Omron 3G3RX-A2015, 3G3RX-A2055, 3G3RX-A2075, 3G3RX-A2220 User Manual

Cat. No. I560-E1-03
USER’S MANUAL
SYSDRIVE RX
SERIES
High-function General-purpose Inverter
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the general-purpose Inverter 3G3RX Series. This User's Manual
(hereinafter called "this manual") describes the parameter setting methods required for installation/
wiring and operation of the 3G3RX model, as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods.
z This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product.
z After reading this manual, keep it handy for future reference.
z This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations
between them. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with
the product.
z Intended readers
This manual is intended for:
Those with knowledge of the workings of electricity (qualified electric engineers or the equivalent),
and also in charge of:
• Introducing the control equipment
• Designing the control system
• Installing and/or connecting the control equipment
• Field management
1
Read and Understand this Manual
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative
if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR
STRICT LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on
which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
2
Read and Understand this Manual
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to
the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the
uses listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions
or uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
3
Read and Understand this Manual
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative
at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and
does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users
must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
4
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
„Indications and Meanings of Safety Information
In this user's manual, the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the
safe use of the 3G3RX Inverter.
The information provided here is vital to safety. Strictly observe the precautions provided.
„Meanings of Signal Words
WARNING
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
is likely to result in serious injury or may result in death. Additionally
there may be severe property damage.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.
„Alert Symbols in this Document
WARNING
Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly. Not doing so may result in a serious injury
due to an electric shock.
Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a serious
injury due to an electric shock.
Do not change wiring and slide switches (SW1), put on or take off Digital Operator and optional
devices, replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a
serious injury due to an electric shock.
Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or
fire.
(200-V class: type-D grounding, 400-V class: type-C grounding)
Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power
shutoff.
Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a serious
injury due to an electric shock.
Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing
so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is
activated.
5
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
Do not connect resistors to the terminals (+1, P/+2, N/-) directly. Doing so might result in a smallscale fire, heat generation or damage to the unit.
Install a stop motion device to ensure safety. Not doing so might result in a minor injury. (A holding
brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety.)
Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. In case of a braking
resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor. Not doing so might
result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor/regenerative braking
unit. Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is
detected in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit.
The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself or
other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal
objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring.
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the
power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn.
Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) that matches
the Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to property due
to the short circuit of the load.
Do not dismantle, repair or modify this product.
Doing so may result in an injury.
6
Precautions for Safe Use
Precautions for Safe Use
„Installation and Storage
Do not store or use the product in the following places.
•Locations subject to direct sunlight.
•Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications.
•Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications.
•Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations.
•Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
•Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
•Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
•Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
•Locations subject to shock or vibration.
„Transporting, Installation, and Wiring
•Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product. Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction.
•Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover, but hold by the fins during transportation.
•Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input/output terminals. Doing so may result in
damage to the product.
•Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely.
Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body.
•Do not connect any load other than a three-phase inductive motor to the U, V, and W output terminals.
•Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so may
result in damage to the product.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong magnetic fields.
Locations close to power lines.
„Operation and Adjustment
•Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter
speed can be changed easily from low to high.
•Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
„Maintenance and Inspection
•Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement.
7
Precautions for Correct Use
Precautions for Correct Use
„Installation
•Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product's longer sides upright.
The material of the wall has to be noninflammable such as a metal plate.
„Main Circuit Power Supply
•Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage.
„Error Retry Function
•Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly
start when stopped by an alarm.
•Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may
abruptly start.
„Non-Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption
•Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non-stop function at momentary power
interruption selection (b050) because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on.
„Operation Stop Command
•Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when
function settings are performed.
•When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input
terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
„Product Disposal
•Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
8
Precautions for Correct Use
Warning Labels
Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration.
Be sure to follow the instructions.
Warning Description
9
Checking Before Unpacking
Checking Before Unpacking
„Checking the Product
On delivery, be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter 3G3RX model that you
ordered.
Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales
representative or OMRON sales office.
zChecking the Nameplate
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
zChecking the Model
3G3RX-A2055
Max. applicable motor capacity
004
007
015
022
037
055
075
110
150
185
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.7 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
220
300
370
450
550
750
900
11K
13K
22 kW
30 kW
37 kW
45 kW
55 kW
75 kW
90 kW
110 kW
132 kW
Voltage class
2
4
3-phase 200 V AC (200-V class)
3-phase 400 V AC (400-V class)
Enclosure rating
A
Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed
wall-mounting models
„Checking the Accessories
Note that this manual is the only accessory included with the 3G3RX model.
Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user.
10
Revision History
Revision History
„A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the
lower left of the front and back covers.
Cat. No. I560-E1-03
Revision code
Revision code
Revision date
01
December 2007
First printing
October 2008
„ New Inverters with different capacities added (3G3RXA2004/-A2007/-A2015/-A2022/-A2037/-A4004/-A4007/
-A4015/-A4022/-A4037)
„ Manual descriptions improved and/or corrected
1-1,
2-3,2-5,2-14,2-18,2-19,2-20,2-22,
3-11,3-20,3-26,3-32,3-33,3-36,3-38,3-43,3-44,3-46,
3-48,3-52,3-53
4-1,4-3,4-5,4-11,4-12,4-15,4-19,4-24,4-32,4-33,4-43,
4-49,4-52,4-57,4-58,4-59,4-65,4-74,4-84,4-86,4-89,
4-90,4-97,4-98,4-101,4-103,4-105,4-108,4-109,4-112,
4-116,4-118to138,4-145,4-150,4-151,4-152,4-153,
4-157,4-159,4-160,4-162,4-163,4-173,4-174,4-176,
4-178,4-182,4-183,4-184,4-188,4-189,4-191,4-193,
4-198,4-200,4-202,4-206,4-209,4-213
5-1to8,6-8
7-1,7-2,7-5,7-6,7-12to17,7-19to37,7-39,7-40,7-41
App-2,App-8,App-25
December 2008
„ New Inverters with different capacities added (3G3RXA4750/-A4900/-A411K/-A413K)
„ Manual descriptions improved and/or corrected
1-2,3-33,3-54,4-25,4-47,4-51,5-1,5-2,5-4,5-5,5-6,7-22
02
03
Changes and revision pages
11
About This Manual
About This Manual
This User's Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user's convenience as follows.
Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product.
Overview
12
Chapter 1 Overview
Describes features and names of parts.
Chapter 2 Design
Provides external dimensions, installation dimensions, peripheral device
design/selection instructions, and other information necessary for
design.
Chapter 3 Operation
Describes names of parts, the Inverter's operations, including how to use
the keys on the Digital Operator, and the monitor function.
Chapter 4 Functions
Describes the functions of the Inverter.
Chapter 5
Maintenance
Operations
Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails,
including the solutions to possible troubles (troubleshooting).
Chapter 6
Inspection and
Maintenance
Describes items for periodical inspection and/or maintenance for the
Inverter.
Chapter 7 Specifications
Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and
dimensions of peripheral devices.
Appendix
Describes the summarized parameter settings as a reference for users
who have used this Inverter and understood the functions.
Contents
Introduction..............................................................................................1
Read and Understand this Manual ..........................................................2
Safety Precautions ..................................................................................5
Precautions for Safe Use.........................................................................7
Precautions for Correct Use ....................................................................8
Checking Before Unpacking ....................................................................10
Revision History.......................................................................................11
About This Manual...................................................................................12
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
1-2
Functions .................................................................................................1-1
Appearance and Names of Parts.............................................................1-4
Chapter 2 Design
2-1
2-2
Installation................................................................................................2-1
Wiring.......................................................................................................2-6
Chapter 3 Operation
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
Operation Method ....................................................................................3-3
Test Run Procedure.................................................................................3-5
Test Run Operation .................................................................................3-6
Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator..............................3-9
Keys.........................................................................................................3-12
Parameter Transition ...............................................................................3-13
Parameter List .........................................................................................3-19
Chapter 4 Functions
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
Monitor Mode...........................................................................................4-1
Function Mode .........................................................................................4-8
Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used....................4-118
Communication Function ........................................................................4-139
Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations
5-1
5-2
Protective Functions and Troubleshooting ..............................................5-1
Warning Function.....................................................................................5-10
Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance
6-1
Inspection and Maintenance....................................................................6-1
Chapter 7 Specifications
7-1
Standard Specification List ......................................................................7-1
13
Contents
7-2
7-3
Dimensional Drawing .............................................................................. 7-6
Options.................................................................................................... 7-14
Appendix
Appendix-1
Appendix-2
Appendix-3
Index
14
Parameter List........................................................................... App-1
Product Life Curve .................................................................... App-41
Life Alarm Output ...................................................................... App-42
Chapter 1
Overview
1-1 Functions .......................................................... 1-1
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts .................... 1-4
1-1 Functions
1Overview
Overview
1
1-1 Functions
3G3RX Inverter Models
Rated voltage
Enclosure rating
3-phase 200 V AC
IP20
(Complies with
JEM1030)
3-phase 400 V AC
1-1
Max. applicable motor capacity
Model
0.4 kW
3G3RX-A2004
0.75 kW
3G3RX-A2007
1.5 kW
3G3RX-A2015
2.2 kW
3G3RX-A2022
3.7 kW
3G3RX-A2037
5.5 kW
3G3RX-A2055
7.5 kW
3G3RX-A2075
11 kW
3G3RX-A2110
15 kW
3G3RX-A2150
18.5 kW
3G3RX-A2185
22 kW
3G3RX-A2220
30 kW
3G3RX-A2300
37 kW
3G3RX-A2370
45 kW
3G3RX-A2450
55 kW
3G3RX-A2550
0.4 kW
3G3RX-A4004
0.75 kW
3G3RX-A4007
1.5 kW
3G3RX-A4015
2.2 kW
3G3RX-A4022
3.7 kW
3G3RX-A4037
5.5 kW
3G3RX-A4055
7.5 kW
3G3RX-A4075
11 kW
3G3RX-A4110
15 kW
3G3RX-A4150
18.5 kW
3G3RX-A4185
22 kW
3G3RX-A4220
30 kW
3G3RX-A4300
37 kW
3G3RX-A4370
45 kW
3G3RX-A4450
55 kW
3G3RX-A4550
75 kW
3G3RX-A4750
90 kW
3G3RX-A4900
110 kW
3G3RX-A411K
132 kW
3G3RX-A413K
1-1 Functions
International Standards Models (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)
The 3G3RX Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.
Classification
EC Directives
Applicable standard
EN61800-3: 2004
Low-voltage Directive
EN61800-5-1: 2003
Overview
EMC Directive
UL/cUL Standards
1
UL508C
Human-/Environment-friendly, High-performance, General-purpose
Inverters Suitable for Various Advanced Applications
„High Performance
High Starting Torque
With the vector control and auto-tuning functions, the 3G3RX Series has achieved high starting
torque in excess of 200% at 0.3 Hz.
Trip Suppression
This Inverter features two trip suppression functions: "Overcurrent trip suppression function" to
suppress overcurrent trip during acceleration, and "Overvoltage suppression function during
deceleration" to suppress overvoltage trip during deceleration. Therefore, the 3G3RX Series
provides tough operational capabilities regardless of the severe time setting of acceleration and
deceleration.
„Various Applications
Sensor-less Vector Control at 0 Hz
The 3G3RX Series provides sensor-less vector control, which is useful for up/down applications. It
can provide a high torque of 150%, even at a speed reference of 0 Hz (150% torque is available
when the Inverter capacity is increased by one rank). This function contributes to simplification of
control programs and extension of the service life of the brake.
Emergency Shutoff Function
Switching the internal slide switch (SW1) changes the multi-function input terminal (S3) to the
emergency shutoff input. The power module that controls the motor is shutoff directly without
operating software.
Built-in Braking Circuit (up to 22 kW)
The Inverter models with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a braking transistor, enabling spacesaving configuration for applications that need rapid acceleration and stop.
Restart Speed Search Function
For a free-running motor (e.g. a fan motor), this function checks the direction of rotation and
frequency, enabling smooth restart of the motor.
1-2
1-1 Functions
High-torque Multi-operation
The 3G3RX Series enables balanced torque control for the whole system, in proportion to multiple
motor loads.
1
Overview
Deceleration Stop During Power Failure
During a power failure or momentary power interruption, the 3G3RX Series can decelerate and stop
a motor by using the motor braking energy.
„Human-/Environment-friendly Features
More Simplified Parameter Settings and View
•Only parameters that have been changed from the default settings can be viewed.
•With the user setting function, only 12 parameters for frequent use can be viewed.
Compliance With Safety Standards
The 3G3RX Series meets the requirements of the CE and UL/cUL and complies with various
standards.
The RoHS Directive
The standard model meets the requirements of the RoHS Directive.
Easily Meets the Requirements Specified by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and
Transport of Japan
The 3G3RX Series incorporates a zero-phase reactor (radio noise filter) as a standard specification.
When an optional DC reactor is added, the 3G3RX Series meets the requirements specified by the
Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport of Japan.
1-3
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts
1
Front cover
Digital Operator
Spacer cover
Terminal block cover
Open the terminal block cover and you can connect cables to the main circuit terminal block, as well
as the control circuit terminal block.
Also, open the front cover and you can mount the optional board.
Position for installing
optional board 1
Position for installing
optional board 2
Control circuit terminal block
Main circuit terminal block
Backing plate
1-4
Overview
When the product is unpacked, it appears as below. (Example of 3G3RX-A2150/A4150 to A2220/
A4220)
Chapter 2
Design
2-1 Installation ........................................................ 2-1
2-2 Wiring ................................................................ 2-6
2-1 Installation
2Design
2-1 Installation
2
Design
WARNING
Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly. Not doing so may result in a serious injury
due to an electric shock.
Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a serious
injury due to an electric shock.
Do not change wiring and slide switches (SW1), put on or take off Digital Operator and optional
devices, replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a
serious injury due to an electric shock.
Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire.
(200-V class: type-D grounding, 400-V class: type-C grounding)
CAUTION
Do not connect resistors to the terminals (+1, P/+2, N/-) directly. Doing so might result in a smallscale fire, heat generation or damage to the unit.
Install a stop motion device to ensure safety. Not doing so might result in a minor injury. (A holding
brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety.)
Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. In case of a braking
resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor. Not doing so might result
in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit.
Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is
detected in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit.
The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself or
other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal
objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring.
2-1
2-1 Installation
Safety Information
„Installation and Storage
Do not store or use the product in the following places.
•Locations subject to direct sunlight.
•Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications.
•Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications.
•Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations.
•Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
•Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
•Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
•Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
•Locations subject to shock or vibration.
2
Design
„Transporting, Installation, and Wiring
•Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product. Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction.
•Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover, but hold by the fins during transportation.
•Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input/output terminals. Doing so may result in
damage to the product.
•Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely.
Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body.
•Do not connect any load other than a three-phase inductive motor to the U, V, and W output terminals.
•Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so may
result in damage to the product.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong magnetic fields.
Locations close to power lines.
Precautions for Use
„Installation
•Install the Inverter vertically on the wall.
Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material, like metal.
Position for installing a screw
„Main Circuit Power Supply
•Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter matches the AC power supply voltage.
2-2
2-1 Installation
„Installation Environment
•Increased ambient temperatures will shorten the life of the Inverter.
•Keep the Inverter away from heating elements (such as a braking resistor, DC reactor, etc.).
If the Inverter is installed in an enclosure, keep the ambient temperature within the range of the
specifications, taking dimensions and ventilation into consideration.
2
Save enough space to prevent the upper
and lower wiring ducts from blocking
cooling airflow.
Inverter
Design
Airflow
*1
Inverter
5 cm min.
5 cm min.
*1 10 cm min.
*2 10 cm min.
Note that replacing the smoothing capacitor
Wall
requires 22 cm or more.
*2
•When several 3G3RX models are installed in an enclosure and a ventilation fan is mounted in the
enclosure, be careful about the layout of the Inverters and the air intake apertures.
Depending on the internal layout of the panel, the Inverter's cooling effect may deteriorate,
resulting in an increase in ambient temperature.
Also, use thorough caution in making sure that the Inverter's ambient temperature is within the
allowable operating temperature range.
Ventilation fan
Ventilation fan
Inverter
Inverter
(Correct example)
(Incorrect example)
•Before installing the Inverter, place a cover over all the ventilation openings to shield them from
foreign objects.
After completing the installation process, be sure to remove the covers from the Inverter before
operation.
•Below is the heat radiation according to the Inverter capacity.
2-3
Inverter capacity (kw)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
Load with 70% loss (W)
64
76
102
127
179
242
312
435
575
698
Load with 100% loss (W)
70
88
125
160
235
325
425
600
800
975
Efficiency at rated output (%)
85.1
89.5
92.3
93.2
94.0
94.4
94.6
94.8
94.9
95.0
Inverter capacity (kw)
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
Load with 70% loss (W)
820
1100
1345
1625
1975
2675
3375
3900
4670
Load with 100% loss (W)
1150
1550
1900
2300
2800
3800
4800
5550
6650
Efficiency at rated output (%)
95.0
95.0
95.1
95.1
95.1
95.2
95.2
95.2
95.2
2-1 Installation
•To raise the carrier frequency, reduce the output current (or derate the rated current) as shown in
the graph below.
Voltage
200-V class
400-V class
0.4 kW
15
100%
15
100%
0.75 kW
15
100%
15
100%
1.5 kW
15
100%
15
100%
2.2 kW
15
100%
15
100%
3.7 kW
15
100%
15
100%
5.5 kW
15
100%
15
100%
7.5 kW
15
100%
15
100%
11 kW
12
90% (41.4 max.)
15
100%
15 kW
12
95% (60.8 A max.)
14
95% (30.4 A max.)
18.5 kW
10
90% (68.4 A max.)
10
90% (34.2 A max.)
22 kW
7
70% (66.5 A max.)
6
75% (36.0 A max.)
30 kW
5
80% (96.8 A max.)
10
75% (43.5 A max.)
37 kW
10
75% (108.7 A max.)
8
80% (60.0 A max.)
45 kW
5
70% (127.4 A max.)
9
75% (68.2 A max.)
55 kW
5
70% (154 A max.)
6
60% (67.2 A max.)
75 kW
⎯
⎯
6
85% (126.7 A max.)
90 kW
⎯
⎯
4
75% (132.0 A max.)
110 kW
⎯
⎯
6
70% (151.9 A max.)
132 kW
⎯
⎯
3
60% (156.0 A max.)
400-V class
11 kW
15 kW
45, 55 kW
30 kW
37 kW
4
6
8
10
12
Carrier frequency (kHz)
14 15
Output current derating
Output current derating
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
0.5 2
22 kW 18.5 kW
Max. fc (kHz)
90 kW
75 kW 45 kW
100
95
90
85
80
132 kW
75
70
65
110 kW
60
55
0.5 2
4
6
8
30 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
37 kW
22 kW
55 kW
10
2
Design
Max. fc (kHz)
200-V class
Derating at fc = 15 kHz
Derating at fc = 15 kHz
(75 to 132 kW is for 10 kHz)
Capacity
12
14 15
Carrier frequency (kHz)
2-4
2-1 Installation
Backing Plate
„ Inverter with 22 kW or Lower Capacity
When running cables, cut the points between the backing plate and unnecessary portions with
nippers or a wire cutter, and remove.
2
Connecting points
Design
Unnecessary portion
„ Inverter with 30 kW or Higher Capacity
For Connection Without Cable Conduit
Make a cut in the rubber bushing of the backing plate with nippers or a wire cutter, and insert a cable.
Backing plate
Rubber bushing
For Connection With Cable Conduit
Remove the rubber bushing from the conduit connecting portions, and connect the cable conduit.
* Do not remove the rubber bushing unless you connect a cable conduit.
Otherwise, the cable sheath may be damaged by the inner edge of the backing plate, resulting in
short-circuit or ground fault.
2-5
2-2 Wiring
2-2 Wiring
Standard Connection Diagram
2
Braking resistor
(optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200 V AC
3-phase 400 V AC
Short-circuit
wire
J51
To wire the control circuit power
supply and main circuit power
supply separately, be sure to
remove the J51 connector
Control circuit
wire first.
power supply
(Refer to page 2-21)
P/+2
N/-
Design
+1
R/L1
RB
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
M
R
T
Ro
To
MB
MA
MC
Relay output *1
Common
P24
P1
Multi-function output 1
P2
Multi-function output 2
P3
Multi-function output 3
P4
Multi-function output 4
P5
Multi-function output 5
PC
Multi-function output common
PSC
FW
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
Multi-function input 4
Multi-function input 5
Multi-function input 6
Multi-function input 7
Multi-function input 8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
RS+
RS-
S8
RS485 communication
RP
Sequence input common
SC
RS-
Thermistor
TH
Frequency setting unit
500 to 2 kΩ
Frequency reference power supply
Frequency reference input (voltage)
Frequency reference auxiliary input (voltage)
Frequency reference input (current)
Frequency reference common
FS
For termination
resistors
AM
Analog monitor output
(voltage output)
AMI
Analog monitor output
(current output)
MP
Digital monitor output
(PWM output)
FV
FE
Option 1
FI
FC
Option 1
*1. By default, MA is set to NC contact, and MB to NO contact in the relay output (MA, MB)
contact selection (C036).
2-6
2-2 Wiring
„ Main Circuit Terminals
Terminal name
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
Main power supply input
terminal
Connect the input power supply.
U/T1,V/T2,
W/T3
Inverter output terminal
Connect to the 3-phase motor.
+1, P/+2
External DC reactor
terminal
Remove the short-circuit bar between terminals "+1" and
"P/+2", and connect the optional power factor
improvement DC reactor.
P/+2, RB
Braking resistor
connection terminals
Connect optional external braking resistors. (The RB
terminal is provided for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower
capacity.)
P/+2, N/-
Regenerative braking
unit connection terminal
Connect optional regenerative braking units.
Ground terminal
Inverter case ground terminal. Connect this terminal to the
ground.
type-D (200-V class), type-C (400-V class)
Design
2
Terminal symbol
G
Description
„ Control Circuit Terminal
Frequency reference input
Analog
Terminal
symbol
Terminal name
Description
Specifications
FS
Frequency reference
power supply output
+10 V DC power supply for the FV terminal.
Allowable load current:
20 mA max.
FV
Frequency reference
input
(Voltage directive)
With a 0 to 10 V DC voltage input, the
frequency reaches the maximum at 10 V.
Set at A014 if the maximum frequency
needs to be achieved at lower than 10 V.
Input impedance 10 kΩ
Allowable input voltage
range:
-0.3 to +12 V DC
FE
Auxiliary frequency
reference input
(Voltage directive)
With a 0 to ±10 V DC voltage input, the FE
signal is added to the frequency reference
signal of the FV or FI terminal. By changing
the setting, the frequency reference can be
input even with the FE terminal
independently.
Input impedance 10 kΩ
Allowable input voltage
range:
0 to ±12 V DC
FI
Frequency reference
input
(Current directive)
With a 4 to 20 mA DC current input, the
maximum frequency is set at 20 mA. The FI
signal is only active when the AT terminal is
ON. Allocate the AT function to the multifunction input terminal.
Input impedance 100 Ω
Allowable max. current:
24 mA
FC
Frequency reference
common
Common terminal for the frequency setting
signals (FV, FE and FI) and the analog
output terminals (AM and AMI). Do not
connect this terminal to the ground.
Continued to the next page
2-7
2-2 Wiring
Terminal
symbol
Specifications
Multi-function analog
output
(Voltage)
This terminal outputs a signal selected from
the "0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output" monitor
items: Output frequency, Output current,
Output torque (with/without sign), Output
voltage, Input power, Electronic thermal load
rate, LAD frequency, Motor temperature,
and Fin temperature.
Allowable max. current:
2 mA
Power supply
Digital (contact)
2
AMI
Multi-function analog
output
(Current)
This terminal outputs a signal selected from
the "4 to 20 mA DC Current Output" monitor
items: Output frequency, Output current,
Output torque (without sign), Output voltage,
Input power, Electronic thermal load rate,
LAD frequency, Motor temperature, and Fin
temperature.
Allowable load
impedance:
250 Ω max.
MP
Multi-function digital
output
This terminal outputs a signal selected from
the "0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output (PWM)"
monitor items: Output frequency, Output
current, Output torque (without sign), Output
voltage, Input power, Electronic thermal load
rate, LAD frequency, Motor temperature, Fin
temperature, Digital output frequency, and
Digital current monitor.
"Digital output frequency", and "Digital
current monitor" output a digital pulse at 0/10
V DC pulse voltage and 50% duty ratio.
Allowable max. current:
1.2 mA
Max. frequency:
3.6 kHz
P24
Internal 24 V DC
24 V DC power supply for contact input
signal.
When the source logic is selected, this
terminal functions as the contact input
common terminal.
Allowable max. output
current:
100 mA
SC
Input common
Common terminal for the interface power
supply P24 terminal, thermistor input TH
terminal and digital monitor MP terminal.
When the sink logic is selected, this terminal
functions as the contact input common
terminal. Do not connect this terminal to the
ground.
Monitor output
Monitor output
Description
Design
Analog
AM
Terminal name
Continued to the next page
2-8
2-2 Wiring
RUN command
Terminal
symbol
Status / Factor
Contact input
Open collector output
Digital (contact)
Description
Specifications
FW
Forward rotation
command terminal
When the FW signal is ON, the motor runs
forward. When it is OFF, the motor decelerates
and stops.
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Multi-function input
Select 8 functions from among the 61 functions
and allocate them to terminals S1 to S8.
[Contact input ON
condition]
Voltage between
each input terminal
and the PSC
terminal: 18 V DC or
more
Note: Only terminals S1 and S3 can be used for
the emergency shutoff function. For
details, refer to "Emergency Shutoff
Function" (page 2-10).
Function / Selection
Design
2
Terminal name
Input impedance
between each input
terminal and the PSC
terminal: 4.7 kΩ
Allowable max.
voltage:
Voltage between
each input terminal
and the PSC
terminal: 27 V DC
Load current at 27 V
DC power supply
voltage:
Approx. 5.6 mA
PSC
Multi-function input
common
The sink and source logic for contact input can
be switched by connecting a short-circuit bar on
the control terminal block.
Short-circuiting P24 and SC ⇒ Sink logic,
Short-circuiting SC and PSC ⇒ Source logic
To activate contact input via an external power
supply, remove the short-circuit bar and
connect PSC terminal to the external interface
circuit.
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
Multi-function output
Select 5 functions from among 45, and allocate
them to terminals P1 through P5.
If an alarm code is selected in C062, terminals
P1 to P3, or terminals P1 to P4 always output an
alarm factor code (e.g. Inverter trip). The signal
between each terminal and PC always
corresponds to the sink or source logic.
PC
Multi-function output
common
Common terminals for multi-function output
terminals P1 to P5.
Between each
terminal and PC
Voltage drop 4 V
max. at power-on
Max. allowable
voltage: 27 V DC
Max. allowable
current: 50 mA
Continued to the next page
2-9
2-2 Wiring
Terminal
symbol
Status, alarm, etc.
Relay output
MC
Relay output
common
TH
External thermistor
input Terminal
Sensor
Analog
Analog input
Relay output
Description
Specifications
Select the desired functions from among 45
functions, and allocate them. SPDT contact
output.
By factory default, the relay output (MA, MB)
contact selection (C036) is set at NC contact
between MA-MC, and NO contact between MBMC.
Contact max.
capacity
MA-MC
250 V AC, 2 A
(Resistance)
0.2 A (Induction)
MB-MC
250 V AC, 1 A
(Resistance)
0.2 A (Induction)
Contact min. capacity
100 V AC, 10 mA
5 V DC, 100 mA
Connect an external thermistor to this terminal,
to trip the Inverter when a temperature error
occurs.
The SC terminal functions as the common
terminal.
[Recommended thermistor characteristics]
Allowable rated power: 100 mW min.
Impedance at temperature error: 3 kΩ
Temperature error detection level is adjustable
between 0 and 9999 Ω.
Allowable input
voltage range
0 to 8 V DC
[Input circuit]
8 V DC
10 kΩ
TH
Thermistor
SC
1 kΩ
„Slide Switch (SW1) Settings
The built-in slide switch is used to enable or disable the emergency shutoff function. (Factory
Default: Disabled)
* For the location of the slide switch, refer to (page 2-12).
Emergency Shutoff Function (Factory Default: Disabled)
•This function is intended to turn off the Inverter output (stop switching the main element) via only
the multi-function input terminal of the hardware circuit without going through the CPU software.
* This function stops switching of the main element.The circuit is not electrically turned off. While the
power supply is ON, do not touch the Inverter terminals and power cable (e.g. motor cable). Doing
so may result in electric shock, injury or ground fault.
•When this function is enabled, the multi-function input terminals S1 and S3 are exclusively used
for this function. No other function can be allocated to these terminals. If another function has been
allocated, it will automatically be disabled, and terminals S1 and S3 are changed to the emergency
shutoff terminals.
Function of multi-function input terminal S1
Reset signal (RS) / NO contact (Fixed)
This signal is used to reset the Inverter, and to reset the emergency shutoff trip [ E37.* ].
Function of multi-function input terminal S3
Emergency shutoff signal (EMR) / NC contact (Fixed)
This signal is used to turn off the Inverter output without using the built-in CPU.
With this signal input, the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip [ E37. * ].
2-10
2
Design
Digital (contact)
MA
MB
Terminal name
2-2 Wiring
* If multi-function input terminal S3 has not been connected or disconnected, or if the signal logic is
not matched, the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip [E37. *]. After checking the cable
connection and the signal logic, input the reset signal (RS).
Emergency shutoff trip [ E37. * ] can be reset only by the reset signal (RS) via multi-function input
terminal S1. (It cannot be reset with the Digital Operator.)
•To enable this function, set the slide switch SW1 lever in the Inverter to [ON].
(With the factory default setting, slide switch SW1 is [OFF]. [This function is disabled.])
2
Design
* Before operating slide switch SW1, make sure that the input power supply is OFF.
Slide switch SW1 setting and status of multi-function input terminals S1 and S3
Slide switch
(SW1)
setting
SW1 OFF
Emergency
shutoff:
Disabled
(factory
default)
SW1 ON
Emergency
shutoff:
Enabled
*5
Turning SW1
on, and then
off
Emergency
shutoff:
Disabled
*3 *5
Multi-function input terminal S1
Multi-function input terminal S3
Multi-function input 1
selection
[ C001 ]
Multi-function input 1
operation selection
[ C011 ]*1
Multi-function input 3
selection
[ C003 ]
Multi-function input 3
operation selection
[ C013 ]*1 *2
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
Factory
default
01 (RV)
Factory
default
00 (NO)
Factory
default
12 (EXT)
Factory
default
00 (NO)
Automatic allocation to multi-function input terminals S1 and S3,
and the input terminal with 18 (RS) setting *3
Fixed
function
(Cannot
be
changed)
18 (RS)
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
Holds
setting
while SW1
is ON.
18 (RS)
Fixed
function
(Cannot
be
changed)
00 (NO)
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
Holds
setting
while SW1
is ON.
00 (NO)
Fixed
function
(Cannot
be
changed)
64 (EMR)
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
Emergency
shutoff
function:
Reset
no
(no
allocation)
Fixed
function
(Cannot
be
changed)
01 (NC)
[Can be selected
randomly] *4
Holds
setting
while SW1
is ON.
01 (NC)
*1. With the terminal with input terminal selection [18 (RS)], NO/NC selection is fixed to [00 (NO)].
*2. When [C003] is [64 (EMR)], [C013] is fixed to [01 (NC)].
*3. If [18 (RS)] has been allocated to a multi-function input terminal (except for S3) other than S1
before switch SW1 is set to "ON", the input terminal selection for the relevant terminal will be
automatically changed to "no (no allocation)" by setting SW1 to "ON". This is done in order to
prevent duplicated allocation of this function. Then, even if SW1 is reset to [OFF], the initial
allocation cannot be restored. Re-allocate the terminal function.
Example) When the multi-function input terminal S2 [C002] is [18 (RS)], setting SW1 to [ON]
changes the [C002] setting to [no (no allocation)]. [18 (RS)] will be allocated to the multifunction input terminal S1 [C001].
Then, even if SW1 is reset to [OFF], the multi-function input terminal S2 [C002] setting is [no
(no allocation)], and the multi-function input terminal S1 [C001] setting is [18 (RS)].
*4. Input terminal selection [64 (EMR)] cannot be selected with the Digital Operator. When slide
switch SW1 is set to [ON], this function will be automatically allocated.
2-11
2-2 Wiring
*5. Once slide switch SW1 is set to [ON], allocation of multi-function input terminals S1 and S3 will
not be restored, even if SW1 is reset to [OFF] afterward. Re-allocate the terminal function.
2
Design
Slide switch SW1
ON
Slide lever (factory default: OFF)
OFF
ON
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals
„Main Power Supply Input Terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
• Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit (wiring) protection between the power supply and the
main power supply terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
• An earth leakage breaker may malfunction due to the effect of high frequency. Use an earth
leakage breaker with a large high-frequency sensitivity current rating.
• If the Inverter protection function is activated, a malfunction or accident may have occurred to your
system. Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply.
• Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON/OFF the magnetic contactor connected on the
Inverter power supply input (primary) side and output (secondary) side.
To start or stop the Inverter via an external signal, use the operation command (FW or RV) on the
control circuit terminal block.
• This Inverter uses a 3-phase power supply. A single-phase power supply cannot be used.
• Do not use this Inverter with a phase loss power input. Doing so may damage the Inverter.
By factory default, the phase loss input protection is disabled. If a phase of power supply input is
interrupted, the Inverter reverts to the following status:
R-phase or T-phase is interrupted: The Inverter does not operate.
S-phase is interrupted:
The Inverter reverts to single-phase operation, causing a
trip (due to undervoltage, overcurrent, etc.) or damage to
the Inverter.
Even if the power input is under a phase loss condition, the internal capacitor is charged with
voltage, causing an electric shock or injury.
When changing the cable connections, refer to the instructions on page 2-1.
2-12
2-2 Wiring
• In the following cases, the internal converter module may be damaged. Use caution to avoid
them:
Imbalance of power supply voltage is 3% or more.
Power supply capacity is ten times or more than the Inverter capacity, and also 500 kVA or more.
Rapid change in power supply voltage.
Design
2
Example) When several Inverters are connected with a short bus.
When the phase advance capacitor is turned on/off.
• Do not turn power on/off more than once every 3 minutes.
Doing so may damage the Inverter.
„Inverter Output Terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
• For connection of the output terminal, use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter.
Otherwise, the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop.
Particularly during low-frequency output, a voltage drop occurs with the cable, resulting in motor
torque reduction.
• Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber. These devices cause the Inverter to
trip, or may cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber.
• If the cable length exceeds 20 m (particularly, with 400-V class), a surge voltage may be
generated at the motor terminal due to stray capacitance or inductance of the cable, causing the
motor to burn out.
• To connect several motors, provide a thermal relay for each.
• The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1.1 times of the motor rated current. The relay may
trip easily depending on the cable length. In this case, connect an AC reactor to the Inverter
output.
„DC Reactor Connection Terminal (+1, P/+2)
• This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor for power factor improvement.
By factory default, a short-circuit bar has been connected between the terminals +1 and P/+2.
Before connecting the DC reactor, remove this short-circuit bar.
• The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or less.
If the DC reactor is not used, do not remove the short-circuit bar.
If you remove the short-circuit bar without connecting the DC reactor, no power is supplied to
the Inverter main circuit, disabling operation.
„External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal (P/+2, RB)/Regenerative Braking
Unit Connection Terminal (P/+2, N/-)
• The Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a regenerative braking circuit.
To improve braking capability, mount the optional external braking resistor to this terminal.
Do not mount a resistor whose resistance is lower than the specified value. Doing so may damage
the regenerative braking circuit.
• The Inverters with 30 kW or higher capacity do not incorporate a regenerative braking circuit.
To improve braking capability, the optional regenerative braking unit and braking resistor are
required. In this case, connect the regenerative braking unit terminals (P/+2, N/-) to the Inverter
terminals (P/+2, N/-).
• The cable length should be 5 m or less. Twist the two wires.
• Do not connect any device other than the optional regenerative braking unit or external braking
resistor to this terminal.
2-13
2-2 Wiring
„Ground Terminal (G
)
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Your ground bolt
Inverter
Inverter
„Installing Screws in the Main Circuit Terminal Block
• For the main circuit terminal blocks of 3G3RX-A2055/-A2075/-A4055/-A4075, be sure to install
the terminal block screw washers with their grooved sides aligned vertically, as shown below.
Not doing so may result in a contact failure or fire.
(Intended terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, +1, P/+2, N/-, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, RB)
Terminal block screw washer
2-14
2
Design
• To prevent electric shock, be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor.
• According to the Electric Apparatus Engineering Regulations, the 200-V class Inverter should be
connected to the grounding electrodes under type-D grounding conditions (conventional type 3
grounding: ground resistance 100 Ω or less), the 400-V class Inverter should be connected to the
grounding electrodes under type-C grounding conditions (conventional special type 3 grounding:
ground resistance 10 Ω or less).
• For the ground cable, use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter. Make the cable
length as short as possible.
• When several Inverters are connected, the ground cable must not be connected across several
Inverters, and must not be looped.
Otherwise, the Inverters may malfunction.
2-2 Wiring
„ Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals
The terminal arrangement on the Inverter main circuit terminal block is shown below.
Terminal arrangement
2
Design
Ro
Applicable model
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
+1
P/+2
N/-
RB
V/T2
W/T3
G
G
To
CHARGE LED indicator
When not using the DC reactor,
keep the +1-P/+2 short-circuit bar
attached.
+1-P/+2 short-circuit bar
[EMC filter function switching method]
In order to enable the EMC filter
function, set up the plug inserted
into the filter enable pin (J61) and
filter disable pin (J62) as shown in
the table below. Confirm that
electrical power has been
disconnected before performing this
setup. Not doing so may result in
electric shock. Also, use with the
plug inserted.
Dummy plug
(green)
Filter enable pin
(J61)
Short plug
3G3RX-A2004 to A2037
3G3RX-A4004 to A4037
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M4
Others: M4
Filter disable pin (J62)
EMC filter disabled (factory default)
Filter enable pin (J61)
Dummy plug (green)
EMC filter enabled
Short plug
Filter disable pin (J62)
Short plug
Dummy plug (green)
Ro
CHARGE LED indicator
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+1
P/+2
G
Ground terminal with short-circuit
bar (shaded area) for EMC filter
function switching
To
RB
N/-
U/T1
+1-P/+2
short-circuit bar
V/T2
W/T3
G
3G3RX-A2055, A2075
3G3RX-A4055, A4075
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M5
Others: M5
When not using the DC
reactor, keep the +1-P/+2
short-circuit bar attached.
[EMC filter function switching method]
3G3RX-A2110
3G3RX-A4110
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M6
Others: M5
EMC filter enabled
2-15
EMC filter disabled (factory default)
2-2 Wiring
Terminal arrangement
Applicable model
Ro
To
CHARGE LED indicator
RB
3G3RX-A2150 to A2185
3G3RX-A4150 to A4220
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+1
P/+2
N/-
V/T2
+1-P/+2 short-circuit bar
Ground terminal with short-circuit
bar (shaded area) for EMC filter
function switching
2
W/T3
G
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M6
Others: M6
Design
G
U/T1
When not using the DC
reactor, keep the +1-P/+2
short-circuit bar attached.
[EMC filter function switching method]
3G3RX-A2220
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M6
Others: M8
EMC filter enabled
EMC filter disabled (factory default)
Ro
CHARGE LED indicator
3G3RX-A2300
To
G
G
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+1
Ground terminal with short-circuit
bar (shaded area) for EMC filter
function switching
P/+2
N/-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+1-P/+2 short-circuit bar
When not using the DC reactor,
keep the +1-P/+2
short-circuit bar attached.
[EMC filter function switching method]
Ro, To: M4
Ground terminal: M6
Others: M8
3G3RX-A4300
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M6
Others: M6
3G3RX-A2370
3G3RX-A4370
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Others: M8
EMC filter enabled
EMC filter disabled (factory default)
2-16
2-2 Wiring
Terminal arrangement
Ro
CHARGE LED indicator
Design
2
Applicable model
To
G
R/L1
G
S/L2
T/L3
+1
P/+2
N/-
+1-P/+2
short-circuit bar
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
G
Ground terminal with
short-circuit bar (shaded area)
for EMC filter function switching
When not using the DC
reactor, keep the +1-P/+2
short-circuit bar attached.
3G3RX-A2450
3G3RX-A4450
3G3RX-A4550
[EMC filter function switching method]
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Others: M8
EMC filter enabled
EMC filter disabled (factory default)
Ro
CHARGE LED indicator
R/L1
G
S/L2
T/L3
+1
+1-P/+2
short-circuit bar
When not using the DC
reactor, keep the +1-P/+2
short-circuit bar attached.
P/+2
N/-
G
To
U/T1
V/T2
G
Ground terminal with
short-circuit bar
(shaded area) for EMC
filter function switching
2-17
3G3RX-A2550
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Others: M10
[EMC filter function switching method]
EMC filter enabled
W/T3
EMC filter disabled (factory default)
2-2 Wiring
Terminal arrangement
Applicable model
Ro
To
CHARGE LED indicator
R/L1
T/L3
+1
+1-P/+2
short-circuit bar
P/+2
N/-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
G
2
Design
G
S/L2
3G3RX-A4750
3G3RX-A4900
3G3RX-A411K
3G3RX-A413K
Ro,To: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Others: M10
When not using the DC
reactor, keep the +1-P/+2
short-circuit bar attached.
2-18
2-2 Wiring
„Recommended Cable Size, Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal
For Inverter wiring, crimp terminal and terminal screw tightening torque, refer to the table below.
Applicable
Inverter
model
Power cable
(mm2)
R, S, T, U, V,
W, +1, P/+2,
N/-
0.4
3G3RXA2004
0.75
Applicable
device
External
Ground
Terminal
braking resistor
cable
screw
between +1
(mm2)
size
2
and RB (mm )
Crimp
terminal
Tightening
torque
N•m
1.25
1.25
1.25
M4
1.25-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
5A
3G3RXA2007
1.25
1.25
1.25
M4
1.25-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
10 A
1.5
3G3RXA2015
2
2
2
M4
2-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
15 A
2.2
3G3RXA2022
2
2
2
M4
2-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
20 A
3.7
3G3RXA2037
3.5
3.5
3.5
M4
3.5-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
30 A
5.5
3G3RXA2055
5.5
5.5
5.5
M5
R5.5-5
2.4
(4.0 max.)
50 A
7.5
3G3RXA2075
8
8
8
M5
R8-5
2.4
(4.0 max.)
60 A
11
3G3RXA2110
14
14
14
M6
R14-6
4.0
(4.4 max.)
75 A
15
3G3RXA2150
22
22
22
M6
22-6
4.5
(4.9 max.)
100 A
18.5
3G3RXA2185
30
22
30
M6
38-6
4.5
(4.9 max.)
100 A
22
3G3RXA2220
38
30
38
M8
38-8
8.1
(8.8 max.)
150 A
30
3G3RXA2300
60
(22 × 2)
30
⎯
M8
60-8
8.1
(8.8 max.)
200 A
37
3G3RXA2370
100
(38 × 2)
38
⎯
M8 *1
100-8
8.1
(20.0 max.)
225 A
45
3G3RXA2450
100
(38 × 2)
38
⎯
M8 *1
100-8
8.1
(20.0 max.)
225 A
55
3G3RXA2550
150
(60 × 2)
60
⎯
M10
150-10
20.0
(22.0 max.)
350 A
200-V class
Design
2
Motor
output
(kW)
2-19
Earth leakage
breaker (ELB)
Motor
output
(kW)
Applicable
Inverter
model
Power cable
(mm2)
R, S, T, U, V,
W, +1, P/+2,
N/-
0.4
3G3RXA4004
0.75
Applicable
device
External
Ground
Terminal
braking resistor
cable
screw
between +1
(mm2)
size
2
and RB (mm )
Crimp
terminal
Tightening
torque
N•m
1.25
1.25
1.25
M4
1.25-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
5A
3G3RXA4007
1.25
1.25
1.25
M4
1.25-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
5A
1.5
3G3RXA4015
2
2
2
M4
2-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
10 A
2.2
3G3RXA4022
2
2
2
M4
2-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
10 A
3.7
3G3RXA4037
2
2
2
M4
2-4
1.2
(max.1.8)
15 A
5.5
3G3RXA4055
3.5
3.5
3.5
M5
R2-5
2.4
(max. 4.0)
30 A
7.5
3G3RXA4075
3.5
3.5
3.5
M5
3.5-5
2.4
(max. 4.0)
30 A
11
3G3RXA4110
5.5
5.5
5.5
M6
R5.5-6
4.5
(max. 4.4)
50 A
15
3G3RXA4150
8
8
8
M6
8-6
4.5
(max. 4.9)
60 A
18.5
3G3RXA4185
14
14
14
M6
14-6
4.5
(max. 4.9)
60 A
22
3G3RXA4220
14
14
14
M6
14-6
4.5
(max. 4.9)
75 A
30
3G3RXA4300
22
22
-
M6
22-6
4.5
(max. 4.9)
100 A
37
3G3RXA4370
38
22
⎯
M8 *1
38-8
8.1
(max. 20.0)
100 A
45
3G3RXA4450
38
22
⎯
M8 *1
38-8
8.1
(max. 20.0)
150 A
55
3G3RXA4550
60
30
⎯
M8 *1
R60-8
8.1
(max. 20.0)
175 A
75
3G3RXA4750
100
(38 × 2)
38
⎯
M10 *1
100-10
20.0
(max. 22.0)
225 A
90
3G3RXA4900
100
(38 × 2)
38
⎯
M10 *1
100-10
20.0
(max. 22.0)
225 A
110
3G3RXA411K
150
(60 × 2)
60
⎯
M10 *1
150-10
20.0
(max. 35.0)
350 A
132
3G3RXA413K
80 × 2
80
⎯
M10 *1
80-10
20.0
(max. 35.0)
350 A
Earth leakage
breaker (ELB)
2
*1. When the cable is connected without using the crimp terminal (bare wires), use the square washer included
with the product.
Note: The cable size is based on the HIV cable (75°C heat resistance).
2-20
Design
400-V class
2-2 Wiring
2-2 Wiring
„ Connection for Separating Inverter Control Circuit Power Supply from Main Power Supply
If the Inverter protection circuit is activated to turn off the magnetic contactor of the Inverter input
power supply, the power to the Inverter control circuit is also turned off, and the alarm signal cannot
be kept on.
If the alarm signal must be kept on, use control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To.
Connect control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To to the primary circuit of the magnetic
contactor according to the following procedure.
2
Design
(Connection method)
Incoming electricity specifications
200-V class:
200 to 240 V (+10%, -15%)
50, 60 Hz ±5%
(282 to 339 V DC)
400-V class:
380 to 480 V (+10%, -15%)
50, 60 Hz ±5%
(537 to 678 V DC)
(1) Disconnect the connected wire.
(2) Disconnect the J51 connector.
(3) Connect the control circuit power
cable to the control circuit power
supply terminal block.
* To separate the control circuit power supply (Ro, To) from the main circuit power supply (R, S, T),
observe the following instructions:
• For wiring between terminals Ro and To (terminal screw size: M4), use a cable of 1.25 mm2
or more.
• Connect a 3 A fuse to the control circuit power supply cable.
• If the control circuit power supply (Ro, To) is turned on before the main circuit power supply
(R, S, T), ground fault detection at power-on is disabled.
• To use a DC power supply for the control circuit power supply (Ro, To), set the multi-function
output terminal contact selection (C031 to C036) for the multi-function output terminals (P1 to
P5) and relay output terminals (MA, MB, MC) to "00". If the multi-function output terminal
contact selection is set to "01", the output signal may chatter when the DC power supply is
turned off.
• Tightening torque for terminals Ro and To
M4: 1.2 N•m (1.4 max.)
2-21
2-2 Wiring
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
• Terminals FC and SC are insulated from each other via the input and output signal common
terminals.
Do not short-circuit or ground these common terminals.
Do not ground these common terminals via external equipment. (Check the external equipment
ground conditions.)
2
• For wiring the control circuit terminals, use twisted shielded cables (recommended size: 0.75
mm2), and connect the shielded cable to each common terminal.
• Separate the control circuit terminal connection cable from the main circuit cable (power cable)
and the relay control circuit cable.
• For the connection of the TH (thermistor input) terminal, twist cables with the terminal SC
individually, and separate them from other SC common cables.
Since a weak current flows through the thermistor, the thermistor connection cable must be
separated from the main circuit cable (power cable). The thermistor connection cable should be
20 m or less.
TH
FW
S8
PSC SC
SC
S6
S7
PLC
S5
S4
Thermistor
• To use a relay for the multi-function output terminal, connect a surge-absorbing diode in parallel
with the coil.
• Do not short-circuit the analog power supply terminals (between FS and FC) and/or the interface
power supply terminals (between P24 and SC).
Doing so may result in failure of the Inverter.
„Arrangement of the Control Circuit Terminal Block
FC
FS
FE
FV
FI
AM
MP
TH
AMI
P24
PSC
FW
S8
SC
SC
S7
S6
Terminal screw size M3
S5
S4
S3
S1
P4
S2
P5
PC
P3
P2
P1
MC
MA
MB
Tightening torque 0.7 N·m (0.8 max.)
„ Selecting the Input Control Logic
By factory default the terminal FW and the multi-function input terminal are set to sink logic (NPN).
To change the input control logic to source logic (PNP), remove the short-circuit bar between the
terminals P24 and PSC on the control circuit terminal block, and connect it between the terminals
PSC and SC.
2-22
Design
• The control circuit terminal connection cables should be 20 m or less.
2-2 Wiring
„ Selecting the Sequence Input Method (Sink/Source Logic)
When external power supply is used
(Remove the short-circuit bar from the control
terminal block.)
When the Inverter's internal interface power supply is
used
2
+V
Sink logic
PSC
SC
P24
PSC
24 V DC
24 V DC
SC
FW
FW
S8
S8
COM
COM
Output unit etc.
COM
Source logic
Output unit etc.
Inverter
COM
P24
Short-circuit PSC
bar
SC
DC24V
Output unit etc.
Inverter
24 V DC
24 V DC
P24
PSC
SC
FW
FW
S8
S8
0V
Output unit etc.
Inverter
0V
Inverter
„ Selecting the Sequence Output Method (Sink/Source Logic)
P1
P2
COM
24 V DC
Source logic
COM2
Sink logic
Design
+V
P24
Short-circuit
bar
24 V DC
P1
P2
COM2
Inverter
2-23
Inverter
COM
24 V DC
2-2 Wiring
Wiring the Digital Operator
• The 3G3RX Series Inverter can be operated with the optional 3G3AX-OP01 as well as the
standard Digital Operator.
• To use the Digital Operator apart from the Inverter body, place an order for the optional cable
3G3AX-OPCN1 (1 m), or 3G3AX-OPCN3 (3 m).
• The optional cable should be 3 m or less. Using a cable longer than 3 m may cause malfunction.
2
Conforming to EC Directives
Design
„Conforming Standards
•EMC directive
•Low-voltage directive
EN 61800-3
EN 61800-5-1
„Concept of Conformity
EMC Directive
OMRON products are the electrical devices incorporated and used in various machines or
manufacturing equipment. For this reason, we make efforts to conform our products to their related
EMC standards so that the machines or equipment which have incorporated our products should
easily conform to the EMC standards. The 3G3RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN
61800-3 by following the installation and wiring method as shown below. Your machines or
equipment, however, vary in type, and in addition, EMC performance depends on the configuration,
wiring, or location of the devices or control panels which incorporate the EC directive conforming
products. This in turn does not allow us to confirm the condition and the conformity in which our
products are used. Therefore, we appreciate confirmation of the final EMC conformity for the whole
machine or equipment on your own.
Wiring the Power Supply
•Keep the ground cable as short as possible.
•Keep the cable between the Inverter and the noise filter as short as possible.
Connecting a Motor to the Inverter
•When connecting a motor to the Inverter, be sure to use shield braided cables.
•Keep the cables as short as possible.
Low-voltage Directive
The 3G3RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN61800-5-1 by performing the machine
installation and wiring as shown below.
•The 3G3RX models are an open type device. Be sure to install it inside the control panel.
•The power supply and voltage (SELV) with reinforced or double insulation should be used for
wiring to the control circuit terminals.
•To satisfy requirements of the LVD (low-voltage) directive, the Inverter must be protected with a
molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) in case a short-circuiting accident occurs. Be sure to install a
molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power supply side of the Inverter.
•Use one molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) per Inverter.
•Use the crimp-type terminal with an insulation sleeve to connect to the main circuit terminals.
2-24
Chapter 3
Operation
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
Operation Method ............................................ 3-3
Test Run Procedure ......................................... 3-5
Test Run Operation .......................................... 3-6
Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital
Operator ............................................................ 3-9
3-5 Keys................................................................... 3-12
3-6 Parameter Transition ....................................... 3-13
3-7 Parameter List .................................................. 3-19
3Operation
WARNING
Do not change wiring and slide switches (SW1), put on or take off Digital Operator and optional
devices, replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a
serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power
shutoff.
Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
3
Operation
Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a serious
injury due to an electric shock.
Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing
so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated.
CAUTION
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the
power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn.
Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) that matches the
Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to property due to
the short circuit of the load.
Safety Information
„Operation and Adjustment
•Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter
speed can be changed easily from low to high.
•Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
3-1
Precautions for Use
„Error Retry Function
•Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly
start when stopped by an alarm.
•Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may
abruptly start.
3
„Non-Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption
•Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non-stop function at momentary power
interruption selection (b050) because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on.
•Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when
function settings are performed.
•When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input
terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
3-2
Operation
„Operation Stop Command
3-1 Operation Method
3-1 Operation Method
This Inverter has the following operation methods that are selected by the RUN command/
frequency reference settings.
The features and the requirements for each operation method are also given below:
„ To enter the RUN command/frequency reference via the Digital Operator
Operates the Inverter via the key sequence of the standard or optional Digital Operator.
When operating the Inverter only via the Digital Operator, the Inverter does not need to be
connected to the control circuit terminal block.
Operation
3
Digital Operator
„To enter the RUN command/frequency reference from the control circuit terminal block
Operates the Inverter by connecting the external signals (from the frequency setting device, starting
switch, etc.) to the control circuit terminal block.
The operation starts by turning ON the RUN command (FW, RV) while the input power supply is
turned ON.
Note that the frequency can be set using the voltage directive or the current directive from the
control circuit terminal block, which can be selected according to the system. For details, refer to
"Control Circuit Terminal" (page 2-7).
(Requirements for operation)
• RUN command: Switch, Relay etc.
• Frequency reference: External signal (e.g. 0 to 10 V DC, -10 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA)
Control circuit terminal block
H
Frequency reference
(FREQ adjuster)
3-3
O
CM1
L
RUN command (switch)
FW
3-1 Operation Method
„To enter the RUN command/frequency reference in a combination of directives
from the Digital Operator and the control circuit terminal block
The RUN command/frequency reference sources can be selected individually from the Digital
Operator as well as the control circuit terminal block.
3
Operation
3-4
3-2 Test Run Procedure
3-2 Test Run Procedure
Item
3
Reference
page
Description
Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions.
2-1
• Make sure that the installation conditions are met.
Wiring and Connection
Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices.
2-6
Operation
• Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications, and wire correctly.
Power On
Check the following before turning on the power.
• Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power
input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly.
• 3G3RX-A2†: 3-phase 200 to 240 V AC
• 3G3RX-A4†: 3-phase 380 to 480 V AC
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to
the motor correctly.
• Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly
and that all control terminals are turned off.
• Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).
• After checking the above, turn on the power.
Display Status Check
Make sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.
• When the power is turned on normally, the display shows:
• RUN LED indicator
: ON
ALARM LED indicator
: OFF
• POWER LED indicator
: ON
RUN command LED indicator : ON
• Data LED indicator (frequency) : ON
• Data display
: Displays the set value in d001.
• If an error occurs, the error code is displayed on the data display. In this case, refer to
"Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations" and make the necessary changes to remedy.
Parameter Initialization
Initialize the parameters.
• Set parameter No. b084 to "02", and press the
keys simultaneously.
Parameter Settings
key while holding down the
and
Set the parameters required for a test run.
• Set the motor capacity selection (H003) and the motor pole number selection (H004).
No-load Operation
Start the no-load motor via the Digital Operator.
• Display parameter No. F001, set the output frequency using the
key and the
key, and press the
key. Then, press the
key to rotate the motor.
Actual Load Operation
Connect the mechanical system and operate via the Digital Operator.
• If there are no difficulties with the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system
to the motor and operate via the Digital Operator.
Operation
3-5
Refer to "Chapter 4 Functions", and set the necessary parameters.
3-3 Test Run Operation
3-3 Test Run Operation
Power On
„Checkpoints Before Turning On the Power
„Power On
•After checking the above, turn on the power.
Display Status Check
•When the power is turned on normally, the display shows:
[Normal] RUN LED indicator (during RUN) : ON
ALARM LED indicator
: OFF
POWER LED indicator
: ON
RUN command LED indicator : ON
Data LED indicator (frequency) : ON
Data display
: Displays the set value in d001
•If an error occurs, refer to "Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations" and make the necessary changes
to remedy.
[Fault]
RUN LED indicator (during RUN) : ON
ALARM LED indicator
: ON
POWER LED indicator
: ON
RUN command LED indicator : ON
Data LED indicator (frequency) : ON
Data display
: An error code, such as "E-01", is displayed.
(The display varies depending on the type of error.)
3-6
3
Operation
•Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals
(R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly.
3G3RX- A2†: 3-phase 200 to 240 V AC
3G3RX- A4†: 3-phase 380 to 480 V AC
•Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor
correctly.
•Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all
control terminals are turned off.
•Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).
3-3 Test Run Operation
Parameter Initialization
•Initialize the parameters using the following procedure.
•To initialize the parameters, set parameter b084 to "02".
Key sequence
Display example
k0.0
Operation
3
Description
Power On
bk-k-k-
Press the Mode key once, and then press the Decrement key three
times to display "b---".
bk0k0k1
Press the Mode key.
"b001" is displayed.
bk0k8k4
Use the Increment or Decrement key to display "b084".
0k0
Press the Mode key. The set value in "b084" is displayed.
0k2
Use the Increment or Decrement key to display "02".
bk0k8k4
Press the Enter key. The set value is entered and "b084" is displayed.
Press the STOP/RESET key while holding down the Mode and
Decrement keys simultaneously.
When the display blinks, release the STOP/RESET key first, and then
the Mode and Decrement keys.
=k.k0k0
(In 1 s)
3-7
dk0k0k1
Displays initialization.
The parameter number is displayed again in approximately 1 s.
3-3 Test Run Operation
No-load Operation
•Start the no-load motor (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system) using the Digital Operator.
„Forward/Reverse Rotation via the Digital Operator
Key sequence
Display example
0.0
Press and hold the Mode key for 3 seconds or more to display "d001",
and then press again.
(Monitors the frequency reference.)
Press the RUN key.
The RUN command LED indicator is lit and the monitor value of the
frequency reference is displayed. (Factory default: F001 = 6)
•Make sure that no errors have occurred in the Inverter during operation.
•Switch between forward and reverse with the operator rotation direction selection (F004).
„Stopping the Motor
•After completing the no-load operation, press the STOP/RESET key. The motor will stop.
Actual Load Operation
•After checking the operation with the motor in the no-load status, connect the mechanical system
and operate with an actual load.
„Connecting the Mechanical System
•After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
•Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis and the mechanical system.
„Operation via the Digital Operator
•Because a possible error may occur during operation, make sure that the STOP/RESET key on
the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
•Use the Digital Operator to operate the Inverter the same way as in no-load operation.
„Checking the Operating Status
•After making sure that the operating direction is correct and that the Inverter is operating smoothly
at a slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
•By changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, make sure that there is no vibration
or abnormal sound from the motor.
Make sure that the output current (output current monitor [d002]) is not excessive.
3-8
3
Operation
6.0
Description
3-4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator
3-4 Part Names and Descriptions of the
Digital Operator
Part Names and Descriptions
Operation
3
Data display
RUN command LED indicator
Operation keys
Name
8.8.8.8.
Function
POWER LED indicator
Lit when the power is supplied to the control circuit.
ALARM LED indicator
Lit when an Inverter error occurs.
RUN (during RUN)
LED indicator
Lit when the Inverter is running.
PROGRAM LED
indicator
Lit when the set value of each function is indicated on the data
display.
Blinks during warning (when the set value is incorrect).
Data display
Displays relevant data, such as frequency reference, output
current, and set values.
Data LED indicator
Lit according to the indication on the data display.
Hz: Frequency V: Voltage A: Current kW: Power %: Ratio
3-9
RUN command LED
indicator
Lit when the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator. (The
RUN key on the Digital Operator is available for operation)
RUN key
Activates the Inverter. Available only when operation via the
Digital Operator is selected.
(Check that the RUN command LED indicator is lit.)
STOP/RESET key
Decelerates and stops the Inverter. Functions as a reset key if
an Inverter error occurs.
Mode key
Switches between: the monitor mode (d†††), the basic
function mode (F†††), and the extended function mode
(A†††, b†††, C†††, H†††).
Enter key
Enters the set value.
(To change the set value, be sure to press the Enter key.)
3-4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator
Name
Function
Increment key
Changes the mode.
Also, increases the set value of each function.
Decrement key
Changes the mode.
Also, decreases the set value of each function.
Display System and Key Sequence of Each Code
3
The display indicates the setting of "b038" when the power is turned on. For details, refer to
"Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen at Power-ON)" (page 4-56).
When "b038 = 01" (factory default), 0.00 for output frequency monitor "d001" is displayed.
Press the Mode key to display dk0k0k1 .
Note: The Digital Operator display varies depending on the settings of display selection "b037", initial screen selection "b038", and user parameter automatic setting function selection "b039".
For details, refer to "Display Selection" (page 4-53), "Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen
at Power-ON)" (page 4-56), "User Parameter Automatic Setting Function" (page 4-57).
Item
Display selection
Initial screen
selection
(Power On)
User parameter
automatic setting
function selection
Function code
b037
Data
Description
00
Complete display
01
Individual display of functions
02
User setting
03
Data comparison display
04
Basic display
00
Screen when the Enter key was pressed last
01
d001 (Output frequency monitor) (factory default)
02
d002 (Output current monitor)
03
d003 (Rotation direction monitor)
04
d007 (Frequency conversion monitor)
05
F001 (Output frequency setting/monitor)
00
Disabled
01
Enabled
(factory default)
b038 *
b039 *
(factory default)
*Not displayed by factory default.
* To return the display to dk0k0k1 or
the following procedures.
0.00 * from any display on the Digital Operator, refer to
• Hold down the Mode key for 3 seconds or more to display dk0k0k1 and
0.00 *.
Press the Mode key to display dk0k0k1 or
*
0.00 * alternately.
0.00 shows the status during stop. Displays the output frequency of the Inverter during
operation.
3-10
Operation
• This section explains the examples of typical operation (Basic display, Complete display) and the
extended function mode U as a special operation.
This operation can be performed when other display modes are selected.
3-4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator
„ Operation Example for Basic Display (factory default: "b037 = 04")
• Displays the limited basic parameters.
Monitor mode
: All
Basic function mode
: 4 parameters
Extended function mode : 24 parameters
• Other parameters than those mentioned above are not displayed. To display all parameters, select
"Complete display 'b037 = 00'".
3
<Parameters to be Displayed and Arrangement>
Operation
NO.
Display code
Item
1
d001 to d104
Monitor display
2
F001
Output frequency setting/monitor
3
F002
Acceleration time 1
4
F003
Deceleration time 1
5
F004
Operator rotation direction selection
6
A001
Frequency reference selection
7
A002
RUN command selection
8
A003
Base frequency
9
A004
Maximum frequency
10
A005
FV/FI selection
11
A020
Multi-step speed reference 0
12
A021
Multi-step speed reference 1
13
A022
Multi-step speed reference 2
14
A023
Multi-step speed reference 3
15
A044
V/f characteristics selection
16
A045
Output voltage gain
17
A085
RUN mode selection
18
b001
Retry selection
19
b002
Allowable momentary power interruption time
20
b008
Trip retry selection
21
b011
Trip retry wait time
22
b037
Display selection *
23
b083
Carrier frequency
24
b084
Initialization selection
25
b130
Overvoltage protection function during deceleration
26
b131
Overvoltage protection level during deceleration
27
C021
Multi-function output terminal P1 selection
28
C022
Multi-function output terminal P2 selection
29
C036
Relay output (MA, MB) contact selection
* If the intended parameter is not displayed, check the setting of display selection "b037".
To display all parameters, set "00" to "b037".
3-11
3-5 Keys
3-5 Keys
Name
Description
Switches between the command setting and the data setting, and between the
function mode and the extended function mode.
With this key, you can always change the display as follows:
3
[Supplemental Information]
To jump to "d001" from any function mode, hold down the Mode key for 3
seconds.
Operation
Mode key
k5k8.1
or
fk0k0k1
5k8.0
fk0k0k1
5k7.9
Note: Always press the Enter key to store any changed data.
Increment key
Changes the set values, parameters, and commands.
Decrement key
RUN key
STOP/RESET key
Enter key
Starts the operation. Forward/Reverse rotation depends on the "F004" setting.
Stops the operation. Functions as a reset key if an error occurs.
Enters and stores changed data.
Do not press the Enter key if you don't want to store any changes, for example, if
you change the data inadvertently.
3-12
3-6 Parameter Transition
3-6 Parameter Transition
Operation and sequence of code display
Operation and sequence of monitor/data display
Press the Increment/Decrement key to scroll through codes in the code display and to increase/decrease the number in the data
display. Press either key until you see the desired code or data. For fast-forwarding, press and hold either key.
3
Monitor Mode
Press the Mode key in the code display to display its monitor value.
Operation
dk0k0k1
0.0k0 (Monitor display)
dk0k0k2
*1
or
Press the Mode/Enter key in the monitor display to return to its code display.
0.0k0 appears at power-on.
Press the Mode key in this status to display dk0k0k1 .
Note: By factory default,
dk1k0k4
fk0k0k1
Function/Extended Function Mode
Press the Mode key in the code display to display its data.
(Data display) *1 *2
fk0k0k4
Data setting
To upper limit
Press the Increment/Decrement key to increase/decrease the
number.
ak0k0k1
(Set the desired number.)
3k0.0k1
ak0k8k5
bk0k0k1
Press the Enter key in the data display to fix the data and to
return to the code display.
Press the Mode key in the data display to return to its code
display without changing the data.
3k0.0k0
or
2k9.9k9
bk1k3k1
ck0k2k1
ck0k2k2
3-13
To lower limit
*1. The setting displayed varies depending on the parameter.
*2. To change the data, be sure to press the Enter key.
3-6 Parameter Transition
„ Operation Example for Complete Display (Default: "b037 = 00")
Displays all parameters.
Operation and sequence
of code display
(Monitor/Function modes)
Operation and sequence of
monitor/data display
(Monitor/Function modes)
Operation and sequence of
code display
(Extended function mode)
Operation and sequence of
monitor/data display
(Extended function mode)
Press the Increment/Decrement key to scroll through codes in the code display and to increase/decrease the number in the
data display.
Press either key until you see the desired code or data. For fast-forwarding, press and hold either key.
dk0k0k1
3
Monitor
mode
0.0k0 (Monitor display)
*1
Operation
dk0k0k2
or
dk1k0k4
*1. The setting displayed varies depending on the parameter.
*2. To change the data, be sure to press the Enter key.
Function
mode
3k0.0k1
fk0k0k1
3k0.0k0 (Data display)
(Data display)
*1 *2
*1 *2
or
2k9.9k9
fk0k0k4
ak0k0k1
Extended
function
mode A
3
2
ak-k-k-
or
ak1k5k3
or
1
bk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode B
bk-k-k-
or
bk1k3k2
ck0k0k1
Extended
function
mode C
ck-k-k-
or
ck1k5k9
hk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode H
hk-k-k-
or
hk0k7k3
pk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode P
pk-k-k-
or
uk-k-kor
Key sequence and display system
of extended function mode U
(See the next page.)
pk1k3k1
3-14
3-6 Parameter Transition
„ Display System and Key Sequence of Extended Function Mode U
The extended function mode U is the parameter to optionally register (or automatically record) other
extended function codes, and differs in operation from other extended function modes.
Operation and sequence of
code display
(Monitor/Function modes)
Operation and sequence of
code display
(Extended function mode U)
Operation and sequence of code display
Displaying another mode
from extended function mode U
Operation and sequence
of monitor/data display
(Monitor/Function/Extended
function modes)
*1 *2 (Data display)
*1. The setting displayed varies depending on the parameter.
*2. To change the data, be sure to press the Enter key.
3
ak0k0k1
Operation
ak1k5k3
Extended
function
mode A
3
2
or
1
bk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode B
bk1k3k2
ck0k0k1
ck1k5k9
Press the Enter key to
reflect the set value in each
parameter.
Note that no data can be
fixed in parameter "U".
Extended
function
mode C
hk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode H
hk0k7k3
pk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode U
pk-k-k-
Pressing the Enter key
does not return.
pk1k3k1
uk0k0k1
nko (Factory default)
uk-k-kdk0k0k1
Extended
function
mode P
or
uk0k1k2
dk0k0k1
Monitor
mode
Press the Enter key to enter
the selected code
in parameter "U".
dk1k0k4
fk0k0k1
Function
mode
fk0k0k4
3-15
3-6 Parameter Transition
„ Direct Code Specification and Selection
• The codes can be specified or selected by directly entering each digit of the codes or data, as well
as by scrolling the codes of the monitor, basic function, and extended function modes.
• Below is an example where monitor mode code "d001" is changed to extended function code
"A029".
1. Display the monitor mode code.
("d001" is displayed.)
3
Press
Operation
dk0k0k1
and
simultaneously. *1
*2 *3
2. Change the extended function mode.
• "d" of the 4th digit on the left starts to blink.
dk0k0k1
Press
(2 times).
("A001" is displayed.)
*3
• "A" blinks.
• Press the Enter key to fix the blinking digit.
ak0k0k1
Press
*2
.
("A" is entered.)
(Continued to the next page)
3-16
3-6 Parameter Transition
3. Change the 3rd digit of the extended function code.
• "0" of the 3rd digit blinks.
• Press the Enter key to fix "0" of the 3rd digit as
you need not change it.
ak0k0k1
Operation
3
Press
*2
.
("0" is entered.)
4. Change the 2nd digit of the extended function code.
• "0" of the 2nd digit blinks.
ak0k0k1
Press
(2 times).
*2
ak0k2k1
Press
*2
("A021" is displayed.)
(Continued to the next page)
3-17
.
• "2" of the 2nd digit blinks.
3-6 Parameter Transition
5. Change the 1st digit of the extended function code.
• "1" of the 1st digit blinks.
ak0k2k1
3
or
Operation
Press
("A029" is displayed).
(8 times) (2 times)
*2
• "9" of the 1st digit blinks.
ak0k2k9
Press
.
("9" is entered.)
6. The extended function code setting is complete.
• The code display "A029" selection is complete.
ak0k2k9
Note: "A" of the 4th digit on the left starts to blink
again when entering codes which have not
been selected for display or codes not on the
list.
Refer to "Display Selection" (page 4-53), "Initial
Screen Selection (Initial Screen at Power-ON)"
(page 4-56), "User Parameter Automatic
Setting Function" (page 4-57), and "Appendix
Parameter List" to check the code, and enter
again.
7. Press the Mode key to display the data. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to change the data
and press the Enter key to set it.*4
The data can be set in the same procedure as 1 to 6.*3 *4
*1
*2
*3
*4
This operation is available even if code "d001" is not displayed.
If pressing the Mode key while each digit is blinking, the display returns the status for the 1-digit
higher entry.
If pressing the Mode key while the 4th digit on the left is blinking, the values under entry are
canceled and the display returns to the status before pressing the Increment and Decrement
keys simultaneously in 1.
To change the data, be sure to press the Mode key.
3-18
3-7 Parameter List
3-7 Parameter List
Monitor Mode (d
)
•The default setting displays "d001" at power-on. To select the optional display, change the setting
in "b038".
3
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Operation
Normal b031 = 10
d001
Output frequency
monitor
0.0 to 400.0
⎯
Yes
⎯
Hz
4-1
d002
Output current
monitor
0.0 to 999.9
1000 to 9999
⎯
⎯
⎯
A
4-1
d003
Rotation direction
monitor
F: Forward
o: Stop
r: Reverse
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-1
d004
PID feedback value
monitor
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
(Enabled when the PID function is selected)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-1
d005
Multi-function input
monitor
(Example) Terminals FW, S7, S2, S1 : ON
Terminals S8, S6, S5, S4, S3: OFF
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-2
(Example) Terminals P2, P1
: ON
Terminals MA, P5, P4, P3: OFF
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-2
d007
Output frequency
monitor
(after conversion)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 3996 (10000 to 39960)
(Output frequency × Conversion factor of b086)
⎯
Yes
⎯
⎯
4-2
d008
Real frequency
monitor
-400. to -100.
-99.9 to 0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
Hz
4-3
d009
Torque reference
monitor
-200. to +200.
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-3
d010
Torque bias
monitor
-200. to +200.
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-3
d012
Output torque
monitor
-200. to +200.
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-3
d013
Output voltage
monitor
0. to 600.
⎯
⎯
⎯
V
4-4
FW
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
d006
Multi-function
output monitor
MA P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
3-19
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
d014
Input power
monitor
0.0 to 999.9
⎯
⎯
⎯
kW
4-4
d015
Integrated power
monitor
0.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-4
3
Total RUN time
0. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
⎯
⎯
⎯
h
4-4
d017
Power ON time
monitor
0. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
⎯
⎯
⎯
h
4-5
d018
Fin temperature
monitor
-020. to 200.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
°C
4-5
d019
Motor temperature
monitor
-020. to 200.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
°C
4-5
d022
Life assessment
monitor
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-5
ON
1: Capacitor on the main circuit board
OFF 2: Cooling fan rotation speed reduced
2
1
d023
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d024
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d025
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d026
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d027
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d028
Pulse counter
monitor
0 to 2147483647 (Displays MSB 4 digits)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-5
d029
Position command
monitor
-1073741823 to 1073741823
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-6
d030
Current position
monitor
-1073741823 to 1073741823
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-6
4-132
d080
Fault frequency
monitor
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
⎯
⎯
⎯
Time
4-6
d081
Fault monitor 1
(Latest)
d082
Fault monitor 2
d083
Fault monitor 3
d084
Fault monitor 4
d085
Fault monitor 5
d086
Fault monitor 6
d090
Warning monitor
d102
DC voltage monitor 0.0 to 999.9
4-6
Error code (condition of occurrence)
→Output frequency [Hz] → Output current [A]
→Internal DC voltage [V]
→RUN time [h]
→ON time [h]
4-6
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
Warning code
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-7
⎯
⎯
⎯
V
4-7
3-20
Operation
d016
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
d103
Regenerative
braking load rate
monitor
0.0 to 100.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-7
d104
Electronic thermal
monitor
0.0 to 100.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-7
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Operation
3
Basic Function Mode (F
Parameter
No.
Function name
)
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Normal b031 = 10
F001
Output frequency
setting/monitor
F002
F202
0.0/Starting frequency to 1st/2nd/3rd max.
frequency
0.0 to 100.0 (PID control enabled)
⎯
Yes
Yes
Hz
4-8
0.01 to 99.99
Acceleration time 1 100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
* 2nd acceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F302
* 3rd acceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F003
0.01 to 99.99
Deceleration time 1 100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F203
* 2nd deceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F303
* 3rd deceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F004
Operator rotation
direction selection
00: (Forward)
01: (Reverse)
00
No
No
⎯
4-10
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-21
3-7 Parameter List
Extended Function Mode
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
02
No
No
⎯
4-10
4-138
02
No
No
⎯
4-11
60.
A002
RUN command
selection
01: Terminal
02: Digital Operator (F001)
03: ModBus communication
04: Option 1
05: Option 2
A003
Base frequency
30. to Maximum frequency [A004]
A203
* 2nd base frequency 30. to 2nd maximum frequency [A204]
60.
A303
* 3rd base frequency 30. to 3rd maximum frequency [A304]
60.
A004
Maximum frequency
30. to 400.
60.
A204
* 2nd maximum
frequency
30. to 400.
60.
A304
* 3rd maximum
frequency
30. to 400.
60.
4-11
4-109
No
No
Hz
4-11
No
No
Hz
4-12
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-22
3
Operation
Basic setting
A001
00: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
(Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
01: Terminal
02: Digital Operator (F001)
Frequency reference 03: ModBus communication
selection
04: Option 1
05: Option 2
06: Pulse train frequency
07: Not used
10: Operation function result
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
FV/FI selection
00: Switches between FV/FI via terminal AT
01: Switches between FV/FE via terminal AT
02: Switches between FV/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used)
03: Switches between FI/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used)
04: Switches between FE/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used)
00
No
No
⎯
4-12
A006
FE selection
00: FE only
01: FV/FI auxiliary frequency reference
(not reversible)
02: FV/FI auxiliary frequency reference
(reversible)
03: FE disabled
03
No
No
⎯
4-13
A011
FV start frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A012
FV end frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A013
FV start ratio
0. to FV end ratio
0.
No
Yes
%
A014
FV end ratio
FV start ratio to 100.
100.
No
Yes
%
A015
FV start selection
00: External start frequency
(A011 set value)
01: 0 Hz
01
No
Yes
⎯
A016
FV, FE, FI sampling
1. to 30.
31. (with 500 ms filter ± 0.1 Hz hysteresis)
31.
No
Yes
⎯
4-16
A017
Not used
Use "00".
* Do not change.
00
No
No
⎯
⎯
3
Analog input, Others
Operation
A005
4-14
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-23
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-16
A019
Multi-step speed
selection
00: Binary: 16-step selection with 4 terminals
01: Bit: 8-step selection with 7 terminals
00
No
No
⎯
A020
Multi-step speed
reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A220
* 2nd multi-step
speed reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd Max.
frequency
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A320
* 3rd multi-step
speed reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to 3rd Max. frequency
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A021
Multi-step speed
reference 1
0.00
A022
Multi-step speed
reference 2
0.00
A023
Multi-step speed
reference 3
0.00
A024
Multi-step speed
reference 4
0.00
A025
Multi-step speed
reference 5
0.00
A026
Multi-step speed
reference 6
0.00
A027
Multi-step speed
reference 7
0.00
A028
Multi-step speed
reference 8
Yes
Yes
Hz
A029
Multi-step speed
reference 9
0.00
A030
Multi-step speed
reference 10
0.00
A031
Multi-step speed
reference 11
0.00
A032
Multi-step speed
reference 12
0.00
A033
Multi-step speed
reference 13
0.00
A034
Multi-step speed
reference 14
0.00
A035
Multi-step speed
reference 15
0.00
0.0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.00
4-8
4-16
3
Operation
Multi-step speed, Jogging
Normal b031 = 10
4-16
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-24
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Jogging frequency
0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A039
Jogging stop
selection
00: Free running on jogging stop/
Disabled in operation
01: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/
Disabled in operation
02: DC injection braking on jogging stop/
Disabled in operation
03: Free running on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
04: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
05: DC injection braking on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
00
No
Yes
⎯
A041
Torque boost
selection
No
No
⎯
Yes
Yes
%
4-18
00
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
A241
* 2nd torque boost
selection
A042
Manual torque boost
voltage
A242
* 2nd manual torque
boost voltage
A342
* 3rd manual torque
boost voltage
1.0
A043
Manual torque boost
frequency
5.0
A243
* 2nd manual torque
boost frequency
A343
* 3rd manual torque
boost frequency
00
1.0
0.0 to 20.0
1.0
4-19
V/f characteristics
Operation
3
Multi-step speed, Jogging
A038
0.0 to 50.0
5.0
Yes
%
No
No
⎯
4-21
Yes
Yes
%
4-24
5.0
V/f characteristics
selection
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(special VP)
02: Free V/f characteristics
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV)
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector control
05: Sensor vector control (V2)
A244
* 2nd V/f
characteristics
selection
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(special VP)
02: Free V/f characteristics
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV)
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector control
00
A344
* 3rd V/f
characteristics
selection
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(special VP)
00
A045
Output voltage gain
20. to 100.
100.
A044
Yes
00
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-25
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
A046
Automatic torque
boost voltage
compensation gain
A246
* 2nd automatic
torque boost voltage
compensation gain
0. to 255.
100.
DC injection braking
Upper/Lower limiter, Jump
0. to 255.
Yes
⎯
100.
4-20
A047
Automatic torque
boost slip
compensation gain
A247
* 2nd automatic
torque boost slip
compensation gain
0. to 255.
100.
A051
DC injection braking
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Frequency control [A052 set value]
A052
DC injection braking
frequency
A053
DC injection braking
delay time
A054
DC injection braking
power
0. to 255.
3
100.
Yes
Yes
⎯
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-24
4-109
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.50
No
Yes
Hz
4-24
0.0 to 5.0
0.0
No
Yes
s
0. to 100. (0.4 to 55 kW)
50.
No
Yes
%
0. to 80. (75 to 132 kW)
40.
No
Yes
%
A055
DC injection braking
time
0.0 to 60.0
0.5
No
Yes
s
A056
DC injection braking
method selection
00: Edge operation
01: Level operation
01
No
Yes
⎯
A057
Startup DC injection
braking power
0. to 100. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 80. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
No
Yes
%
A058
Startup DC injection
braking time
0.0 to 60.0
0.0
No
Yes
s
DC injection braking
carrier frequency
0.5 to 15.0 (0.4 to 55 kW)
5.0
No
No
kHz
A059
0.5 to 10.0 (75 to 132 kW)
3.0
No
No
kHz
A061
Frequency upper
limit
0.00/Frequency lower limit to Max.
frequency
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A261
* 2nd frequency
upper limit
0.00/2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max.
frequency
0.00
A062
Frequency lower limit
0.00/Starting frequency to Frequency upper
limit
0.00
A262
* 2nd frequency
lower limit
0.00/Starting frequency to 2nd frequency
upper limit
0.00
4-24
4-28
No
Yes
Hz
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-26
Operation
V/f characteristics
Yes
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
PID control
PID control
A063
Jump frequency 1
0.00
A064
Jump frequency
width 1
0.50
A065
Jump frequency 2
0.00
Jump frequency: 0.0 to 400.0
Jump frequency width: 0.0 to 10.0
No
Yes
Hz
A066
Jump frequency
width 2
A067
Jump frequency 3
0.00
A068
Jump frequency
width 3
0.50
A069
Acceleration stop
frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A070
Acceleration stop
time
0.0 to 60.0
0.0
No
Yes
s
A071
PID selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
A072
PID P gain
0.2 to 5.0
1.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
A073
PID I gain
0.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
1.0
Yes
Yes
s
A074
PID D gain
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.00
Yes
Yes
s
A075
PID scale
0.01 to 99.99
1.00
No
Yes
Time
A076
PID feedback
selection
00: FI
01: FV
02: RS485 communication
03: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
0.50
4-30
4-31
00
No
Yes
⎯
A077
00: OFF (Deviation = Target value Feedback value)
Reverse PID function
01: ON (Deviation = Feedback value - Target
value)
00
No
Yes
⎯
A078
PID output limit
function
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
No
Yes
%
A079
PID feedforward
selection
00: Disabled
01: FV
02: FI
03: FE
00
No
Yes
⎯
A081
AVR selection
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
02: OFF during deceleration
02
No
No
⎯
A082
AVR voltage
selection
200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
200/
400
AVR
Operation
3
Upper/Lower limit, Jump
Normal b031 = 10
4-31
4-35
No
No
V
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-27
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
A085
00: Normal operation
RUN mode selection 01: Energy-saving operation
02: Automatic operation
A086
Energy-saving
response/accuracy
adjustment
00
No
No
⎯
0.0 to 100.0
50.0
A092
Acceleration time 2
15.00
A292
* 2nd acceleration
time 2
15.00
A392
* 3rd acceleration
time 2
A093
Deceleration time 2
A293
* 2nd deceleration
time 2
15.00
A393
* 3rd deceleration
time 2
15.00
A094
2-step acceleration/
deceleration
selection
A294
* 2nd 2-step
acceleration/
deceleration
selection
A095
2-step acceleration
frequency
0.00
A295
* 2nd 2-step
acceleration
frequency
0.00
A096
2-step deceleration
frequency
A296
* 2nd 2-step
deceleration
frequency
A097
Acceleration pattern
selection
A098
Deceleration pattern
selection
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
00: Switched via multi-function input 09
(2CH)
01: Switched by setting
02: Enabled only when switching forward/
reverse
Yes
Yes
⎯
3
Operation
RUN mode, Acceleration/Deceleration functions
4-36
15.00
Yes
Yes
s
No
No
⎯
No
No
Hz
No
No
Hz
No
No
⎯
15.00
00
4-37
00
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
0.00
00: Line
01: S-shape curve
02: U-shape curve
03: Inverted U-shape curve
04: EL-S-shape curve
00
4-38
00
No
No
⎯
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-28
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Acceleration/Deceleration
Operation frequency
Operation
3
External frequency adjustment
Normal b031 = 10
A101
FI start frequency
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
FI end frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
A102
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A103
FI start ratio
0. to FI end ratio
20.
No
Yes
%
A104
FI end ratio
FI start ratio to 100.
100.
No
Yes
%
A105
FI start selection
00: Use FI start frequency [A101]
01: 0 Hz
00
No
Yes
⎯
A111
FE start frequency
A112
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
FE end frequency
-400. to -100.
-99.9 to 0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A113
FE start ratio
-100. to FE end ratio
-100.
No
Yes
%
A114
FE end ratio
FE start ratio to 100.
100.
No
Yes
%
A131
Acceleration curve
parameter
02
No
Yes
⎯
A132
Deceleration curve
parameter
02
No
Yes
⎯
A141
Operation frequency
input A setting
02
No
Yes
⎯
A142
Operation frequency
input B setting
03
No
Yes
⎯
A143
Operator selection
00: Addition (A + B)
01: Subtraction (A - B)
02: Multiplication (A × B)
00
No
Yes
⎯
A145
Frequency addition
amount
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A146
Frequency addition
direction
00: Add A145 value to output frequency
01: Subtract A145 value from output
frequency
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-15
01 (small curve) to 10 (large curve)
00: Digital Operator (F001)
01: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
(Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
02: Input FV
03: Input FI
04: RS485 communication
05: Option 1
06: Option 2
07: Pulse train frequency
4-14
4-39
4-41
4-41
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-29
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Acceleration/Deceleration
Normal b031 = 10
A150
EL-S-curve ratio 1
during acceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
A151
EL-S-curve ratio 2
during acceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
A152
EL-S-curve ratio 1
during deceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
A153
EL-S-curve ratio 2
during deceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
Retry selection
00: Alarm
01: 0 Hz start
02: Frequency matching start
03: Trip after frequency matching
deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-39
Momentary power interruption/Trip restart
4-42
b002
Allowable
momentary power
interruption time
0.3 to 25.0
1.0
No
Yes
s
b003
Retry wait time
0.3 to 100.0
1.0
No
Yes
s
b004
Momentary power
00: Disabled
interruption/
01: Enabled
undervoltage trip
02: Disabled during stop and deceleration
during stop selection
stop
00
No
Yes
⎯
b005
Momentary power
00: 16 times
interruption retry time
01: No limit
selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
b006
Input phase loss
protection selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-46
b007
Frequency matching
0.00 to 99.99
lower limit frequency
100.0 to 400.0
setting
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
4-42
4-68
4-85
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-42
00
No
Yes
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
4-42
b008
Trip retry selection
00: Trip
01: 0 Hz start
02: Frequency matching start
03: Trip after frequency matching
deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
b009
Undervoltage retry
time selection
00: 16 times
01: No limit
b010
Overvoltage/
overcurrent retry time 1 to 3
selection
3
No
Yes
Time
b011
Trip retry wait time
1.0
No
Yes
s
0.3 to 100.0
4-85
4-43
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-30
Operation
b001
3
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Electronic Thermal
Operation
3
b012
Electronic thermal
level
b212
* 2nd electronic
thermal level
b312
* 3rd electronic
thermal level
b013
Electronic thermal
characteristics
selection
b213
* 2nd electronic
thermal
characteristics
selection
b313
* 3rd electronic
thermal
characteristics
selection
b015
Free setting,
electronic thermal
frequency 1
b017
Free setting,
electronic thermal
frequency 2
b019
Free setting,
electronic thermal
frequency 3
b016
Free setting,
electronic thermal
current 1
b018
Free setting,
electronic thermal
current 2
b020
Free setting,
electronic thermal
current 3
0.20 × Rated current to 1.00 × Rated current
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
4-46
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
00
No
Yes
⎯
0. to 400.
0.
No
Yes
Hz
4-47
0.0 to Rated current
0.0
No
Yes
A
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-31
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Overload limit
selection
01
1.50
×
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
1.00
No
Yes
s
No
Yes
⎯
3
b022
Overload limit level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
b023
Overload limit
parameter
0.10 to 30.00
b024
Overload limit
selection 2
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation (Accelerates during
regeneration)
01
No
Yes
⎯
b025
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
Overload limit level 2
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
1.50
×
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
b026
Overload limit
parameter 2
0.10 to 30.00
1.00
No
Yes
s
b027
Overcurrent
00: Disabled
suppression function 01: Enabled
01
No
Yes
⎯
b028
Frequency pull-in
restart level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
b029
Frequency pull-in
restart parameter
0.10 to 30.00
0.50
No
Yes
s
b030
Starting frequency at 00: Frequency at interruption
frequency pull-in
01: Max. frequency
02: Set frequency
restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
Operation
Overload limit, Overcurrent Protection
b021
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation (Accelerates during
regeneration)
4-49
4-51
4-43
4-69
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-32
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Others
Operation
3
Lock
Normal b031 = 10
00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed
when terminal SFT is ON.
01: Data other than b031 and the specified
frequency parameter cannot be changed
when terminal SFT is ON.
02: Data other than b031 cannot be
changed.
03: Data other than b031 and the specified
frequency parameter cannot be
changed.
10: Data can be changed during RUN.
01
No
Yes
⎯
4-51
0.
No
Yes
h
4-52
00: Forward and Reverse are enabled
01: Only Forward is enabled.
02: Only Reverse is enabled.
00
No
No
⎯
4-52
Reduced voltage
startup selection
0 (Reduced voltage startup time: small) to
255 (Reduced voltage startup time: large)
6
No
Yes
⎯
4-53
Display selection
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
02: User setting
03: Data comparison display
04: Basic display
04
No
Yes
⎯
4-53
b038
Initial screen
selection
00: Screen when the Enter key was pressed
last
01: d001
02: d002
03: d003
04: d007
05: F001
01
No
Yes
⎯
4-56
b039
User parameter
automatic setting
function selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-57
b031
Soft lock selection
b034
RUN time/Power ON 0. to 9999. (0 to 99990)
time setting
1000 to 6553 (100000 to 655300)
b035
Rotation direction
limit selection
b036
b037
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-33
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
-⎯
4-57
4-59
4-57
4-59
b040
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switch
Torque limit selection 02: Analog input
03: Option 1
04: Option 2
b041
Torque limit 1
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
forward power
no (Torque limit disabled)
running)
150.
No
Yes
%
b042
Torque limit 2
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
reverse
no (Torque limit disabled)
regeneration)
150.
No
Yes
%
b043
Torque limit 3
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
reverse power
no (Torque limit disabled)
running)
150.
No
Yes
%
b044
Torque limit 4
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
forward
no (Torque limit disabled)
regeneration)
150.
No
Yes
%
b045
Torque LADSTOP
selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
3
4-57
4-59
4-59
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-34
Operation
Torque limit
Normal b031 = 10
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-59
Normal b031 = 10
b046
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
b050
Selection of non-stop
function at
momentary power
interruption
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (deceleration stop)
02: Enabled (without recovery)
03: Enabled (with recovery)
00
No
No
⎯
b051
Starting voltage of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
220/
440
No
No
V
b052
Stop deceleration
level of non-stop
function at
momentary power
interruption
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
360/
720
No
No
V
b053
Deceleration time of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
1.00
No
No
s
b054
Deceleration starting
width of non-stop
function at
0.00 to 10.00
momentary power
interruption
0.00
No
No
Hz
b055
Proportional gain
setting of non-stop
function at
momentary power
interruption
0.20
Yes
Yes
⎯
b056
Integral time setting
of non-stop function
0.000 to 9.999/10.00 to 65.53
at momentary power
interruption
0.100
Yes
Yes
s
Others
Operation
3
4-60
0.00 to 2.55
4-60
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-35
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
b060
Window comparator
FV upper limit level
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100.
Yes
Yes
%
b061
Window comparator
FV lower limit level
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b062
Window comparator
FV hysteresis width
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b063
Window comparator
FI upper limit level
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100.
Yes
Yes
%
b064
Window comparator
FI lower limit level
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b065
Window comparator
FI hysteresis width
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b066
Window comparator
FE upper limit level
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100.
Yes
Yes
%
b067
Window comparator
FE lower limit level
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
-100.
Yes
Yes
%
b068
Window comparator
FE hysteresis width
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b070
Analog operation
level at FV
disconnection
0. to 100./no (ignored)
no
No
Yes
⎯
b071
Analog operation
level at FI
disconnection
0. to 100./no (ignored)
no
No
Yes
⎯
b072
Analog operation
level at FE
disconnection
-100. to 100./no (ignored)
no
No
Yes
⎯
3
Operation
Others
Normal b031 = 10
4-63
4-63
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-36
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
b078
Integrated power
clear
Cleared with the Enter key after changing to
01
b079
Integrated power
display gain
1. to 1000.
1.
Yes
Yes
⎯
b082
Starting frequency
0.10 to 9.99
0.50
No
Yes
Hz
0.5 to 15.0 (0.4 to 55 kW)
*Derating enabled
5.0
No
No
kHz
0.5 to 10.0 (75 to 132 kW)
*Derating enabled
3.0
No
No
kHz
00: Clears the trip monitor
01: Initializes data
Initialization selection
02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes
data
00
No
No
⎯
b085
Initialization
parameter selection
00
*Do not change.
00
No
No
⎯
b086
Frequency
conversion
coefficient
0.1 to 99.0
1.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-2
b087
STOP key selection
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
02: Disabled only during stop
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-68
b088
Free-run stop
selection
00: 0 Hz start
01: Frequency matching start
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-69
b089
Automatic carrier
reduction
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
No
⎯
4-71
b090
Usage rate of
regenerative braking 0.0 to 100.0
function
0.0
No
Yes
%
4-72
b091
Stop selection
00: Deceleration → Stop
01: Free-run stop
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-68
b092
Cooling fan control
00: Always ON
01: ON during RUN
01
No
Yes
⎯
b095
Regenerative
braking function
operation selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Disabled during stop)
02: Enabled (Enabled during stop)
00
No
Yes
⎯
b096
Regenerative
braking function ON
level
330 to 380
660 to 760
360/
720
No
Yes
V
b098
Thermistor selection
00: Disabled
01: PTC enabled
02: NTC enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-4
3
Operation
b083
Others
b084
b099
4-65
4-117
Carrier frequency
Thermistor error level 0. to 9999.
4-65
4-66
3000.
No
Yes
4-72
4-73
Ω
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-37
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
b100
Free V/f frequency 1
0. to Free V/f frequency 2
0.
No
No
Hz
b101
Free V/f voltage 1
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b102
Free V/f frequency 2
0. to Free V/f frequency 3
0.
No
No
Hz
b103
Free V/f voltage 2
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b104
Free V/f frequency 3
0. to Free V/f frequency 4
0.
No
No
Hz
b105
Free V/f voltage 3
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b106
Free V/f frequency 4
0. to Free V/f frequency 5
0.
No
No
Hz
b107
Free V/f voltage 4
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b108
Free V/f frequency 5
0. to Free V/f frequency 6
0.
No
No
Hz
b109
Free V/f voltage 5
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b110
Free V/f frequency 6
0. to Free V/f frequency 7
0.
No
No
Hz
b111
Free V/f voltage 6
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b112
Free V/f frequency 7
0. to 400.
0.
No
No
Hz
b113
Free V/f voltage 7
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
3
4-23
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-38
Operation
Vf free setting
Normal b031 = 10
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Others
Operation
3
b120
Brake control
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
b121
Brake wait time for
release
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b122
Brake wait time for
acceleration
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b123
Brake wait time for
stopping
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b124
Brake wait time for
confirmation
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b125
Brake release
frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
b126
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
Brake release current
0.0 to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
No
Yes
⎯
b127
Brake input
frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
b130
Overvoltage
protection function
selection during
deceleration
00: Disabled
01: DC voltage kept constant
02: Acceleration enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
b131
Overvoltage
protection level
during deceleration
200-V class: 330 to 390
400-V class: 660 to 780
380/
760
No
Yes
V
b132
Overvoltage
0.10 to 30.00
protection parameter
1.00
No
Yes
s
b133
Overvoltage
protection
proportional gain
setting
0.00 to 2.55
0.50
Yes
Yes
⎯
b134
Overvoltage
protection integral
time setting
0.000 to 9.999
10.000 to 65.53
0.060
Yes
Yes
s
4-75
4-76
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-39
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Multi-function input 1
selection *1
C002
Multi-function input 2
selection
C003
Multi-function input 3
selection *1
C004
Multi-function input 4
selection
C005
Multi-function input 5
selection
C006
Multi-function input 6
selection
C007
Multi-function input 7
selection
C008
Multi-function input 8
selection
01 *1
3
18
Operation
Multi-function input terminals
C001
01: RV (reverse)
02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1)
03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2)
04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3)
05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4)
06: JG (jogging)
07: DB (external DC injection braking)
08: SET (2nd control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (free-run stop)
12: EXT (external trip)
13: USP (USP function)
14: CS (commercial switch)
15: SFT (soft lock)
16: AT (analog input switching)
17: SET3 (3rd control)
18: RS (reset)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
23: PID (PID enabled/disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
26: CAS (control gain switching)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
31: OPE (forced operator)
32: SF1 (multi-step speed setting bit 1)
33: SF2 (multi-step speed setting bit 2)
34: SF3 (multi-step speed setting bit 3)
35: SF4 (multi-step speed setting bit 4)
36: SF5 (multi-step speed setting bit 5)
37: SF6 (multi-step speed setting bit 6)
38: SF7 (multi-step speed setting bit 7)
39: OLR (overload limit switching)
40: TL (torque limit enabled)
41: TRQ1 (torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (torque limit switching 2)
43: PPI (P/PI switching)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
45: ORT (orientation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
47: PCLR (position deviation clear)
48: STAT (pulse train position command input
permission)
50: ADD (frequency addition)
51: F-TM (forced terminal block)
52: ATR (torque command input permission)
53: KHC (integrated power clear)
54: SON (servo ON)
55: FOC (preliminary excitation)
56: Not used
57: Not used
58: Not used
59: Not used
60: Not used
61: Not used
62: Not used
63: Not used
65: AHD (analog command held)
66: CP1 (position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (position command selection 3)
69: ORL (zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (zero return startup signal)
71: FOT (forward driving stop)
72: ROT (reverse driving stop)
73: SPD (speed/position switching)
74: PCNT (pulse counter)
75: PCC (pulse counter clear)
no: NO (no allocation)
12 *1
02
No
Yes
⎯
4-77
03
04
05
06
*1. C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 (RS) and 64 (EMR), respectively, when the emergency shutoff
function is enabled (SW1 = ON). (64 cannot be set optionally.)
When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF, C003 has no allocations ("no").
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-40
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
⎯
4-79
Operation
3
Multi-function input terminals
Normal b031 = 10
C011
Multi-function input 1
operation selection
00
C012
Multi-function input 2
operation selection
00
C013
Multi-function input 3
operation selection
00
C014
Multi-function input 4
operation selection
00
C015
Multi-function input 5
operation selection
C016
Multi-function input 6
operation selection
00
C017
Multi-function input 7
operation selection
00
C018
Multi-function input 8
operation selection
00
C019
FW terminal
operation selection
00
00: NO
01: NC
00
No
Yes
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-41
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Multi-function output
terminal
P1 selection
C022
Multi-function output
terminal P2 selection
C023
Multi-function output
terminal P3 selection
C024
Multi-function output
terminal P4 selection
C025
Multi-function output
terminal P5 selection
C026
Relay output (MA,
MB) function
selection
00
3
Operation
Multi-function output terminal
C021
00: RUN (signal during RUN)
01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal)
02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal)
03: OL (overload warning)
04: OD (excessive PID deviation)
05: AL (alarm output)
06: FA3 (set-frequency-only arrival signal)
07: OTQ (overtorque)
08: IP (signal during momentary power interruption)
09: UV (signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (torque limit)
11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power ON time over)
13: THM (thermal warning)
19: BRK (brake release)
20: BER (brake error)
21: ZS (0 Hz signal)
22: DSE (excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (position ready)
24: FA4 (set frequency exceeded 2)
25: FA5 (set frequency only 2)
26: OL2 (overload warning 2)
27: FVDc (analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIDc (analog FI disconnection detection)
29: FEDc (analog FE disconnection detection)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
32: NDc (network error)
33: LOG1 (logic operation output 1)
34: LOG2 (logic operation output 2)
35: LOG3 (logic operation output 3)
36: LOG4 (logic operation output 4)
37: LOG5 (logic operation output 5)
38: LOG6 (logic operation output 6)
39: WAC (capacitor life warning signal)
40: WAF (cooling fan life warning signal)
41: FR (starting contact signal)
42: OHF (fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (light load detection signal)
44: Not used
45: Not used
46: Not used
47: Not used
48: Not used
49: Not used
50: IRDY (operation ready signal)
51: FWR (forward run signal)
52: RVR (reverse run signal)
53: MJA (fatal fault signal)
54: WCFV (window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (window comparator FI)
56: WCFE (window comparator FE)
(When C062 is used to select the alarm code
output, the multi-function output terminals P1 to
P3, or P1 to P4 are forcibly changed to AC0 to
AC2 or AC0 to AC3 [Acn 'Alarm code output'],
respectively.)
01
03
No
Yes
⎯
4-92
07
40
05
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-42
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-106
4-116
Normal b031 = 10
3
MP selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
AM selection
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
04: Output voltage
05: Input voltage
06: Thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
09: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
11: Output torque <signed>
13: Not used
00
No
Yes
⎯
Analog monitor
Operation
C027
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input voltage
06: Thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
09: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
12: Not used
C028
4-107
4-116
C029
AMI selection
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
04: Output voltage
05: Input voltage
06: Thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
09: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
14: Not used
00
No
Yes
⎯
C030
Digital current
monitor reference
value
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
Rated
(Current value at the digital current monitor
current
output 1440 Hz)
Yes
Yes
A
4-106
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-43
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Level and output terminal status
C031
Multi-function output
terminal P1 contact
selection
C032
Multi-function output
terminal P2 contact
selection
C033
Multi-function output
terminal P3 contact
selection
C034
Multi-function output
terminal P4 contact
selection
C035
Multi-function output
terminal P5 contact
selection
C036
Relay output (MA,
MB) contact selection
C038
Light load signal
output mode
3
00
00: NO contact at MA; NC contact at MB
01: NC contact at MA; NO contact at MB
No
Yes
⎯
No
Yes
⎯
4-93
01
00: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
01
4-103
C039
Light load detection
level
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.0 to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
Yes
Yes
A
C040
Overload warning
signal output mode
00: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
01
No
Yes
⎯
C041
Overload warning
level
0.0: Does not operate.
0.1 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.1 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
Yes
Yes
A
C042
Arrival frequency
during acceleration
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C043
Arrival frequency
during deceleration
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C044
PID deviation
excessive level
0.0 to 100.0
3.0
No
Yes
%
C045
Arrival frequency
0.00 to 99.99
during acceleration 2 100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C046
Arrival frequency
0.00 to 99.99
during deceleration 2 100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C052
PID FB upper limit
0.0 to 100.0
100.0
No
Yes
%
C053
PID FB lower limit
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
No
Yes
%
4-49
4-95
4-31
4-95
4-31
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-44
Operation
Multi-function output terminal
Normal b031 = 10
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
C055
Overtorque level
(Forward power
running)
C056
Overtorque level
(Reverse
regeneration)
Level and output terminal status
Operation
3
100.
No
Yes
%
100.
No
Yes
%
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
C057
Overtorque level
(Reverse power
running)
C058
Overtorque level
(Forward
regeneration)
C061
Thermal warning
level
C062
C063
0 Hz detection level
C064
Fin overheat warning
0. to 200.
level
4-97
100.
No
Yes
%
100.
No
Yes
%
80.
No
Yes
%
4-47
00: Disabled
Alarm code selection 01: 3-bit
02: 4-bit
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-98
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
4-98
120.
No
Yes
°C
4-102
0. to 100.
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-45
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
C071
02: Loop-back test
Communication
03: 2400 bps
speed selection
04: 4800 bps
(Baud rate selection) 05: 9600 bps
06: 19200 bps
04
No
Yes
⎯
C072
Communication
station No. selection
1. to 32.
1.
No
Yes
⎯
C073
Communication bit
length selection
7: 7-bit
8: 8-bit
7
No
Yes
⎯
C074
Communication
parity selection
00: No parity
01: Even
02: Odd
00
No
Yes
⎯
C075
Communication stop 1: 1-bit
bit selection
2: 2-bit
1
No
Yes
⎯
C076
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
Communication error
02: Ignore
selection
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
02
No
Yes
⎯
C077
Communication error
0.00 to 99.99
timeout
0.00
No
Yes
s
C078
Communication wait
time
0. to 1000.
0.
No
Yes
ms
C079
Communication
method selection
00: ASCII
01: ModBus-RTU
3
4-141
4-101
4-141
4-141
No
Yes
⎯
FV adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
⎯
FI adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
⎯
C083
FE adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
⎯
C085
Thermistor
adjustment
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
4-73
C091
Not used
Use "00".
* Do not change.
No
⎯
⎯
C081
Adjustment
C082
01
00
No
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-46
Operation
Communication function
Normal b031 = 10
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
UP/DWN selection
00: Do not store the frequency data
01: Store the frequency data
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-88
C102
Reset selection
00: Trip reset at power-on
01: Trip reset when the power is OFF
02: Enabled only during trip (Reset when the
power is ON)
03: Trip reset only
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-85
4-132
C103
Reset frequency
matching selection
00: 0 Hz start
01: Frequency matching start
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-85
C105
MP gain setting
50. to 200.
100.
Yes
Yes
%
4-107
C106
AM gain setting
50. to 200.
100.
Yes
Yes
%
C107
AMI gain setting
50. to 200.
100.
Yes
Yes
%
C109
AM bias setting
0. to 100.
0.
Yes
Yes
%
C110
AMI bias setting
0. to 100.
20.
Yes
Yes
%
C111
Overload warning
level 2
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.0 to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
Yes
Yes
A
FV zero adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
FI zero adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
FE zero adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
Meter adjustment
Terminal
4-108
C121
Adjustment
Operation
3
Others
C101
C122
C123
4-49
⎯
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-47
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
C130
Output P1 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C131
Output P1 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C132
Output P2 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C133
Output P2 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C134
Output P3 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C135
Output P3 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C136
Output P4 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C137
Output P4 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C138
Output P5 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C139
Output P5 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C140
Relay output ON delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C141
Relay output OFF
delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C142
Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C143
Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C144
00: AND
Logic output signal 1
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C145
Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C146
Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C147
00: AND
Logic output signal 2
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C148
Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C149
Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C150
00: AND
Logic output signal 3
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C151
Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
3
No
Yes
s
4-105
No
Yes
⎯
4-99
Operation
Output terminal operation function
Normal b031 = 10
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-48
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Input terminal response
Others
Operation
3
Output terminal operation function
Normal b031 = 10
C152
Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C153
00: AND
Logic output signal 4
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C154
Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C155
Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C156
00: AND
Logic output signal 5
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C157
Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C158
Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C159
00: AND
Logic output signal 6
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C160
Input terminal
response time 1
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C161
Input terminal
response time 2
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C162
Input terminal
response time 3
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C163
Input terminal
response time 4
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C164
Input terminal
response time 5
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C165
Input terminal
response time 6
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C166
Input terminal
response time 7
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C167
Input terminal
response time 8
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C168
FW terminal response
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
time
1
C169
Multi-step speed/
position
determination time
0
0. to 200. (× 10 ms)
No
Yes
⎯
4-99
No
Yes
ms
4-105
No
Yes
ms
4-16
4-132
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-49
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
H001
00: Disabled
Auto-tuning selection 01: Not rotate
02: Rotate
00
H002
Motor parameter
selection
00
00: Standard motor parameter
01: Auto-tuning parameter
02: Auto-tuning parameter
(online auto-tuning enabled)
H202
* 2nd motor
parameter selection
H003
Motor capacity
selection
H203
* 2nd motor capacity
selection
Factory
default
H004
Motor pole number
selection
4
H204
* 2nd motor pole
number selection
H005
Speed response
⎯
4-109
No
No
⎯
4-109
4-111
4-112
No
No
kW
Factory
default
2/4/6/8/10
H205
No
00
0.20 to 160.0
* 2nd speed
response
No
4-19
4-109
4-112
4-116
No
No
Pole
Yes
Yes
⎯
4
1.590
0.001 to 9.999/10.00 to 80.00
(10.000 to 80.000)
1.590
4-87
4-89
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-50
3
Operation
Control parameter
Normal b031 = 10
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-117
Normal b031 = 10
3
H006
Stabilization
parameter
H206
* 2nd stabilization
parameter
H306
* 3rd stabilization
parameter
100.
Motor parameter R1
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Operation
H020
100.
0. to 255.
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
H220
H021
* 2nd motor
parameter R1
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter R2
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Control parameter
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
H221
H022
* 2nd motor
parameter R2
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter L
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H222
H023
* 2nd motor
parameter L
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter Io
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H223
100.
* 2nd motor
parameter Io
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter J
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
Ω
No
No
Ω
No
No
mH
No
No
A
4-112
4-112
H024
H224
* 2nd motor
parameter J
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
No
No
kgm2
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-51
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
H030
Motor parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
No
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H031
Motor parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H231
* 2nd motor
parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H032
Motor parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H232
* 2nd motor
parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H033
Motor parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H233
* 2nd motor
parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H034
Motor parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H234
* 2nd motor
parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
No
Ω
3
No
No
Ω
No
No
mH
No
No
A
No
No
kgm2
Operation
H230
* 2nd motor
parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
Control parameter
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
4-109
4-112
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-52
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Control parameter
Operation
3
H050
PI proportional gain
100.0
H250
0.0 to 999.9
* 2nd PI proportional 1000.
gain
100.0
H051
PI integral gain
100.0
H251
*2nd PI integral gain
H052
P proportional gain
H252
*2nd P proportional
gain
H060
Limit at 0 Hz
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
%
100.0
4-87
4-89
1.00
0.01 to 10.00
1.00
100.0
0.0 to 100.0
H260
* 2nd limit at 0 Hz
100.0
H061
Boost amount at SLV
startup, 0 Hz
50.
H261
* 2nd boost amount
at SLV startup, 0 Hz
H070
For PI proportional
gain switching
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
H071
For PI integral gain
switching
H072
H073
0. to 50.
4-114
Yes
Yes
%
100.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
100.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
For P proportional
gain switching
0.00 to 10.00
1.00
Yes
Yes
⎯
Gain switching time
0. to 9999.
100.
Yes
Yes
ms
50.
4-87
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-53
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
P001
Operation selection
at option 1 error
00: Trip
01: Continues operation
P002
Operation selection
at option 2 error
00: Trip
01: Continues operation
00
No
Yes
P011
Encoder pulses
128. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65535)
1024.
No
No
P012
V2 control mode
selection
00: ASR (speed control mode)
01: APR (pulse train position control mode)
02: APR2 (absolute position control mode)
03: HAPR (High resolution absolute position
control mode)
00
No
No
P013
Pulse train mode
selection
00: Mode 0
01: Mode 1
02: Mode 2
00
No
P014
Orientation stop
position
0. to 4095.
0.
P015
Orientation speed
setting
Starting frequency to Max. frequency (upper
limit: 120.0)
P016
Orientation direction
setting
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
00
No
Yes
⎯
⎯
4-119
Pulse 4-128
4-129
3
⎯
4-119
4-131
No
⎯
4-122
Operation
Options
4-108
No
Yes
⎯
5.00
No
Yes
Hz
00
No
No
⎯
4-129
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-54
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Options
Operation
3
P017
Position ready range 0. to 9999.
setting
1000(10000)
5.
No
Yes
Pulse
4-122
4-129
P018
Position ready delay
time setting
0.00 to 9.99
0.00
No
Yes
s
4-122
4-129
P019
Electronic gear
setting position
selection
00: Position feedback side (FB)
01: Position command side (REF)
00
No
Yes
⎯
P020
Electronic gear ratio
numerator
0. to 9999.
1.
Yes
Yes
⎯
P021
Electronic gear ratio
denominator
0. to 9999.
1.
Yes
Yes
⎯
P022
Position control
feedforward gain
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
0.00
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-123
4-124
0.50
Yes
Yes
rad/s
4-119
4-123
4-124
4-129
4-131
Position bias amount -204(-2048.)/-999. to 2048.
0.
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-123
P025
Secondary resistance
00: Disabled
compensation enable/
01: Enabled
disable selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-111
P026
Overspeed error
detection level
135.0
No
Yes
%
5-6
P027
Speed deviation error 0.00 to 99.99
detection level
100.0 to 120.0
7.50
No
Yes
Hz
4-119
P028
Motor gear ratio
numerator
1.
No
Yes
⎯
P029
Motor gear ratio
denominator
1. to 9999.
1.
No
Yes
⎯
P031
Acceleration/
deceleration time
input type
00: Digital Operator
01: Option 1
02: Option 2
00
No
No
⎯
4-9
P032
Orientation stop
position input type
00: Digital Operator
01: Option 1
02: Option 2
00
No
Yes
⎯
⎯
P033
Torque reference
input selection
00: Terminal FV
01: Terminal FI
02: Terminal FE
03: Digital Operator
00
No
No
⎯
P034
Torque reference
setting
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
Yes
Yes
%
P035
Polarity selection at
00: Signed
torque reference via FE 01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
No
No
⎯
P023
Position loop gain
P024
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.0 to 150.0
1. to 9999.
4-128
4-121
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-55
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
P036
Torque bias mode
00: None
01: Digital Operator
02: Terminal FE
00
No
No
⎯
P037
Torque bias value
-200. to +200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
-180. to +180. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
Yes
Yes
%
P038
Torque bias polarity
selection
00: Signed
01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
No
No
⎯
P039
Speed limit value in
torque control
(forward)
0.00 to Maximum frequency
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P040
Speed limit value in
torque control
(reverse)
0.00 to Maximum frequency
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P044
Not used
Use "1.00".
*Do not change.
1.00
No
No
s
⎯
P045
Operation setting at
communications
error
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run
04: Deceleration stop
01
No
No
⎯
⎯
P046
Output assembly
instance No. setting
20
21
100
21
No
No
⎯
⎯
P047
Input assembly
instance No. setting
70
71
101
71
No
No
⎯
⎯
P048
Operation setting at
idle mode detection
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run
04: Deceleration stop
01
No
No
⎯
⎯
P049
Polarity setting for
rotation speed
0/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/22/24/26/28/30/
32/34/36/38
0
No
No
⎯
⎯
P055
Pulse train frequency
1.0 to 50.0
scale
25.0
No
Yes
kHz
P056
Pulse train frequency
0.01 to 2.00
filter time constant
0.10
No
Yes
s
P057
Pulse train frequency
-100. to +100.
bias amount
0.
No
Yes
%
P058
Pulse train frequency
0. to 100.
limit
100.
No
Yes
%
4-121
4-122
3
Options
4-138
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-56
Operation
4-121
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
P060
Multi-step position
command 0
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P061
Multi-step position
command 1
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P062
Multi-step position
command 2
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P063
Multi-step position
command 3
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
Multi-step position
command 4
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
Absolute position control
Operation
3
Yes
P064
Yes
⎯
4-131
P065
Multi-step position
command 5
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P066
Multi-step position
command 6
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P067
Multi-step position
command 7
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P068
Zero return mode
00: Low
01: Hi1
02: Hi2
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
P069
Zero return direction
selection
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-57
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
P070
Low-speed zero
return frequency
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P071
High-speed zero
return frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to Maximum frequency
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P072
Position range
specification
(forward)
0 to 268435455 (at P012 = 02)
0 to 1073741823 (at P012 = 03)
(Displays MSB 4 digits)
268435455
Yes
Yes
⎯
P073
Position range
specification
(reverse)
-268435455 to 0 (at P012 = 02)
-1073741823 to 0 (at P012 = 03)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
-268435455
Yes
Yes
⎯
Teaching selection
00: Multi-step position command 0 (P060)
01: Multi-step position command 1 (P061)
02: Multi-step position command 2 (P062)
03: Multi-step position command 3 (P063)
04: Multi-step position command 4 (P064)
05: Multi-step position command 5 (P065)
06: Multi-step position command 6 (P066)
07: Multi-step position command 7 (P067)
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
Not used
Do not use.
0.
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
U001
User 1 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U002
User 2 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U003
User 3 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U004
User 4 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U005
User 5 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U006
User 6 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
Yes
Yes
User 7 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
⎯
4-53
U007
U008
User 8 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U009
User 9 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U010
User 10 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U011
User 11 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U012
User 12 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
P074
User parameter
P100
to
P131
4-131
3
4-132
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
3-58
Operation
Absolute position control
Normal b031 = 10
Chapter 4
Functions
4-1 Monitor Mode.................................................... 4-1
4-2 Function Mode.................................................. 4-8
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is
Used .................................................................. 4-118
4-4 Communication Function................................ 4-139
4-1 Monitor Mode
4Functions
4-1 Monitor Mode
Output Frequency Monitor [d001]
Displays the output frequency of the Inverter. During stop, "0.00" is displayed.
The data LED indicator "Hz" lights up while the d001 setting is displayed.
(Display)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
Functions
4
: Displays in increments of 0.01 Hz.
: Displays in increments of 0.1 Hz.
Note: When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator, the output frequency can be
changed with the Increment/Decrement key during operation only.
The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001.
Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference.
Output Current Monitor [d002]
Displays the output current value of the Inverter. During stop, "0.00" is displayed.
The data LED indicator "A" lights up while the d002 setting is displayed.
(Display)
0.0 to 999.9: Displays in increments of 0.1 A.
Rotation Direction Monitor [d003]
Displays the RUN direction of the Inverter.
The RUN LED indicator lights up during forward/reverse rotation.
(Display)
F : Forward
o : Stop
r : Reverse
PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004]
When "Enabled" (01) or "Reverse output enabled" (02) is selected in PID selection A071, the PID
feedback value can be monitored.
Gain conversion is enabled with PID scale A075.
"d004 display" = "PID feedback value (%)" × "PID scale (A075)"
(A075): 0.01 to 99.99 (Can be set in increments of 0.01.)
(Display)
0.00 to 99.99
: Displays in increments of 0.01.
100.0 to 999.9 : Displays in increments of 0.1.
1000 to 9999
: Displays in increments of 1.
⎡100 to ⎡999
: Displays in increments of 10.
4-1
4-1 Monitor Mode
Multi-function Input Monitor [d005]
•The LED lighting position indicates the input status of the multi-function input terminals.
•The item that the built-in CPU recognizes to be "significant" is indicated as being ON.
This does not depend on the NO/NC contact setting.
(Example)
FW, Multi-function input terminals S7, S2, S1: ON
Multi-function input terminals S8, S6, S5, S4, S3: OFF
ON
Multi-function
input terminals
Display
ON
: ON
OFF
: OFF
4
OFF
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
(OFF) (ON)(OFF)(OFF)(OFF)(OFF)(ON) (ON)
•The LED lighting position indicates the output status of the multi-function output terminals.
•This monitor displays the output status of the built-in CPU, not the control circuit terminal status.
(Example)
Multi-function output terminals P2, P1: ON
Relay output terminal MA, Multi-function output terminals P5, P4, P3: OFF
ON
Display
: ON
OFF
: OFF
Multi-function output terminals MA P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
Relay output terminals
(OFF)(OFF)(OFF) (OFF)(ON) (ON)
Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007]
Displays a gain conversion value based on the coefficient set in frequency conversion coefficient
b086.
This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data (e.g. motor rpm).
"d007 display" = "Output frequency (d001)" × "Frequency conversion coefficient (b086)"
(b086) 0.1 to 99.9 (Can be set in increments of 0.1.)
(Example)
To display 4-pole motor rpm:
Motor rpm N (min-1) = (120 × f (Hz)) / P (pole)
= f (Hz) × 30
As such, when b086 = 30.0, a motor rpm of 1800 (60 × 30.0) is displayed.
(Display)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
100. to 9999.
1000 to 3996
: Displays in increments of 0.01.
: Displays in increments of 0.1.
: Displays in increments of 1.
: Displays in increments of 10.
4-2
Functions
Multi-function Output Monitor [d006]
4-1 Monitor Mode
Note: When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator, the output frequency can be
changed with the Increment/Decrement key during operation only.
The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001.
Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference. (The data
storage accuracy depends on each frequency reference.)
Real Frequency Monitor [d008]
When a motor with an encoder is connected to a load, and the PG board (3G3AX-PG01) is used,
this monitor displays the real frequency of the motor (regardless of the control method).
(Display)
In forward rotation: 0.00 to 99.99 : Displays in increments of 0.01 Hz.
100.0 to 400.0 : Displays in increments of 0.1 Hz.
In reverse rotation: -0.0 to -99.9
: Displays in increments of 0.1 Hz.
-100 to -400
: Displays in increments of 1 Hz.
Functions
4
Note 1: To use this monitor, set the number of encoder pulses (P011) and the motor pole number
selection (H004 or H204) correctly.
Note 2: The monitored value does not depend on V/f characteristics selection A044.
Torque Reference Monitor [d009]
When torque control is selected for sensor vector control, this monitor displays the currently entered
torque reference value.
The data LED indicator "%" lights up while the d009 setting is displayed.
(Display)
0. to 200.: Displays in increments of 1%.
Torque Bias Monitor [d010]
When sensor vector control is selected, this monitor displays the torque bias amount currently set
in display code d010.
The data LED indicator "%" lights up while the d010 setting is displayed.
(Display)
-150. to +150.: Displays in increments of 1%.
Output Torque Monitor [d012]
Displays an estimated value of the Inverter's output torque.
The data LED indicator "%" lights up while the d012 setting is displayed.
(Display)
-300. to +300.: Displays in increments of 1%.
Note: This monitor is enabled only when "sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector
control" , or "sensor vector control" is selected as the control mode.
4-3
4-1 Monitor Mode
Output Voltage Monitor [d013]
Displays the output voltage of the Inverter.
The data LED indicator "V" lights up while the d013 setting is displayed.
(Display)
0.0 to 600.0: Displays in increments of 0.1 V.
Input Power Monitor [d014]
Displays the input power (instantaneous value) of the Inverter.
The data LED indicator "kW" ("V" and "A") lights up while the d014 setting is displayed.
4
(Display)
0.0 to 999.9: Displays in increments of 0.1 kW.
Functions
Integrated Power Monitor [d015]
•Displays the integrated power (integrated value of input power) of the Inverter.
The gain conversion of displayed data is performed with integrated power display gain b079.
"d015 display" = "Input power calculation value (kWh)" / "Integrated power display gain (b079)"
(b079) 1. to 1000. (Can be set in increments of 1.)
•When integrated power clear d078 is set to "01", pressing the Enter key clears the integrated power
value.
•The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input, if "53" (KHC: Integrated power
clear) is allocated to any of the multi-function input terminals.
•When b079 is set to "1000", up to "999000" (kWh) can be displayed.
(Display)
0. to 9999.
: Displays in increments of 1 kWh/(b079) set value.
1000 to 9999 : Displays in increments of 10 kWh/(b079) set value.
⎡100 to ⎡999 : Displays in increments of 1000 kWh/(b079) set value.
Total RUN Time [d016]
Displays the total RUN time of the Inverter.
(Display)
0. to 9999.
: Displays in increments of 1 hour.
1000 to 9999 : Displays in increments of 10 hours.
⎡100 to ⎡999 : Displays in increments of 1000 hours.
4-4
4-1 Monitor Mode
Power ON Time Monitor [d017]
Displays the total power ON time of the Inverter.
(Display)
0. to 9999.
: Displays in increments of 1 hour.
1000 to 9999 : Displays in increments of 10 hours.
100 to ⎡999 : Displays in increments of 1000 hours.
Fin Temperature Monitor [d018]
4
Displays the temperature of the fin inside the Inverter.
Functions
(Display)
-020. to 200.0: Displays in increments of 0.1°C.
Motor Temperature Monitor [d019]
•Displays the temperature of the thermistor connected between the control circuit terminals TH and
SC.
•Use thermistor PB-41E (SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS).
•Set thermistor selection b098 to "02" (NTC enabled).
(Display)
0.0 to 200.0: Displays in increments of 0.1°C.
Note: When b098 = "01" (PTC enabled), the motor temperature monitor is disabled.
Life Assessment Monitor [d022]
•The LED lighting position indicates a life assessment result.
The following two items can be monitored:
1: Main circuit board capacitor service life
2: Cooling fan rpm reduction
Life assessment
Normal
2
1
Note 1: The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes. If the Inverter is turned on/off
frequently within this interval, the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed.
Note 2: While the cooling fan is stopped with b092 set to "01", the cooling fan rpm is judged as being
normal.
Pulse Counter Monitor [d028]
You can monitor a total pulse count of multi-function input function pulse counter 74 (PCNT).
4-5
4-1 Monitor Mode
Position Command Monitor (Absolute Position Control Mode) [d029]
You can monitor a position command in absolute position control mode.
Note: This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to "02" or "03" in
sensor vector control mode.
Current Position Monitor (Absolute Position Control Mode) [d030]
You can monitor the current position in absolute position control mode.
Note: This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to "02" or "03" in
sensor vector control mode.
Functions
Fault Frequency Monitor [d080]
Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped.
(Display)
0. to 9999.
: Displays in increments of 1 time.
1000 to 6553 : Displays in increments of 10 times.
Fault Monitors 1 to 6 [d081] to [d086]
Displays the details of the last six trips.
The most recent trip is displayed on trip monitor 1.
(Display)
(1) Factor (Displays any of E01 to E79.)*
(2) Output frequency (Hz) at the time of tripping
(3) Output current (A) at the time of tripping
(4) Main circuit DC voltage (V) at the time of tripping
(5) Total RUN time (h) before the trip
(6) Total power ON time (h) before the trip
* Refer to "Error Code List" (page 5-1).
(Trip Monitor Display Sequence)
dk0k8k1
(1) Trip factor*
(2) Trip frequency
ek0k7.2
6k0.0k0
(3) Trip current
4.0k0
4
(4) Trip main circuit
DC voltage
(5) Total RUN time
4k0k0.2
1k5.
(6) Power ON time
1k8.
* Displays _k_k_k_ if there has been no trip.
4-6
4-1 Monitor Mode
Warning Monitor [d090]
•If the set data is inconsistent with other data, a warning code is displayed.
•While this warning remains in effect, the PROGRAM LED indicator (PRG) stays lit until forced to
rewrite or correct the data.
•For details on the Warning display, refer to "5-2 Warning Function".
DC Voltage Monitor [d102]
•Displays the DC voltage (between P and N) of the Inverter.
•During operation, the monitor value changes depending on the actual DC voltage of the Inverter.
4
Functions
(Display)
0.0 to 999.9: Displays in increments of 0.1 V.
Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor [d103]
Displays a regenerative braking load rate. When the monitor value comes close to exceeding the
value set in usage rate of the regenerative braking function b090, "E06 (Braking resistor overload
protection)" works to trip the Inverter.
(Display)
0.0 to 100.0: Displays in increments of 0.1%.
Electronic Thermal Monitor [d104]
Displays an electronic thermal load rate. When the monitor value comes close to exceeding 100%,
"E05 (Overload protection)" works to trip the Inverter.
(Display)
0.0 to 100.0: Displays in increments of 0.1%.
4-7
4-2 Function Mode
4-2 Function Mode
<Group F: Basic Function Parameters>
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor
Parameter No.
Function name
F001
Output frequency
setting/monitor
A020
Multi-step speed
reference 0
A220
*2nd multi-step
speed reference 0
A320
*3rd multi-step
speed reference 0
Data
Default setting
Unit
⎯
0.0/Starting frequency to
1st/2nd/3rd max. frequency
Hz
6.0
Related functions
A001, A020, A220, A320, C001 to C008
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
•Set an acceleration/deceleration time for the motor. For a slow transition, set to a large value, and
for a fast transition, set to a small one.
Parameter No.
Function name
F002
Acceleration time 1
F202
*2nd acceleration time 1
F302
*3rd acceleration time 1
F003
Deceleration time 1
F203
*2nd deceleration time 1
F303
*3rd deceleration time 1
Data
0.01 to 3600
Default setting
Unit
30.00
s
4-8
4
Functions
•Set the Inverter output frequency.
•With frequency reference selection A001 set to 02, you can set the output frequency with F001.
For other methods, refer to the [A001] section in "Frequency Reference Selection" (page 4-10).
(If A001 is set other than to "02", F001 functions as the frequency reference monitor.)
•If a frequency is set in F001, the same value is automatically set in multi-step speed reference 0
(A020). To set the 2nd/3rd control, use the 2nd multi-step speed reference 0 (A220)/3rd multi-step
speed reference 0 (A320) or use F001 with the SET/SET3 terminal turned on. To set using the
SET/SET3 terminal, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input.
•When this monitor is used to display a target value of the PID function, the monitor value is
displayed as a percentage (%). (100% = Max. frequency)
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
P031
Acceleration/deceleration
time input type
00: Input via the Digital Operator
01: Input via option 1
02: Input via option 2
00
⎯
Related functions
A004, A204, A304, P031, C001 to C008
* To switch to 2nd/3rd acceleration time 1 or 2nd/3rd deceleration time 1, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the
desired multi-function input and then turn it on.
•The set time here indicates the acceleration/deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum
frequency.
Output frequency
4
Max. frequency
A004/A204/A304
Functions
Output frequency set value
Actual
acceleration
time
F002/F202/F302
Actual
deceleration
time
F003/F203/F303
•When the LAD cancel (LAC) function is selected in the multi-function input selection and the signal
is turned on, the acceleration/deceleration time is ignored, and the output frequency
instantaneously follows the reference frequency.
•To switch between the 1st/2nd/3rd acceleration times or between the 1st/2nd/3rd deceleration
times, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input (refer to "Multi-function Input
Selection" (page 4-77)), and use the SET/SET3.
•You can set the acceleration/deceleration time via (1) the Digital Operator, (2) optional board 1, or
(3) optional board 2.
•Even if a short acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual time cannot be shorter than the
minimum acceleration/deceleration time that is determined by the mechanical inertia moment and
the motor torque. If you set a time shorter than the minimum time, an overcurrent/overvoltage trip
may occur.
Acceleration Time TS
TS =
(JL + JM) NM
9.55 (T S T L )
Deceleration Time TB
TB =
JL: Inertia moment of the load converted to the motor shaft [kg·m2]
JM: Inertia moment of the motor [kg·m2]
NM: Motor rotation speed [r/min]
TS: Max. acceleration torque with the Inverter driving [N·m]
TB: Max. deceleration torque with the Inverter driving [N·m]
TL: Required driving torque [N·m]
(JL + JM) NM
9.55 (T B + T L )
For short-time deceleration, use a braking unit (optional).
4-9
4-2 Function Mode
Operator Rotation Direction Selection
•Select the rotation direction applied to the RUN command via the Digital Operator.
•This is disabled at terminals.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
F004
Operator rotation direction
selection
00: Forward
01: Reverse
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
<Group A: Standard Function Parameters>
4
Frequency Reference Selection
Parameter No.
A001
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
Frequency reference
selection
00: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
01: Terminal
02: Digital Operator (F001)
03: ModBus communication
04: Option 1
05: Option 2
06: Pulse train frequency
07: Not used
10: Operation function result
02
⎯
Related functions
Data
A005, A141 to A143, A145, A146
Frequency reference source
00
Set a frequency with the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator.
(Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
01
Set a frequency via terminals. (FV-FC, FI-FC, FE-FC)
02
Set a frequency via the Digital Operator (F001).
03
Set a frequency through the ModBus communication.
04
Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 1.
05
Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 2.
06
Set a frequency as a pulse train by using 3G3AX-PG01.
07
Not used
10
The operation result of the frequency operation function is defined as a frequency reference.
4-10
Functions
Select the method for using the frequency reference.
4-2 Function Mode
RUN Command Selection
Select the method for using the RUN/STOP command.
Parameter No.
Function name
RUN command
selection
A002
Data
Functions
Unit
02
⎯
01: Terminal
02: Digital Operator (F001)
03: ModBus communication
04: Option 1
05: Option 2
Related functions
4
Default setting
F004, C001 to C008, C019
Data
RUN command source
01
Turn on/off the FW or RV allocated to terminals.
The STOP command is activated if both Forward/Reverse commands are input simultaneously.
02
Use the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator.
03
Use the ModBus communication.
04
Use option board 1.
05
Use option board 2.
Base Frequency
•Match the Inverter output (frequency/voltage) to the motor rating. Be careful, especially if you set
a base frequency below 50 Hz. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
A003
Base frequency
A203
*2nd base frequency
30 to 2nd max. frequency [A204]
A303
*3rd base frequency
30 to 3rd max. frequency [A304]
Default setting
Unit
60.0
Hz
30 to Max. frequency [A004]
Related functions
A004, A204, A304, A081, A082
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
•For the base frequency and motor voltage selections, match the Inverter output (frequency/
voltage) to the motor rating.
Output voltage
AVR voltage
selection
(A082)
Base frequency
(A003/A203/A303)
Output frequency (Hz)
•If you apply a base frequency of over 60 Hz, a special motor is required. This may require the
Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor.
•Set the motor voltage selection according to the motor specifications. If the voltage exceeds the
specified level, the motor may burn out.
4-11
4-2 Function Mode
Maximum Frequency
•Set the maximum value of the output frequency.
•The value set here is the maximum value (e.g.,10 V in the range from 0 to 10 V) of the external
analog input (frequency reference).
•The maximum Inverter output voltage from base to maximum frequencies is the voltage set in AVR
voltage selection A082.
•The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage.
Output voltage
4
AVR voltage
selection
(A082)
Parameter No.
Function name
A004
Maximum frequency
A204
*2nd maximum frequency
A304
*3rd maximum frequency
Max. frequency
Data
30 to 400
Related functions
Default setting
Unit
60.0
Hz
A003, A203, A303, A081, A082
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
Analog Input (FV, FE, FI)
•The Inverter has three types of external analog input terminals.
FV-FC terminal: 0 to 10 V (voltage input)
FI-FC terminal: 4 to 20 mA (current input)
FE-FC terminal: -10 to 10 V (voltage input)
•Below are the settings for this function.
Parameter No.
A005
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
FV/FI selection
00: Switches between FV/FI via terminal AT
01: Switches between FV/FE via terminal AT
02: Switches between FV/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT (Enabled only when 3G3AXOP01 is used.)
03: Switches between FI/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT (Enabled only when 3G3AXOP01 is used.)
04: Switches between FE/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT (Enabled only when 3G3AXOP01 is used.)
00
⎯
4-12
Functions
Base frequency
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
A006
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
FE selection
00: FE only
01: Auxiliary frequency reference of FV and FI
(not reversible)
02: Auxiliary frequency reference of FV and FI
(reversible)
03: FE disabled
03
⎯
Related functions
A005, A006, C001 to C008
•The frequency reference and reversibility depend on whether "16" (AT) is allocated to a multifunction input, and depend on the combination of A005 and A006, as shown below.
If the frequency reference is "reversible", the motor runs in the reverse direction when "main
frequency reference + auxiliary frequency reference" is less than zero, even if the FW (Forward)
terminal is ON. Also, note that the motor may run in the reverse direction, resulting in prolonged
acceleration time or other phenomena, if the voltage fluctuates around 0 V even with the FE
terminal not connected.
Functions
4
A006
A005
AT
terminal
Main frequency reference
Auxiliary frequency
reference
(FE-FC terminal)
OFF
FV-FC terminal
Disabled
ON
FI-FC terminal
Disabled
OFF
FV-FC terminal
Disabled
ON
FE-FC terminal
Disabled
OFF
FV-FC terminal
Enabled
ON
FI-FC terminal
Enabled
OFF
FV-FC terminal
Enabled
ON
FE-FC terminal
Disabled
OFF
FV-FC terminal
Enabled
ON
FI-FC terminal
Enabled
OFF
FV-FC terminal
Enabled
ON
FE-FC terminal
Disabled
00
00, 03
Reversibility
Not
reversible
01
With AT
allocated to a
multi-function
input
00
(Example 1)
01
Reversible
Not
reversible
01
00
(Example 2)
Reversible
Reversible
02
01
With AT NOT
allocated to a
multi-function
input
4-13
00
⎯
⎯
FE-FC terminal
Disabled
Reversible
01
⎯
⎯
Addition of the FV-FC and
FI-FC terminals
Enabled
Not
reversible
02
⎯
⎯
Addition of the FV-FC and
FI-FC terminals
Enabled
Reversible
03
⎯
⎯
Addition of the FV-FC and
FI-FC terminals
Disabled
Not
reversible
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 1) Not reversible
(Example 2) Reversible
FW
FW
AT
Main frequency
reference
FI or FV terminal O
Auxiliary
frequency
reference
FE terminal
fFI
AT
Main frequency
reference
FI or FV terminal O
fFV
fFE
O
fFV + fFE
Forward
fFE
O
fFE + fFI
fFE + fFI
fFI + fFE
fFV
Real frequency
reference
Forward
Reverse
External Frequency (Voltage/Current) Adjustment
•External analog input (frequency reference)
FV-FC terminal: 0 to 10 V (voltage input)
FI-FC terminal: 4 to 20 mA (current input)
FE-FC terminal: -10 to 10 V (voltage input)
Also set an output frequency for the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator.
„Adjusting the FE-FC and FI-FC Terminals
Parameter No.
Function name
A011
A101
FV/FI start frequency
Data
0.00 to 400.0
(Set a start/end frequency.)
A012
A102
FV/FI end frequency
A013
A103
FV/FI start ratio
A014
A104
FV/FI end ratio
A015
A105
FV/FI start selection
Related functions
0. to 100.
(Set a start/end ratio relative to an external
frequency reference of 0 to 10 V and 4 to 20
mA.)
00: Start frequency (A011 set value)
01: 0 Hz
4
Functions
Real frequency
reference
Auxiliary
frequency
reference
FE terminal
fFI
Default
setting
Unit
0.0
Hz
0.
20.
%
100.
01
⎯
00
A003, A203, A303, A081, A082
•To input voltage ranging from 0 to 5 V on the FI-FC terminal, set A014 to 50%.
4-14
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 1) A015/A105: 00
(Example 2) A015/A105: 01
Max.
frequency
Max.
frequency
A012/A102
A012/A102
A011/A101
A011/A101
4
0
A013/A103
(0 V/0 mA)
A014/A104
100% Analog input
(10 V/20 mA)
(0/OI)
0
A013/A103
(0 V/0 mA)
A014/A104
100% Analog input
(10 V/20 mA)
(0/OI)
Functions
„Adjusting the FE-FC Terminal
Data
Default
setting
FE start frequency
-400. to 400.
(Set a start frequency.)
0.00
A112
FE end frequency
-400. to 400.
(Set an end frequency.)
0.00
A113
FE start ratio
-100. to 100.:
(Set a start ratio relative to an external
frequency reference of -10 to 10 V. *)
-100.
FE end ratio
-100. to 100.:
(Set an end ratio relative to an external
frequency reference of -10 to 10 V. *)
Parameter No.
Function name
A111
Unit
Hz
%
A114
Related functions
100.
A003, A203, A303, A081, A082
* Below is the ratio from -10 to 10 V.
-10 to 0 V: -100% to 0%
0 to 10 V: 0% to 100%
• For example, to input voltage ranging from -5 to 5 V on the
FE-FC terminal, set A113 to -50%, and A114 to 50%.
(Example 3)
Forward
max. frequency
(-10 V)
-100% A113
A112
A111
A114 100% Analog input
(02)
(+10 V)
Reverse
max. frequency
4-15
4-2 Function Mode
FV, FE, FI Sampling
•You can set the built-in filter applied to frequency setting signals of the external voltage/current
input.
Parameter No.
Function name
A016
FV, FE, FI sampling
Data
Default setting
Unit
31.
Time
1. to 30./31.
Related functions
A011 to A016, C001 to C008
•Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit.
•Set a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise.
Note that the larger the data value is, the slower the response time. This parameter specifies a filter
time constant for a set value of 1 to 30 (× 2 ms).
•When "31." is selected, a filter time constant of 500 ms and a hysteresis of ±0.1 Hz are set. (Factory
default)
•You can set RUN speeds using codes and switch between the set speeds via the terminal.
•For multi-step speed operation, you can select either 4-terminal binary operation (with 16 steps
max.) or 7-terminal bit operation (with 8 steps max.).
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
A019
Multi-step speed selection
00: Binary: 16-step selection with 4
terminals
01: Bit: 8-step selection with 7
terminals
00
⎯
A020
Multi-step speed reference 0
A220
*2nd multi-step speed
reference 0
A320
*3rd multi-step speed
reference 0
A021
Multi-step speed reference 1
A022
Multi-step speed reference 2
A023
Multi-step speed reference 3
A024
Multi-step speed reference 4
A025
Multi-step speed reference 5
A026
Multi-step speed reference 6
A027
Multi-step speed reference 7
A028 to A035
Multi-step speed references
8 to 15
6.0
0.0/Starting frequency to
Max. frequency
Hz
0.0
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
•During multi-step speed operation, if frequency reference selection A001 is set to the terminal (01),
and the external analog input (FV, FE, FI) setting mode based on a combination of FV/FI selection
A005, FE selection A006, and the AT terminal is set to "reversible", the RUN command is inverted
when "main frequency reference + auxiliary frequency reference" is less than zero.
4-16
Functions
Multi-step Speed Operation Function
4
4-2 Function Mode
„Binary Operation
•By allocating 02 to 05 (CF1 to CF4) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008), you can
select from multi-step speeds 0 to 15.
•Use A021 to A035 (multi-step speeds 1 to 15) to set frequencies for speeds 1 to 15.
•When the Digital Operator is selected as the frequency reference, speed 0 is set with A020/A220/
A320 or F001 (refer to page 4-8). When the control circuit terminal block is selected, speed 0 is set
with terminals FV, FE, and FI.
Multi-step speeds
CF4
CF3
CF2
0th
OFF
1st
4
OFF
2nd
3rd
Functions
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
5th
ON
6th
OFF
7th
8th
OFF
9th
OFF
10th
11th
12th
13th
14th
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
15th
CF1
11th
10th
OFF
9th
ON
OFF
4th
ON
2nd
OFF
Frequency from
the Digital Operator
or the external
analog input terminal
15th
0th
1st
ON
OFF
5th
6th
7th
3rd
12th
13th
14th
8th
CF1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CF2
CF3
CF4
ON
OFF
FW
ON
OFF
ON
•For multi-step speed binary operation, you can set the wait time until which the terminal input is
determined in multi-step speed/position determination time C169. This prevents the transition status
before the input determination from being applied.
•If no input is made after the time set in C169, the data is determined.
(Note that the longer the determination time, the slower the input response.)
15
Without determination time (C169)
With determination time (C169)
13
11
9
Frequency reference
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4
4-17
1
Determination
time (C169)
5
4
4-2 Function Mode
„Bit Operation
•By allocating 32 to 38 (SF1 to SF7) to any of multi-function inputs selection 1 to 8 (C001 to C008),
you can select from multi-step speeds 0 to 7.
•For SF1 to SF7 frequency settings, set multi-step speeds 1 to 7 (A021 to A027).
Multi-step speeds
SF7
SF6
SF5
SF4
SF3
SF2
SF1
0th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1st
×
×
×
×
×
×
ON
2nd
×
×
×
×
×
ON
OFF
3rd
×
×
×
×
ON
OFF
OFF
SF2
4th
×
×
×
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
SF3
5th
×
×
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SF4
6th
×
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
7th
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
5th
3rd
6th
2nd
1st
7th
1st
SF1
4
SF5
SF6
SF7
Functions
• When several terminals are simultaneously turned on, priority
is given to the terminal with the smallest number.
The x mark in the above table indicates that speed is selected
regardless of ON/OFF status.
Frequency from the
Digital Operator or
the external analog
input terminal
0th
SF8
FW
Jogging Operation Function
•The motor rotates while this function is turned on.
Parameter No.
Function name
A038
Jogging frequency
A039
Jogging stop selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99
6.00
Hz
00: Free-run stop/Disabled in operation
01: Deceleration stop/Disabled in operation
02: DC injection braking stop/Disabled in
operation*
03: Free-run stop/Enabled in operation
04: Deceleration stop/Enabled in operation
05: DC injection braking stop/Enabled in
operation*
00
⎯
* When jogging stop selection A039 is set to "02" or "05", the DC injection braking settings are required. (Refer to
page 4-24.)
•Allocate 06 (JG) to the desired multi-function input.
„Jogging Frequency
JG
FW
RV
Output frequency
A038
•Setting a high jogging frequency causes the Inverter to easily trip. Adjust the set value of jogging
frequency A038 to prevent the Inverter from tripping.
4-18
4-2 Function Mode
„Jogging Stop Selection
Note: To perform the jogging operation, turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal.
(Do the same if the RUN command source is set to the Digital Operator.)
(Example 1)
(Example 2)
JG
JG
FW
4
FW
Output
frequency
Deceleration
Normal
operation
Output
frequency
Jogging operation
Free running
Functions
Accelerates according to the b088 setting
With jogging stop selection A039 set to "00", "01", or
"02", jogging does not function if the FW signal is turned
on first.
With A039 set to "03", "04", or "05", jogging functions even
if the FW signal is turned on first. However, if the JG signal
is turned off before the FW signal, the motor coasts to a free
running stop.
Torque Boost
• Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the primary resistance of the motor, or by wiring to
suppress torque reduction at a low speed range.
•To select the automatic torque boost for A041/A241, set motor capacity selection H003/H203 and
motor pole number selection H004/H204 according to your motor.
Parameter No.
Function name
A041
Torque boost selection
A241
*2nd torque boost selection
A042
Manual torque boost voltage
A242
*2nd manual torque boost
voltage
A342
*3rd manual torque boost voltage
A043
Manual torque boost frequency
A243
*2nd manual torque boost
frequency
A343
*3rd manual torque boost
frequency
H003
Motor capacity selection
H203
*2nd motor capacity selection
H004
Motor pole number selection
H204
*2nd motor pole number
selection
4-19
Data
Default setting
Unit
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
00
⎯
0.0 to 20.0
(Ratio to the value of AVR voltage
selection A082)
1.0
%
0.0 to 50.0
(Ratio to base frequency)
5.0
%
0.20 to 160.0
(Ratio to base frequency)
Factory
default
kW
4
Pole
2/4/6/8/10
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
A046
Automatic torque boost
voltage compensation gain
A246
2nd automatic torque boost
voltage compensation gain
A047
Automatic torque boost
slip compensation gain
A247
2nd automatic torque boost
slip compensation gain
Default setting
Unit
0. to 255.
100.
%
0. to 255.
100.
%
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
4
„Manual Torque Boost
Output
voltage (%)
100
A042/A242/A342
A043/A243/A343
Base frequency
(100%)
Output frequency
•If you raise the set value of the manual torque boost, be careful about motor overexcitation.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
•In manual torque boost frequency A043/A243/A343, set a ratio based on the base frequency as
100%.
4-20
Functions
•Outputs the voltage set in A042/A242/A342 or A043/A243/A343.
•In A042/A242/A342, set a ratio based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection as 100%.
4-2 Function Mode
„Automatic Torque Boost
•If the automatic torque boost is selected in the torque boost selection (A041/A241: 01), it operates
to adjust the output frequency and voltage automatically, depending on the load level.
(In actual control, the automatic torque boost is used along with the manual torque boost.)
•To select the automatic torque boost, set motor capacity selection H003/H203 and motor pole
number selection H004/H204 correctly according to your motor.
•To avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration, set the AVR selection to "Always ON"
(A081: 00).
•If the automatic torque boost cannot provide the desired characteristics, adjust each item, as
shown in the following table.
Phenomenon
Functions
4
Insufficient torque at low
speed
(Motor does not run at low
speed.)
Adjusting method
Adjustment item
Gradually increase the voltage setting of the manual torque boost.
A042/A242
Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic
torque boost.
A047/A247
Gradually increase the voltage compensation gain of the automatic
torque boost.
A046/A246
Reduce the set value of the carrier frequency.
b083
Rotation speed lowers
when load is applied.
Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic
torque boost.
A047/A247
Rotation speed increases
when load is applied.
Gradually reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque
boost.
A047/A247
Gradually reduce the voltage compensation gain of the automatic
torque boost.
A046/A246
Gradually reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque
boost.
A047/A247
Gradually reduce the voltage setting of the manual torque boost.
A042/A242
Overcurrent trip occurs
when load is applied.
Control Method (V/f Characteristics)
You can set V/f characteristics (output voltage/output frequency).
Parameter No.
Function name
A044
V/f characteristics
selection
A244
*2nd V/f characteristics
selection
A344
*3rd V/f characteristics
selection
Related functions
Data
Default setting
Unit
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque
characteristics (Special VP)
02: Free V/f characteristics
(Only A044/A244 can be set.)
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV)
(Only A044/A244 can be set.*1)
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector control
(Only A044/A244 can be set.*2)
05: Sensor vector control (V2)
(Only A044 can be set.)
00
⎯
A046, A246, A047, A247, A082, H003, H203, H004, H204
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
*1. Refer to "Sensorless Vector Control" (page 4-113).
*2. Refer to "0-Hz Sensorless Vector Control" (page 4-114).
4-21
4-2 Function Mode
„Constant Torque Characteristics (VC)
Output voltage is proportional to output frequency.
While proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency, the output voltage is constant from base to
maximum frequencies.
Output voltage
(100%)
Output
frequency (Hz)
0
Base frequency
Max. frequency
4
„Special Reduced Torque Characteristics (Special VP)
Output
voltage
(100%)
VP(f 1.7)
VC
Output
frequency (Hz)
0
10% of base
frequency
a
b
Base
frequency
Max.
frequency
c
Period a: Provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 Hz to 10% of the base
frequency.
(Example) If the base frequency is 60 Hz, the Inverter provides constant torque
characteristics within a range from 0 to 6 Hz.
Period b: Provides reduced torque characteristics within a range from 10% to 100% of the base
frequency.
The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1.7th power of the frequency.
Period c: Provides constant voltage characteristics within a range from the base frequency to the
maximum frequency.
„Free V/f Setting
•You can set desired V/f characteristics by setting 7 points of voltage and frequency. (b100 to b113)
•The free V/f frequencies should always be 1 ≤ 2 ≤ 3 ≤ 4 ≤ 5 ≤ 6 ≤ 7.
All the default settings are 0 Hz. You must set Free V/f setting 7 first. (Operation is disabled by
factory default.)
4-22
Functions
Suitable for a fan or pump that requires torque in a low speed range. These have VC characteristics
only for low deceleration in reduced torque characteristics.
4-2 Function Mode
•If the free V/f setting is enabled, the functions of torque boost A041/A241, base frequency A003/
A203/A303, and maximum frequency A004/A204/A304 are disabled. (Free V/f frequency 7 is
regarded as the maximum frequency.)
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Description
b100
Free V/f frequency 1
0. to Free V/f frequency 2
b102
Free V/f frequency 2
0. to Free V/f frequency 3
b104
Free V/f frequency 3
0. to Free V/f frequency 4
b106
Free V/f frequency 4
0. to Free V/f frequency 5
b108
Free V/f frequency 5
0. to Free V/f frequency 6
b110
Free V/f frequency 6
0. to Free V/f frequency 7
b112
Free V/f frequency 7
0. to 400.
b101
Free V/f voltage 1
b103
Free V/f voltage 2
b105
Free V/f voltage 3
b107
Free V/f voltage 4
b109
Free V/f voltage 5
b111
Free V/f voltage 6
b113
Free V/f voltage 7
Set frequencies for
each break point.
Default setting
Unit
0
Hz
Set output voltages
0.0
for each break point. *
0.0 to 800.0
Related functions
V
A044, A244, A344
(Example)
Output voltage (V)
V7
V6
V5
V4
V1
V2, V3
Output frequency (Hz)
0
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
* Even if free V/f voltages 1 to 7 are set to 800 V, the Inverter cannot output voltage higher than
the input voltage or the value of the motor voltage selection.
Use thorough caution to verify that the output characteristic setting is proper. An improper setting
causes overcurrent during acceleration or deceleration, or vibration of the motor and/or machine.
Output
voltage (V)
V7
Select the voltage or motor
voltage available for output.
V6
0
4-23
f6
f7
Output frequency (Hz)
4-2 Function Mode
Output Voltage Gain
•Changes the Inverter output voltage, based on the voltage selected in AVR voltage selection A082
as 100%.
•You can avoid motor hunting by reducing the output voltage gain.
Parameter No.
A045
Function name
Data
Output voltage gain
20. to 100.
Related functions
Default setting
Unit
100.
%
A082
AVR voltage
selection
(A082)
4
A045
Functions
Max. frequency
(A004/A204/A304)
Base frequency
(A003/A203/A303)
DC Injection Braking
•DC injection braking is applied to the motor depending on the motor load.
•Two methods are available for DC injection braking: One is the external method via the multifunction input terminal; the other is the internal method performed automatically to start/stop the
motor.
Even if DC injection braking is used, however, the motor may not stop depending on the moment
of inertia of the motor load.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
A051
DC injection braking
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Frequency control [A052 set value]
00
⎯
A052
DC injection braking
frequency
0.0 to 400
0.5
Hz
A053
DC injection braking
delay time
0.0 to 5.0
0.0
s
0. to 100. (0.4 to 55 kW)
50.
A054
DC injection braking power
0. to 80. (75 to 132 kW)
40.
0.0 to 60.0
0.5
s
⎯
%
A055
DC injection braking time
A056
DC injection braking
method selection
00: Edge operation
01: Level operation
01
Startup DC injection
braking power
0. to 100. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.
A057
0. to 80. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
0.0 to 60.0
0.0
A058
Startup DC injection
braking time
%
s
4-24
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
A059
DC injection braking
carrier frequency
Data
Default setting
0.5 to 15.0 (0.4 to 55 kW)
5.0
0.5 to 10.0 (75 to 132 kW)
3.0
Unit
Hz
Related functions
C001 to C008
„DC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency
You can set a DC injection braking carrier frequency in A059. Note that setting a 5 kHz or higher
frequency automatically reduces the braking power. Refer to the following figure (DC injection
braking power limit).
4
Functions
10
9
8
7
6
Max.
braking power 5
4
3
2
1
100
90
80
70
Max.
braking power 60
50
(%)
40
30
20
10
(75)
(46)
(34)
(22)
(10)
(40)
(20)
(10)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DC injection braking carrier frequency (kHz)
3 5 7 9 11 13 15
DC injection braking carrier frequency
DC Injection Braking Power Limit (55 kW max.)
(60)
DC Injection Braking Power Limit (75 to 132 kW)
„External DC Injection Braking
•Allocate 07 (DB) to any of multi-function inputs C001 to C008.
•DC injection braking can be applied by turning on/off the DB terminal, regardless of DC injection
braking selection A051.
•Set a braking power level in DC injection braking power A054.
•If DC injection braking delay time A053 is set, the Inverter output is shut off during the set time
period and the motor goes into free-run status. After the set time elapses, DC injection braking
starts.
•Set DC injection braking time A055 via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into
account motor heat generation.
•Perform each setting according to your system after setting DC injection braking method selection
A056.
(a) Edge operation (A056: 00)
(Example 1-a)
(Example 1-b)
FW
FW
DB
DB
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
A055
4-25
(b) Level operation (A056: 01)
4-2 Function Mode
(a) Edge operation (A056: 00)
(Example 2-a)
(b) Level operation (A056: 01)
(Example 2-b)
FW
FW
DB
DB
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
A055
(Example 3-a)
4
(Example 3-b)
FW
DB
DB
Output
frequency
Free running
A053
A055
Output
frequency
Functions
FW
Free running
A053
„Internal DC Injection Braking (A051: 01)
•DC injection braking is applied without terminal operation at start/stop of the Inverter.
To use internal DC injection braking, set DC injection braking selection A051 to 01.
•Set the startup DC injection braking power in A057. In A058, set the startup DC injection braking
time, regardless of the edge or level operation. (Example 4-a), (Example 4-b)
•Set DC injection braking power A054 to define the braking power other than at startup.
•Set the DC injection braking starting frequency in DC injection braking frequency A052.
•Once DC injection braking delay time A053 is set, the Inverter stops output when the frequency
reaches the A052 value after the RUN command (FW) has been turned off. During the set time in
A053, the motor remains in free-run status. After the set time in A053, DC injection braking starts.
•Edge and Level operations for internal DC injection braking work differently when the RUN
command switches from STOP to RUN.
Edge operation: Giving priority to DC injection braking time A055, performs DC injection braking for
the set time in A055. DC injection braking operates for the set time in A055 when
the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command (FW)
is turned off. Even if the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking,
the latter is effective during the set time in A055. (Example 5-a), (Example 6-a)
Level operation: Giving priority to the RUN command, shifts to normal operation, ignoring DC injection braking time A055. When the RUN command is turned on during DC injection
braking, returns to normal operation, ignoring the set time in A055. (Example 5-b),
(Example 6-b)
4-26
4-2 Function Mode
(a) Edge operation
(b) Level operation
(i) During startup (example 4-a)
(ii) During startup (example 4-b)
FW
FW
Output frequency
Output frequency
A057
A057
A058
A058
4
(ii) During stop (example 5-b)
FW
FW
Functions
(ii) During stop (example 5-a)
Free running
Output frequency
A052
A053
A055
(iii) During stop (example 6-a)
Free running
Output frequency
A052
A055
(iii) During stop (example 6-b)
FW
FW
Output frequency
Output frequency
A052
A053
A055
A052
A055
„Internal DC Injection Braking (Operates Only at the Set Frequency) (A051: 02)
•DC injection braking can be applied when the output frequency becomes lower than the DC
injection braking frequency (A052).
•Neither (2) external nor (3) internal DC injection braking is available while this function is selected.
•Operates only when the RUN command is turned on.
•DC injection braking starts when both the reference and current frequencies become lower than
A052. (Example 7-a)
•When the reference frequency exceeds the A052 set value by 2 Hz or more, DC injection braking
is released and the output returns to normal. (Example 7-a)
•If the reference frequency is "0" when the operation starts with analog input, the initial operation is
DC injection braking because both the reference and current frequencies are "0". (Example 7-b)
4-27
4-2 Function Mode
•If the RUN command is turned on with the frequency reference established (or a value larger than
the A052 setting is input), the initial operation is set to normal output.
(Example 7-a)
(Example 7-b)
ON
ON
RUN
command
RUN
command
A052
Frequency
reference
A052
Frequency
reference
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
4
(a) Edge operation
(b) Level operation
ON
ON
RUN
command
RUN
command
A052
Frequency
reference
A052
Frequency
reference
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
A053
Frequency Limit
•You can set both the upper/lower limits to the output frequency.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
A061
Frequency upper limit
0.0/Frequency lower limit [A062] to
Max. frequency [A004]
0.0
A261
*2nd frequency upper limit
0.0/2nd frequency lower limit [A262]
to 2nd max. frequency [A204]
0.0
A062
Frequency lower limit
0.0/Starting frequency to Frequency
upper limit [A061]
0.0
A262
*2nd frequency lower limit
0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd
frequency upper limit [A261]
0.0
Unit
Hz
Related functions
C001 to C008
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
•Does not accept any frequency reference beyond the upper/lower limits.
•Set the upper limit first. Make sure that the upper limit (A061/A261) is larger than the lower limit
(A062/A262).
4-28
Functions
•The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of DC injection braking power
A054.
4-2 Function Mode
•Make sure that the upper and lower limiter settings do not exceed the maximum frequency (A004/
A204/A304).
•Make sure that the output frequency (F001) and multi-step speeds 1 to 15 (A021 to A035) are not
lower than the lower limit setting and not higher than the upper limit setting.
•Neither limit works if set to 0 Hz.
•Disabled when the 3rd control is selected.
„When Using FV-FC and FI-FC
• Once the lower limit is set, the Inverter outputs the
frequency (A062) set for the lower limit, if 0 V (4 mA)
is input to the frequency reference.
Output frequency (Hz)
Max. frequency
A004/A204
4
A061
Functions
A062
10 V
20 mA
0V
4 mA
Frequency
reference
„When Using FE-FC
• When the lower limit is used for the FE input, the
rotation at 0 V is fixed to A062 for either forward or
reverse rotation, as described below.
Max. frequency
A004/A204
A061
Reverse -10 V
A062
Forward
A062
10 V
A061
Max. frequency
A004/A204
(a) When the RUN command is set to the terminal (A002: 01)
Terminal
Rotation when FE = 0 V
FW (ON)
A062 for forward rotation
RV (ON)
A062 for reverse rotation
(a) When the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator (A002: 02)
4-29
F004
Rotation when FE = 0 V
00
A062 for forward rotation
01
A062 for reverse rotation
4-2 Function Mode
Frequency Jump Function
•The frequency jump function helps avoid resonant points of loaded machines.
Parameter No.
Function name
A063
A065
A067
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
A064
A066
A068
Jump frequency width 1
Jump frequency width 2
Jump frequency width 3
Data
Default setting
0.0 to 400.0
Unit
0.0
Hz
0.0 to 10.0
0.5
Related functions
C001 to C008
4
Output frequency
A068
A068
A067
A066
A065
A063
A066
A064
A064
Frequency reference
Acceleration Stop Function
•When the moment of inertia of a machine load is large, this function delays acceleration until the
motor starting slip is reduced.
Use this function, if an overcurrent trip occurs during startup.
•Does not depend on acceleration pattern selection A097, and works with all acceleration patterns.
Parameter No.
Function name
A069
Acceleration stop frequency
A070
Acceleration stop time
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.0 to 400.0
0.00
Hz
0.0 to 60.0
0.0
s
Output frequency
A069
A070
Frequency reference
4-30
Functions
•You cannot set output frequencies within a jump frequency setting range, where the frequency
jump function avoids steady operation.
•The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the acceleration/deceleration time
during both actions.
You can set up to three points for the jump frequency.
4-2 Function Mode
PID Function
•This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate, air volume, and pressure.
4
Parameter No.
Function name
A071
PID selection
A072
Default setting
Unit
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
00
⎯
PID P gain
0.2 to 5.0
1.0
⎯
A073
PID I gain
0.0 to 3600.0
1.0
s
A074
PID D gain
0.00 to 100.0
0.0
s
A075
PID scale
0.01 to 99.99
1.00
Time
PID feedback selection
00: FI-FC (4 to 20 mA)
01: FV-FC (0 to 10 V)
02: RS485 communication
03: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
00
⎯
A077
Reverse PID function
00: Deviation = Target value Feedback value
01: Deviation = Feedback value Target value
00
⎯
A078
PID output limit function
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
%
PID feedforward selection
00: Disabled
01: FV-FC (0 to 10 V)
02: FI-FC (4 to 20 mA)
03: FE-FC (-10 to 10 V)
00
⎯
3.0
%
100
%
0.0
%
Functions
A076
A079
C044
Data
PID deviation excessive level 0. to 100.
C052
PID FB upper limit
C053
PID FB lower limit
0.0 to 100.0
Related functions
d004, A001, A005, A006, C001 to C008, C021 to C025
•To use this function, set A071 to "01" or "02".
•You can disable the PID operation in progress using an external signal.
To use this function, allocate "23" (PID: PID disabled) to any of the multi-function inputs. While the
PID terminal is turned on, the Inverter disables the PID function and outputs normally.
•You can limit the PID output under various conditions.
„Basic Structure of PID Control (Example)
Feedforward
Target
value
+
0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA
Deviation ε
Feedback
Kp 1 +
1
Ti s
+ Td s
+
-
Disabled
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
-10 to 10 V
Control volume Normal control
of the Inverter
fs
Transducer
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
Kp: Proportional gain
4-31
Sensor
M
Ti: Integral time
Td: Derivative time
s: Operator
ε: Deviation
4-2 Function Mode
„PID Operation
P Operation
•Operation where the control volume is proportional to the target value
Step transition
Ramp transition
Target value
Large
Large
Control volume
A072
A072
Small
Small
I Operation
4
•Operation where the control volume increases linearly according to time
Target value
Small
A073
Large
Large
Functions
Control volume
Small
A073
D Operation
•Operation where the control volume is proportional to the variation ratio of the target value
Target value
Large
Large
A074
A074
Control volume
Small
Small
•PI operation is the combination of the above P and I operations; PD is P and D operations; PID is
P, I and D operations.
„Feedback Selection
•Select a terminal used for feedback signals in PID feedback selection A076.
•The target value depends on the terminal selected in frequency reference selection A001 other
than that in A076.
When A001 is set to "01" (terminal), the setting of FV/FI selection A005 is disabled.
•When analog input is selected for PID feedback and A001 is set to "01" (terminal), the PID target
value is selected depending on the A006 set value, as shown in the following table.
PID target value
PID feedback selection (A076)
A006 = 00
A006 = 01
A006 = 02
A006 = 03
00 (FI-FC)
FV + FE (Not reversible)
FV + FE (Reversible)
FV
01 (FV-FC)
FI + FE (Not reversible)
FI + FE (Reversible)
FI
FV + FE (Not reversible)
FV + FE (Reversible)
FV
FI + FE (Not reversible)
FI + FE (Reversible)
FI
FI included in operands
FV included in
10
operands
(operation result)
FI and FV are the
operands
FE (Reversible)
•To select RS485 for PID feedback, transfer data as described below.
4-32
4-2 Function Mode
<ASCII (C078 = 00)>
Transfer data using "command 01". To transfer feedback data, set the most significant byte of
frequency data to "1".
(Example) To send 5 Hz:
Transmission data is "set value × 100" and expressed in 6 bytes → "000500"
→ "100500"
Set the most significant byte to "1".
→ "31 30 30 35 30 30"
ASCII conversion
Note: With ASCII data, the set value is frequency (Hz).
<ModBus-RTU (C078 = 01)>
Write data in holding register address 0006h. (100% = 10000)
Functions
4
Register No.
Function name
Function code
R/W
Monitor data and setting
parameters
Data resolution
0006h
PID feedback
⎯
R/W
0 to 10000
0.01 [%]
Note: You can read and write data. However, you can read data only when ModBus-RTU is selected for the PID
feedback. Data cannot be read under other settings.
•If "03" (pulse train input) is set for PID feedback A076, the Inverter obtains a percent conversion
result (100% at max. frequency) as a feedback value, relative to the input pulse train frequency
value (Hz).
„Feedforward Selection
•Select a terminal used for feedforward signals in PID feedforward selection A079.
•The A079 setting is enabled even if the terminal selected in A079 is duplicated with the terminal
selected for target value or feedback value input.
•If A079 is set to "disabled", feedforward control is disabled.
„Reverse PID Function
Depending on the sensor characteristics, the polarity of deviation between the target and feedback
values may not match the Inverter's command. In this case, you can invert the deviation polarity by
setting A077 to "01".
(Example) To control a refrigerator compressor:
If the specified temperature range of a temperature sensor is -20°C to 100°C at 0 to
10 (V), the target value is 0°C, and the current temperature is 10°C, the Inverter
reduces the frequency under normal PID control since the feedback value is higher
than the target value.
→ Set A077 to "01" so that the Inverter increases the frequency.
A077
PID target value
PID operation
-1
PID feedback value
4-33
4-2 Function Mode
„PID Output Limit Function
•This function limits PID output within a variable range relative to the target value.
•To use this function, set PID output limit function A078. The output frequency will be limited within
a range of "target value ± (A078)", with the maximum frequency defined as 100%.
•With A078 set to 0.0, this function is disabled.
PID output (%)
PID output range
PID target
value
PID variable range (A078)
PID variable range (A078)
4
Time (s)
•When a PID operation result is a negative value under normal PID control, the frequency reference
to the Inverter is limited at 0 Hz. However, if PID selection A071 is set to "02" (reverse output
enabled), reverse output can be provided for the Inverter when the PID operation result is a negative
value.
•When A071 = 02, the above-mentioned PID variable range limit function and the PID output stop
function are disabled.
„PID Gain Adjustment
•If a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation, adjust each gain as follows
according to the situation.
•Feedback value variation is slow when the target value is changed.
•The feedback value changes fast but isn't stable.
•The target and feedback values wouldn't match smoothly.
•The feedback value fluctuates unstably.
•Response is slow even with P gain raised.
•With P gain raised, the feedback value vibrates and isn't stable.
→ Raise P gain A072.
→ Lower P gain A072.
→ Lower I gain A073.
→ Raise I gain A073.
→ Raise D gain A074.
→ Lower D gain A074.
„Excessive Deviation/Output
•You can set PID deviation excessive level C044 during PID control. With this function allocated,
the multi-function output terminal is turned on when the PID deviation ε reaches the set level in
C044.
•C044 can be set from 0 to 100. The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target
value.
•Allocate 04 (OD) to any of multi-function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal
C026.
„Feedback Comparison Signal
•If a PID feedback value is out of the specified range, it can be output to a multi-function output
terminal.
•Allocate 31 (FBV) to any of multi-function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal
C026.
4-34
Functions
„PID Reverse Output
4-2 Function Mode
C052 (OFF level)
PID feedback
C053 (ON level)
Time
Functions
4
FW
ON
OFF
FBV
ON
OFF
„PID Feedback Value Monitor
•You can monitor the PID feedback value.
•The monitor value is displayed as the product of the feedback value and PID scale A075.
"Monitor display" = "Feedback value (%)" × "A075 setting"
„PID Integral Reset
•Clears the integral value of PID operation.
•Allocate 24 (PIDC) to any of multi-function inputs C001 to C008.
•Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on.
Do not turn on the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid a possible overcurrent trip.
Turn on the PIDC terminal after turning off PID operation.
AVR Function
•This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter
fluctuates. With this function, output voltage to the motor is based on the voltage set in the motor
voltage selection.
Parameter No.
Function name
A081
AVR selection
A082
AVR voltage selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
02
⎯
200/400
⎯
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
02: OFF during deceleration
200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
Related functions
d004, A001, A005
•With A081 (AVR selection), set whether to enable or disable this function.
•Note that the Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage.
•To avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration, set the AVR selection to "Always ON"
(A081: 00).
Parameter No.
Data
Description
Note
00
Always ON
Enabled during acceleration, constant speed , and deceleration.
01
Always OFF
Disabled during acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration.
02
OFF during
deceleration
Disabled only during deceleration in order to reduce the energy
regenerated to the Inverter by increasing the motor loss. This will
avoid a possible trip due to regeneration during deceleration.
A081
4-35
4-2 Function Mode
Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function
•This function automatically minimizes the Inverter output power during constant speed operation,
and is suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics (e.g. fan, pump).
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
A085
RUN mode selection
A086
Energy-saving response/
accuracy adjustment
Default setting
Unit
00: Normal operation
01: Energy-saving operation
02: Automatic operation
00
⎯
0% to 100%
50
%
Parameter No.
Function name
A086
Energy-saving response/
accuracy adjustment
Data
Response
Accuracy
0
Slow
High
100
Fast
Low
Automatic Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration
•The automatic acceleration/deceleration function eliminates the need for acceleration/deceleration
settings during Inverter operation.
Parameter No.
Function name
A085
RUN mode selection
Related functions
Data
00: Normal operation
01: Energy-saving operation
02: Automatic operation
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
A044, A244, A344, b021, b024, b022, b025
•Conventionally, the user had to set an Inverter acceleration/deceleration time depending on the
actual load conditions. However, this function can automatically set an acceleration/deceleration
time, making full use of the Inverter's capacity.
The acceleration time is a time during which acceleration is performed within a current value set in
the overload limit parameter (when the overload limit function is enabled), or within approx. 150%
of the rated current (when the overload limit function is disabled). The deceleration time is a time
during which deceleration is performed within approx. 150% of the rated current value, or within a
DC voltage in the Inverter circuit of approx. 370 V (200V-class) or approx. 740 V (400 V-class).
Thus, the Inverter enables real-time response to a change in applied load and inertia, and sets
acceleration/deceleration time automatically.
• Note the following before use:
Note 1: This function is not suitable for a machine that needs a fixed acceleration/deceleration time.
Acceleration/deceleration time varies depending on applied load and inertia.
Note 2: If the machine inertia exceeds approx. 20 times that of the motor shaft, the Inverter may trip.
In this case, reduce the carrier frequency.
4-36
4
Functions
•To operate with this function, set RUN mode selection A085 to "01".
You can adjust the response and accuracy with energy-saving response/accuracy adjustment
A086.
•Controls the output power at a comparatively slow rate. Should rapid load fluctuation like impact
load occur, the motor may stall, resulting in an overcurrent trip.
4-2 Function Mode
Note 3: Acceleration/deceleration time varies depending on fluctuations in current value, even with
the same motor.
Note 4: The automatic optimum acceleration/deceleration setting is enabled only during V/f control.
When sensorless vector control is selected, the Inverter performs normal operation.
Note 5: If the jogging operation is performed when the automatic operation is selected, the Inverter
performs automatic acceleration, which is different from normal jogging operation.
Note 6: When the applied load is larger than the rating, deceleration time may be prolonged.
Note 7: If acceleration and deceleration are frequently repeated, the Inverter may trip.
Note 8: When the internal braking circuit is used, or when the regenerative braking unit is externally
installed, the motor cannot stop within the specified deceleration time because of braking
resistance. In this case, do not use the automatic optimum acceleration/deceleration
function.
Note 9: When using a lower rank motor size than specified for the Inverter, enable the overload limit
function (b021), and set the overload limit level (b022) to 1.5 times the rated current of the
motor.
Functions
4
2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function
•By setting this function, you can change the acceleration/deceleration time during acceleration/
deceleration.
Parameter No.
Function name
A092
Acceleration time 2
A292
*2nd acceleration time 2
A392
*3rd acceleration time 2
A093
Deceleration time 2
A293
*2nd deceleration time 2
A393
*3rd deceleration time 2
A094
2-step acceleration/
deceleration selection
A294
A095
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
Default setting
Unit
s
15.0
s
s
s
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
15.0
00: Switched via multi-function input 09
(2CH) (example 1)
01: Switched by setting (example 2)
*2nd 2-step acceleration/ 02: Enabled only when switching forward/
deceleration selection
reverse (example 3)
00
⎯
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.0
Hz
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
00
Hz
2-step acceleration
frequency
A295
*2nd 2-step acceleration
frequency
A096
2-step deceleration
frequency
A296
Data
*2nd 2-step deceleration
frequency
Related functions
s
s
F002, F202, F302, F003, F203, F303, C001 to C008
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it
on.
4-37
4-2 Function Mode
•Select an acceleration/deceleration time switching method from the following three:
Switching via a multi-function input
Automatic switching at a specified frequency
Automatic switching only when switching between forward/reverse
If the 3rd control function is selected, however, switching by the 2-step acceleration/deceleration
frequency is disabled.
•To switch via a multi-function input, allocate 09 (2CH) to any of C001 to C008.
(Example 1) When A094/A294 is set to 00
(Example 2) When A094/A294 is set to 01
FW
FW
4
2CH
Acceleration 2
Functions
A095/A295
Deceleration 2
A096/A296
Acceleration 1
Deceleration 1
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
Acceleration
time 1
Acceleration
time 2
F002/F202/ A092/
A292/
F302
A392
Deceleration Deceleration
time 2
time 1
Acceleration
time 1
A093/A293/ F003/F203/
A393
F303
Acceleration
time 2
F002/F202 A092/
A292
Deceleration Deceleration
time 2
time 1
A093/ F003/F203
A293
(Example 3) When A094/A294 is set to 02
FW
2CH
Output
frequency
Acceleration
time 2
Deceleration
time 1
A092/A292/
A392
F003/F203/
F303
Acceleration
time 1
Deceleration
time 2
F002/F202/
F302
A093/A293/
A393
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern
•Acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set for each system.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
A097
Acceleration pattern selection
00
⎯
A098
Deceleration pattern selection
00: Line
01: S-shape curve
02: U-shape curve
03: Inverted U-shape curve
04: EL-S-shape curve
4-38
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
A131
Acceleration curve parameter
A132
Deceleration curve parameter
A150
EL-S-curve ratio 1 during
acceleration
A151
EL-S-curve ratio 2 during
acceleration
A152
EL-S-curve ratio 1 during
deceleration
A153
EL-S-curve ratio 2 during
deceleration
Default setting
Unit
01 (small curve) to
10 (large curve)
02
⎯
0 to 50
25
%
0 to 50
25
%
•To select an acceleration or deceleration pattern, use A097 or A098, respectively.
•You can set acceleration and deceleration patterns individually.
•If any item other than "Line" (A097/A098 = 00) is selected for the acceleration/deceleration pattern,
the acceleration/deceleration time is prolonged when this function is used with analog input (A001 =
01).
„Pattern Selection
Select an acceleration/deceleration pattern with reference to the following table.
Set values
02
03
04
Line
S shape
U shape
Inverted U shape
EL-S shape
Time
Accelerates/
Decelerates
linearly before
Description
reaching the set
output frequency
value.
4-39
Output frequency
Output frequency
Time
Helps prevent the
collapse of cargo
on the elevating
machine or
conveyor.
Time
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency
Output frequency
A098
(Deceleration)
Time
Time
Time
Output frequency
Time
Output frequency
01
Output frequency
A097
(Acceleration)
00
Output frequency
Parameter
No.
Output frequency
Functions
4
Data
Time
Time
Helps with tension control and roll break Provides shockless
prevention (for a winding machine, etc.). start/stop as with
the S pattern, but
the intermediate
section is linear.
4-2 Function Mode
„Pattern Curve Parameter (Curve Factor)
•Determine a curve factor with reference to the figures below.
Output frequency (Hz)
Target
frequency
(100%)
96.9
82.4
Output frequency (Hz)
10 02
Target
frequency
(100%)
99.6
93.8
87.5
68.4
64.6
Output frequency (Hz)
Target
frequency
(100%)
10
65
02
35
17.6
10
10
25
50
75
Time
Acceleration time before reaching the
output frequency set value (100%)
25
50
10
12.5
6.25
0.39
02
3.1
02
35.4
31.6
75
4
25
Time
50
75
Time
Acceleration time before reaching the
output frequency set value (100%)
Acceleration time before reaching the
output frequency set value (100%)
„EL-S Curve Ratio
If the EL-S pattern is used, you can set a curve ratio (A151 to A153) individually for acceleration and
deceleration.
If all settings are "50 (%)", the Inverter operates in the same manner as with the S curve.
Output frequency ratio (%)
100
Curve ratio 2 during
acceleration (A151)
Curve ratio 1 during
deceleration (A152)
50
Curve ratio 2 during
deceleration (A153)
Curve ratio 1 during
acceleration (A150)
Time(s)
4-40
Functions
•The S pattern has an intermediate section where acceleration/deceleration time is shortened.
•If LAD cancel (LAC) is selected for a multi-function input and that input is turned on, the
acceleration/deceleration pattern is ignored, and the output frequency instantaneously follows the
reference frequency.
4-2 Function Mode
Operation Frequency Function
•Two systems of frequency reference operation results are available for the frequency reference
and PID feedback value.
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
A141
Operation frequency
input A setting
A142
Operation frequency
input B setting
A143
Operator selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
02
⎯
03
⎯
00
⎯
00: Digital Operator (F001)
(A020/A220/A320)
01: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
(Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used.)
02: Input FV
03: Input FI
04: RS485 communication
05: Option 1
06: Option 2
07: Pulse train frequency
00: Addition (A + B)
01: Subtraction (A - B)
02: Multiplication (A × B)
Related functions
A001 = 10, A076 = 10
Note 1: When this function is enabled, the Up/Down function cannot be used. In addition, frequency cannot be
changed through key operations from output frequency monitor d001, frequency conversion monitor
d007, or output frequency setting F001.
Note 2: The same setting is available in A141 and A142.
•To use this function as a frequency reference, set frequency reference selection A001 to "10".
•To use this function as a PID feedback, set PID feedback selection A076 to "10".
Frequency Addition Function
•The value set in frequency addition amount A145 can be added to or subtracted from the selected
frequency reference value.
•To use this function, allocate 50 (ADD) to any of the multi-function inputs.
The A145 value is added or subtracted with the ADD terminal turned on.
Parameter No.
Function name
A145
Frequency addition
amount
A146
Frequency addition
direction
Related functions
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.0 to 400.0
0.00
Hz
00: Add A145 value to output frequency
01: Subtract A145 value from output
frequency
00
⎯
C001 to C008, ADD input
Note 1: If the sign of the frequency reference is changed ((-) → (+), or (+) → (-)) as a result of operation, the
rotation direction will be inverted.
Note 2: When the PID function is used, the frequency addition function is enabled for a PID target value.
(Note that A145 is displayed in % (in increments of 0.01%).)
4-41
4-2 Function Mode
<Group B: Detailed Function Parameters>
Momentary Power Interruption/Trip Retry (Restart)
„Restart During Momentary Power Interruption
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b001
Retry selection*4 *6
00: Outputs an alarm after a trip
01: Restarts from 0 Hz at retry
02: Matches the frequency at retry and starts
(example 1) *3
03: Performs frequency pull-in start at retry and trips
after deceleration stop *1 *3
04: Performs frequency pull-in restart at retry
(example 1) *3
00
⎯
b002
Allowable
momentary power
interruption time
0.3 to 25.0:
If the momentary power interruption is within the set
time, the Inverter follows the setting in b001.
1.0
s
b003
Retry wait time
0.3 to 100.
Time before restart
1.0
s
b004
Momentary power
interruption/
undervoltage trip
during stop
selection *2 *4
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Disabled during stop, and during deceleration
stop when the RUN command is turned off
00
⎯
b005
Momentary power
interruption retry
time selection
00: Restarts 16 times during momentary power
interruption
01: Restarts limitlessly during momentary power
interruption
00
⎯
b007
Frequency
matching lower
limit frequency
setting
0.00 to 400.0
When the motor free-running frequency falls below
this lower limit frequency, the Inverter restarts at 0
Hz (examples 3 and 4)
0.00
Hz
00
⎯
00
⎯
b008
*7
00: Outputs an alarm after a trip
01: Restarts from 0 Hz at retry
02: Matches the frequency at retry and starts
03: Performs frequency pull-in start at retry and trips
after deceleration stop
04: Performs frequency pull-in restart at retry
b009
Undervoltage retry
time selection
00: Restarts 16 times in the event of undervoltage
01: Restarts limitlessly in the event of undervoltage
Trip retry selection
4-42
4
Functions
•You can set whether the Inverter trips or retries (restarts) when a momentary power interruption or
undervoltage occurs.
•If the retry function is selected in retry selection b001, the Inverter retries for the number of times
set in b005 (for momentary power interruption) or b009 (for undervoltage), and trips on the next
time.
(Under the limitless retry setting, the Inverter doesn't trip.)
•You can use b004 to select whether the Inverter trips or not when a momentary power interruption
or undervoltage occurs during stop.
•When selecting the retry function, set retry condition b008 according to your system.
•If undervoltage is retained for 40 seconds even during retry operation, it results in E09
(undervoltage trip).
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
b010
Overvoltage/
overcurrent retry
time
b011
Default setting
Unit
1 to 3
Select the number of retry times in the event of
overvoltage/overcurrent *5
3
Time
Trip retry wait time
0.3 to 100.
Time before restart
1.0
s
b028
Frequency pull-in
restart level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Current limit level at frequency pull-in restart
Rated current
A
b029
Frequency pull-in
restart parameter
0.10 to 30.00
Frequency reduction time at frequency pull-in
restart
0.50
s
b030
Starting frequency
at frequency pull-in
restart
00: Frequency at interruption
01: Max. frequency
02: Set frequency
00
⎯
Functions
4
Data
Related functions
C021 to C025, C026
*1. If an overvoltage/overcurrent trip occurs during deceleration, momentary power interruption error E16
appears, and the motor goes into free-run status. In this case, increase the deceleration time.
*2. When direct current (P-N) is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro-To, the Inverter may detect
undervoltage at power interruption and then trip. If there is any problem with your system, set "00" or "02".
*3. The Inverter may start at 0 Hz if:
The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1/2 of the base frequency
The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
*4. Even if retry selection b001 is set to "Retry" (01 to 03) and selection of momentary power interruption/
undervoltage trip during stop b004 is set to "Disabled" (00 or 02), the Inverter trips when the actual momentary
power interruption time exceeds the allowable momentary power interruption time. (Example 2)
*5. Even if the trip retry operation is selected, the Inverter trips if the cause of the trip is not remedied after the retry
wait time (b003) elapses. In this case, increase the retry wait time.
*6. Even if the retry operation is selected, the Inverter trips when undervoltage remains for 40 seconds or longer.
*7. If frequency matching start or frequency pull-in restart is selected for retry operation, the Inverter abruptly
restarts at power-on, by alarm reset or retry start.
•Below is the timing chart for frequency matching start (retry selection b001 = 02).
Note that the Inverter switches, regardless of settings, to the initial state when the power supply is turned on in
the case of a complete power discharge.
t0: Momentary power interruption time
t1: Allowable momentary power interruption time (b002)
t2: Retry wait time (b003)
(Example 1)
Duration of momentary power interruption
< Allowable duration of momentary power interruption (b002)
(Example 2)
Duration of momentary power interruption
> Allowable duration of momentary power interruption (b002)
Power supply
Power supply
Inverter
output
Inverter
output
Free running
Motor rpm
Motor rpm
t0
t2
t1
4-43
Free running
t0
t1
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 3) Motor frequency (rpm) > b007
(Example 4) Motor frequency (rpm) < b007
Power supply
Power supply
Inverter
output
Inverter
output
Free running
Free running
b007
b007
Motor frequency
(rpm)
Frequency
matching start
t0
Motor frequency
(rpm)
t0
t2
t2
0-Hz start
4
„Alarm Output for Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage During Stop
(Example 5) b004: 00
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Power supply
(Example 6) b004: 01
Power supply
Inverter is stopped
(Example 7) b004: 02
Power supply
Inverter is stopped
Inverter is running
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Inverter is running
Inverter is stopped
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Power supply
Power supply
Inverter is running
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Power supply
4-44
Functions
•Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm output in case of momentary power interruption or
undervoltage.
•An alarm output continues while Inverter control power supply remains.
Alarm output for momentary power interruption/undervoltage during stop
Standard (examples 5 to 7)
Operation where DC (P-N) is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro-To (examples 8 to10)
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 8) b004: 00
(Example 9) b004: 01
Power supply
Functions
4
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
(Example 10) b004: 02
Power supply
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Inverter is running
Inverter is stopped
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Power supply
Power supply
Inverter is running
Inverter is stopped
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Power supply
Undervoltage
Inverter is running
Inverter is stopped
ON
OFF
ON
RUN command
OFF
ON
Inverter output
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
Signal during momentary ON
OFF
power interruption (IP)
Power supply
Note 1: You can allocate the momentary power interruption signal (IP: 08) and the undervoltage signal (UV: 09)
to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 selection (C021 to C025) or the relay output terminal
(C026).
Note 2: If power interruption is retained for 1 second or longer, refer to the reset description ("Reset" (page 4-85)).
„Restarting Procedure
•Frequency matching restart
This method restarts the Inverter by detecting frequency and rotation direction based on the
motor's residual voltage.
•Frequency pull-in restart
The Inverter starts output at the frequency set in starting frequency selection b030, and searches
for a point where frequency and voltage are balanced to restart the Inverter, while holding current
at the frequency pull-in restart level (b028).
If the Inverter trips with this method, reduce the b028 set value.
4-45
4-2 Function Mode
•The Digital Operator displays okokoko until restart, after output is shut off.
FW
FRS
b028
Output current
Decelerates according to b029
Inverter
output frequency
Frequency selected in b030
Motor rotation
speed
4
b003
Functions
Input Power Supply Phase Loss Protection Function Selection
•This function outputs an alarm when the Inverter's input power supply has phase loss.
Parameter No.
Function name
b006
Input phase loss protection
selection
Data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
Phase loss may cause the Inverter to fail, as follows:
•The main capacitor ripple current increases, resulting in remarkable reduction in the capacitor's
service life.
•When load is applied, the Inverter's internal converter or thyristor may be damaged.
Electronic Thermal Function
•Causes a trip to protect the motor from overheating. Set this according to the motor rated current.
•Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics, taking into account the decline of the
motor cooling capability at a low speed.
•Outputs an alarm signal before an electronic thermal trip.
Parameter No.
Function name
b012
Electronic thermal level
b212
*2nd electronic thermal level
b312
*3rd electronic thermal level
b013
Electronic thermal
characteristics selection
b213
*2nd electronic thermal
characteristics selection
b313
*3rd electronic thermal
characteristics selection
Data
0.20 × Rated current to 1.00 ×
Rated current
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
Default setting
Unit
Rated current
A
00
⎯
4-46
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
b015
Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency 1
b017
Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency 2
b019
Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency 3
b016
Free setting, electronic thermal
current 1
b018
Free setting, electronic thermal
current 2
b020
Free setting, electronic thermal
current 3
C061
Thermal warning level
Functions
4
Data
Default setting
Unit
0. to 400.
0.
Hz
0.0 to Rated current
0.0
A
0. to 100. *1
80
%
Related functions
C021 to C025, C026
* To switch to the 2nd/3rd control, allocate 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn it on.
*1. Set a percentage relative to the electronic thermal multiplication value. When the value reaches 100%, an
overload trip (E05) occurs.
„Electronic Thermal Level (Motor Protection Level)
(Example) 3G3RX-A2150 (0.4 to 55 kW)
Rated current: 64 A
Setting range: 12.8 A (20%) to 64.0 A (100%)
• The graph on the right shows the time limit
characteristics with the electronic thermal level
(b012) set to 64 A.
Trip time (s)
60
3.0
0
(Example) 3G3RX-A4750 (75 to 132 kW)
Rated current: 149 A
Setting range: 29.8 A (20%) to 149 A (100%)
• The graph on the right shows the time limit
characteristics with the electronic thermal level
(b012) set to 149 A.
69.8 96
128
(109%) (150%) (200%)
Motor current (A)
(Ratio to the rated
current of the Inverter)
Trip time (s)
60
0.5
0
158 223.5 298
(106%) (150%) (200%)
Motor current (A)
(Ratio to the rated
current of the Inverter)
„Electronic Thermal Characteristics
•The frequency characteristics are integrated with the above b012/b212/b312 set values.
•A general-purpose motor requires reduced load (current) because the lower the output frequency
is, the lower the cooling capability of its self-cooling fan.
•The reduced torque characteristics are designed to fit the heat radiation of a general-purpose
motor.
4-47
4-2 Function Mode
Reduced Torque Characteristics
Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012/b212/b312 for each frequency.
(Example) 3G3RX-A2150 (Rated current: 64 A), b012 = 64
(A), Base frequency = 60 Hz, Output frequency =
20 Hz
Torque
Trip time (s)
x1.0
x0.8
x0.6
60
0
0
16
20
5
6
50
60
Inverter output
frequency (Hz)
3.0
0
Base frequency
4
55.8 76.8 102.4 Motor current (A)
(87.2%) (120%) (160%) (Ratio to the rated
current of the Inverter)
Functions
Constant Torque Characteristics
Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor.
(Example) 3G3RX-A2150 (Rated current: 64 A),
b012 = 64 (A), Output frequency = 2.5 Hz
Torque
Output current
value (A)
x1.0
b020
x0.8
b018
x0.6
b016
0 2.5 5
60
Inverter output
frequency (Hz)
0
b015 b017 b019 A004/A204/A304
Max. frequency (Hz)
Free Setting
To protect the motor according to load, you can freely set the electronic thermal characteristics.
Below is the setting range.
Torque
Output current
value (A)
x1.0
b020
b018
x0.8
b016
0
5
40
Inverter output
frequency (Hz)
0
b015 b017 b019 A004/A204/A304
Max. frequency (Hz)
(Example) Output frequency = b017
Trip time (s)
(x): (b018/Rated current) × 109%
(y): (b018/Rated current) × 150%
(z): (b018/Rated current) × 200%
60
3.0
0
(x) (y)
(z)
Motor current (A)
(Ratio to the rated
current of the Inverter)
4-48
4-2 Function Mode
„Thermal Warning
•This function outputs an alarm signal before electronic thermal overheat protection is activated.
The warning level can be set in C061.
•Allocate 13 (THM) to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to C025) or the relay
output terminal (C026).
Overload Limit/Overload Warning
This function helps prevent an overcurrent trip due to rapid load fluctuation in acceleration or
constant speed operation.
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b021
Overload limit selection
01
⎯
b024
Overload limit selection 2
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/constant
speed operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled in acceleration/constant
speed operation (accelerates during
regeneration)
01
⎯
b022
Overload limit level
1.50 × Rated
current
A
b025
Overload limit level 2
1.50 × Rated
current
A
b023
Overload limit parameter
1.0
s
1.0
s
01
⎯
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated
current (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated
current (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 to 30.00
b026
Overload limit parameter 2
C040
Overload warning signal
output mode
C041
Overload warning level
C111
Overload warning level 2
Related functions
00: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
0.0: Does not operate.
0.1 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.1 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
(Outputs OL and OL2 signals when
reaching the overload warning level.)
Rated current
A
Rated current
C001 to C008, C021 to C025, C026
„Overload Limit
•The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation in order
to lower output frequency automatically according to the overload limit parameter once the motor
current reaches the overload limit.
•This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during
acceleration, or caused by rapid load fluctuations during constant speed operation.
•You can set two types of overload limit functions in b021/b022/b023 and b024/b025/b026.
•To switch between b021/b022/b023 and b024/b025/b026, allocate 39 (OLR) to a multi-function
input and then turn it on/off.
•The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work.
•The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz.
•When this function operates, the acceleration time becomes longer than the set time.
4-49
4-2 Function Mode
• If "sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor vector control" is selected
as the control method (V/f characteristics) (refer to "Control Method (V/f Characteristics)" (page 421)), and "03" is selected for b021/b024, the frequency increases when a current exceeding the
overload limit level flows during regenerative operation.
•If overload limit parameter b023/b026 is set too short, an overvoltage trip may occur because of
regenerative energy from the motor caused by automatic deceleration of this function even during
acceleration.
•Make the following adjustments if this function operates before the frequency reaches the target
value during acceleration.
Increase the acceleration time. (Refer to "Acceleration/Deceleration Time" (page 4-8).)
Increase the torque boost. (Refer to "Torque Boost" (page 4-19).)
Increase the overload limit level (b022/b025).
4
Overload limit level
b022/b025
Decelerates according to the set
overload limit parameter.
Functions
Output current
Max. frequency
A004/A204/A304
Inverter output
frequency
Target frequency
F001
b023/b026
„Overload Warning
•If the applied load is large, the Inverter can output an overload warning signal before an overload
trip occurs.
This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the carrier machine, or an operation
line stop due to overload protection of the Inverter.
•Allocate "03" (OL) or "26" (OL2) to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to C025)
or the relay output terminal (C026). (Two types of overload warning signals are available for
output.)
Overload limit level
b022/b025
Overload warning level
C041/C111
Output current
OL/OL2 output
4-50
4-2 Function Mode
Overcurrent Suppression Function
•This function suppresses overcurrent caused by a steep current rise in rapid acceleration.
•You can set whether to enable or disable this function with b027.
Parameter No.
Function name
b027
Overcurrent suppression
function
Data
Default setting
Unit
01
⎯
Default setting
Unit
01
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Note: If you use the Inverter with an elevating machine, disable this function.
Otherwise, the machine may slide down.
Output frequency
4
Desired
Functions
Actual acceleration after
suppression operation
Time
Output current
Suppression level
(about 160% of the rating)
Time
Soft Lock Function
•You can set whether to enable or disable the writing of various code data.
This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous operation.
Parameter No.
b031
Function name
Data
00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed
when terminal SFT is ON.
01: Data other than b031 and specified frequency
parameter cannot be changed when terminal
Soft lock selection
SFT is ON.
02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed.
03: Data other than b031 and specified frequency
parameter cannot be changed.
10: Data can be changed during RUN.
Related functions
C001 to C008, SFT input
•Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the above table.
•To use a multi-function input terminal, allocate 15 (SFT) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001
to C008).
4-51
4-2 Function Mode
RUN Time/Power ON Time Exceeded
•If the total RUN time of the Inverter exceeds the time set in ON time setting b034, a RUN/Power
ON 'time exceeded' (RNT/ONT) signal is output.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
0
⎯
0.: Does not operate.
RUN time/Power ON
time setting
b034
1. to 9999.:
Set in increments of 10 hours.
1000 to 6553:
Set in increments of 100 hours.
(100000 to 655300 hours)
Related functions
4
C021 to C025, C026, d016, d017
•Allocate 11 (RNT) to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to C025) or the relay
output terminal (C026).
•Set a time in RUN time/Power ON time setting b034.
„Power ON Time Exceeded (ONT)
•Allocate 12 (ONT) to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to C025) or the relay
output terminal (C026).
•Set a time in RUN time/Power ON time setting b034.
Rotation Direction Limit Selection
•Limits motor rotation directions.
•Enabled in either "control circuit terminal block" or "Digital Operator" control mode.
•When a limited RUN command is input, the Digital Operator displays OkOkOkO .
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b035
Rotation direction limit
selection
00: Forward and Reverse are enabled.
01: Only Forward is enabled.
02: Only Reverse is enabled.
00
⎯
4-52
Functions
„RUN Time Exceeded (RNT)
4-2 Function Mode
Reduced Voltage Startup Selection
•Slowly increases voltage during motor startup.
•To increase torque during startup, reduce the set value of reduced voltage startup selection b036.
Note that if the value is too small, the motor starts in full-voltage starting mode, possibly resulting
in an overcurrent trip.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Reduced voltage startup
selection
b036
4
Default setting
Unit
6
⎯
00: Reduced voltage startup disabled
01 to 255:
01: Short (approx. 6 ms)
255: Long (approx. 1.53 s)
Functions
Related functions
b082
FW
Starting frequency
b082
Output
frequency
Output
voltage
00
01
06
Display Selection
•You can change the items to be displayed on the Digital Operator.
Parameter No.
b037
Function name
Display selection
Data
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
02: User setting
03: Data comparison display
04: Basic display
Default setting
Unit
04
⎯
no
⎯
_ _no: No allocation
U001 to U012
4-53
User selection
d001 to P131: Select the code you want to
display. (Among all codes. Note that P100 to
P131 cannot be used.)
4-2 Function Mode
„Individual Display of Functions
•If a specific function is not selected, its relevant parameter is not displayed.
•For details on the display requirements, refer to the following table.
No.
Display requirements
Parameters displayed when the requirements are met
1
A001 = 01
A005, A006, A011 to A016, A101, A102
A111 to A114, C081 to C083, C121 to C123
2
A001 = 10
A141 to A143
3
A002 = 01, 03, 04, 05
b087
4
A017 = 01
d025 to d027, P100 to P131 (Note that P100 to P131 cannot be
used.)
5
A041 = 01
A046, A047
6
A044 = 00, 01
A041, A042, A043
7
A044 = 03, 04, 05
H002, H005, H050
8
A044 = 04
H060, H061
9
A044 = 03, 04, 05, and
H002 = 00
H020 to H024
10
A044 = 03, 04, 05, and
H002 = 01, 02
H030 to H034
11
Either of A044 or A244 = 03, 04, 05
d008 to d010, d012, b040 to b046, H001, H070 to H073
12
Either of A044 or A244 = 02
b100 to b113
13
A051 = 01, 02
A052, A056 to A058
14
A051 = 01, 02
A053 to A055, A059
15
A071 = 01, 02
d004, A005, A006, A011 to A016, A072 to A078
A101, A102, A111 to A114, C044, C052, C053, C081 to C083,
C121 to C123
16
A076 = 10
A141 to A143
17
A094 = 01, 02
A095, A096
18
A097 = 01, 02, 03, 04
A131
19
A097 = 01, 02, 03, 04
A132
20
Any of b012, b212, and b312 = 02
b015 to b020
21
b021 = 01, 02, 03
b022, b023
22
b024 = 01, 02, 03
b025, b026
23
b050 = 01
b051 to b054
24
b095 = 01, 02
b090, b096
25
b098 = 01, 02
b099, C085
26
b120 = 01
b121 to b127
27
Any of C001 to C008 = 05, and
A019 = 00
A028 to A035
28
Any of C001 to C008 = 06
A038, A039
29
Any of C001 to C008 = 07
A053 to A055, A059
30
Any of C001 to C008 = 08
F202, F203, A203, A204, A220, A244, A246, A247, A261, A262,
A292, A293, A294, b212, b213, H203, H204, H206
4
Functions
4-54
4-2 Function Mode
No.
Display requirements
31
Any of C001 to C008 = 08, and
A041 = 01
A246, A247
32
Any of C001 to C008 = 08, and
A244 = 00, 01
A241, A242, A243
33
Any of C001 to C008 = 08, and
A244 = 03, 04
H202, H205, H250, H251, H252
34
Any of C001 to C008 = 08, and
A244 = 04
H260, H261
35
Any of C001 to C008 = 08,
A244 = 03, 04, and H202 = 00
H220 to H224
36
Any of C001 to C008 = 08,
A244 = 03, 04, and H202 = 01, 02
H230 to H234
37
Any of C001 to C008 = 08, and
A094 = 01, 02
A295, A296
38
Any of C001 to C008 = 11
b088
39
Any of C001 to C008 = 17
F302, F303, A303, A304, A320, A342, A343, A392, A393, b312,
b313, H306
40
Any of C001 to C008 = 18
C102
41
Any of C001 to C008 = 27, 28, 29
C101
42
Any of C021 to C026 = 03
C040, C041
43
Any of C021 to C026 = 26
C040, C111
44
Any of C021 to C026 = 02, 06
C042, C043
45
Any of C021 to C026 = 07
C055 to C058
46
Any of C021 to C026 = 21
C063
47
Any of C021 to C026 = 24, 25
C045, C046
48
Any of C021 to C026 = 33
C142 to C144
49
Any of C021 to C026 = 34
C145 to C147
50
Any of C021 to C026 = 35
C148 to C150
51
Any of C021 to C026 = 36
C151 to C153
52
Any of C021 to C026 = 37
C154 to C156
53
Any of C021 to C026 = 38
C157 to C159
54
Any of C021 to C026 = 42
C064
Functions
4
Parameters displayed when the requirements are met
„User Setting
•Displays only the parameters optionally set in U001 to U012.
•In addition to U001 to U012, d001, F001 and b037 are displayed.
„Data Comparison Display
•Displays only the parameters changed from the factory default.
Note that analog input adjustments C081, C082, C083, C121, C122, and C123, and thermistor
adjustment C085 are not displayed.
•All monitors (d***) and F001 are displayed.
4-55
4-2 Function Mode
„Basic Display
•Displays basic parameters. (Factory default)
•Below are the parameters displayed when this function is enabled.
No.
1
Data
Function name
d001 to d104 Monitor display
No.
Data
Function name
16
A045
Output voltage gain
2
F001
Output frequency setting/monitor
17
A085
RUN mode selection
3
F002
Acceleration time 1
18
b001
Retry selection
4
F003
Deceleration time 1
19
b002
Allowable momentary power
interruption time
5
F004
Operator rotation direction
selection
20
b008
Trip retry selection
6
A001
Frequency reference selection
21
b011
Trip retry wait time
7
A002
RUN command selection
22
b037
Display selection
8
A003
Base frequency
23
b083
Carrier frequency
9
A004
Maximum frequency
24
b084
Initialization selection
10
A005
FV/FI selection
25
b130
Overvoltage protection function
selection during deceleration
11
A020
Multi-step speed reference 0
26
b131
Overvoltage protection level
during deceleration
12
A021
Multi-step speed reference 1
27
C021
Multi-function output terminal P1
selection
13
A022
Multi-step speed reference 2
28
C022
Multi-function output terminal P2
selection
14
A023
Multi-step speed reference 3
29
C036
Relay output (MA, MB) contact
15
A044
V/f characteristics selection
U001 to U012
Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen at Power-ON)
You can select the Digital Operator screen to be displayed at power-on among the following items.
(By factory default, "01" (d001) is selected.)
Parameter No.
b038
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
Initial screen selection
00: Screen when the Enter key was pressed
last
01: d001 (Output frequency monitor)
02: d002 (Output current monitor)
03: d003 (Rotation direction monitor)
04: d007 (Output frequency monitor [after
conversion])
05: F001 (Output frequency setting/monitor)
01
⎯
Note: With "00" (screen on which the Enter key was last pressed) selected, if the last screen is other than d*** or
F***, the entrance (*---) of each group is displayed.
(Example) When the power is turned off and then on after a change in the A020 setting, "A---" is displayed.
4-56
Functions
Related functions
4
4-2 Function Mode
User Parameter Automatic Setting Function
•When user parameter automatic setting function b039 is set to "01" (enabled), the parameters
subjected to a data change are automatically stored in sequence (from U001 to U012). This data
can be used as changed data.
•The screen information is stored when the Enter key is pressed. The monitor screens (d***) are
also stored in the same manner.
•U001 is the most recent parameter, and U012 is the oldest.
•The same parameter cannot be stored. If the number of parameters stored exceeds 12, the oldest
data (U012) is erased.
Parameter No.
Function name
b039
User parameter automatic
setting function selection
4
Data
Unit
00
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Related functions
Functions
Default setting
U001 to U012
Torque Limit Function
•This function limits motor output torque when "03" (sensorless vector control), "04" (0-Hz
sensorless vector control), or "05" (sensor vector control) is selected in control method A044/A244.
Parameter No.
Default setting
Unit
V/f characteristics
selection
03: Sensorless vector
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector
05: Sensor vector (A244 is blank.)
00
⎯
Torque limit selection
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switch
02: Analog input
03: Option 1
04: Option 2
00
⎯
Torque limit 1
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Forward power running
under four-quadrant separate setting
150.
%
Torque limit 2
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Reverse regeneration
under four-quadrant separate setting
150.
%
Torque limit 3
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Reverse power running
under four-quadrant separate setting
150.
%
b044
Torque limit 4
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Forward regeneration
under four-quadrant separate setting
150.
%
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
40: Torque limit enabled
41: Torque limit switching 1
42: Torque limit switching 2
⎯
⎯
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
10: During torque limit
⎯
⎯
A044/A244
b040
b041
b042
b043
Function name
Related functions
4-57
Data
A044, A244, C001 to C008
4-2 Function Mode
•You can select any of the following four torque limit functions from torque limit selection b040.
<Four-quadrant separate setting mode>
Sets torque limits 1 to 4 (b041 to b044) for four quadrants
(forward power running, regeneration, reverse power running, and regeneration).
<Terminal switching mode>
Switches over torque limits 1 to 4 (b041 to b044), depending on combinations of torque limit
switchings 1 and 2 (TRQ1 and TRQ2) allocated to multi-function inputs. Selected torque limit
values are enabled for all operation modes.
<Analog input mode>
Sets a torque limit value depending on the voltage applied to terminal FE on the control terminal
block. 0 to 10 V correspond to torque limit values of 0% to 200%. Selected torque limit values
are enabled for all operation modes.
<Option (option 1, option 2) mode>
Enabled when an optional 3G3AX-DI01 board is used. For details, refer to the optional board
instruction manual.
Torque
Regeneration
b042
Power running
b041
Power running
b043
Regeneration
b044
Reverse (RV)
Forward (FW)
•The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with "01" (terminal switching) selected in torque limit
selection b040. They can be switched with torque limit switchings 1 and 2 allocated to multifunction inputs.
(Example) When torque limit switching 1 (41) and torque limit switching 2 (42) are allocated to
multi-function input terminals S7 and S8, respectively
Multi-function input terminals
(41)
(42)
S7
S8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SC
b041
b042
b043
b044
•To use the torque limit function in a low speed range, also use the overload limit function.
4-58
Functions
•If the torque limit enable function (TL) is set for a multi-function input, the torque limit function set
in b040 is enabled only when TL is turned on. When TL is off, the torque limit setting is disabled,
and the maximum value is defined as the torque limit value. Unless the torque limit enable function
(TL) is set for a multi-function input, the torque limit function set in torque limit selection b040 is
always enabled.
•With this function, the torque limit value is set with the Inverter's maximum output current as 200%.
This means output torque varies depending on the combination of motors. Note that the torque limit
value is not the absolute one.
•When the torque limit signal is selected in the multi-function output selection, the torque limit signal
is turned on when the above torque limit function is activated.
•The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with "00" (four-quadrant separate setting) selected
in torque limit selection b040.
4
4-2 Function Mode
Reverse Rotation Prevention Function
•This function is enabled when "03" (sensorless vector control), "04" (0-Hz sensorless vector
control), or "05" (sensor vector control) is selected in control method A044/A244.
•Because of the Inverter's control characteristics, the Inverter may output a rotation signal in the
direction opposite to that of the RUN command (e.g. in a low-speed range). If the motor's reverse
rotation may cause a problem (e.g. damage to the machine driven by the motor), set reverse
rotation prevention selection b046 to "enabled".
Parameter No.
Function name
A044/A244
V/f characteristics
selection
b046
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
Functions
4
Data
Default setting
Unit
03: Sensorless vector
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector
05: Sensor vector (A244 is blank.)
00
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
⎯
Torque LADSTOP Function
•If "03" (sensorless vector control), "04" (0-Hz sensorless vector control), or "05" (sensor vector
control) is selected in control method A004/A244, this function temporarily stops the frequency
deceleration function (LAD) when the torque limit function is activated.
Parameter No.
Function name
A044/A244
V/f characteristics
selection
Default setting
Unit
03: Sensorless vector
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector
05: Sensor vector (A344 is blank.)
00
⎯
Torque limit selection
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switch
02: Analog input
03: Option 1
04: Option 2
00
⎯
Torque limit 1
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Forward power running
under four-quadrant separate setting
Torque limit 2
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Reverse regeneration
under four-quadrant separate setting
150.
%
Torque limit 3
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Reverse power running
under four-quadrant separate setting
b044
Torque limit 4
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Forward regeneration
under four-quadrant separate setting
b045
Torque LADSTOP
selection
00
⎯
b040
b041
b042
b043
4-59
Data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
Data
40: Torque limit enabled
41: Torque limit switching 1
42: Torque limit switching 2
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
Momentary Power Interruption Non-stop Function
•After the power is shut off during operation, this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while
keeping the voltage below the overvoltage level.
•You can select from three modes in momentary power interruption non-stop selection b050.
Parameter No.
Data
Default setting
Unit
b050
Selection of non-stop
function at momentary
power interruption
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: DC voltage constant control (without
recovery)*5
03: DC voltage constant control (with
recovery)*5
00
⎯
b051
Starting voltage of non-stop
function at momentary
power interruption *4
0.0 to 1000.
220/440
V
b052
Stop deceleration level of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption *1 *4
0.0 to 1000.
360/720
V
b053
Deceleration time of nonstop function at momentary
power interruption *3
0.01 to 3600.
1.00
s
b054
Deceleration starting width
of non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption *3
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
Hz
b055
Proportional gain setting of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
0.00 to 2.55:
Proportional gain for DC voltage constant
control
(b050 = 02, 03 only)
0.20
⎯
b056
Integral time setting of nonstop function at momentary
power interruption
0.000 to 9.999/10.00 to 65.53:
Integral time for DC voltage constant
control
(b050 = 02, 03 only)
0.100
s
4-60
4
Functions
Function name
4-2 Function Mode
„Momentary Power Interruption Non-stop Deceleration Stop (b050 = 01)
•After the power is shut off during operation, this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while
keeping the voltage below the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration level (b052).
•To use this function, remove the J51 connector cable connected between terminals Ro and To,
and connect the cable from main terminal P to Ro, and from N to To. The cable size should be 0.75
mm2 or larger.
•If the power is shut off during operation and the voltage falls below the momentary power
interruption non-stop function starting voltage (b051), the frequency deceleration width decreases
at the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration starting width (b054), and then the
Inverter decelerates for the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration time (b053).
•If an overvoltage condition (momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration level b052 or
higher) occurs because of regeneration during deceleration, the Inverter is kept in the LAD STOP
status until the overvoltage condition is reset.
4
Functions
*1. When the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration level (b052) < the momentary
power interruption non-stop function starting voltage (b051), the Inverter performs this function
by increasing the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration level (b052) to the
momentary power interruption non-stop function starting voltage (b051). (The set value will not
be changed.)
If b052 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent (DC voltage or equivalent after
rectification [incoming voltage × √
⎯ 2]), the Inverter is brought into the LAD STOP status at power
recovery during execution of this function, disabling deceleration. (The Inverter will accept
neither a STOP command nor frequency reference change until operation is complete.) Make
sure that the b052 setting is higer than the normal incoming voltage or equivalent.
*2. This function is not reset before the operation is complete and stopped. To run the Inverter after
power recovery during this function, input the RUN command following the STOP command
(RUN command OFF) after a stop condition.
*3. If the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration starting width (b054) is too large, an
overcurrent trip occurs because of rapid deceleration. If b054 is too small, or if the momentary
power interruption non-stop deceleration time (b053) is too long, an undervoltage trip occurs
because of insufficient regeneration power.
Main circuit P-N
voltage
VPN (V)
b052
b051
Undervoltage
level
Time (s)
Output
frequency (Hz)
b054
b053
Time (s)
4-61
4-2 Function Mode
„Momentary Power Interruption Non-stop DC Voltage Constant Control
(b050 = 02: without recovery, b050 = 03: with recovery)
b050
b051
Operation
b052 > Main circuit DC voltage at
power recovery
Deceleration stop (DC voltage constant control)
(example 1)
b052 < Main circuit DC voltage at
power recovery
Deceleration stop (normal operation) (example 2)
b052 > Main circuit DC voltage at
power recovery
Deceleration stop (DC voltage constant control)
(example 1)
b052 < Main circuit DC voltage at
power recovery
Operation (normal operation) (example 2)
02 (without recovery)
03 (with recovery)
•If operation of this function results in deceleration stop, the Inverter is forced to stop, even if the
FW command is ON. To restart the Inverter, make sure that the incoming voltage has recovered,
and input the FW command again.
*4. Make sure that the b051/b052 set values are larger than the undervoltage level (200-V class:
210 V, 400-V class: 410 V). If undervoltage occurs, this function is disabled.
Make sure that b051 is smaller than b052. If the proportional gain setting (b055) is excessively
increased when the difference between b051 and b052 is large, the Inverter may accelerate
immediately after this function starts, resulting in overcurrent.
*5. When b050 = 02, 03, PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant.
• Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain (b055), control tends to
be divergent and may easily lead to a trip.
• Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time (b056), but if too short, the same
situation may occur.
• If the proportional gain (b055) is too small, the voltage drops immediately after this function
starts, resulting in an undervoltage trip.
4-62
4
Functions
•If a momentary power interruption or main circuit DC voltage drop occurs during operation, the
Inverter decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage at the value set in momentary power
interruption non-stop target voltage (OV-LADSTOP level) b052.
•This function is started when the following conditions are all satisfied:
• b050 = "02" or "03"
• The Inverter is running. (This function is disabled during trip/undervoltage/stop.)
• The control power supply is momentarily interrupted, or the main circuit DC voltage falls below
the momentary power interruption non-stop function starting voltage (b051)
•This function is enabled when the above starting conditions are satisfied, even if the J51 connector
cable is disconnected from terminals Ro and To and is connected from main terminal P to Ro and
from N and To, or even if the control power supply is separated from the main circuit power supply.
•If the time of momentary power interruption is short, the Inverter can continue to run without
shutting off the output. However, if undervoltage occurs because of momentary power interruption,
the Inverter immediately shuts off the output, and stops operating this function. The subsequent
power recovery depends on the setting of retry selection b001.
•With b050 = 03, the Inverter can be restored to normal operation, if a momentary power interruption
occurs and incoming voltage recovers before the output is shut off. Note that the Inverter may
decelerate to a stop, depending on the b051 setting. Below are the details.
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 1)
(Example 2)
Main circuit P-N voltage
Vpn (V)
Main circuit P-N voltage
Vpn (V)
Main circuit DC voltage
at power recovery
b052
Power recovery
Main circuit DC voltage
b052
b051
b051
DC voltage kept constant
Time
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Output
frequency
(Hz)
b050 = 02, 03
(Deceleration stop)
Functions
4
DC voltage kept constant
Time
b050 = 03 (Operation)
b050 = 02
(Deceleration stop)
Time
Power recovery
Time
Power recovery
Note: The main circuit DC voltage level, while the function is running, may fall below the b052 set value depending
on the proportional gain and integral time settings.
Window Comparator (Disconnection Detection FVDc/FIDc/FEDc)
•The Inverter activates the window comparator output when the FV/FI/FE analog input value is
within the upper and lower limit levels of the window comparator. This function allows you to
monitor analog input based on the desired level (e.g. to detect a disconnection).
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminals P1 to P5
selection
27: FVDc (analog FV disconnection
detection)
28: FIDc (analog FI disconnection detection)
29: FEDc (analog FE disconnection
detection)
54: WCFV (window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (window comparator FI)
56: WCFE (window comparator FE)
C026
b060 (FV)
b063 (FI)
b066 (FE)
4-63
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
05
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
Window comparator
FV/FI/FE upper limit level Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100
%
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
b061 (FV)
b064 (FI)
Default setting
Unit
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
0
%
-100
%
0
%
no
⎯
Window comparator
FV/FI/FE lower limit level Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
b067 (FE)
b062 (FV)
Window comparator
FV/FI/FE hysteresis
width
b065 (FI)
b068 (FE)
b070 (FV)
b071 (FI)
Analog operation level at
FV/FI/FE disconnection
b072 (FE)
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower
limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0 to 100/no (ignored): Set an analog input
application value used for WCFV/WCFI/
WCFE (FVDc/FIDc/FEDc) output.
-100 to 100/no (ignored): Set an analog input
application value used for WCFV/WCFI/
WCFE (FVDc/FIDc/FEDc) output.
•You can set hysteresis widths for the window comparator upper and lower limit levels.
•You can set limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for FV, FI, and FE inputs.
•For the WCFV/WCFI/WCFE output, you can fix the analog input application value to the desired
value. Set values in FV/FI/FE disconnection operation levels b070/b071/b072. If "no" is set, the
analog input value is directly reflected.
•FVDc/FIDc/FEDc outputs are the same as WCFV/WCFI/WCFE, respectively.
FV/FI/FE inputs
Max (100%)
Hysteresis width
(b062, b065, b068)
Window comparator upper
limit level (b061/b064/b067)
Analog application value
Analog operating level on
disconnection
(b070/b071/b072)
Min (O/OI: 0%)
Analog input value
Window comparator lower
limit level (b060/b063/b066)
(O2 : -100%)
WCFV/WCFI/WCFE
FVDc/FIDc/FEDc
4-64
4
Functions
Data
4-2 Function Mode
Starting Frequency
•Set the frequency for starting Inverter output when the RUN signal is turned on.
Parameter No.
Function name
b082
Starting frequency
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.50
Hz
0.10 to 9.99
•Use mainly to adjust the starting torque.
•With starting frequency b082 set high, the starting current increases, possibly causing the current
to exceed the overload limit and overcurrent protection to work to trip the Inverter.
•If "04" (OSLV: 0-Hz sensorless vector control) or "05" (V2: sensor vector control) is selected in
control method selection A044, this function is disabled.
4
Functions
FW
b082
Output frequency
Output voltage
Carrier Frequency
•You can change the PWM waveform carrier frequency output from the Inverter.
Parameter No.
Function name
b083
Carrier frequency
Data
Default setting
0.5 to 15.0 (0.4 to 55 kW)
5.0
0.5 to 10.0 (75 to 132 kW)
3.0
Unit
kHz
•With the carrier frequency set high, you can reduce metallic noise from the motor. However, this
increases noise or leakage current from the Inverter.
•Helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance.
•The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity.
To raise the carrier frequency (fc), derate the output current as shown in the following table.
•Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal level.
(If the existing electronic thermal value is lower than the derating value, the above setting is not
required.)
For details on the electronic thermal function, refer to page 4-46.
•To raise the carrier frequency, reduce the output current (or derate the rated current) as shown in
the graph below.
Voltage
Capacity
200-V class
Max. fc (kHz)
Derating at fc = 15 kHz
400-V class
Max. fc (kHz)
Derating at fc = 15 kHz
(75 to 132 kW is for 10 kHz)
0.4 kW
15
100%
15
100%
0.75 kW
15
100%
15
100%
1.5 kW
15
100%
15
100%
2.2 kW
15
100%
15
100%
3.7 kW
15
100%
15
100%
4-65
4-2 Function Mode
Voltage
200-V class
400-V class
Derating at fc = 15 kHz
Derating at fc = 15 kHz
(75 to 132 kW is for 10 kHz)
Capacity
Max. fc (kHz)
Max. fc (kHz)
5.5 kW
15
100%
15
100%
7.5 kW
15
100%
15
100%
11 kW
12
90% (41.4 max.)
15
100%
15 kW
12
95% (60.8 A max.)
14
95% (30.4 A max.)
18.5 kW
10
90% (68.4 A max.)
10
90% (34.2 A max.)
22 kW
7
70% (66.5 A max.)
6
75% (36.0 A max.)
30 kW
5
80% (96.8 A max.)
10
75% (43.5 A max.)
37 kW
10
75% (108.7 A max.)
8
80% (60.0 A max.)
45 kW
5
70% (127.4 A max.)
9
75% (68.2 A max.)
55 kW
5
70% (154 A max.)
6
60% (67.2 A max.)
75 kW
⎯
⎯
6
85% (126.7 A max.)
⎯
⎯
4
75% (132.0 A max.)
⎯
⎯
6
70% (151.9 A max.)
132 kW
⎯
⎯
3
60% (156.0 A max.)
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
0.5 2
22 kW 18.5 kW
400-V class
11 kW
15 kW
45, 55 kW
30 kW
37 kW
4
6
8
10
12
14 15
Output current derating
Output current derating
200-V class
90 kW
75 kW 45 kW
100
95
90
85
80
132 kW
75
70
65
110 kW
60
55
0.5 2
4
6
8
Carrier frequency (kHz)
30 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
37 kW
22 kW
55 kW
10
12
14 15
Carrier frequency (kHz)
•If the above maximum rated carrier frequency and the derating value at 15 kHz are exceeded, the
Inverter may be damaged and/or the service life may be shortened.
Parameter Initialization
•You can initialize the rewritten set values and reset to the factory default.
•You can clear trip data.
•You cannot clear the P100 to P131 set values, RUN time, or power ON time.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b084
Initialization selection
00: Clears the trip monitor
01: Initializes data
02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes
data
00
⎯
b085
Initialization parameter
selection
00: Do not change
00
⎯
4-66
Functions
90 kW
110 kW
4
4-2 Function Mode
„Initialization Method
After setting the above parameter, use the following method to initialize.
(1) Press the STOP/RESET key with the Mode and
Decrement keys pressed simultaneously.
• Release the STOP/RESET key when the display
blinks.
(The display changes as shown below.)
• Release the Mode and Decrement keys.
8k8k8k8
Functions
4
(2) Initializing
(3) Initialization completes when "d001" appears on the
monitor.
Check that the data is initialized.
Note: You cannot initialize analog input adjustments C081, C082, C083, C121, C122, and C123, as well as
thermistor adjustment C085.
4-67
4-2 Function Mode
STOP Key Selection
•When "control circuit terminal block" is selected for the RUN command, you can set whether the
STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator is used to activate the STOP command and trip reset
operation.
•This setting is enabled when any item other than "02" (Digital Operator) is selected in RUN
command selection A002. (Refer to "RUN Command Selection" (page 4-11).)
If "02" (Digital Operator) is selected in A002, the STOP command and trip reset operation are
enabled regardless of this setting.
Parameter No.
Function name
b087
STOP key selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
02: Disabled only during stop
STOP command via the STOP/
RESET key on the Digital Operator
Trip reset operation via the STOP/
RESET key on the Digital Operator
00
Enabled
Enabled
01
Disabled
Disabled
02
Disabled
Enabled
Functions
Data
Stop Selection
•You can set whether the Inverter decelerates to a stop for the set deceleration time or goes into
free-run status, when the STOP command is input from the Digital Operator or the control circuit
terminal block.
•If the RUN command is input again during free running, the Inverter restarts according to free-run
stop selection b088. (Refer to "Free-run Stop Selection" (page 4-69).)
Parameter No.
Function name
b091
Stop selection
b088
Free-run stop selection
b003
b007
Default setting
Unit
00: Deceleration → Stop
01: Free-run stop
00
⎯
00: 0-Hz start
01: Frequency matching start
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00
⎯
Retry wait time
0.3 to 100.
0.00
Hz
Frequency matching lower
limit frequency setting
0.00 to 400.0
1.0
s
Related functions
Data
4
F003, F203, F303
4-68
4-2 Function Mode
Free-run Stop Selection
•Activating the free-run stop (FRS) function shuts off the Inverter output, letting the motor go into
free-run status.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b088
Free-run stop selection
00: 0-Hz start (example 1)
01: Frequency matching start (example 2)
02: Frequency pull-in restart (example 3)
00
⎯
b003
Retry wait time
0.3 to 100: Time before restart
1.0
s
b007
Frequency matching lower
limit frequency setting
0.00 to 400.0:
Set a frequency matching level.
0.00
Hz
b028
Frequency pull-in restart
level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated
current
Rated current
A
b029
Frequency pull-in restart
parameter
0.10 to 30.00
0.50
s
b030
Starting frequency at
frequency pull-in restart
00: Frequency at interruption
01: Max. frequency
02: Set frequency
00
⎯
Functions
4
•Helps stop the motor using a mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic one.
Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during
Inverter output.
•Allocate 11 (FRS) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
•Performs a free-run stop (FRS) while the FRS terminal is turned on.
When the FRS terminal is turned off, the motor restarts after the retry wait time (b003) elapses.
However, if RUN command selection A002 is set to "02" (Digital Operator), the Inverter does not
restart.
To restart the Inverter, input the RUN command.
•You can select as the Inverter output mode for restart a 0-Hz start, frequency matching start or
frequency pull-in restart at free-run stop selection b088. (Examples 1, 2, 3)
•If you set frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007, the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz, when
the Inverter detects a frequency equal to or lower than this setting during frequency matching start.
•The setting of this function is applied to the FRS terminal, and also to the status when the Inverter
is reset from free running.
4-69
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 1) 0-Hz start
(Example 2): Frequency matching start
FW
FW
FRS
FRS
Free running
Free running
0-Hz start
Motor
rpm
Motor
rpm
0
0
b003
Frequency
matching start
• When the FRS terminal is turned off and the retry wait
time elapses, the motor frequency is matched and a
frequency pull-in starts without stopping the motor. If
an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching
start, extend the retry wait time.
• Even if "frequency matching start" is selected, the
Inverter may start at 0 Hz when:
• The output frequency is equal to or lower than
1/2 of the base frequency
• The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
• The Inverter detects a frequency equal to or
lower than the frequency matching lower limit
frequency setting (b007)
(Example 3) Frequency pull-in restart
RS
• After the retry wait time (b003) elapses, the
Inverter starts output from the b030 set value.
The Inverter then decelerates according to b029,
Decelerates
while keeping the output current at the b028 set
according to b
value.
• When the frequency matches the voltage, the
Inverter accelerates again, and then output
Frequency selected
frequency is restored to the original level.
in b030
• If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method,
reduce the b028 set value.
b028
Output
current
Inverter output
frequency
Trip occurs
Motor rpm
b003
4-70
4
Functions
• The Inverter starts running at 0 Hz regardless of the
motor rpm. The retry wait time is ignored at 0-Hz
start.
• If the Inverter starts running at 0 Hz with the motor
rpm high, an overcurrent trip may occur.
4-2 Function Mode
Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function
•This function automatically reduces carrier frequency according to an increase in output current.
•This function is enabled when automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b089 is set to "01".
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
b089
Automatic carrier reduction
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
•When output current exceeds 60%, 72%, 84% and 96% of the rated current, the carrier frequency
is reduced to 12, 9, 6, and 3 kHz, respectively.
When the output current falls below -5% of each level, this function will be reset.
Functions
4
Carrier frequency reduction starting level
(Recovery level)
Reduced carrier frequency (kHz)
Less than 60% of the rated current
15.0
60% (55%) of the rated current
12.0
72% (67%) of the rated current
9.0
84% (79%) of the rated current
6.0
96% (91%) of the rated current
3.0
Carrier
frequency
15.0 kHz
12.0 kHz
9.0 kHz
6.0 kHz
3.0 kHz
0
50
100
Output current (%)
60% 72% 84% 96%
•The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second.
•The upper limit of carrier frequency variable with this function conforms to the set value of carrier
frequency b083, and the lower limit is 3 kHz.
Note: When b083 is 3 kHz or lower, this function is disabled regardless of the b089 setting.
4-71
4-2 Function Mode
Regenerative Braking Function
•This function applies to the Inverter models with a built-in regenerative braking circuit
(3G3RX-A2220/A4220 or lower models).
•With the built-in regenerative braking circuit, this function allows an external braking resistor to
consume the motor's regeneration energy as heat.
This function is useful for a system in which the motor works as a generator when it is rapidly
decelerated.
•To use this function, configure the following settings.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.0: Does not operate.
0.1 to 100.0:
A regenerative braking usage rate for 100 seconds
can be set, in increments of 0.1%.
If the set usage rate is exceeded, a braking resistor
overload trip (E06) occurs.
t1
t2
t3
ON
Regenerative
braking
function activated
ON
ON
Usage rate (%) =
0.0
%
0.0
⎯
200-V class:
360 V
400-V class:
720 V
V
100 s
(t1 + t2 + t3)
100 s
× 100
b095
00: Disabled (This function is not active.)
01: Enabled during operation (This function is
Regenerative
active.)
braking function
Disabled during stop (This function is not active.)
operation selection
02: Enabled during both operation and stop (This
function is active.)
b096
Regenerative
braking function
ON level
200-V class: 330 to 380 *
400-V class: 660 to 760 *
(Inverter DC voltage)
* The regenerative braking function ON level conforms to the voltage setting for the Inverter's internal converter
(DC unit).
Cooling Fan Control
•You can set whether to operate the Inverter's cooling fan constantly or only during Inverter
operation.
Parameter No.
b092
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
Cooling fan control
00: Always ON
01: ON during RUN
Regardless of the settings, the cooling fan
operates for 5 minutes after power-on, and
for 5 minutes after the Inverter stops.
01
⎯
Note: If a momentary power interruption occurs or the power is shut off while the cooling fan is in operation, the
cooling fan stops temporarily and restarts automatically after power recovery.
4-72
Functions
Usage rate of
regenerative
braking function
b090
4
4-2 Function Mode
External Thermistor (TH)
•This function enables thermal protection of the external equipment (e.g. motor) if its internal
thermistor is connected to the Inverter.
Parameter No.
Default setting
Unit
Thermistor selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled, Positive temperature
coefficient resistance element (PTC)
02: Enabled, Negative temperature
coefficient resistance element (NTC)
00
⎯
b099
Thermistor error level
0 to 9999.:
Set a temperature resistance value to trip
the Inverter, according to the
specifications of your thermistor.
3000.
Ω
C085
Thermistor adjustment
0.0 to 1000.:
Used for gain adjustment.
Factory default
⎯
b098
Functions
4
Function name
Data
Note: If thermistor selection b098 is set to "01" without connecting an external thermistor, the Inverter trips.
•Connect an external thermistor between control terminals TH and SC.
•Set the following functions according to the specifications of your thermistor.
•When this function is used, keep the cable length between the motor and Inverter within 20 m.
Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak, you must take measures to prevent noise
due to motor current. (For example, place the thermistor cable away from the motor cable.)
Brake Control Function
•This function allows the Inverter to control the external brake of equipment, including an elevating
system. When brake control selection b120 is set to "01" (enabled), the Inverter operates as
follows:
(1) At RUN command input, the Inverter starts output, and accelerates to the release frequency.
(2) After the release frequency is reached, the Inverter outputs the brake release signal (BRK) after
the brake release establishment wait time (b121) elapses. However, if the Inverter's output
current is less than the current value set in release current b126, the Inverter does not output
the brake release signal. In this case, the Inverter trips, and outputs the brake error signal (BER).
(3) If the brake confirmation signal (BOK) is allocated to a multi-function input (when "44" is set in
any of C001 to C008), the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal for the period set in
brake confirmation wait time b124 without accelerating, after the brake release signal is output.
If the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the period set in b124, the Inverter
outputs the brake error signal (BER), resulting in trip. If the brake confirmation signal is not
allocated to a multi-function input, brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled, and the Inverter
performs processing (4) after the brake release signal is output.
(4) After the brake confirmation signal is input (or after the brake release signal is output if BOK is
not selected), the Inverter restarts acceleration up to a set frequency after the period set in
acceleration wait time b122 elapses.
(5) After the RUN command is turned off, the Inverter decelerates to the brake release frequency
(b125), and turns off the brake release signal (BRK).
4-73
4-2 Function Mode
(6) If the brake confirmation signal (BOK) is allocated to a multi-function input (when "44" is set in
any of C001 to C008), the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal to be turned off for the
period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without decelerating, after the brake release
signal is turned off. If the brake confirmation signal is not turned off within the period set in b124,
the Inverter outputs the brake error signal (BER), resulting in trip. If the brake confirmation signal
is not allocated to a multi-function input, brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled, and the
Inverter performs processing (7) after the brake release signal is turned off.
(7) After the brake confirmation signal is turned off (or after the brake release signal is turned off if
BOK is not selected), the Inverter restarts deceleration down to 0 Hz after the period set in stop
wait time b123 elapses.
b0125 Brake release
frequency
b127 Brake input
frequency
(7)
(5)
(2)
Brake release signal
b121 Brake wait time
for release
(4) b122 Acceleration wait time
b123 Brake wait time
for stopping
Functions
Output frequency
(1)
RUN command
4
Brake confirmation signal
(3)
b124 Brake confirmation wait time
(6)
b124 Brake confirmation wait time
Note: The above operation chart applies to a case where the brake confirmation signal (44: BOK)
is selected for any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008). If BOK is not selected, the
acceleration wait time (b122) starts at the brake release signal ON timing. The stop wait time
(b123) starts at the brake release signal OFF timing.
•To use the brake control function, allocate the following functions to multi-function I/O terminals,
as required.
•To input a brake release signal from an external brake to the Inverter, allocate the brake
confirmation signal (44: BOK) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
•Allocate the brake release signal (19: BRK) to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5
(C021 to C025). Also, to use a brake error output signal, allocate the brake error signal (20:
BER).
•To use the brake control function, you are recommended to select "sensorless vector control"
(A044 = 03), "0-Hz sensorless vector control" (A044 = 04), or "sensor vector control" (A044 = 05)
so that the Inverter outputs high torque during startup. (Refer to page 4-21.)
4-74
4-2 Function Mode
Parameters Required for Brake Control Function
Parameter No.
Function name
b120
Brake control selection
Default setting
Unit
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
⎯
b121
Brake wait time for
release
0.00 to 5.00:
Set a time required for the output current to
reach the rate of the release current after
reaching the release frequency.
0.00
s
b122
Brake wait time for
acceleration
0.00 to 5.00:
Set a mechanical delay time from when the
release signal is output until the brake is
released.
0.00
s
b123
Brake wait time for
stopping
0.00 to 5.00:
Set a mechanical delay time from when the
release signal is turned off until the brake is
closed.
0.00
s
b124
Brake wait time for
confirmation
0.00 to 5.00:
Set a wait time longer than the time from
when the release signal is released until the
brake outputs the release completion signal
to the Inverter.
0.00
s
b125
Brake release frequency
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 400.0 (Hz):
Set a frequency to output the brake release
signal. *1
0.00
Hz
b126
Brake release current
0 × Rated current to 2.0 × Rated current:
Set an output current that allows the brake to
be released. *2
Rated current
⎯
b127
Brake input frequency
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 400.0:
Set a frequency to close the brake during
stop. *1
0.00
Hz
Functions
4
Related functions
Data
C001 to C008, C021 to C025
*1. Set a brake release frequency higher than the starting frequency (b082).
*2. If the set current is too low, sufficient torque may not be provided when the brake is released.
In any of the following cases, the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal (BER). (Brake error:
E36)
•The output current is lower than the release current after the brake release establishment wait time
(b121) elapses.
• When the brake confirmation (BOK) signal is used, the brake confirmation signal does not turn on
within the brake confirmation wait time (b124) during acceleration, or does not turn off within the
brake confirmation wait time (b124) during deceleration; or the brake confirmation signal turns off,
although the brake release signal is output.
4-75
4-2 Function Mode
Overvoltage Protection Function During Deceleration
•This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during
deceleration.
•You can set whether to enable or disable this function with overvoltage protection function
selection during deceleration b130.
•If overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to "01" (enabled: DC voltage constant
control), the Inverter automatically decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage rise due
to deceleration start at the overvoltage protection function level setting (b131).
•If overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to "02" (enabled: with acceleration), the
main circuit DC voltage increases because of deceleration start. When the main circuit DC voltage
exceeds the overvoltage protection function level setting (b131), the Inverter starts acceleration
according to the setting of overvoltage protection parameter b132. After that, when the main circuit
DC voltage falls below the b131 level, the Inverter starts deceleration again.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b130
Overvoltage protection
function selection
during deceleration
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC voltage constant control)
(example 1) *2
02: Enabled (with acceleration) (example 2)
00
⎯
b131
Overvoltage protection
level during
deceleration *1
200-V class: 330 to 390
400-V class: 660 to 780
380/760
V
b132
Overvoltage protection
parameter
0.10 to 30.00:
Set the acceleration rate applied when this
function is enabled.
1.00
s
b133
0.00 to 2.55:
Overvoltage protection
Proportional gain for DC voltage constant
proportional gain setting
control (b130 = 01 only)
0.50
⎯
b134
Overvoltage protection
integral time setting
0.060
s
0.000 to 9.999/10.00 to 65.53:
Integral time for DC voltage constant control
(b130 = 01 only)
(Example 1) When b130 = 01
(Example 2) When b130 = 02
Main circuit DC voltage (V)
Main circuit DC voltage (V)
Overvoltage
protection level
(b131)
Overvoltage
protection level
(b131)
Time (s)
Output frequency (Hz)
Time (s)
Output frequency (Hz)
DC voltage kept constant
Deceleration
started
Deceleration
started
Accelerates according to b132.
Time (s)
Time (s)
Note 1: With this function enabled, the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value.
Particularly with b130 = 02, if b131 is set too low, the Inverter may not decelerate.
4-76
Functions
Parameter No.
4
4-2 Function Mode
Note 2: Even if this function is enabled, an overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate and
load condition.
Note 3: When using this function, the Inverter may reduce frequency depending on the moment of inertia of motor
load, and takes a long time to stop.
*1. If the b131 set value is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent, the motor may not be stopped.
*2. When b130 = 01, PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant.
•Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain (b133), control tends to be divergent
and may easily lead to a trip.
•Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time (b134), but if too short, the same situation may
occur.
Functions
4
<Group C: Multi-function Terminal Function>
The 3G3RX has eight input terminals [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4], [S5], [S6], [S7], and [S8]; five open collector output terminals [P1], [P2], [P3], [P4], and [P5]; one relay output terminal [MA] and [MB] (SPDT contact); two analog output terminals [AM] and [AMI]; as well as one digital output terminal [MP].
Multi-function Input Selection
•You can use the following functions by allocating them to any of multi-function inputs S1 to S8.
To allocate the functions, set the following data in C001 to C008. For example, C001 corresponds
to input terminal S1.
•The same two functions cannot be allocated to the multi-function input terminals. If you attempt to
allocate the same two functions to the terminals by mistake, the terminal where you allocated the
function last takes precedence. The previous data is set to "no (no allocation)", and the terminal
function is disabled.
•After allocating functions to terminals S1 to S8, make sure that the function settings have been
stored.
Parameter
No.
C001 to
C008
4-77
Data
Function name
Reference item
Page
RUN command
⎯
Multi-step speed operation function
4-16
: Multi-step speed setting binary 4
Multi-step speed operation function
4-16
JG
: Jogging
Jogging operation
4-18
07
DB
: External DC injection braking
DC injection braking (external DC
injection braking)
4-24
08
SET
: 2nd control
2nd/3rd control function
4-80
09
2CH
: 2-step acceleration/deceleration
2-step acceleration/deceleration
function
4-37
11
FRS
: Free-run stop
Free-run stop
4-69
12
EXT
: External trip
External trip
4-82
13
USP
: USP function
Power recovery restart prevention
function
4-82
14
CS
: Commercial switch
Commercial switch
4-83
01
RV
: Reverse command
02
CF1
: Multi-step speed setting binary 1
03
CF2
: Multi-step speed setting binary 2
04
CF3
: Multi-step speed setting binary 3
05
CF4
06
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter
No.
Function name
Reference item
Page
15
SFT
: Soft lock
Soft lock
4-51
16
AT
: Analog input switching
External analog input
4-12
17
SET3 : 3rd control
2nd/3rd control function
4-80
18
RS
: Reset
Reset
4-85
20
STA
: 3-wire start
21
STP
: 3-wire stop
3-wire input function
4-86
22
F/R
: 3-wire forward/reverse
23
PID
: PID enabled/disabled
PID function
4-31
Control gain switching
4-87
UP/DOWN function
4-88
Forced operator function
4-89
Multi-step speed operation function
4-16
Overload limit
4-49
Torque limit function
4-57
24
PIDC : PID integral reset
26
CAS
: Control gain switching
27
UP
: UP/DWN function accelerated
28
DWN : UP/DWN function decelerated
29
UDC : UP/DWN function data clear
31
OPE
: Forced operator
32
SF1
: Multi-step speed setting bit 1
33
SF2
: Multi-step speed setting bit 2
34
SF3
: Multi-step speed setting bit 3
35
SF4
: Multi-step speed setting bit 4
36
SF5
: Multi-step speed setting bit 5
37
SF6
: Multi-step speed setting bit 6
38
SF7
: Multi-step speed setting bit 7
39
OLR
: Overload limit switching
40
TL
: Torque limit enabled
41
TRQ1 : Torque limit switching 1
42
TRQ2 : Torque limit switching 2
43
PPI
: P/PI switching
P/PI switching function
4-89
44
BOK : Brake confirmation
Brake control function
4-73
45
ORT : Orientation
Orientation function
4-129
46
LAC : LAD cancel
LAD cancel function
4-9
47
PCLR : Position deviation clear
STAT : Pulse train position command input
permission
V2 control mode selection
4-119
48
50
ADD : Frequency addition
Set frequency addition function
4-41
51
F-TM : Forced terminal block
Forced terminal function
4-90
52
ATR : Torque command input permission
Torque control
4-121
53
KHC : Integrated power clear
Integrated power
4-4
54
SON : Servo ON
Servo ON function
4-137
4-78
4
Functions
C001 to
C008
Data
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter
No.
Functions
4
C001 to
C008
Data
Function name
55
FOC : Preliminary excitation
56
Not used
57
Not used
58
Not used
59
Not used
60
Not used
61
Not used
62
Not used
63
Not used
65
AHD : Analog command held
66
CP1 : Position command selection 1
67
CP2 : Position command selection 2
68
CP3 : Position command selection 3
69
ORL : Zero return limit signal
70
ORG : Zero return startup signal
71
FOT : Forward driving stop
72
ROT : Reverse driving stop
73
SPD : Speed/Position switching
74
PCNT : Pulse counter
75
PCC : Pulse counter clear
no
NO
Reference item
Page
Preliminary excitation function
4-116
⎯
Analog command held
4-91
4-133
Absolute position control mode
⎯
4-136
4-134
Multi-function pulse counter
4-91
⎯
: No allocation
⎯
•You can select NO- or NC-contact input for each multi-function input terminal.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C011 to
C018
Multi-function input
operation selection
C019
FW terminal operation
selection
Related functions
4-79
Data
00: NO contact
01: NC contact
• You can set NO- and NC-contact inputs
individually for multi-function input terminals S1 to
S8 and the FW terminal.
• NO contact: "ON" with the contact closed, "OFF"
with the contact open.
• NC contact: "ON" with the contact open. "OFF"
with the contact closed.
• A terminal with reset (RS) setting functions as NO
contact only.
C001 to C008
Default
setting
Unit
00
⎯
00
⎯
4-2 Function Mode
2nd/3rd Control Function
•You can switch between three motors to control the Inverter by allocating 08 (SET)/17 (SET3) to
any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008) and then turning on/off the SET/SET3 terminal.
Parameter No.
C001
Function name
Multi-function input 1
selection *1
Multi-function input 2
selection
C003
Multi-function input 3
selection *1
C004
Multi-function input 4
selection
C005
Multi-function input 5
selection
C006
Multi-function input 6
selection
C007
Multi-function input 7
selection
C008
Multi-function input 8
selection
01: RV (reverse)
02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1)
03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2)
04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3)
05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4)
06: JG (jogging)
07: DB (external DC injection braking)
08: SET (2nd control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (free-run stop)
12: EXT (external trip)
13: USP (USP function)
14: CS (commercial switching)
15: SFT (soft lock)
16: AT (analog input switching)
17: SET3 (3rd control)
18: RS (reset)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
23: PID (PID enabled/disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
26: CAS (control gain switching)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
31: OPE (forced operator)
32: SF1 (multi-step speed setting bit 1)
33: SF2 (multi-step speed setting bit 2)
34: SF3 (multi-step speed setting bit 3)
35: SF4 (multi-step speed setting bit 4)
36: SF5 (multi-step speed setting bit 5)
37: SF6 (multi-step speed setting bit 6)
38: SF7 (multi-step speed setting bit 7)
39: OLR (overload limit switching)
40: TL (torque limit enabled)
41: TRQ1 (torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (torque limit switching 2)
43: PPI (P/PI switching)
44: BOK (brake confirmation)
45: ORT (orientation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
47: PCLR (position deviation clear)
48: STAT (pulse train position command input permission)
50: ADD (frequency addition)
51: F-TM (forced terminal)
52: ATR (torque command input permission)
53: KHC (integrated power clear)
54: SON (servo ON)
55: FOC (preliminary excitation)
56: Not used
57: Not used
58: Not used
59: Not used
60: Not used
61: Not used
62: Not used
63: Not used
65: AHD (analog command held)
66: CP1 (position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (position command selection 3)
69: ORL (zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (zero return startup signal)
71: FOT (forward driving stop)
72: ROT (reverse driving stop)
73: SPD (speed/position switching)
74: PCNT (pulse counter)
75: PCC (pulse counter clear)
no: NO (no allocation)
Default setting
Unit
01
4
18
Functions
C002
Data
12
02
⎯
03
04
05
06
4-80
4-2 Function Mode
*1. When the emergency shutoff function is enabled (SW1 = ON), C001 and C003 are forced to change to "18"
(RS) and "64" (EMR), respectively. (You cannot intentionally set "64".)
If SW1 is turned on and then off, C003 is set to "no" (no allocation).
The functions switchable via the SET/SET3 terminal are:
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd
A047/A247 *
: 1st/2nd
A061/A261 *
A062/A262 *
A092/A292/A392 *
A093/A293/A393 *
A094/A294
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd
A095/A295
A096/A296
b012/b212/b312 *
b013/b213/b313 *
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
H002/H202
H003/H203
H004/H204
H005/H205 *
H006/H206/H306 *
H020/H220
H021/H221
H022/H222
H023/H223
H024/H224
H030/H230
H031/H231
H032/H232
H033/H233
H034/H234
H050/H250 *
H051/H251 *
H052/H252 *
H060/H260 *
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd/3rd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
: 1st/2nd
acceleration time
deceleration time
base frequency
maximum frequency
multi-step speed reference 0
torque boost selection
manual torque boost voltage
manual torque boost frequency
V/f characteristics selection
automatic torque boost
voltage compensation gain
automatic torque boost slip
compensation gain
frequency upper limit
frequency lower limit
acceleration time 2
deceleration time 2
2-step acceleration/deceleration
selection
2-step acceleration frequency
2-step deceleration frequency
electronic thermal level
electronic thermal characteristics
selection
motor parameter selection
motor capacity selection
motor pole number selection
speed response
stabilization parameter
motor parameter R1
motor parameter R2
motor parameter L
motor parameter I0
motor parameter J
motor parameter R1 (auto-tuning)
motor parameter R2 (auto-tuning)
motor parameter L (auto-tuning)
motor parameter I0 (auto-tuning)
motor parameter J (auto-tuning)
PI proportional gain
PI integral gain
P proportional gain
Limit at 0 Hz
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Motor 1
Motor 2
Inverter
Functions
4
F002/F202/F302 *
F003/F203/F303 *
A003/A203/A303
A004/A204/A304
A020/A220/A320 *
A041/A241
A042/A242/A342 *
A043/A243/A343 *
A044/A244/A344
A046/A246 *
Motor 3
SET
SET3
CM1
*: Parameters changeable during operation.
• The 1st/2nd/3rd control functions are displayed identically. You'll see which one is enabled by checking whether
the terminal is turned on/off.
• When both SET and SET3 terminals are turned on, priority is given to SET, and the 2nd control function is
enabled.
• During operation, you cannot switch between the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd control functions. You can switch them only
during stop.
4-81
4-2 Function Mode
External Trip
•This function trips the Inverter via an error (trip) signal from a peripheral system. To use this
function, allocate "12" (EXT) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
Data
Symbol
Function name
12
EXT
External trip
Status
Description
ON
Sets the motor to free-run status by shutting off output.
OFF
The motor is in normal operation.
Available input terminals
C001 to C008
Note: Do not turn on the EXT terminal after shutting off the power. Otherwise, the Inverter may not store data
correctly.
Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function
RUN commands
FW, RV
EXT terminal
Free running
Motor rpm
RS terminal
Alarm output
terminal
•This function trips the Inverter, displaying "E13", if the power is turned on with the RUN command
to the Inverter turned on.
Data
13
Symbol
USP
Available input terminals
Function name
Status
Description
ON
Does not start the Inverter with the power turned on
while the RUN command is input.
OFF
Starts the Inverter with the power turned on while the
RUN command is input.
USP function
C001 to C008
•To reset a trip, perform the reset operation, or turn off the RUN command. (Example 1)
•If a trip is reset with the RUN command input turned on, the Inverter restarts operation immediately
after the trip is reset. (Example 2)
•If the RUN command is turned on after the power is turned on, the Inverter operates normally.
(Example 3)
•Allocate 13 (USP) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
4-82
Functions
•When the EXT terminal is turned on, E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to stop output.
•When the Inverter has tripped, indicating E12, the trip is not reset even if the error signal from
external equipment is reset (EXT terminal is turned off).
To reset the trip, perform the reset operation or turn the power off and on again.
4
4-2 Function Mode
•The following shows how the power recovery restart prevention function works.
4
(Example 1)
Power
supply
(Example 2)
Power
supply
(Example 3)
Power
supply
FW
FW
FW
USP
USP
USP
RS
RS
RS
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
Functions
Commercial Switching
•You can use this function to drive a system with large moment of inertia during acceleration and
deceleration by using the Inverter, and during constant speed by using a commercial power supply.
•Allocate "14" (CS) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
•When the CS terminal is turned on and then off with the RUN command turned on, the Inverter starts
acceleration in synchronization with the motor rpm during free running, after the retry wait time (b003)
elapses (frequency matching start). Note that the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if:
• The motor rpm is equal to or lower than 1/2 of the base rpm
• The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
•If frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 is set, the Inverter starts at 0 Hz when the
motor rpm lowers to the frequency set in b007. (Refer to page 4-38)
•Ensure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked.
•If the earth leakage breaker (ELB) has tripped because of ground fault, the commercial power
supply circuit does not work, either. If you need backup, supply power from a commercial power
supply circuit (ELBC).
•For FWY, RVY, and CSY, use weak current relays. Refer to the following sequence for timing.
•If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching, extend the retry wait time (b003).
•For commercial switching operation, refer to the following examples of connections and timing of
commercial switching operation.
•At power-on, the Inverter can automatically perform retry operation. This does not require the
following CS terminal. For details, refer to "Reset" (page 4-85).
4-83
4-2 Function Mode
Examples of connections and timing of commercial switching operation
MC2
NFB
ELBC
MC1
MC3
R
S
T
U
V
W
THRY
Motor
Ro
To
FS
FV
FC
FWY
RVY
FW
RV
CSY
CS
MA
MB
MC
4
Timing example of switching from
Inverter to commercial power
MC1
MC1
ON
MC2
Timing example of switching from
commercial power to Inverter
ON
MC2
MC3
ON
MC3
FW
ON
FW
CS
Inverter output
Operation
frequency
ON
CS
ON
Interlock time of MC2 and MC3
(0.5 to 1 s)
ON
ON
OFF
Retry wait time b003
0.5 to 1 s
Operation
Operates after frequency matching.
4-84
Functions
SC
4-2 Function Mode
Reset
•This function resets an Inverter trip.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
b003
Retry wait time
0.3 to 100.:
(Refer to "Momentary Power Interruption/
Trip Retry (Restart)" (page 4-42).)
Time from reset to restart
1.0
s
b007
Frequency matching
lower limit frequency
setting
0.00 to 400.0:
(Refer to "Momentary Power Interruption/
Trip Retry (Restart)" (page 4-42).)
0.00
Hz
00
⎯
00
⎯
Functions
4
00: Trip reset at power-on (example 1)
Normal: Output shut off
Abnormal: Trip reset
01: Trip reset at power-off (example 2)
Normal: Output shut off
Abnormal: Trip reset
C102
Reset selection
02: Trip reset at power-on (example 1)
Normal: Disabled
Abnormal: Trip reset
03: Trip reset only (example 1)
The Inverter does not initialize internal
data at trip reset.
Normal: Disabled
Abnormal: Trip reset
C103
Reset frequency
matching selection
00: 0-Hz start
01: Frequency matching start (example 3)
02: Frequency pull-in restart
•To reset an Inverter trip, press the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator, or switch the RS
terminal from ON to OFF.
•To reset via the control circuit terminal block, allocate 18 (RS) to the desired multi-function input.
•With reset frequency matching selection C103, you can select how to restart the Inverter after
reset, a frequency matching or 0-Hz start. If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching start,
increase the retry wait time (b003).
•You can select an alarm reset timing in reset selection C102. In addition, you can enable the reset
signal only for alarm resetting during error.
•For the RS terminal, only NO contact is available.
Note: Do not use the reset terminal to shut off the Inverter output. Reset operation clears the
internal data (e.g. electronic thermal BRD counter), causing damage to the Inverter.
(Example 1)
4-85
(Example 2)
RS
RS
Alarm
Alarm
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 3) If "01" (frequency matching start) is selected in reset frequency matching selection C103, frequency
matching start is also enabled when the power is turned on again. When C103 = 00 (0-Hz start), the
retry wait time (b003) is ignored. Even if "frequency matching start" is selected, however, the
Inverter may start at 0 Hz if:
• The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1/2 of the base frequency
• The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
Power
supply
FW
Frequency matching
Free running
Motor rpm
4
(Example 4) Frequency pull-in restart
FW
RS
b028
Output
current
Decelerates
according to b029.
Inverter output
frequency
• After the retry wait time (b003) elapses, the
Inverter starts output from the b030 set value.
The Inverter then decelerates according to
the b029 setting, while keeping the output
current at the b028 set value.
• When the frequency matches the voltage, the
Inverter accelerates again, and the frequency
is restored to the original level.
• If an overcurrent trip occurs under this
method, reduce the b028 setting.
Frequency selected
in b030
Trip occurs
Motor rpm
b003
Note: If a reset signal is input during the retry wait time, the value of "frequency at interruption"
stored in the Inverter is cleared, resulting in a 0-Hz start.
3-wire Input Function
•This function helps start and stop the Inverter using an auto-recovery contact (e.g. pushbutton
switch).
Data
Symbol
Function name
20
STA
3-wire start
21
22
STP
F/R
Status
Description
ON
Starts with auto recovery contacts.
OFF
Irrelevant to the motor operation.
ON
Stops with auto recovery contacts.
OFF
Irrelevant to the motor operation.
ON
Reverse
OFF:
Forward
3-wire stop
3-wire forward/reverse
4-86
Functions
Note: The counters used for the Inverter's internal protection are cleared during reset.
To shut off the Inverter's output via a multi-function input terminal, use the free-run stop
terminal (FRS).
4-2 Function Mode
Data
Symbol
Function name
Status
Description
Available input terminals
C001 to C008
Required settings
A002 = 01
•Set RUN command selection A002 to 01 (control circuit terminal block).
•The following operations become possible when 20 (STA), 21 (STP), and 22 (F/R) are allocated to
any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008). Allocating the STP terminal disables the FW and
RV terminals.
•Below are the outputs via terminal operation.
STA
ON
OFF
4
ON
Functions
STP
OFF
F/R
Forward
Output frequency
Reverse
Control Gain Switching Function
•This function provides two types of gain and time constant settings for the speed control system
(proportional/integral compensation). You can switch over these settings when "sensorless vector
control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor vector control" is selected as the control
method.
Parameter No.
A044/A244
Function name
Data
03: Sensorless vector
V/f characteristics selection 04: 0-Hz sensorless vector
05: Sensor vector
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
26: CAS (control gain switching)
⎯
⎯
H005/H205
Speed response
0.001 to 9.999/10.00 to 80.00
1.590
⎯
H050/H250
PI proportional gain
0.0 to 999.9/1000
100.0
%
H051/H251
PI integral gain
0.0 to 999.9/1000
100.0
%
H052/H252
P proportional gain
0.01 to 10.00
1.00
⎯
H070
For PI proportional gain
switching
0.0 to 999.9/1000
100.0
%
For PI integral gain switching 0.0 to 999.9/1000
100.0
%
1.00
⎯
H071
H072
4-87
For P proportional gain
switching
0.00 to 10.00
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name
H073
Gain switching time
Data
Default setting
Unit
100.
ms
0. to 9999. (ms):
Taper time during gain switching
•If control gain switching is selected in the multi-function input selection, turning off the signal
selects the gain setting of H050, H250, H051, H251, H052, or H252. Turning on the signal selects
the gain setting of H070, H071, or H072.
•If control gain switching is not selected in multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008), the gain
setting conforms to the status in which the signal is turned off.
UP/DOWN Function
•This function allows you to change the Inverter output frequency using the UP and DWN terminals
of the multi-function inputs.
Symbol
27
UP
28
DWN
29
UDC
Available input terminals
Function name
UP/DWN function
accelerated
UP/DWN function
decelerated
UP/DWN function
data clear
Status
Description
ON
Increases the current speed during the signal
input period.
OFF
Keeps the current speed.
ON
Decreases the current speed during the signal
input period.
OFF
Keeps the current speed.
ON
Clears the stored UP/DWN speed.
OFF
Keeps the stored UP/DWN speed.
C001 to C008
Note: Do not turn on/off the UP/DWN terminal after shutting off the power. Otherwise, the Inverter may not store
data correctly.
•Allocate "27" (UP) and "28" (DWN) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
•This function is enabled only when frequency reference selection A001 is set to "01" or "02". If "01"
(terminal) is selected, however, this function is enabled for multi-step speed operation only.
•When you use an external analog input as frequency reference input, or when you set the jogging
operation frequency, this function is disabled.
•While the UP/DWN terminal is turned on, the acceleration/deceleration time depends on F002,
F003/F202, F203/F302, and F303. To switch between the 1st/2nd/3rd controls, allocate 08 (SET)/
17 (SET3) to the desired multi-function input and then turn on/off the SET terminal.
•You can store a frequency set value after UP/DWN adjustment. Choose whether to store the value
with C101.
Also, you can clear the stored frequency set value.
By allocating "29" (UDC) to a multi-function input and turning on/off the UDC terminal, you can
clear or store the frequency reference setting adjusted at UP/DOWN.
Parameter No.
Data
Description
00
Does not store the frequency reference adjusted at UP/DWN.
After restoring the power, returns to the value set before UP/DWN adjustment.
01
Stores the frequency reference adjusted at UP/DWN.
After restoring the power, maintains the set value after UP/DWN adjustment.
C101
4-88
Functions
Data
4
4-2 Function Mode
RUN command
(FW, RV)
UP
DWN
Acceleration/Deceleration does
not occur if the UP and DWN
terminals turn on simultaneously.
Output
frequency
Functions
4
Forced Operator Function
•This function forcibly enables operation via the Digital Operator by turning on/off the multi-function
terminal if the frequency reference/RUN command sources are not set to the Digital Operator.
Data
Symbol
31
Function name
OPE
Status
Description
ON
Prioritizes the command from the Digital Operator (A020,
A220 set values) over the A001 and A002 settings.
OFF
Operates according to the A001 and A002 settings.
Forced operator
Available input terminals
C001 to C008
Related codes
A001, A002
•If the Forced Operator function is selected in the multi-function input selection, the Inverter is
operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected
in A001 and A002, when the input signal is OFF. When the signal is ON, the Inverter is forced to
operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the Digital Operator.
•If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter
output. Before resuming operation, turn off the RUN command from each command source to
avoid possible danger and then input it again.
P/PI Switching Function
•This function allows you to switch the control (compensation) method for the speed control system
between proportional integral compensation and proportional compensation, when "sensorless
vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor vector control" is selected as the
control method.
Parameter No.
Function name
A044/A244/A344
V/f characteristics
selection
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
H005/H205
Speed response
H050/H250
Default setting
Unit
03: SLV (A344 is blank.)
04: 0 Hz (A344 is blank.)
05: Sensor vector
00
⎯
43: PPI (P/PI switching)
⎯
⎯
0.001 to 80.000
1.590
⎯
PI proportional gain
0.0 to 999.9/1000
100.0
%
H051/H251
PI integral gain
0.0 to 999.9/1000
100.0
%
H052/H252
P proportional gain
0.001 to 10.00
1.00
⎯
4-89
Data
4-2 Function Mode
•If P/PI switching is selected in the multi-function input selection, proportional integral compensation
is enabled while the signal is off; proportional compensation is enabled while the signal is on.
If P/PI switching is not selected in multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008), proportional integral
compensation is enabled.
Normally, the Inverter performs proportional integral compensation
(PI control) for speed control so that the difference between
frequency reference and actual rpm becomes zero. If one load is
operated by several motors, however, proportional control (P
control) may be required. To enable proportional control (P
control), allocate the P/PI switching function to any of multifunction input terminals S1 to S8 (set "43" in any of C001 to
C008) via the Digital Operator, and turn on the terminal. If you
choose to enable proportional control, set a "KPP" value in H052
(P proportional gain).
P control
PI control
Torque
(A)
100%
4
rpm
0
10
(Speed change ratio) =
(KPP set value)
%
The relationship between speed change ratio and speed error is
expressed broadly in the following formula:
Speed error at rated torque (A)
(Speed change ratio) =
Synchronous rpm at base frequency
× 100%
Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM)
•This function forcibly enables operation via the control terminal block by turning on/off the multifunction terminal if the frequency reference/RUN command sources are not set to the control
terminal block.
Data
Symbol
Function name
51
F-TM
Multi-function input selection
Description
Forced terminal
Available input terminals
C001 to C008
Related codes
A001, A002
•If the Forced Terminal Block function is selected in the multi-function input selection, the Inverter
is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source
selected in A001 and A002, when the input signal is OFF. When the signal is ON, the Inverter is
forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the control circuit terminal
block.
•If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter
output. Before resuming operation, turn off the RUN command from each command source to
avoid possible danger and then input it again.
4-90
Functions
The relationship between the KPP value and speed change ratio
is expressed broadly in the following formula:
4-2 Function Mode
Analog Command Hold Function
•While the AHD terminal is turned on, the Inverter keeps external analog input results on hold.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
65: AHD (analog command held)
•While the AHD terminal is turned on, you can use the UP/DWN function based on the reference
value of the analog signal kept on hold by this function.
•If UP/DWN selection C101 is set to "01", the Inverter can store an UP/DWN result.
•If the power is turned on with the AHD terminal turned on, or if the RS terminal is turned on and
then off, the Inverter employs the data kept on hold immediately before.
4
Functions
AHD terminal
ON
Analog input value
Frequency reference
Note1: If the control function is switched via the SET/SET3 terminal with the AHD terminal turned
on, the set frequency is retained. To change the control function, turn off the AHD terminal
once, and keep the analog signal on hold again.
Note 2: If this function is frequently used, the internal storage element service life may be shortened.
Multi-function Pulse Counter (PCNT, PCC)
•The Inverter can input pulse trains via a multi-function input.
•With pulse counter monitor d028, you can monitor the total count of input pulses.
Parameter No.
Function name
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
Data
74: PCNT (pulse counter)
75: PCC (pulse counter clear)
Related functions
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
d028
•The total pulse count value cannot be stored. After the power is turned on or after reset, the counter
is reset to zero.
•Turning on PCC (pulse counter clear) clears the total count value.
•The input pulse frequency resolution can be obtained with the following formula. (This applies to
pulse input with a 50% duty ratio.) The Inverter cannot input frequency higher than the specified
frequency resolution. It is recommended that you use input frequencies up to 100 Hz. For details
on input terminal response, refer to "Input Terminal Response Time" (page 4-105).
Frequency resolution (Hz) = 250/(Input terminal response time set values C160 to C168 + 1
Example: When the input terminal response time = 1, the frequency resolution = 125 Hz.
Input terminal response time
Input pulse
PCNT
ON
OFF
Counter value
4-91
1
2
3
4
4-2 Function Mode
Multi-function Output Terminal Selection
•You can allocate the following functions to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021
to C025) or the alarm relay output terminal (C026).
•Multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 provide open-collector output. The alarm relay output
terminal provides relay output.
•You can select NO- or NC-contact output for each output terminal with C031 to C035, or C036.
•If alarm code output is selected in C062 (refer to page 4-98), alarm code output (AC0 to AC3) is
provided via output terminals P1 to P3 (for 3-bit code), or via output terminals P1 to P4 (for 4-bit
code). The C021 to C025 settings are disabled.
Data
Description
RUN: Signal during RUN
01
FA1: Constant speed arrival signal
02
FA2: Over set frequency arrival signal
03
Page
Signal during RUN
4-95
Frequency arrival signal
4-95
OL: Overload warning
Overload limit/Overload warning
4-49
04
OD: Excessive PID deviation
PID function
4-31
05
AL: Alarm output
⎯
⎯
06
FA3: Set-frequency-only arrival signal
Frequency arrival signal
4-95
07
OTQ: Overtorque
Overtorque
4-97
08
IP: Signal during momentary power
interruption
Momentary power interruption/Undervoltage
4-44
09
UV: Signal during undervoltage
10
TRQ: Torque limit
Torque limit function
4-57
11
RNT: RUN time over
RUN time over
4-52
12
ONT: Power ON time over
Power ON time over
4-52
13
THM: Thermal warning
Electronic thermal function
4-46
19
BRK: Brake release
Brake control function
4-73
20
BER: Brake error
21
ZS: 0-Hz signal
0-Hz detection signal
4-98
22
DSE: Excessive speed deviation
V2 control mode selection
4-119
23
POK: Position ready
Orientation function
4-129
24
FA4: Set frequency exceeded 2
Frequency arrival signal
4-95
25
FA5: Set frequency only 2
26
OL2: Overload warning 2
Overload limit/Overload warning
4-49
27
FVDc: Analog FV disconnection detection
28
FIDc: Analog FI disconnection detection
Window comparator function
4-63
29
FEDc: Analog FE disconnection detection
31
FBV: PID FB status output
PID function
4-31
32
NDc: Network error
Network error
4-101
4-92
4
Functions
00
Reference item
4-2 Function Mode
Data
Functions
4
Description
33
LOG1: Logic operation output 1
34
LOG2: Logic operation output 2
35
LOG3: Logic operation output 3
36
LOG4: Logic operation output 4
37
LOG5: Logic operation output 5
38
LOG6: Logic operation output 6
39
Reference item
Page
Logic operation function
4-99
WAC: Capacitor life warning signal
Capacitor life warning signal
4-100
40
WAF: Cooling fan life warning signal
Cooling fan speed drop signal
4-101
41
FR: Starting contact signal
Starting contact signal
4-102
42
OHF: Fin overheat warning
Fin overheat warning
4-102
43
LOC: Light load detection signal
Light load detection signal
4-103
44
Not used
45
Not used
46
Not used
47
Not used
48
Not used
49
Not used
50
IRDY: Operation ready signal
Operation ready signal
4-103
51
FWR: Forward run signal
Forward run signal
4-104
52
RVR: Reverse run signal
Reverse run signal
4-104
53
MJA: Fatal fault signal
Fatal fault signal
4-104
54
WCFV: Window comparator FV
55
WCFI: Window comparator FI
Window comparator function
4-63
56
WCFE: Window comparator FE
⎯
Related functions
C021 to C025, C026
Multi-function Output Terminal Contact Selection
•You can set NO- or NC-contact output individually for multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 as
well as the relay output terminal.
•Multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 provide open-collector output.
Parameter No.
Function name
C031 to C035
Multi-function output
terminal contact selection
C036
Relay output (MA, MB)
contact selection
4-93
Data
Default setting
Unit
00: NO contact
01: NC contact
00
⎯
00: NO contact between MA and MC
01: NC contact between MA and MC
01
⎯
4-2 Function Mode
„Specifications of Multi-function Output Terminals P1 to P5
•Below are the specifications of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5.
P5
PC
P1
Inside the Inverter
C031 to C035 set values
Power
supply
Output
status
Electrical characteristics
ON
00
(NO contact)
Between each terminal and PC
Voltage drop 4 V max. at power-on
Max. allowable voltage: 27 V DC
Max. allowable current: 50 mA
ON
OFF
⎯
OFF
Functions
ON
01
(NC contact)
ON
OFF
⎯
OFF
„Specifications of the Relay Output Terminals
•The relay output terminals have an SPDT contact configuration. Below is its operation.
MC
MA
MB
Inside the Inverter
(Default value: C036 = 01)
(Example) When the relay output terminals are used for alarm
C036
set
values
Output terminal
status
Power
Resistance load
Inverter
status
MA-MC
Max.
contact
capacity
MB-MC
Inductive load
250 V AC, 2 A
30 V DC, 8 A
250 V AC, 0.2 A
30 V DC, 0.6 A
MA-MC
Abnormal
Closed
Open
Min.
contact
capacity
Normal
Open
Closed
Max.
contact
capacity
100 V AC, 10 mA
5 V DC, 100 mA
ON
00
250 V AC, 1 A
30 V DC, 1 A
250 V AC, 0.2 A
30 V DC, 0.2 A
MB-MC
OFF
01
(Default)
⎯
Open
Closed
Abnormal
Open
Closed
Normal
Closed
Open
⎯
Open
Closed
Min.
contact
capacity
100 V AC, 10 mA
5 V DC, 100 mA
ON
OFF
4
4-94
4-2 Function Mode
Signal During RUN
•While the Inverter is running, this signal is output via multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 or the
relay output terminal.
•Allocate "00" (RUN) to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to C025) or the relay
output terminal (C026).
•This signal is also output during DC injection braking.
Below is the time chart.
Output frequency
FW
4
Functions
RUN
Frequency Arrival Signal
•When the output frequency reaches the set level, a frequency arrival signal is output.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C042
Arrival frequency during
acceleration
C045
Arrival frequency during
acceleration 2
C043
Arrival frequency during
deceleration
C046
Arrival frequency during
deceleration 2
Data
Default
setting
Unit
0.0: Does not output arrival signal during acceleration.
0.1 to 400.0: Outputs arrival signal during acceleration.
0.0
Hz
0.0: Does not output arrival signal during deceleration.
0.1 to 400.0: Outputs arrival signal during deceleration.
0.0
Hz
•For elevating machines, use this signal for applying the brake. To release the brake, use the
overtorque signal.
•Allocate "01" (FA1: Constant speed arrival signal), "02" (FA2: Set frequency exceeded), "06" (FA3:
Set frequency only), "24" (FA4: Set frequency exceeded 2), or "25" (FA5: Set frequency only 2) to
any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to C025) or the relay output terminal (C026).
•Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal:
ON: (Set frequency - 1% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
OFF: (Set frequency - 2% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
If "06" (FA3) or "25" (FA5) is set, however, operation during acceleration is:
ON: (Set frequency - 1% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
OFF: (Set frequency + 2% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
and operation during deceleration is:
ON: (Set frequency + 1% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
OFF: (Set frequency - 2% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
4-95
4-2 Function Mode
„Constant Speed Arrival Output (01: FA1)
A signal is output when the output frequency has reached the level set in the frequency setting
(F001, A020, A220, and A320) or multi-step speed (A021 to A035).
Set frequency
foff
fon
fon: 1% of the max. frequency
foff: 2% of the max. frequency
Output frequency
(Example) Max. frequency fmax = 120 (Hz)
Set frequency fset = 60 (Hz)
fon = 120 × 0.01 = 1.2 (Hz)
foff = 120 × 0.02 = 2.4 (Hz)
During acceleration: ON at 60 - 1.2 = 58.8 (Hz)
During deceleration: OFF at 60 - 2.4 = 57.6 (Hz)
FA1
Functions
„Set-frequency-exceeded Output (02: FA2, 24: FA4)
A signal is output when the output frequency has exceeded the arrival frequencies during
acceleration/deceleration set in [C042, C043 (FA2)] and [C045, C046 (FA4)].
C042/C045
fon
Output frequency
C043/C046
foff
fon: 1% of the max. frequency
foff: 2% of the max. frequency
FA2/FA4
„Set-frequency-only Output (06: FA3, 25: FA5)
A signal is output when the output frequency equals the arrival frequencies during acceleration/
deceleration set in [C042, C043 (FA3)] and [C045, C046 (FA5)].
Output frequency
C042/C045
foff
fon
C043/C046
foff
4
fon: 1% of the max. frequency
foff: 2% of the max. frequency
fon
FA3/FA5
4-96
4-2 Function Mode
Overtorque (OTQ)
•This function outputs a signal when detecting a motor output torque estimated value exceeding a
specified level.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C055
Overtorque level
(Forward power running)
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
OTQ signal output level for forward
power running
100.
%
C056
Overtorque level
(Reverse regeneration)
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
OTQ signal output level for reverse
regeneration
100.
%
C057
Overtorque level
(Reverse power running)
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
OTQ signal output level for reverse
power running
100.
%
C058
Overtorque level
(Forward regeneration)
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
OTQ signal output level for forward
regeneration
100.
%
⎯
07: OTQ: Overtorque signal
Functions
4
Related functions
Unit
05
A044, A244, A344, C063
•Enabled when "overtorque signal" is selected in the multi-function output selection. You can use
this function only when "sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor
vector control" is selected in V/f characteristics selection A044/A244. With other settings, the
output is unstable.
•For elevating machines, use this signal for releasing the brake. To close the brake, use the
frequency arrival signal.
4-97
4-2 Function Mode
0-Hz Detection Signal
•This function outputs a detection signal when the Inverter's output frequency falls below the 0-Hz
detection value set in 0-Hz detection level C063.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C063
0-Hz detection level
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
21: ZS (0-Hz signal)
05
0.00 to 100.0:
Set a frequency to be detected as 0 Hz.
Related functions
Hz
0.00
4
A044, A244, A344
Alarm Code Output (AC0 to AC3)
•This function outputs a 3-bit or 4-bit code signal to indicate the cause of an Inverter trip.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
00: Disabled
C062
Alarm code selection
01: 3-bit code
02: 4-bit code
•If "01" (3-bit) or "02" (4-bit) is selected in alarm code selection C062, multi-function output terminals
P1 to P3, or P1 to P4, are forced to output an alarm code.
The following table shows the output alarm codes.
Multi-function output terminals
With 4-bit code selected
14
13
12
11
AC3
AC2
AC1
AC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
E01 to E03,
Overcurrent protection
E04
0
0
1
0
E05, E38
Overload protection
Overload protection in a low
speed range
0
0
1
1
E07, E15
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
Factor code
Normal
Trip cause
Normal
With 3-bit code selected
Factor code
Normal
Trip cause
Normal
E01 to E03,
Overcurrent protection
E04
E05
Overload protection
Overvoltage/Incoming
overvoltage protection
E07, E15
Overvoltage/Incoming
overvoltage protection
E09
Undervoltage protection
E09
Undervoltage protection
1
E16
Momentary power interruption
protection
E16
Momentary power
interruption protection
0
E30
IGBT error
E30
IGBT error
4-98
Functions
•Enabled when "21" (ZS) is allocated to any of multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 (C021 to
C025) or the relay output terminal (C026).
When "VC", "special VP", "free V/F", "sensorless vector control", or "0-Hz sensorless vector
control" is selected as the control method, this function works for the Inverter's output frequency.
When the control method is "sensor vector control", this function works for the motor rotation
frequency.
4-2 Function Mode
Multi-function output terminals
With 4-bit code selected
14
13
12
11
AC3
AC2
AC1
AC0
0
1
1
1
E06
1
0
0
0
E08, E11
E23, E25
1
0
0
1
E10
1
0
1
0
E12, E13
E35, E36
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
Factor code
Functions
4
Trip cause
With 3-bit code selected
Factor code
Trip cause
Braking resistor overload
protection
⎯
Other errors
EEPROM error, CPU error,
GA communication error, Main
circuit error
⎯
⎯
CT error
⎯
⎯
External trip, USP error,
Thermistor error, Brake error
⎯
⎯
E14
Grounding protection
⎯
⎯
1
E20
Abnormal temperature due to
the cooling fin's speed drop
0
1
E21
Abnormal temperature
⎯
⎯
1
1
0
E24
Input phase loss protection
⎯
⎯
1
1
1
E50 to E79
Network error, Options 1, 2
Errors 0 to 9
⎯
⎯
Output Signal Logic Operation
•This function performs output signal logic operations inside the Inverter.
•All output signals are operation targets.
However, the logic operation outputs (LOG1 to LOG6) are not subject to operations.
Parameter No.
C021 to C025
Function name
Multi-function
output terminal
selection
Data
33: LOG1
(Logic operation output [C142, C143, C144])
34: LOG2
(Logic operation output 2 [C145, C146, C147])
35: LOG3
(Logic operation output 3 [C148, C149, C150])
36: LOG4
(Logic operation output 4 [C151, C152, C153])
37: LOG5
(Logic operation output 5 [C154, C155, C156])
38: LOG6
(Logic operation output 6 [C157, C158, C159])
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
C026
Relay output
(MA, MB) function
selection
C142/C145/C148/
C151/C154/C157
Logic output signal
selection 1
Select 00 to 50 from the multi-function output
data (other than LOG1 to LOG6):
Select operand 1.
00
⎯
C143/C146/C149/
C152/C155/C158
Logic output signal
selection 2
Select 00 to 50 from the multi-function output
data (other than LOG1 to LOG6):
Select operand 2.
00
⎯
C144/C147/C150/
C153/C156/C159
Logic output signal
operator selection
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
00
⎯
4-99
05
4-2 Function Mode
•You can select from three types of operators (AND, OR, and XOR).
Output signal 1
Output signal 2
LOGx (AND)
LOGx (OR)
LOGx (XOR)
•The setting parameters vary depending on the logic operation output selected.
Refer to the following table to set the necessary parameters.
4
Operand 1
selection
Operand 2
selection
Operator
selection
33: Logic operation output 1 (LOG1)
C142
C143
C144
34: Logic operation output 2 (LOG2)
C145
C146
C147
35: Logic operation output 3 (LOG3)
C148
C149
C150
36: Logic operation output 4 (LOG4)
C151
C152
C153
37: Logic operation output 5 (LOG5)
C154
C155
C156
38: Logic operation output 6 (LOG6)
C157
C158
C159
Functions
Selected signal
(Example) To output a logic output 1 (LOG1) signal through AND operation of "RUN signal" (00:
RUN) and "over set frequency arrival signal" (02: FA2) to multi-function output 2
•Multi-function input 2 selection (C002)
: 33 (LOG1)
•Logic output signal 1 selection 1 (C142)
: 00 (RUN)
•Logic output signal 1 selection 2 (C143)
: 02 (FA2)
•Logic output signal 1 operator selection (C144): 00 (AND)
Capacitor Life Warning Signal
•This function determines estimated service life of the capacitor on the PCB, based on the Inverter's
internal temperature and ON time.
•Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal.
•If this function is activated, it is recommended that the main circuit board and logic board be
replaced.
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Data
39: WAC
(Capacitor life warning signal (on PCB))
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
05
4-100
4-2 Function Mode
Network Error
•Enabled only when ModBus-RTU is selected for RS485 communication.
•If a reception timeout error occurs, this signal is output until reception of the next data.
•Set a time before reception timeout in communication error timeout C077.
•For details, refer to "4-4 Communication Function".
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C077
Communication error
timeout
Functions
4
Data
Default setting
Unit
⎯
32: NDc (network communication
disconnection detection)
⎯
05
0.00 to 99.99:
Set a time before reception timeout.
0.00
s
External controller
Inverter
Monitor timer
Communication trip time
(C077)
Communication disconnection detection signal (NDc)
Cooling Fan Speed Drop Signal
•This signal is output when detecting that the Inverter's built-in cooling fan rotation speed is reduced
to 75% or less.
•If "01" is selected in cooling fan control b092, this signal is not output even while the fan is stopped.
•While this signal is output, check the cooling fan for clogging.
•Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal.
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output terminal
selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Related functions
4-101
Data
Default setting
40: WAF
(cooling fan life warning signal)
⎯
⎯
05
b092, d022
Unit
4-2 Function Mode
Starting Contact Signal
•While the Inverter is receiving the RUN command, a starting contact signal is output.
•The output is enabled regardless of the setting of RUN command source selection A002.
•If inputs FW and RV are simultaneously turned on, the Inverter stops.
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
41: FR (starting contact signal)
05
4
Forward command
Reverse command
Functions
Starting contact signal (FR)
Fin Overheat Warning
•This function monitors the Inverter's internal fin temperature and outputs a signal when the
temperature exceeds the fin overheat warning level (C064).
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
Data
Default setting
⎯
⎯
42: OHF (cooling fin overheat warning)
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C064
Fin overheat warning
level
Unit
05
0. to 200.: Set a temperature to output the
overheat warning signal.
120
°C
4-102
4-2 Function Mode
Light Load Detection Signal
•This signal is output when output current falls below the light load detection level (C039).
•In light load signal output mode C038, you can set whether this output is enabled in any operation
mode, or only in constant speed operation.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C038
Light load signal output
mode
00: Enabled in operation
01: Enabled only in constant speed
operation
C039
Light load detection level
0.0 to 2.0 × Rated current:
Set an output level for low current signals.
Default setting
⎯
⎯
43: LOC (light load detection signal)
Functions
4
Unit
05
01
⎯
Rated current
A
Output
current (A)
Low current
signal detection
level
(C039)
Low current signal
Operation Ready Signal
•This signal is output when the Inverter becomes ready for operation (ready to receive the RUN
command).
•Even if the RUN command is input while this signal is not output, the Inverter does not recognize
the RUN command.
•If this signal is not output, check if the input power supply voltage (R, S, T) is within the specified
range.
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
Data
Default setting
⎯
⎯
50: IRDY (operation ready signal)
C026
4-103
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Unit
05
4-2 Function Mode
Forward Run Signal
•This signal is output while the Inverter is running forward.
•While the Inverter is running in reverse, or when stopped, this signal is turned off.
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
⎯
⎯
51: FWR (forward run signal)
05
4
Reverse Run Signal
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
Data
Default setting
⎯
⎯
52: RVR (reverse run signal)
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C026
Unit
05
Output frequency
(kHz)
Signal during
forward operation
Signal during
reverse operation
Fatal Fault Signal
Parameter No.
Function name
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminal selection
Data
Default setting
⎯
⎯
53: MJA (fatal fault signal)
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Unit
05
•In addition to an alarm, this signal is output if any of the following trips occurs.
4-104
Functions
•This signal is output while the Inverter is running in reverse.
•While the Inverter is running forward, or when stopped, this signal is turned off.
4-2 Function Mode
(These trips are caused by hardware.)
Error code
Description
1
E10.*
CT error
2
E11.*
CPU error
3
E14.*
Grounding protection
4
E20.*
Abnormal temperature due to cooling fan stop
5
E23.*
Gate array communications error
6
E25.*
Main circuit error
Multi-function Output Terminal ON Delay/OFF Delay
•You can set ON/OFF delay times for each output terminal.
Functions
4
No.
Output terminal
ON delay time
OFF delay time
P1
C130
C131
P2
C132
C133
P3
C134
C135
P4
C136
C137
P5
C138
C139
RY (AL*)
C140
C141
•All output signals immediately turn on/off when the specified conditions are satisfied. Depending
on the selected signal, chattering may occur. In such a case, use this function to hold or delay the
signal.
•Set the parameters for individual output terminals (multi-function output terminals P1 to P5 and the
relay output terminal: six terminals in total). For the output terminals and the corresponding
parameters, refer to the table below.
Function code
Item
C130/C132/C134/C136/
C138/C140
Output ON delay
C131/C133/C135/C137/
C139/C141
Output OFF delay
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.0 to 100.0:
Set an ON delay time.
0.0
s
0.0 to 100.0:
Set an OFF delay time.
0.0
s
Input Terminal Response Time
•You can set a sampling time individually for multi-function input terminals S1 to S8 as well as the
FW terminal. This helps remove chattering or other noise.
•If the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering, increase the set value. The larger
the data value is, the slower the response time. A setting range of 0 to 200 is available, which
corresponds to approx. 2 to 400 ms.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
C160 to C167
Input terminal response time
1
ms
C168
FW terminal response time
0. to 200. (× 2 ms):
Can be set in increments of 1.
4-105
4-2 Function Mode
Digital MP Terminal
•You can monitor the output frequency and current using the MP terminal on the control circuit
terminal block.
•The MP terminal provides pulse output.
„MP Selection
•Select a signal to output from the following table.
For "03" (digital output frequency), use the digital frequency counter.
For other output signals, use the analog meter.
Parameter No.
Data
Description
Full-scale value
Output frequency (example 1)
0 to Max. frequency (Hz)*3
01
Output current (example 1)
0% to 200%
02
Output torque (example 1)
*1
0% to 200%
03
Digital output frequency (example 2)
0 to Max. frequency (Hz)
04
Output voltage (example 1)
0% to 100%
05
Input voltage (example 1)
0% to 200%
06
Thermal load rate (example 1)
0% to 100%
07
LAD frequency (example 1)
0 to Max. frequency (Hz)
08
Digital current monitor
*2
09
Motor temperature
0°C to 200°C (0°C output at 0°C or lower)
10
Fin temperature
0°C to 200°C (0°C output at 0°C or lower)
12
Not used
4
Functions
00
C027
*1. This output is enabled only when "SLV", "0-Hz SLV", or "V2" is selected. (Refer to "Control Method (V/f
Characteristics)" (page 4-21).)
(Example 1) Set values: 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 07, 09, 10, 12
(Example 2) Set values: 03, 08
t
t
T
T
Cycle T: Constant (6.4 ms)
Duty ratio t/T: Variable
Cycle T: Variable
Duty ratio t/T: Fixed to 1/2
*2. Digital current monitor
• When the monitor displays the value set in digital current monitor reference value C030, 1440 Hz is
output.
Parameter No.
C030
Function name
Data
Digital current monitor 0.2 × Rated current to 2.0 × Rated current:
reference value
Set a current value at 1440-Hz output.
Default setting
Unit
Rated current
A
*3. When "sensor vector control" is selected (A044 = 05), the real frequency (detected frequency) is displayed.
4-106
4-2 Function Mode
„MP Adjustment
•Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meter connected to the MP terminal.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
C105
MP gain setting
50. to 200.: Set a gain for the MP monitor.
100.
%
Related functions
C027, b081
Analog Output AM/AMI Terminals
You can monitor the output frequency and current using the AM and AMI terminals on the control
circuit terminal block.
The AM terminal provides 0- to 10-V analog output.
The AMI terminal provides 4- to 20-mA analog output.
Functions
4
„AM/AMI Selection
•Select a signal to output from the following table.
Parameter
No.
Function name
Data
Default
setting
Unit
00
⎯
00: Output frequency (0 to Max. frequency (Hz)*3)
01: Output current (0% to 200%)
02: Output torque *1(0% to 200%)
04: Output voltage (0% to 100%)
05: Input voltage (0% to 200%)
06: Thermal load rate (0% to 100%)
C028/C029
AM selection/
AMI selection
07: LAD frequency (0 to Max. frequency [Hz])
09: Motor temperature (0°C to 200°C) (0°C output at 0°C or
lower)
10: Fin temperature
(0°C to 200°C) (0°C output at 0°C or lower)
11: Output torque (signed)
(AM output only. 0% to 200% *1 *2)
13: Not used
14: Not used
*1. This output is enabled only when "SLV", "0-Hz SLV", or "V2" is selected. (Refer to "Control Method (V/f
Characteristics)" (page 4-21).)
4-107
4-2 Function Mode
*2. Below are the specifications of the output torque (signed).
AM output (V)
AM gain setting (C106) = 100%
10
AM gain setting (C106) = 200%
5
0
AM bias setting (C109) = 50%
100
200
Torque (%)
*3. When "sensor vector control" is selected (A044 = 05), the real frequency (detected frequency) is displayed.
4
„AM/AMI Adjustment
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
C106
AM gain setting
50. to 200.: Set a gain for the AM monitor.
100.
C109
AM bias setting
0 to 100:
Set an offset for the AM monitor.
0.
C107
AMI gain setting
50. to 200.: Set a gain for the AMI monitor.
100.
C110
AMI bias setting
0 to 100:
Set an offset for the AMI monitor.
20.
Unit
%
Note: The offset data is set in %.
(Example) If AMI provides 4 to 20 mA output, the offset value is 20% (= 4/20). (Default value)
Operation Selection During Option Error
If the built-in optional board causes an error, you can set whether the Inverter trips or continues to
run regardless of the option error.
Parameter No.
Function name
P001/P002
Operation selection at
option error
Data
00: TRP (Outputs an alarm.)
01: RUN (Continues to operate.)
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
<Group H: Motor Control Parameters>
Offline Auto-Tuning Function
•This function enables measurement and automatic setting of the motor parameters required for
"sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", and "sensor vector control".
•To perform "sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor vector control"
for a motor with unknown motor parameters, perform offline auto-tuning to determine the motor
parameters.
•To use the online auto-tuning function described later, be sure to perform offline auto-tuning.
•This function is applicable to 1st/2nd control, not to 3rd control.
4-108
Functions
•Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals.
4-2 Function Mode
•For motor parameters, the Inverter inputs data on one phase of Y-connection at 50 Hz.
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
H001
Auto-tuning selection
Data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Motor does not rotate.)
02: Enabled (Motor rotates.)
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
00
⎯
H002/H202
00: Standard motor parameter
01: Auto-tuning parameter
Motor parameter selection
02: Auto-tuning parameter
(Online auto-tuning enabled.)
H003/H203
Motor capacity selection
0.2 to 160.0
Factory default
kW
H004/H204
Motor pole number
selection
2/4/6/8/10
4
Pole
H030/H230
Motor parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
0.000 to 65.53
Depends on the
motor capacity.
Ω
H031/H231
Motor parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
0.000 to 65.53
Depends on the
motor capacity.
Ω
H032/H232
Motor parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
0.00 to 655.3
Depends on the
motor capacity.
mH
H033/H233
Motor parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
0.00 to 655.3
Depends on the
motor capacity.
A
H034/H234
Motor parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9999.
Depends on the
motor capacity.
kgm2
A003
Base frequency
30 to Max. frequency
60
Hz
A051
DC injection braking
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
⎯
AVR voltage selection
200/215/220/230/240:
Selectable for 200-V class
380/400/415/440/460/480:
Selectable for 400-V class
200/400
⎯
A082
•Note the following before use:
•Set base frequency A003 and AVR voltage selection A082 according to the specifications of the
motor to be measured.
•The motor parameters can be determined for motors with the maximum applicable capacity or
one rank lower motor size. For motors with other capacities, correct constant data may not be
obtained. (In some cases, auto-tuning may not be completed. In this case, pressing the STOP/
RESET key displays an error message.)
•If DC injection braking selection A051 is set to "01" (enabled), the data cannot be measured
correctly. Be sure to set to "00" (disabled). (The default setting is "00" (disabled).)
•If "02" (auto-tuning with motor rotation) is selected in auto-tuning selection H001, note the
following:
•Make sure there is no problem even if the motor accelerates up to approx. 80% of the base
frequency.
•The motor is not driven by external equipment.
•The brake is released.
•During auto-tuning, the output torque is insufficient, which may cause an elevator system to
slip and fall. To prevent this, remove the motor from the load machine, and perform the autotuning for the motor separately. (In this case, moment of inertia (J) is determined for the single
motor. You should add a motor shaft conversion value of the load machine's moment of
inertial to parameter J.)
4-109
4-2 Function Mode
•With a machine (e.g. lift, ball screw) whose motor shaft rotation is limited, the machine may
be damaged if the allowable rotation limit is exceeded. In this case, set H001 to "01" (autotuning without motor rotation).
•With a motor whose no-load current is unknown, measure the current at 50 Hz in the "V/f
setting" mode, and perform auto-tuning after setting the current value in H023/H223.
•Even if "01" (auto-tuning without motor rotation) is selected in H001, the motor may slightly
rotate.
•To perform auto-tuning for one rank lower motor size, enable the overload limit function and set
the overload limit level to 1.5 times the rated current of the motor.
Operating Procedure
(1) Set auto-tuning selection H001 to "01" or "02".
(2) Turn on the RUN command.
Turning on the RUN command starts automatic operation in the following sequence.
4
Functions
(1) 1st AC excitation (Motor does not run.)
↓
(2) 2nd AC excitation (Motor does not run.)
↓
(3) 1st DC excitation (Motor does not run.)
↓
(4) V/f operation (Motor accelerates up to 80% of the base frequency.)
↓
(5) SLV operation (Motor accelerates up to x% of the base frequency.)
↓
(6) 2nd DC excitation (Motor does not run.)
↓
(7) The auto-tuning result is displayed.
Note 1: When "auto-tuning without motor rotation" is selected (H001 = 01), steps (4) and (5) are not
performed.
Note 2: The rotation frequency in step (5) is defined as follows ("T" is whichever larger value of
acceleration time or deceleration time in step (4)):
When T ≤ 0 < 50 s,
x = 40%
When 50 s ≤ T < 100 s, x = 20%
When 100 s ≤ T,
x = 10%
Note 3: The auto-tuning result is displayed as follows:
Normal end
Abnormal end
_k_k_ko
_k_k_kz
If auto-tuning abnormally ends, perform it again.
(Press the STOP/RESET key to clear the display.)
Note 4: If a trip occurs during auto-tuning, the auto-tuning processing is forced to stop.
(No error message appears. Trip display is given higher priority.)
After removing the cause of a trip, perform the auto-tuning again.
Note 5: If the auto-tuning is interrupted by STOP command input (by pressing the STOP key or by
turning off the RUN command), the parameters for auto-tuning may remain in the Inverter.
To perform the auto-tuning again, initialize the parameters, and then set each parameter
again. (This also applies when you restart ordinary operation.)
Note 6: If the offline auto-tuning is performed with "free V/f setting" selected as the control method,
the Inverter displays an error message and stops processing.
Note 7: Even if auto-tuning is completed normally, the Inverter cannot be operated with the tuning
data. To do so, be sure to set motor parameter selection H002 to "01".
4-110
4-2 Function Mode
Online Auto-Tuning Function
•Online auto-tuning compensates for changes in motor parameters resulting from a motor
temperature rise or other factor, thus ensuring stable operation.
•This function is applicable to 1st/2nd control, not to 3rd control.
Parameter No.
H002/H202
Function name
Motor parameter selection
Data
00: Standard motor parameter
01: Auto-tuning parameter
02: Auto-tuning parameter
(Online auto-tuning data enabled.)
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
Note the following before use:
•Be sure to perform the offline auto-tuning before the online auto-tuning.
•This function calculates online auto-tuning data during offline auto-tuning. Even with a generalpurpose motor, perform offline auto-tuning once.
•After the motor is stopped, online auto-tuning is performed for 5 seconds max. (For tuning R1 and
R2, this function performs DC excitation once. The tuning result is not displayed.) If the RUN
command is input during this period, priority is given to the RUN command, and the online autotuning is aborted. (The tuning result is not reflected.)
•With "DC injection braking during stop" selected, online auto-tuning starts after DC injection
braking is completed.
•If FOC and SON are allocated to terminals, online auto-tuning is not performed.
Functions
4
Operating Procedure
(1) Set motor parameter selection H002 to "02" (online auto-tuning enabled).
(Set auto-tuning selection H001 to "00" (disabled).)
(2) Turn on the RUN command. (The Inverter automatically performs online auto-tuning during
stop.)
Secondary Resistance Compensation Function (Temperature
Compensation)
•This function compensates for speed fluctuations resulting from motor temperature changes, when
"sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor vector control" is selected
as the control method.
Use thermistor PB-41E (SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS).
•To use this function, set thermistor selection b098 to "02" (NTC).
(With other thermistors and settings, the motor temperature cannot be detected correctly.)
Parameter No.
Function name
P025
Secondary resistance
compensation enable/disable
selection
4-111
Data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
4-2 Function Mode
Motor Parameter Selection
•Set this parameter according to your motor.
•To use several motors with a single Inverter in the "VC", "special VP", or "free V/F setting" control
mode, calculate the total capacity of the motors and select the closest value in the motor capacity
selection.
•When automatic torque boost is used, improper setting of this parameter may result in torque
reduction or motor hunting.
•The motor parameters for "sensorless vector control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor
vector control" can be selected from the following three types:
•Motor parameter of a standard motor
•Motor parameter measured by offline auto-tuning
•Arbitrarily set motor parameter
•For 3rd control, motor parameters specified for 1st control are used.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Unit
00
⎯
00
⎯
A044/A244/
A344
V/f characteristics
selection
H002/H202
Motor parameter
selection
00: Standard motor parameter
01: Auto-tuning parameter
02: Online auto-tuning parameter
H003/H203
Motor capacity
selection
0.2 to 160.0
Factory default
kW
H004/H204
Motor pole number
selection
2/4/6/8/10
4
Pole
H020/H220
Motor parameter R1
0.000 to 65.53
Depends on the
motor capacity.
Ω
H021/H221
Motor parameter R2
0.000 to 65.53
Depends on the
motor capacity.
Ω
H022/H222
Motor parameter L
0.00 to 655.3
Depends on the
motor capacity.
mH
H023/H223
Motor parameter Io
0.00 to 655.3
Depends on the
motor capacity.
A
H024/H224
Motor parameter J
0.001 to 9999. *2
Depends on the
motor capacity.
kgm2
H030/H230
Motor parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
0.000 to 65.53
Depends on the
motor capacity.
Ω
H031/H231
Motor parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
0.000 to 65.53
Depends on the
motor capacity.
Ω
H032/H232
Motor parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
0.00 to 655.3
Depends on the
motor capacity.
mH
H033/H233
Motor parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
0.00 to 655.3
Depends on the
motor capacity.
A
H034/H234
Motor parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9999.
Depends on the
motor capacity.
kgm2
*1. For 1st control A044, all items (00 to 05) are selectable. However, for 2nd control A244 and 3rd control A344,
the selectable range is 00 to 04, and 00 to 01, respectively.
4-112
Functions
Default setting
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(Special VP)
02: V/f free setting *1
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV) *1
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector control *1
05: Sensor vector control (V2) *1
4
4-2 Function Mode
*2: Convert moment of inertia J into motor shaft data. The larger the J value, the faster the response, resulting in
a steep torque rise; the smaller the J value, the slower the response, resulting in a gradual torque rise. After
setting the J value, adjust the response speed in speed response H005/H205.
Arbitrary Motor Parameter
•For arbitrary settings of motor parameters, the function codes vary depending on the setting of 1st/
2nd control and on the set value of the motor parameter selection.
• When 1st/2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to "00" →
Directly enter H020 to H024.
• When 1st/2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to "01" or "02" →
Directly enter H030 to H034.
•If offline auto-tuning has not been performed, the motor parameters in the same capacity rank as
the Inverter (standard motor parameters) are set in H030/H230 to H034/H234.
4
Functions
Sensorless Vector Control
•This function estimates and controls motor rpm and output torque based on the Inverter's output
voltage and current, as well as the motor parameter settings. This control method provides high
starting torque in a low-frequency range (0.3 Hz), enabling high-precision operation.
•To use this function, set V/f characteristics selection A044/A244 to "03".
•To use this function, make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor.
(Refer to "Motor Parameter Selection" (page 4-112)).
•Note the following before use:
•Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower
than the motor size specified.
•If sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics, adjust the motor
parameters depending on the phenomena, as shown in the table below.
Operation
status
Power
running
Phenomenon
Adjusting method
Adjustment item
Speed change ratio is a
negative value.
Increase motor parameter R2 gradually (up to set
parameter × 1.2).
H021/H221/H031
Speed change ratio is a
positive value.
Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually (down to set
parameter × 0.8).
H021/H221/H031
Increase motor parameter R1 gradually (up to set
parameter × 1.2).
H020/H220/H030
Increase motor parameter Io gradually (up to set
parameter × 1.2).
H023/H223/H033
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H224/H034
Insufficient torque at low
Regeneration
frequency (several Hz)
During
startup
Shock occurs during
startup.
During
deceleration
Motor hunting
During
torque limit
Insufficient torque at low
frequency during torque
limit
Set a overload limit level lower than that of the torque.
b021
b041 to b044
Lowfrequency
operation
Rotation is not constant.
Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H224/H034
Reduce the speed response.
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H005/H205
H024/H224/H034
A001, A044/A244, F001, b040, b041 to b044, H002/H202, H003/H203,
Related functions
4-113
H004/H204, H005/H205, H020/H220, H021/H221, H022/H222, H023/
H223, H024/H224, H050/H250, H051/H251, H052/H252
4-2 Function Mode
Note 1: Make sure that the carrier frequency (b083) is not lower than 2.1 kHz. If the carrier frequency is lower than
2.1 Hz, the Inverter does not operate normally.
Note 2: To use lower rank motor size than the Inverter, set a torque limit value (b041 to b044), while keeping the
value α, calculated with the following formula, at 200% or lower. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
α = Torque limit set value × (Inverter capacity) / (Motor capacity)
(Example) If the Inverter capacity is 0.75 kW and the motor capacity is 0.4 kW, the torque limit set value for α =
200%, calculated with the above formula, is as follows: Torque limit set value (b041 to b044) = α ×
(Motor capacity) / (Inverter capacity) = 200% x (0.4 kW)/(0.75 kW) = 106%
0-Hz Sensorless Vector Control
Parameter No.
Function name
H060/H260
Limit at 0 Hz
H061/H261
Boost amount at SLV
startup, 0 Hz
Data
Default setting
Unit
0.0 to 100.0:
Current limit in low frequency range
100.0
%
0. to 50.: Current boost amount at startup
50.
%
•Note the following before use:
•Select an Inverter with one rank higher in capacity than the motor's.
•Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower
than the maximum applicable motor size.
•In the 0-Hz sensorless control mode, the digital command board (3GAX-DI01) cannot be used.
4-114
4
Functions
•This function enables high-torque operation in the 0-Hz range (0- to 3-Hz frequency reference).
This control method is particularly suitable for applications such as an elevating system, which
requires sufficient torque in a low-frequency range at startup (e.g. crane, hoist).
•To use this function, set V/f characteristics selection A044/A244 to "04".
•To use this function, make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor.
(Refer to "Motor Parameter Selection" (page 4-112).)
•The parameters for 0-Hz SLV control are as follows:
•In 0-Hz limit H060/H260, you can set a current value used for constant current control in the 0Hz range (generally, 3.0 Hz or lower). This parameter is expressed as a ratio of the output current
to the Inverter's rated current.
•In 0-Hz SLV startup boost amount H061/H261, you can set a current boost amount at startup in
the 0-Hz range. A current value expressed as a ratio to the Inverter's rated current is added to
the current value set in H060/H260 at startup only.
4-2 Function Mode
•If 0-Hz sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics, adjust the motor
parameters depending on the phenomena, as shown in the table below.
Operation
status
Power
running
Phenomenon
Adjustment item
Speed change ratio is a
negative value.
Increase motor parameter R2 gradually (up to set
parameter × 1.2).
H021/H221/H031
Speed change ratio is a
positive value.
Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually (down to set
parameter × 0.8).
H021/H221/H031
Increase motor parameter R1 gradually (up to set
parameter × 1.2).
H020/H220/H030
Increase motor parameter Io gradually (up to set
parameter × 1.2).
H023/H223/H033
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H224/H034
Insufficient torque at low
Regeneration
frequency (several Hz)
4
Functions
Adjusting method
During
startup
Shock occurs during
startup.
During
deceleration
Motor hunting
Immediately
after
deceleration
Overcurrent or
overvoltage protection is
activated.
Lowfrequency
operation
Rotation is not constant.
Reduce the speed response.
Related functions
H005/H205
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H224/H034
Reduce motor parameter Io gradually (down to set
parameter × 0.8).
H023/H223/H033
Set AVR selection A081 to "00" (always ON) or "01"
(always OFF).
A081
Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H224/H034
A001, A044/A244, F001, b040, b041 to b044, H002/H202, H003/H203,
H004/H204, H005/H205, H020/H220, H021/H221, H022/H222, H023/
H223, H024/H224, H050/H250, H051/H251, H052/H252, H060/H260,
H061/H261
Note 1: Make sure that the carrier frequency (b083) is not lower than 2.1 kHz. If the carrier frequency is at 2.1 Hz
or lower, the Inverter does not operate normally.
Note 2: Set a torque limit value (b041 to b044), while keeping the value α, calculated with the following formula,
at 200% or lower. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
α = Torque limit set value × (Inverter capacity) / (Motor capacity)
(Example) If the Inverter capacity is 0.75 kW and the motor capacity is 0.4 kW, the torque limit set value for α =
200%, calculated with the above formula, is as follows: Torque limit set value (b041 to b044) = α ×
(Motor capacity) / (Inverter capacity) = 200% × (0.4 kW)/(0.75 kW) = 106%
4-115
4-2 Function Mode
Torque Monitor Function
•This function allows you to monitor an estimated motor output torque, when "sensorless vector
control", "0-Hz sensorless vector control", or "sensor vector control" is selected as the control
method.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
A044/A244
V/f characteristics
selection
03: Sensorless vector
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector
05: Sensor vector (A244 is blank.)
00
⎯
C027
C028
C029
MP selection
AM selection
AMI selection
02: Output torque
11: Output torque (signed) (C028 only)
00
⎯
H003/H203
Motor capacity selection
0.20 to 160.0
Factory default
kW
H004/H204
Motor pole number
selection
2/4/6/8/10
4
Pole
•To use the monitor via the Digital Operator, select display code d012.
•To use the monitor with a signal from the control terminal block, refer to "Digital MP Terminal"
(page 4-106) or "Analog Output AM/AMI Terminals" (page 4-107).
•If "VC", "special VP", or "free V/f setting" is selected in V/f characteristics selection A044/A244, this
function is disabled, and the display or the output signal from the control terminal block is not
defined.
•For a torque monitor value of this function, the output torque at the rated frequency equivalent to
the motor's output rating during synchronous rotation is indicated as 100%.
•Since this function estimates output torque based on the motor current, the accuracy is approx.
20% when a motor with the same output capacity as the Inverter is used.
Preliminary Excitation Function (FOC)
•This function supplies excitation current from an input terminal to establish magnetic flux
preliminarily, when "03" (sensorless vector control), "04" (0-Hz sensorless vector control), or "05"
(sensor vector control) is selected in V/f characteristics selection A004/A244.
•Allocate 55 (FOC) to the desired multi-function input.
•The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the FOC terminal is turned on when FOC
is allocated.
•If the FOC terminal is turned off during operation, the Inverter goes into free-run status. If the FOC
terminal is turned on again, the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free-run stop selection
b088.
FOC
FW (RV)
Does not operate because
the FOC terminal is OFF.
Output frequency
Free running
Restarts according to b088.
Excitation current flows.
Related functions
A044/A244, C001 to C008
4-116
4
Functions
Parameter No.
4-2 Function Mode
High-torque Multi-operation
•When "sensorless vector control" or "0-Hz sensorless vector control" is selected with a single
Inverter, this function controls two motors of the same type to drive a single load.
•To use this function, you set the same parameters as when you select "Sensorless Vector Control"
(page 4-113) or "0-Hz Sensorless Vector Control" (page 4-114). However, set the motor
parameters as follows:
•Set motor parameters R1, R2, and L to one half of the set value for one motor.
•Set motor parameter Io to be twice the set value for one motor.
•Set motor parameter J to one half of the total moment of inertia of two motors and loads
connected to these motors.
•Select the motor capacity value closest to the total capacity of two motors.
4
Functions
•When different loads are driven with two motors, a fluctuation in one load affects the operating
condition of the other, which may hinder normal control.
To prevent this, be sure to operate a system in a way that the load driven by two motors is regarded
as one load.
Related functions
A044/A244, F001, b040, b041 to b044, H002/H202, H003/H203, H004/
H204, H005/H205, H020/H220, H021/H221, H022/H222, H023/H223,
H024/H224, H050/H250, H051/H251, H052/H252
Stabilization Parameter
•This function adjusts to reduce motor hunting.
•In case of motor hunting, check whether motor capacity H003/H203 and motor pole number
selection H004/H204 match your motor. If they do not, match them. If the motor's primary
resistance is smaller than that of the standard motor, increase the H006/H206/H306 set value
gradually. To run a motor with a capacity larger than the Inverter's rated capacity, reduce the set
value.
•Other than this function, the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting:
Lower the carrier frequency (b083). (Refer to page 4-65.)
Lower the output voltage gain (A045). (Refer to page 4-24.)
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
H006/H206/H306
Stabilization parameter
0. to 255.:
If hunting occurs, adjust the set value.
100.
⎯
A045
Output voltage gain
20. to 100.:
If hunting occurs, reduce the set value.
100
%
b083
Carrier frequency
0.5 to 15.0:
If hunting occurs, reduce the set value.
5.0
kHz
4-117
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board
(3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Functions That Need 3G3AX-PG01
Related functions
A044, A001, A076, A141, A142
4-118
4
Functions
•Generally, the Feedback Option Board (3G3AX-PG01) is required for the following two cases:
• "05" (V2: sensor vector control) is selected in V/f characteristics selection A044.
• "Pulse train frequency input" is selected in any of the following parameters:
•"06" (pulse train frequency) is selected in frequency reference selection A001.
•With "10" (operation function result) selected in frequency reference selection A001, "07" (pulse
train frequency) is selected in operation frequency input A setting (A141) or operation frequency
input B setting (A142).
•"03" (pulse train frequency) is selected in PID feedback selection A076.
•When running the Inverter with V/f characteristics selection A044 set to "00" (VC), you can check
the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008.
(If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated, or if negative frequency
is detected when the reverse command is activated, the rotation direction is judged as being
normal.)
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
V2 Control Mode Selection
Select a control method in V2 control mode selection P012.
When "00" (ASR) is selected in P012, speed control mode is enabled. Select a frequency reference
in frequency reference selection A001.
When "01" (APR) is selected in P012, the Inverter enables position control by generating frequency
reference based on the position command pulse input from the pulse train position command input
terminal, and on the position feedback detected by the encoder.
Select any of the three pulse train position command input modes in pulse train mode selection
P013.
To perform pulse train position control, allocate "48" (STAT) to any of the multi-function input terminals. While the STAT terminal is tuned on, pulse train position command input is accepted.
4
Functions
Position deviation can be cleared through external input. Allocate "47" (PCLR) to any of the multifunction input terminals. Tuning on and then off the PCLR terminal can clear position deviation data.
Allocate "22" (DSE) to any of the multi-function output terminals to enable excessive speed deviation signal output.
Set a deviation level in speed deviation error detection level P027. When the deviation between real
frequency and reference frequency exceeds the P027 set value, the DSE signal turns on.
When "02" (APR2) or "03" (HAPR) is selected in P012, the Inverter performs absolute position control with reference to the absolute position from its origin.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
P012
V2 control mode
selection
00: ASR (speed control mode)
01: APR (pulse train position control mode)
02: APR2 (absolute position control mode)
03: HAPR (high-resolution absolute position
control mode)
00
⎯
P011
Encoder pulses
128. to 9999./1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65535):
Number of encoder pulses
1024.
Pulse
P023
Position loop gain
.00 to 99.99/100.0: Position loop gain
0.50
rad/s
P027
Speed deviation error
detection level
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 120.0:
DSE signal output level
7.50
Hz
H004
Motor pole number
selection
2/4/6/8/10: Select the number of motor poles.
4
Pole
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
47: PCLR (position deviation clear)
48: STAT (pulse train position command input
permission)
⎯
⎯
C021 to C025
Multi-function output
terminals P1 to P5
selection
C026
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Related functions
4-119
⎯
⎯
22: DSE (excessive speed deviation)
05
A001, P013
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Sensor Vector Control (Speed Control)
To use this function, set V/f characteristics selection A044 to "05" (V2), and V2 control mode selection P012 to "00" (speed control).
("Sensor vector control" can be selected for 1st control only.)
To use this function, make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor. Refer
to Inverter model 3G3RX user's manual "Chapter 4 Functions, 4-2 Function Mode, Motor Parameter
Selection".
Also, be sure to set the number of your encoder pulses.
Operation status
Phenomenon
Adjusting method
Adjustment item
During startup
Shock occurs during
startup.
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H034
During
deceleration
Motor hunting
During
torque limit
Insufficient torque at low
frequency during torque
limit
Low-frequency
operation
Reduce the speed response.
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
H024/H034
Set a overload limit level lower than that of the
torque.
b021
b041 to b044
Rotation is not constant. Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter.
Related functions
H005
H024/H034
A001, A044, F001, b040 , H002, H003, H004 , H020 , H021 , H022 ,
H023 , H050 , H051 , H052 , P011, P012
Note 1: Make sure that the carrier frequency (b083) is not lower than 2.1 kHz. If the carrier frequency is at 2.1 Hz
or lower, the Inverter does not operate normally.
Note 2: To use a lower rank motor size than the Inverter, set a torque limit value (b041 to b044), while keeping
the value α, calculated with the following formula, at 200% or lower. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
α = Torque limit set value × (Inverter capacity) / (Motor capacity)
(Example) If the Inverter capacity is 0.75 kW and the motor capacity is 0.4 kW, the torque limit set value
for α = 200%, calculated with the above formula, is as follows:
Torque limit set value (b041 to b044) = α × (Motor capacity) / (Inverter capacity)
= 200% × (0.4 kW)/(0.75 kW) = 106%
4-120
4
Functions
With V2 control mode selection P012, you can select four types of control modes: Speed control,
Pulse train position control, Absolute position control, and High-resolution absolute position control.
Note the following before use:
• Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than
the maximum applicable motor size.
• If the Inverter does not normally accelerate, or if overload protection is activated, check the phase order
of the encoder signal.
(If phase A is advanced by 90° from phase B during forward run, it is judged as being normal.)
When running the Inverter with V/f characteristics selection A044 set to "00" (VC), you can check
the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008.
(If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated, or if negative frequency
is detected when the reverse command is activated, the rotation direction is judged as being
normal.)
If sensor vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics, adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena, as shown in the table below.
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Torque Bias Function
This function applies bias to the torque reference generated by speed control, and is useful for elevating applications (e.g. elevator).
Parameter No.
Function name
P036
Torque bias mode
P037
P038
4
Data
Default setting
Unit
00: Disabled
01: Set via the Digital Operator
02: Set via terminal FE *1
00
⎯
Torque bias value
-200. to +200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
-180. to +180. (75 to 132 kW)
Enabled when P036 = 01
0.
%
Torque bias polarity
selection *2
00: As per sign
01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
⎯
Functions
Related functions
d010
*1. When torque bias is set to the FE terminal, -10 to +10 (V) is recognized as -200 to +200 (%).
*2. • When "00" (As per sign) is selected:
When the polarity of a torque bias signal is (+), the torque increases for forward rotation, and when it is (-),
the torque increases for reverse rotation, regardless of the RUN direction.
• When "01" (Depends on the RUN direction) is selected:
The torque bias signal polarity and torque bias direction vary depending on the RUN command direction.
Forward command: Applies torque in the same direction as the torque bias.
Reverse command: Applies torque in the opposite direction of the torque bias.
Torque Control
Under this function, the Inverter can be used in torque control, as well as in the speed and pulse
train position controls.
Torque control can be applied to winders, and more.
To run the Inverter in torque control mode, allocate "52" (ATR) to any of the multi-function inputs.
While the ATR terminal is turned on, the torque reference input is enabled.
In torque reference input selection P033, you can select one of the three analog inputs or the input
via the Digital Operator.
The torque control speed depends on the balance between torque and load. To prevent the Inverter
from running out of control, set a speed limit value in P039 (forward) or P040 (reverse).
Parameter No.
Function name
P033
Torque reference input
selection
P034
P035
4-121
Data
Default setting
Unit
00: Input via terminal FV
01: Input via terminal FI
02: Input via terminal FE
03: Input via the Digital Operator
00
⎯
Torque reference setting
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
Torque reference when P033 = 03
0.
%
Polarity selection at
torque reference via FE
00: As per sign
01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
-
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Parameter No.
Function name
P039
Speed limit value in
torque control (forward)
P040
Data
Unit
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 400.0
0.00
Hz
Speed limit value in
torque control (reverse)
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 400.0
0.00
Hz
P036
Torque bias mode
00: Disabled
01: Set via the Digital Operator
02: Set via terminal FE
00
⎯
P037
Torque bias value
-200. to +200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
-180. to +180. (75 to 132 kW)
Enabled when P036 = 01
0.
%
P038
Torque bias polarity
selection
00: As per sign
01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
⎯
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
52: ATR (torque reference input permission)
⎯
⎯
Related functions
d009, d010, d012
Control Block Diagram
Torque bias
Torque limit
ATR terminal
Torque reference
(Reference value for current control)
Torque reference input
Speed control
(P control)
Speed
monitor
Speed limit
value
The speed control (P control) operates when a
speed detection value exceeds the limit value.
Speed detection
value
Pulse Train Position Control Mode
To use this function, set V/f characteristics selection A044 to "05" (V2), and V2 control mode selection P012 to "01" (pulse train position control).
("Sensor vector control" can be selected for 1st control only.)
Select a pulse train position command input mode in pulse train mode selection P013.
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
P012
V2 control mode selection 01: APR (pulse train position control mode)
P013
00: Mode 0 (pulse train with 90° phase
difference)
01: Mode 1 (forward/reverse command +
Pulse train mode selection
pulse train)
02: Mode 2 (forward pulse train + reverse
pulse train)
4
Functions
Default setting
Default setting
Unit
00
⎯
4-122
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
P017
Position ready
range setting
P018
Position ready
delay time setting
P019
Data
Default setting
Unit
0. to 9999./1000 (10000):
Set a value equivalent to encoder ×4
multiplication.
5.
⎯
0.00 to 9.99
0.00
s
Electronic gear setting
position selection
00: FB (feedback side)
01: REF (command side)
00
⎯
P020
Electronic gear ratio
numerator
1. to 9999.
1.
⎯
P021
Electronic gear ratio
denominator
1. to 9999.
1.
⎯
P022
Position control
feedforward gain
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 655.3
0.00
⎯
P023
Position loop gain
0.00 to 99.99/100.0
0.50
rad/s
P024
Position bias amount
-204 (-2048)/-999. to 2048.
0.
⎯
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
47: PCLR (position deviation clear)
48: STAT (pulse train position command
input permission)
⎯
⎯
Frequency reference for the pulse train position control mode is calculated with the following formula:
6.4 × P × Kv
Frequency reference (Hz) =
ENC
×
ΔP
255
P
: Number of motor poles
Kv : Position loop gain
ENC : Number of encoder pulses
ΔP : Position deviation
In the position control mode, the acceleration/deceleration time settings are disabled. (The Inverter
is automatically brought into LAD cancel status.)
The higher the position loop-back gain, the shorter the acceleration/deceleration time.
For details on the pulse train input mode, refer to the following.
•Mode 0: Pulse train with 90° phase difference
SAP
SAN
(Pulse train input)
SBP
SBN
(Pulse train input)
Detected
pulses
Forward
Reverse
Time
4-123
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
•Mode 1: Forward/Reverse command + Pulse train
SAP
SAN
(Pulse train input)
SBP
SBN
(Forward/Reverse command)
Detected
pulses
Forward
Reverse
4
Time
•Mode 2: Forward pulse train + Reverse pulse train
SAP
Functions
SAN
(Forward pulse train input)
SBP
SBN
(Reverse pulse train input)
Detected
pulses
Forward
Reverse
Time
Electronic Gear Function
This function allows you to set a gain relative to position command or position feedback and to
change the main/sub motor rotation ratio, particularly for synchronous operation.
Parameter No.
Function name
P019
Electronic gear setting
position selection
P020
Data
Default setting
Unit
00: Position feedback side (FB)
01: Position command side (REF)
00
⎯
Electronic gear ratio
numerator *3
1 to 9999
1.
⎯
P021
Electronic gear ratio
denominator *3
1 to 9999
1.
⎯
P022
Position control
feedforward gain *1
0.00 to 655.3
0.00
⎯
P023
Position loop gain *2
0.00 to 99.99/100.0
0.50
rad/s
4-124
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Note: Below are the block diagrams of the electronic gear function.
First-order lag filter
Position control feedforward gain
1
P022
1+sT
Position loop gain
P019 = 00 (FB)
Position
command
N
D
Electronic gear
Position feedback
4
Functions
Speed
command
P023
First-order lag filter
Position control feedforward gain
1
P022
1+sT
P019 = 01 (REF)
Electronic gear
Position
N
command
D
Position loop gain
P023
Speed
command
Position feedback
*1. It is recommended that position control feedfoward gain adjustment should be started with P022 = 2.00. To
reduce the position deviation between the main and sub motors, increase the feedforward gain. If motor
hunting occurs, reduce the feedforward gain.
*2. It is recommended that position loop gain adjustment should be started with P023 = 2.00. To increase
positioning accuracy and holding power, increase the position loop gain. If an increased position loop gain
causes hunting, reduce the position loop gain.
*3. Make sure that the N/D setting is within the range of 1/50 ≤ N/D ≤ 20.
(N: Electronic gear ratio numerator [P020], D: Electronic gear ratio denominator [P021])
4-125
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Example: Synchronous Operation
Master Inverter
Slave Inverter
AP, BP
AN, BN
SAP, SBP
SAN, SBN
EG5
EG5
EAP, EBP
EAN, EBN
EAP, EBP
EAN, EBN
4
Sub
motor
M
EC
M
Functions
Main
motor
EC
For the Inverter (master Inverter) on the main motor side, you can select either the speed control or
pulse train position control mode.
For the Inverter (slave Inverter) on the sub motor side, you need to select the pulse train position
control mode.
Configuration Example
•Main motor : Number of encoder pulses = 1024
•Sub motor : Number of encoder pulses = 3000
•Main motor rpm:Sub motor rpm = 2:1
For operation under the above conditions, set the following data in the slave Inverter.
Pulse train mode selection (P013)
Electronic gear setting position selection (P019)
Electronic gear ratio numerator (P020)
Electronic gear ratio denominator (P021)
: 00 (pulse with 90° phase difference)
: 01 (REF)
: 3000
: 1024 × 2 = 2048
The following shows an example of the ratio of slave rpm to master rpm depending on the P019 to
P021 settings.
(Note that the same number of encoder pulses (1024 pulses) should be set on both Inverters.)
Electronic gear setting
position selection
(P019)
REF
(Position
command side)
REF
(Position
command side)
FB
(Position feedback side)
FB
(Position feedback side)
Electronic gear ratio
numerator (P020)
1024
2048
1024
2048
Electronic gear ratio
denominator (P021)
2048
1024
2048
1024
Slave rpm/Master rpm
1/2
2
2
1/2
4-126
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Configuration Example
•Main motor : Number of encoder pulses = 1024
•Sub motor : Number of encoder pulses = 3000
•Main motor rpm:Sub motor rpm = 2:1
For operation under the above conditions, set the following data in the slave Inverter.
Electronic gear setting position selection (P019) : 01 (REF)
Electronic gear ratio numerator (P020) : 3000
Electronic gear ratio denominator (P021) : 1024 × 2 = 2048
FFWG
4
Functions
Position control
feedforward gain
+
+
G
REF
-
ASR
+
Position loop gain
N
D
FB
Electronic gear setting position =00(FB) selected
FFWG
Position control
feedforward gain
REF
N
D
+
+
G
-
+
Position loop gain
FB
Electronic gear setting position =01(REF) selected
4-127
ASR
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Motor Gear Ratio Setting Function
This function is useful for a system with an optional encoder installed on the machine side.
Set the number of actual encoder pulses in encoder pulses P011.
Set a motor-to-encoder rpm ratio in motor gear ratio numerator/denominator P028/P029.
With the above settings, the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data is set in the
Inverter.
This function performs speed/position detection based on the number of encoder pulses converted
into motor shaft data and calculates the orientation stop position based on the number of encoder
pulses (P011).
Function name
P028
Motor gear ratio numerator
P029
Motor gear ratio
denominator
P011
Encoder pulses
Data
0. to 9999
Set a motor-to-encoder rpm ratio.
128. to 9999./1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65535)
Set the number of actual encoder pulses.
Default setting
Unit
1.
⎯
1024.
Pulse
Note: Make sure that the N/D setting is within the range of 1/50 ≤ N/D ≤ 20.
(N: Motor gear ratio numerator, D: Motor gear ratio denominator)
<Example>
Encoder
(1024 pulses)
Gear/Load
(1:10)
Motor
•When the motor-to-encoder rpm ratio is 1:10, set the following data:
Number of encoder pulses (P011)
: 1024
Motor gear ratio numerator (P028)
: 10
Motor gear ratio denominator (P029) : 100
In this case, the orientation stop position is defined as 4096 divisions of the encoder's one rotation.
Note that the concept of the stop position is inverted from the description in "Orientation stop
position conceptual drawing" (page 4-130).
Position Bias Function
Set this function to apply position command bias in the pulse train position control mode.
The set number of pulses is added to a change value at 2-ms internals. This is used for adjusting
the phase of synchronization points during synchronous operation.
Set an addition value in position bias amount P024. A positive value adds the value in the forward
direction.
Related functions
P024
4-128
4
Functions
Parameter No.
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Speed Bias Function
This function applies speed command bias in the pulse train position control mode.
Set a bias value in frequency addition amount A145, and select a sign in frequency addition direction A146.
Allocate 50 (ADD) to any of the multi-function inputs. While the ADD terminal is turned on, the bias
value is added to the speed command.
Speed bias
A145
4
Position bias
ADD terminal
P024
Set with A146.
Functions
+/Position command variation
Position control
Speed control
Speed feedback value
Position feedback variation
Related functions
A145, A146
Orientation Function
This function determines a motor position at a single desired point during one rotation of the motor,
and can be used to exchange tools for the machine tool main spindle or others.
During positioning, the Z-pulse (one rotation position signal) is used as the reference signal. Input
Z-pulse between EZP and EZN.
Parameter No.
Function name
P011
Encoder pulses
P014
Orientation stop position
P015
Orientation speed setting
P016
Orientation direction setting
P017
Position ready range setting
0. to 9999./
1000 (10000)
5.
Pulse
P018
Position ready delay time
setting
0.00 to 9.99
0.00
s
P023
Position loop gain
0.00 to 99.99/100.0
0.50
rad/s
C001 to C008
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
45: ORT (orientation)
⎯
C021 to C025
Multi-function output terminal
selection
C026
4-129
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
Data
Default setting
Unit
1024.
Pulse
0. to 4095.
0.
⎯
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 120.0
5.00
Hz
128. to 9999./1000 to 6553
(10000 to 65530)
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
00
⎯
23: POK (position ready)
05
⎯
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
RUN commands (FW/RV)
ON
ORT terminal
ON
Output
frequency
(2)
(1)
Orientation speed setting (P015)
(3)
Position ready range setting (P017)
4
Z pulse
POK signal
ON
(4)
(1) When the RUN command is turned on with the ORT terminal turned on, the Inverter accelerates to the
orientation speed (P015), and then performs constant speed operation.
(If the RUN command is turned on during operation, the operation speed changes to the orientation speed
when the ORT terminal is turned on.)
(2) After the orientation speed is reached, the Inverter shifts to the position control mode when the first Z-pulse
is detected.
(3) During forward run, position control is performed with a target value of "Orientation stop position (P014) + one
rotation"; During reverse run, with a target value of "Orientation stop position (P014) + two rotations".
In this step, the higher the position loop gain (P023), the shorter the deceleration time (regardless of the
deceleration time setting).
(4) After the remaining number of pulses reaches the position ready range setting (P017), the Inverter outputs
the POK signal after the position ready delay time setting (P018) elapses. (The POK output remains until the
ORT signal is turned off.)
After positioning is completed, the servo lock status remains until the RUN command is turned off.
Note 1: Do not set a high frequency for the orientation speed, because positioning must be completed within two
rotations during deceleration. Otherwise, overvoltage protection may cause a trip.
Note 2: Orientation stop position is defined as 4096 (0 to 4095) divisions of one forward rotation from the
reference point. (The number of divisions is fixed to 4096, regardless of the encoder's number of pulses.)
The reference point is defined as the point where the pulse is input between EZP and EZN. Below is the
layout of the stop target position. (Positive-phase connection)
Motor shaft viewed from motor
shaft load side
Position of Z pulse
Reference point
0
3072
1024
2048
Orientation stop position conceptual drawing
4-130
Functions
Position ready delay time setting (P018)
Speed control Position control
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Absolute Position Control Mode
•To use this function, set V/f characteristics selection A044 to "05" (V2), and V2 control mode
selection P012 to "02" (APR2: Absolute position control).
•When "03" (high-resolution absolute position control) is selected in V2 control mode selection
P012, control is based on ×4 the number of pulses used for internal operations.
(Set the multi-step position command and position range setting for ×4 multiplication control.)
•The position command can be changed up to 8 steps, depending on combinations of multi-function
input terminals.
•Zero return speed can be selected from one low speed and two high speeds.
(The orientation function, described in the previous section, is not available.)
•By using the teaching function, you can set the position command while running the machine.
•By allocating "73" (SPD) to a multi-function input, you can switch between the speed and position
controls.
•For data with many digits (e.g. position command), only the higher 4 digits are displayed.
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
P012
V2 control mode
selection
P023
Default setting
Unit
02: APR2 (absolute position control)
03: HAPR (high-resolution absolute position
control)
00
⎯
Position loop gain
0.00 to 99.99/100.0
0.50
rad/s
P060
Multi-step position
command 0
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P061
Multi-step position
command 1
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P062
Multi-step position
command 2
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P063
Multi-step position
command 3
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P064
Multi-step position
command 4
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P065
Multi-step position
command 5
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P066
Multi-step position
command 6
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P067
Multi-step position
command 7
Position range setting (reverse side)
to Position range setting (forward side)
0
⎯
P068
Zero return mode
00: Low
01: Hi1
02: Hi2
00
⎯
P069
Zero return direction
selection
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
00
⎯
P070
Low-speed zero
return frequency
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
Hz
P071
High-speed zero
return frequency
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 400.0
0.00
Hz
P072
Position range
specification
(forward)
0 to +268435456: When APR2 is selected
0 to +1073741823: When HAPR is selected
268435455
⎯
4-131
Data
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Parameter No.
Function name
P073
Position range
specification
(reverse)
P074
Data
Default setting
Unit
−268435456 to 0: When APR2 is selected
−1073741823 to 0: When HAPR is selected
−268435455
⎯
Teaching selection
00: Multi-step position command 0 (P060)
01: Multi-step position command 1 (P061)
02: Multi-step position command 2 (P062)
03: Multi-step position command 3 (P063)
04: Multi-step position command 4 (P064)
05: Multi-step position command 5 (P065)
06: Multi-step position command 6 (P066)
07: Multi-step position command 7 (P067)
00
⎯
C169
Multi-step
speed/position
determination time
0. to 200.: × 10 ms
0
ms
d029
Position command
monitor
−1073741823 to +1073741823
⎯
⎯
d030
Current position
monitor
−1073741823 to +1073741823
⎯
⎯
45: ORT (orientation)
54: SON (servo ON)
66: CP1 (position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (position command selection 3)
69: ORL (zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (zero return startup signal)
71: FOT (forward driving stop)
72: ROT (reverse driving stop)
73: SPD (speed/position switching)
⎯
⎯
03: Does not initialize internal data during reset.
0
⎯
Multi-function inputs
1 to 8 selection
C102
Reset selection
Absolute Position Control Operation
RUN command
ON
Output
frequency (Hz)
Speed
command
When the position command
level is low, the motor
decelerates and its position is
determined before the output
frequency reaches the speed
command level.
Position ready range setting (P017)
Position
POK signal
ON
Position ready delay time setting (P018)
4-132
Functions
C001 to C008
4
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
In the absolute position control mode, the Inverter moves to the target position according to the following parameter settings, and is then set in the position servo lock status.
• Position command
• Speed command (frequency reference)
• Acceleration/Deceleration time
(The servo lock status is retained until the RUN command is turned off.)
The frequency reference and acceleration/deceleration command for absolute position control conform to the items selected when the RUN command is turned on.
If the position command is set to a low value, the Inverter may stop deceleration and perform positioning before the speed command value is reached.
In the absolute position control mode, the direction of RUN command (FW or RV) does not refer to
the rotating direction. The FW or RV signal starts or stops the Inverter. The Inverter runs forward
when "Target position - Current position" is a positive value, or runs in reverse when it is a negative
value.
If you do not perform zero return operation, (to be described later), the position at power-on is regarded as the origin (position = 0).
When position command is set to "0", positioning is performed when the RUN command is turned
on.
In reset selection C102, select "03" (trip reset only).
* If reset selection C102 is not set to "03", turning on the Inverter's reset terminal (or RESET key)
clears the current position counter. To operate the Inverter by using the current position count value
after resetting a trip by turning on the reset terminal (or RESET key), be sure to set reset selection
C102 to "03".
If PCLR is allocated, turning on the PCLR terminal clears the current position counter.
(The internal position deviation counter is simultaneously cleared.)
The absolute position control mode disables the ATR terminal. (Torque control is disabled.)
The absolute position control mode disables the STAT terminal. (Pulse train position control is disabled.)
The absolute position control mode disables the orientation function.
(However, the ORT terminal is used for teaching, as described later.)
Functions
4
Multi-step Position Switching Function (CP1/CP2/CP3)
By allocating "66" to "68" (CP1 to CP3) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008), you
can select multi-step positions 0 to 7.
Set position commands in multi-step position commands 0 to 7 (P060 to P067).
If no position command is allocated to the terminals, multi-step position command 0 (P060) is defined as the position command.
4-133
Position command
CP3
CP2
CP1
Multi-step position 0
0
0
0
Multi-step position 1
0
0
1
Multi-step position 2
0
1
0
Multi-step position 3
0
1
1
Multi-step position 4
1
0
0
Multi-step position 5
1
0
1
Multi-step position 6
1
1
0
Multi-step position 7
1
1
1
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
When you input a multi-step position command, you can set the wait time until the terminal input is
determined. This prevents the transition status from being applied before it is determined.
You can adjust the determination time in multi-step speed/position determination time C169. If no
input is made during the time set in C169, the data is determined after the set time elapses. (Note
that the longer the determination time, the slower the input response.)
Without determination
time (C169)
With determination time (C169)
7
5 4
3
Position command
1
4
CP1
CP2
Functions
CP3
Determination time (C169)
Speed/Position Switching Function (SPD)
Allocate 73 (SPD) to one of the multi-function inputs.
While the SPD terminal is turned on, the current position counter is retained at "0". Therefore, if the
SPD terminal is turned off during operation, the Inverter shifts to the position control mode. (Speed/
Position switching)
At this time, if the position command is "0", the Inverter immediately stops.
(Hunting may occur, depending on the position loop gain setting.)
While the SPD terminal is turned on, the Inverter runs in the direction based on the RUN command.
When shifting from speed control to position control, be careful about the polarity sign of the RUN
command.
Output frequency
Position count started
Speed control
Position control
Time
Target position
SPD terminal
ON
4-134
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Zero Return Function
This function performs three types of zero return operations depending on the setting of zero return
mode P068. When zero return is complete, the current position is cleared to zero.
You can select the zero return direction in zero return direction selection P069.
If zero return is not performed, the Inverter performs position control with the position at power-on
defined as the origin.
<Low-speed zero return (P068 = 00)>
ON
ORG terminal
4
ON
ORL terminal
Functions
Output
frequency
(2)
Low-speed zero return
frequency (P070)
(3)
(1)
Origin
Position
<High-speed zero return 1 (P068 = 01)>
ON
ORG terminal
ON
ORL terminal
(2)
Output
frequency
High-speed zero return
frequency (P071)
(3)
(1)
Origin
(5)
Position
(4)
Low-speed zero return
frequency (P070)
<High-speed zero return 2 (P068 = 02)>
ORG terminal
ON
ORL terminal
ON
(2)
Output
frequency
High-speed zero return
frequency (P071)
(3)
(1)
(6)
(5)
Z pulse
4-135
(1) The Inverter accelerates to the lowspeed zero return frequency
according to the acceleration time
setting.
(2) The Inverter runs at the low-speed
zero return speed.
(3) The Inverter performs positioning
when the ORL signal is input.
Low-speed zero return
frequency (P070)
(7)
Origin Position
(4)
Low-speed zero return
frequency (P071)
(1) The Inverter accelerates to the highspeed zero return frequency
according to the acceleration time
setting.
(2) The Inverter runs at the high-speed
zero return frequency.
(3) The Inverter starts deceleration when
the ORL signal is turned on.
(4) The Inverter runs in reverse at the
low-speed zero return frequency.
(5) The Inverter performs positioning
when the ORL signal is turned off.
(1) The Inverter accelerates to the highspeed zero return frequency
according to the acceleration time
setting.
(2) The Inverter runs at the high-speed
zero return frequency.
(3) The Inverter starts deceleration when
the ORL signal is turned on.
(4) The Inverter runs in reverse at the
low-speed zero return frequency.
(5) The Inverter starts deceleration when
the ORL signal is turned off.
(6) The Inverter runs forward at the lowspeed zero return frequency.
(7) The Inverter performs positioning at
the first Z-pulse position after the
ORL signal is turned on.
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Forward/Reverse Run Stop Function (FOT/ROT)
With a signal from the control range limit switch, this function prevents the Inverter from running outside the specified operation range.
The torque limit is set to 10% on the forward side when the FOT terminal is turned on, and on the
reverse side when the ROT terminal is turned on.
This function can be used as the limit switch at the machine end. To do so, allocate "71" (FOT) and
"72" (ROT) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
Position Range Setting Function
Teaching Function
This function starts or stops the motor at a desired position and stores the current position as a position command in a desired position command area.
Allocate "45" (ORT) to any of multi-function inputs 1 to 8 (C001 to C008).
When V2 control mode selection P012 is set to "02" (absolute position control) or "03" (high-resolution absolute position control), the relevant terminal serves as a teaching terminal.
Related functions
C001 to C008, P012, P074
<Teaching Procedure>
(1) In teaching selection P074, select the position command you want to set.
(2) Move the workpiece.
• Input the RUN command with the ORT terminal turned on. At this time, the speed command and
acceleration/deceleration time conform to the currently selected parameters.
ORT terminal
ON
RUN command
ON
Output frequency
Depends on the speed command selected.
Position
* If the Inverter control circuit (Ro, To) is turned on, teaching is enabled.
The current position counter operates even if the workpiece is moved by an external device.
Teaching is therefore enabled even while the Inverter is stopped.
Note: Make sure that the power supplies (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) for the Inverter power circuit are shut
off or that the Inverter's outputs (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) are disconnected from the motor. Not
doing so may result in injury and/or damage to the equipment.
(3) When the target position is reached, press the Enter key on the Digital Operator. Press the key
on the data display screen (the PRG LED indicator is lit).
4-136
4
Functions
Set a forward/reverse position control range in position range setting (forward) P072 and position
range setting (reverse) P073. If the current position counter exceeds the setting range, a position
control range trip (E63.* or E73.*) occurs, and the Inverter goes into free-run status.
The upper limit setting of multi-step position commands 0 to 7 (P060 to P067) is limited by this control range setting.
(You cannot set a position command beyond the position range.)
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
(4) The current position is set to the area corresponding to the position command source set in
teaching selection P074.
(However, the P074 setting is not stored. After the power is shut off or after reset, this parameter
is indicated as "00" (x00).)
Functions
4
P074 set values
Position commands to be set
00
P060: Multi-step position command 0
01
P061: Multi-step position command 1
02
P062: Multi-step position command 2
03
P063: Multi-step position command 3
04
P064: Multi-step position command 4
05
P065: Multi-step position command 5
06
P066: Multi-step position command 6
07
P067: Multi-step position command 7
Servo ON Function
This function brings the Inverter into speed servo lock status via an input terminal when "05" (sensor
vector control) is selected in V/f characteristics selection A044.
Allocate 54 (SON) to the desired multi-function input.
The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the SON terminal is turned on when SON
is allocated.
If the SON terminal is turned off during operation, the Inverter goes into free-run status. When the
SON terminal is turned on again, the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free-run stop selection b088.
This function cannot be simultaneously used with the preliminary excitation function (55: FOC). If
FOC and SON are both allocated to multi-function input terminals, priority is given to FOC, and SON
is disabled.
SON
ON
FW(RV)
ON
ON
ON
ON
Does not operate
because the SON
terminal is OFF.
Output
frequency
Free running
Restarts according to b088.
Speed servo-lock status
Related functions
4-137
A044, C001 to C008
4-3 Functions When Option PG Board (3G3AX-PG01) Is Used
Pulse Train Frequency Input
This function allows you to use a pulse train input to the SAP-SAN terminals as frequency reference
or PID feedback value in each control mode.
(This function can be used in all control modes.)
Set the input frequency at the maximum frequency in pulse train frequency scale P055.
The analog input start/end function cannot be used. To limit the input frequency, use pulse train frequency bias amount P057 and pulse train frequency limit P058.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
P055
Pulse train frequency scale
1.0 to 50.0: Set the input frequency at the
maximum frequency.
25.0
kHz
P056
Pulse train frequency filter
time constant
0.01 to 2.00: Set a filter time constant for
pulse train input.
0.10
s
P057
Pulse train frequency bias
amount
-100. to +100.
0.
%
P058
Pulse train frequency limit
0. to 100.
100.
%
A001
Frequency reference
selection
06: Pulse train frequency
02
A076
PID feedback selection
03: Pulse train frequency
00
A141
Operation frequency input
A setting
07: Pulse train frequency
02
A142
Operation frequency input
B setting
07: Pulse train frequency
03
⎯
Pulse train frequency processing block
Bias/Limit
Limit
Frequency
measurement
Hz
%
%
1
1+sT
Hz
Frequency
reference
Bias
Frequency scale (P055)
(1.0 to 50.0 kHz)
First-order lag filter (P056)
Maximum
frequency
(A004)
Note: The SWENC switch on PG Board is available for "OFF: encoder disconnection detection disabled".
4-138
4
Functions
Parameter No.
4-4 Communication Function
4-4
Communication Function
•This function allows the Inverter to communicate with an external controller via the RS485 interface
from the TM2 terminal on the Inverter's control terminal block board.
„Communication Specifications
Item
Functions
4
ASCII method
ModBus-RTU method
Transmission speed
2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Communication
method
Half-duplex communication
Select using
the Digital Operator.
Synchronous system
Start-stop synchronous system
Asynchronous system
Transmission code
ASCII code
Binary
Transmission mode
LSB first
Compatible interface
RS-485
Data bit length
7 or 8 bits
Note
8 bits
Select using
the Digital Operator.
No parity/Even/Odd
Select using
the Digital Operator.
Stop bit length
1 or 2 bits
Select using
the Digital Operator.
Starting method
One-side start using host command
Parity
Wait time
Connection
Error check
4-139
10 to 1000 [ms]
0 to 1000 [ms]
1:N (N = 32 max.)
Overrun/Framing
BCC/Vertical/Horizontal parity
Overrun/Framing
CRC-16/Horizontal parity
Set using
the Digital Operator.
Use the Digital Operator
to select a station No.
4-4 Communication Function
<RS485 Port Specifications and Connections>
For the RS485 communication function, use the TM2 terminal on the control terminal block board.
Terminal
abbreviations
RS+
Transmission/Reception (+)
RS-
Transmission/Reception (-)
RP
Termination resistor enabling terminal
RS-
Termination resistor enabling terminal
4
Control terminal
block board
RS
+R
SRP
RS
-
Control terminal
block
Description
•Connection
Connect the Inverters parallel to each other, as shown below. For the termination Inverter, shortcircuit the RP and RS- terminals. (Also, if the RS485 communication function is used with a single
Inverter, the RP and RS- terminals must be short-circuited.)
Short-circuiting the RP and RS- terminals activates the termination resistor inside the control
terminal block board, suppressing signal reflection.
External controller
RS+ RS- RP RS-
RS+ RS- RP RS-
RS+ RS- RP RS-
4-140
Functions
The following wires are recommended for TM2:
Single wire
0.14 to 1.5 mm2
(If two equal-sized wires are connected to one pole:
0.14 to 0.5 mm2)
Stranded wire
0.14 to 1.0 mm2
(If two equal-sized wires are connected to one pole:
0.14 to 0.2 mm2)
Stranded wire with solderless terminal
0.25 to 0.5 mm2
(Example: PC-1.25 F-7 from J.S.T. MFG. Co., Ltd.)
Wire strip length
5 mm
Tightening torque
0.22 to 0.25 N•m (screw size: M2)
4-4 Communication Function
„Setting
RS485 communication requires the following settings.
Functions
4
Parameter No.
Function name
C071
Communication speed
selection
(Baud rate selection)
C072
Communication station
No. selection
C073
Default setting
Unit
02: Loop-back test
03: 2400 bps
04: 4800 bps
05: 9600 bps
06: 19200 bps
04
⎯
1. to 32.: Allocate each Inverter's station No.
Set station numbers to control several
Inverters simultaneously.
1.
⎯
Communication bit
length selection
7: 7 bits
8: 8 bits
7
⎯
C074
Communication parity
selection
00: No parity
01: Even
02: Odd
00
⎯
C075
Communication stop bit
selection
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bits
1
⎯
C076
Communication error
selection
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
02
⎯
C077
Communication error
timeout
0.00 to 99.99: Communication
disconnection judgment time
0.00
s
C078
Communication wait time
0. to 1000.: Time to wait for response from
the Inverter
0.
ms
C079
Communication method
selection
00: ASCII method
01: ModBus-RTU method
01
⎯
Related functions
Data
A001, A002
„Communication Test Mode
•The communication test mode allows you to check the RS485 communication line (hardware).
(Communication Test Mode Procedure)
(1) Before conducting a loop-back test, disconnect the cable from TM2 on the control terminal block
board.
(2) Set the following parameter via the Digital Operator.
•Set C071 (communication speed selection) to "02" (loop-back test).
(3) Turn off the Inverter, and turn it on again. The check will start.
(4) After the check is complete, the Digital Operator displays the following code:
•Normal: lk_k_ko
•Abnormal: lk_k_kz
(5) Press the RESET button on the Digital Operator or on the copy unit to show the basic setting
screen. Reset the parameter that you changed in step (2) to a desired setting.
4-141
4-4 Communication Function
ASCII Method
„Communication Procedure
•The following shows the communication procedure between the Inverter and external controller.
(1)
External controller
Inverter
Time
C078
(2)
Wait time (Set via the Digital Operator.)
4
(1): Indicates a frame sent from the external controller to the Inverter.
(2): Indicates a frame sent back from the Inverter to the external controller.
Command List
Command
Description
Communication
with all stations
00
Inputs forward/reverse/stop
command.
Available
01
Sets frequency reference.
Available
02
Sets multi-function input terminal
status.
Available
03
Reads all monitor data.
Not available
04
Reads the Inverter status.
Not available
05
Reads trip data.
Not available
06
Reads a parameter.
Not available
07
Sets a parameter.
Available
08
Initializes each set value.
Available
09
Checks if a set value can be stored in
EEPROM.
Not available
0A
Stores a set value in EEPROM.
Available
0B
Re-calculates internal parameters.
Available
Note
Enabled only when b084 is set
to "01" or "02".
(Clears trip data.)
The following describes each command.
4-142
Functions
Frame (2) is response output from the Inverter after reception of frame (1). It is not an active output.
Below is each frame format (command).
4-4 Communication Function
<Command 00>
Inputs the forward/reverse/stop command. (To use this command, set A002 to "03" (RS485).)
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
Data
Description
STX
Functions
4
BCC
CR
Data size
Control code (Start of TeXt)
Setting
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No. Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32, and FF (Communication
with all stations)
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
00
Data
Transmission data
1 byte
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
*
Data
Description
0
Stop command
1
Forward command
2
Reverse command
Note
(Example) To send a forward command to station 01
(STX) 01 00 1 (BCC) (CR) ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 30 31 33 30 0D
•Response frame
Normal response: Refer to page 4-155.
Error response: Refer to page 4-155.
<Command 01>
Sets frequency reference. (To use this command, set A001 to "03" (RS485).)
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
Data
Description
STX
4-143
BCC
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32, and FF (Communication
with all stations)
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
01
Data
Transmission data (Decimal ASCII
code)
6 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4-4 Communication Function
* To set "5 Hz" for station 01
(STX) 01 01 000500 (BCC) (CR)
ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D
Note 1: Data is a value obtained by mulplying the set value by 100.
(Example) 5 (Hz) → 500 → 000500 ASCII conversion 30 30 30 35 30 30
Note 2: To use the data as PID control feedback data, set "1" in the MSB of the data.
(Example) 5 (%) → 500 → 100500 ASCII conversion 31 30 30 35 30 30
•Response frame
Normal response: Refer to page 4-155.
Error response: Refer to page 4-155.
4
Functions
<Command 02>
Sets multi-function input terminal status.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
Description
STX
Data
BCC
Data size
CR
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32, and FF (Communication with
all stations)
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
02
Data
Transmission data
16 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to data.
(Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4-144
4-4 Communication Function
* Data (hexadecimal) and description of multi-function terminals (For details, refer to "Multi-function Input
Selection" (page 4-77).)
Data (hex)
Functions
4
Description
: Forward
0000000000000001 FW
: Reverse
0000000000000002 RV
0000000000000004 CF1 : Multi-step speed setting binary 1
0000000000000008 CF2 : Multi-step speed setting binary 2
0000000000000010 CF3 : Multi-step speed setting binary 3
0000000000000020 CF4 : Multi-step speed setting binary 4
: Jogging
0000000000000040 JG
: External DC injection braking
0000000000000080 DB
0000000000000100 SET : 2nd control
0000000000000200 2CH : 2-step acceleration/deceleration
0000000000000400 ⎯
0000000000000800 FRS : Free-run stop
0000000000001000 EXT : External trip
0000000000002000 USP : Power recovery restart prevention
0000000000004000 CS
: Commercial switching
0000000000008000 SFT : Soft lock
0000000000010000 AT
: Analog input switching
0000000000020000 SET3 : 3rd control
0000000000040000 RS
: Reset
0000000000080000 ⎯
0000000000100000 STA : 3-wire start
0000000000200000 STP : 3-wire stop
0000000000400000 F/R : 3-wire forward/reverse
0000000000800000 PID : PID enabled/disabled
0000000001000000 PIDC : PID integral reset
0000000002000000 ⎯
0000000004000000 CAS : Control gain switching
0000000008000000 UP
: Remote operation accelerated
0000000010000000 DWN : Remote operation decelerated
0000000020000000 UDC : Remote operation data clear
0000000040000000 ⎯
0000000080000000 OPE : Forced operator
4-145
Data (hex)
Description
0000000100000000 SF1 : Multi-step speed setting bit 1
0000000200000000 SF2 : Multi-step speed setting bit 2
0000000400000000 SF3 : Multi-step speed setting bit 3
0000000800000000 SF4 : Multi-step speed setting bit 4
0000001000000000 SF5 : Multi-step speed setting bit 5
0000002000000000 SF6 : Multi-step speed setting bit 6
0000004000000000 SF7 : Multi-step speed setting bit 7
0000008000000000 OLR : Overload limit switching
: Torque limit enabled/disabled
0000010000000000 TL
0000020000000000 TRQ1 : Torque limit switching 1
0000040000000000 TRQ2 : Torque limit switching 2
0000080000000000 PPI : P/PI switching
0000100000000000 BOK : Brake confirmation
0000200000000000 ORT : Orientation
0000400000000000 LAC : LAD cancel
0000800000000000 PCLR : Position deviation clear
0001000000000000 STAT : Pulse train position command permission
0002000000000000 ⎯
0004000000000000 ADD : Set frequency addition
0008000000000000 F-TM : Forced terminal
0010000000000000 ATR : Torque reference input permission
0020000000000000 KHC : Integrated power clear
0040000000000000 SON : Servo ON
0080000000000000 FOC : Preliminary excitation
0100000000000000 MI1 : Not used
0200000000000000 MI2 : Not used
0400000000000000 MI3 : Not used
0800000000000000 MI4 : Not used
1000000000000000 MI5 : Not used
2000000000000000 MI6 : Not used
4000000000000000 MI7 : Not used
8000000000000000 MI8 : Not used
4-4 Communication Function
* Data (hexadecimal) and description of multi-function terminals corresponding to 12 commands (For details, refer
to "Multi-function Input Terminal Function".)
Data (hex)
Description
Data (hex)
Description
⎯
0000000100000000
⎯
0000000000000002
AHD: Analog command on hold
0000000200000000
⎯
0000000000000004
CP1: Position command selection 1
0000000400000000
⎯
0000000000000008
CP2: Position command selection 2
0000000800000000
⎯
0000000000000010
CP3: Position command selection 3
0000001000000000
⎯
0000000000000020
ORL: Zero return limit signal
0000002000000000
⎯
0000000000000040
ORG: Zero return startup signal
0000004000000000
⎯
0000000000000080
FOT: Forward driving stop
0000008000000000
⎯
0000000000000100
ROT: Reverse driving stop
0000010000000000
⎯
0000000000000200
SPD: Speed/Position switching
0000020000000000
⎯
0000000000000400
PCNT: Pulse counter
0000040000000000
⎯
0000000000000800
PCC: Pulse counter clear
0000080000000000
⎯
0000000000001000
⎯
0000100000000000
⎯
0000000000002000
⎯
0000200000000000
⎯
0000000000004000
⎯
0000400000000000
⎯
0000000000008000
⎯
0000800000000000
⎯
0000000000010000
⎯
0001000000000000
⎯
0000000000020000
⎯
0002000000000000
⎯
0000000000040000
⎯
0004000000000000
⎯
0000000000080000
⎯
0008000000000000
⎯
0000000000100000
⎯
0010000000000000
⎯
0000000000200000
⎯
0020000000000000
⎯
0000000000400000
⎯
0040000000000000
⎯
0000000000800000
⎯
0080000000000000
⎯
0000000001000000
⎯
0100000000000000
⎯
0000000002000000
⎯
0200000000000000
⎯
0000000004000000
⎯
0400000000000000
⎯
0000000008000000
⎯
0800000000000000
⎯
0000000010000000
⎯
1000000000000000
⎯
0000000020000000
⎯
2000000000000000
⎯
0000000040000000
⎯
4000000000000000
⎯
0000000080000000
⎯
8000000000000000
⎯
4
Functions
0000000000000001
(Example) To enable "Forward", "Multi-step speed 1", and "Multi-step speed 2" for the Inverter with station No. 01
0x0000000000000001 + 0x0000000000000004 + 0x0000000000000008
= 0x000000000000000D
The transmission frame is therefore:
(STX) 01 02 000000000000000D (BCC) (CR)
4-146
4-4 Communication Function
•Response frame
Positive response: Refer to page 4-155.
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
<Command 03>
Reads all monitor data.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Description
4
Functions
STX
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
03
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
•Response frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Data
BCC
Description
STX
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Data
Data
104 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
Station No.
4-147
CR
4-4 Communication Function
* Each monitor value
Monitor item
Magnification
Data size
Description
Output frequency
Hz
× 100
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Output current
A
× 10
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Rotation direction
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
0: Stop, 1: Forward,
2: Reverse
PID feedback monitor
%
× 100
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Multi-function input
monitor
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
See *1 .
Multi-function output
monitor
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
See *2 .
Frequency conversion
monitor
⎯
× 100
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Output torque
%
×1
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Output voltage monitor
V
× 10
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Power monitor
kW
× 10
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
⎯
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
"00000000" is stored.
(Preliminary data storage
area)
RUN time monitor
h
×1
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
ON time monitor
h
×1
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
*1. Multi-function input terminal monitor
→
MSB
LSB
←
*2. Multi-function output terminal monitor
Item
Data
Item
Data
S1 terminal
00000001
P1 terminal
00000001
S2 terminal
00000002
P2 terminal
00000002
S3 terminal
00000004
P3 terminal
00000004
S4 terminal
00000008
P4 terminal
00000008
S5 terminal
00000010
P5 terminal
00000010
S6 terminal
00000020
Relay terminal
00000020
S7 terminal
00000040
S8 terminal
00000080
FW terminal
00000100
4-148
4
Functions
Unit
4-4 Communication Function
<Command 04>
Reads the Inverter status.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Description
STX
CR
Data size
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
04
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4
Functions
Setting
•Response frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Data
BCC
Description
STX
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Data
Data
8 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
Station No.
* Inverter status data includes the following three elements (A, B, and C).
Data
Status A
4-149
Status B
Status C
00 (Reserved)
4-4 Communication Function
Inverter status A
Inverter status B
Inverter status C
Status
Code
Status
Code
Status
00
Initial status
00
During stop
00
-
01
-
01
During RUN
01
Stop
02
During stop
02
During trip
02
Deceleration
03
During RUN
03
Constant speed
04
During FRS
04
Acceleration
05
During JG
05
Forward
06
During DB
06
Reverse
07
During retry
07
Forward to reverse
08
During trip
08
Reverse to forward
09
During UV
09
Forward run start
10
Reverse run start
<Command 05>
Reads trip data.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Description
STX
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
05
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4-150
4
Functions
Code
4-4 Communication Function
•Response frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Data
BCC
Description
STX
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Data
Each monitor's data at the time of
tripping
440 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4
Functions
* Each trip monitor stores the past six trips, together with total trip count (8 bytes).
Total count
Trip data 1
Monitor item
••••••••••••
Trip data 6
Unit
Magnification
Data size
Note
Trip factor
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
Inverter status A
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
Inverter status B
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
Inverter status C
⎯
⎯
8 bytes
Output frequency
Hz
× 10
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Total RUN time
h
×1
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Output current
A
× 10
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
DC voltage
V
× 10
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Power ON time
h
×1
8 bytes
Decimal ASCII code
Code display
See "Command 04".
→
MSB
LSB
←
<Command 06>
Reads a setting item.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
Parameter
Description
STX
BCC
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
06
Parameter
Parameter No. for data
4 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
* All parameters except F001 and U001 to U012 are retrieved.
4-151
CR
4-4 Communication Function
•Response frame
Positive response
Frame format
STX
Station No.
ACK
Data
Description
STX
BCC
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
ACK
Control code (ACKnowledge)
1 byte
ACK (0x06)
Data
Data (Decimal ASCII code)
8 bytes
*
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
Data on H003 and H203 (motor capacity selection) are the following code data.
Code data
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Domestic/USA mode
(b085 = 00 or 02)
0.2 kW
⎯
0.4
⎯
0.75
⎯
1.5
2.2
⎯
3.7
⎯
EU mode (b085 = 01)
0.2 kW
0.37
⎯
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
⎯
4.0
Code data
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Domestic/USA mode
(b085 = 00 or 02)
5.5 kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
EU mode (b085 = 01)
5.5 kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
Code data
22
23
24
25
26
Domestic/USA mode
(b085 = 00 or 02)
90 kW
110
132
150
160
EU mode (b085 = 01)
90 kW
110
132
150
160
•If the data is a numeric value, refer to the function code list.
(Example) When acceleration time F002 is set to 30.00 sec, the data is "3000".
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
4-152
Functions
* If the data is a selected item, the corresponding code data is received/transmitted.
4
4-4 Communication Function
<Command 07>
Writes data to a specified setting item.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
Parameter
Description
STX
Functions
4
Data
BCC
Data size
CR
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32, and FF (Communication
with all stations)
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
07
Parameter
Parameter No. for data
4 bytes
*1
Data
Parameter data
(Decimal ASCII code)
8 bytes
*2
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
*1 Allowable parameter ranges are shown below.
From F002, A001, b001, C001, H001, and P001 (For F001, use command 01.)
*2 Refer to command 06.
•Response frame
Positive response: Refer to page 4-155.
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
<Command 08>
Initializes each set value.
Initialization conforms to the setting of initialization selection b084. If b084 is "00", the trip data is
cleared.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Description
STX
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32, and FF (Communication
with all stations)
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
08
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
•Response frame
Positive response: Refer to page 4-155.
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
4-153
CR
4-4 Communication Function
<Command 09>
Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Description
STX
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
09
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
Functions
•Response frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
ACK
Data
Description
STX
BCC
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
ACK
Control code (ACKnowledge)
1 byte
ACK (0x06)
Data
Data
2 bytes
01: Enabled
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
<Command 0A>
Stores a set value in EEPROM.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Description
STX
CR
Data size
4
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
0A
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4-154
4-4 Communication Function
•Response frame
Positive response: Refer to page 4-155.
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
<Command 0B>
Re-calculates internal parameters.
Recalculation is required when the base frequency and H*** parameters are changed via RS485
communication.
•Transmission frame
Frame format
4
STX
Station No.
Command
BCC
Functions
Description
STX
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
Command
Transmission command
2 bytes
0B
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
•Response frame
Positive response: Refer to page 4-155.
Negative response: Refer to page 4-155.
„Positive/Negative Responses
<Positive Response>
•Response frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
ACK
BCC
Description
STX
4-155
CR
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No.
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
ACK
Control code (ACKnowledge)
1 byte
ACK (0x06)
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
4-4 Communication Function
<Negative Response>
•Response frame
Frame format
STX
Station No.
NAK
Description
STX
Error code
BCC
Data size
Setting
Control code (Start of TeXt)
1 byte
STX (0x02)
Station No. of the target Inverter
2 bytes
01 to 32
NAK
Control code
(Negative AcKnowledge)
1 byte
NAK (0x15)
Error code
Communication error status
2 bytes
*
Station No.
CR
BCC
Block check code
2 bytes
Exclusive OR from station No. to
data. (Refer to page 4-157.)
CR
Control code (Carriage Return)
1 byte
CR (0x0D)
Functions
* Error Code List
Error code
Description
01H
Parity error
02H
Checksum error
03H
Framing error
04H
Overrun error
05H
Protocol error
06H
ASCII code error
07H
Receiving buffer overrun error
08H
Receiving timeout error
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
11H
12H
13H
Command invalid error
⎯
Execution disabled error
14H
⎯
15H
⎯
16H
17H
4
Parameter invalid error
⎯
During communication with all stations, the Inverter
sends no response.
4-156
4-4 Communication Function
„BCC (Block Check Code) Calculation Method
(Example) To set "5 Hz" using command 01 (frequency reference setting) (When the target station
No. is "01")
Transmission Frame Structure
STX
Station No.
Command
Data
BCC
CR
ASCII code
(0x 02)
4
01
(0x 30 31)
01
000500
(0x 30 31)
(0x 30 30 30 35 30 30)
05
(0x 30 35)
(0x 00)
Functions
To determine BCC, the Inverter performs ASCII conversion from the station No. to data, and calculates a result of the exclusive OR (Xor) per byte.
For the above transmission frame, BCC is calculated as follows:
30
31
Xor
01
Xor
31
30
31
Xor
00
Xor
30
30
Xor
00
30
Xor
30
30
Xor
05
35
30
Xor
35
30
Xor
05 ......This value is BCC.
(Appendix) ASCII Code Conversion Table
4-157
Text data
ASCII code
Text data
ASCII code
STX
2
A
41
ACK
6
B
42
CR
0D
C
43
NAK
15
D
44
0
30
E
45
1
31
F
46
2
32
H
48
3
33
P
50
4
34
b
62
5
35
6
36
7
37
8
38
9
39
4-4 Communication Function
ModBus-RTU Method
Follow the procedures below in regards to communication between the external controller and the
Inverter.
(1)
(1)
External controller
Time
Inverter
(2)
Wait time (silent interval + C078)
(3) Communication error timeout C077
(Operates according to
communication error selection
C076 when reception times out.)
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
C076
Communication error
selection
00: Trip
(Trip after receiving timeout [E41])
01: Trip after stop
(Deceleration stop after receiving
timeout. Trip after stop [E41])
02: Ignored
(No trip and no alarm output)
03: FRS
(Free-run stop after receiving timeout. No
trip and no alarm output)
04: Deceleration stop
(Deceleration stop after receiving
timeout. No trip and no alarm output)
02
⎯
C077
Communication error
timeout
0.00 to 99.99:
Time before receiving timeout
0.00
⎯
0.
⎯
C078
0. to 1000.: Wait time until response starts
Communication wait time after reception is completed (excluding silent
interval)
Response from the Inverter (Frame 2) is output as return after the Inverter receives the query
(Frame 1), not output independently.
4-158
Functions
(1) : Frame to be sent from the external control device to the Inverter (Query)
(2) : Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external controller (Response)
(3) : Unless the Inverter completes reception of a query from the host within the time set in C077
after the Inverter completes a response (response transmission), the Inverter becomes ready
to receive the first data again. In this case, the Inverter sends no response.
Also, the Inverter's operation conforms to the setting of communication error selection C076.
For details, refer to the following table.
The receiving timeout monitor starts after the first transmission/reception is performed after
power-on or reset. Receiving timeout is inactive until reception or transmission is performed.
4
4-4 Communication Function
Below is each frame format (command).
Message Configuration: Query
Header (Silent interval)
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Trailer (Silent interval)
4
Functions
<Slave Address>
•Pre-set numbers ranging from 1 to 32 in each Inverter (slave). (Only the Inverter having the same
slave address as the query takes in the corresponding query.)
•Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to "0".
•Data call or loop-back cannot be performed while broadcasting.
<Data>
•Sends the function command.
•The 3G3RX corresponds with the following data formats used in the ModBus.
Data name
Description
Coil
2-value data (1-bit long) that can be referred to or changed
Holding register
16-bit long data that can be referred to or changed
<Function Code>
•Specifies the function for the Inverter to perform.
•Below are the function codes supported by the 3G3RX.
Function Code
Function code
Function
Maximum number of
data bytes in 1 message
Maximum data number in
1 message
01h
Reading coil status
4
32 coils (in bits)
03h
Reading holding register
content
8
4 registers (in bytes)
05h
Writing into the coil
2
1 coil (in bits)
06h
Writing into the holding
register
2
1 register (in bytes)
08h
Loop-back test
⎯
0Fh
Writing into multiple coils
4
32 coils (in bits)
10h
Writing into multiple registers
8
4 registers (in bytes)
<Error Check>
•CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used for the ModBus-RTU error check.
•The CRC code is a 16-bit data generated for the block of random length data in the 8-bit unit.
•To prepare the CRC code, use a generation polynomial of CRC-16 (X16 + X15 + X2 + 1).
4-159
4-4 Communication Function
CRC-16 Calculation Example
CRC-16
calculation
CRC*1
Hi
CRC*1
= FFFFh
Target data
Lo
CRC register (2 bytes)
Exists
CRC*1 = CRC*1 XOR target data
All target data
completed
8-bit shift
4
Completed
Bits left
the right
0
Functions
Interchange the Hi and Lo
bytes of CRC*1
Shift CRC*1 = CRC*1 by 1 bit to
Overflow bit
after shift
1
Completed
CRC*1 = CRC*1 XOR A001h
Shift by 1 byte against target data
<Header and Trailer (Silent Interval)>
•Wait time from receiving the query from the master to the response by the Inverter.
•Be sure to provide 3.5 characters (24 bits) as the wait time. If the length does not reach 3.5
characters, the Inverter does not respond.
•The actual communication wait time is the total of the silent interval (3.5-character length) and
C078 (communication wait time) setting.
Message Configuration: Response
<Total Communication Time>
•The time from receiving query to the response by the Inverter is the total of the silent interval (3.5character length) and C078 (communication wait time) setting.
•If sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response, be sure to provide the silent
interval length (3.5 characters) at the minimum.
<Normal Response>
•If the query is the loop-back function code (08h), the Inverter sends back a response of the same
content as the query.
•If the query is the function code to be written into the holding register or coil (05h, 06h, 0Fh, 10h),
the Inverter sends back the query as it is in response.
•If the query is the function code to be read from the holding register or coil (01h, 03h), the Inverter
makes the slave address and function code the same as the query and attaches the read data to
the query.
4-160
4-4 Communication Function
<Abnormal Response>
Field Configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
CRC-16
•If an error (aside from a communication error) is found in the query content, the Inverter returns
exception responses without performing any operation.
•To determine the cause of an error, check the function code of the response. The function code of
the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added.
•Check the details of the error with the exception code.
4
Exception code
Functions
Code
Description
01h
An unsupported function has been specified.
02h
Specified address does not exist.
03h
Specified data has an unacceptable format.
21h
Data is out of the Inverter's range for writing into the holding register.
22h
The Inverter does not allow this function.
• Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation.
• Has issued the enter command during operation (UV).
• Has written into the register during trip (UV).
• Has written into the read-only register (coil)
<No Response>
The Inverter ignores the query and does not respond if:
•The broadcast is received.
•A communication error is detected in receiving a query.
•The query slave address does not correspond with the slave address set for the Inverter.
•The time interval between 2 pieces of data that configure the message is less than a 3.5-character
length.
•Query data length is inappropriate.
Note: If the timer is set in the master to monitor response, but no response is returned within the set
time period, send the same query again.
4-161
4-4 Communication Function
„Explanation of Each Function Code
<Reading Coil Status [01h]>
Reads out the coil status (ON/OFF).
(Example)
Read multi-function input terminals S1 to S6 on the Inverter with slave address 8.
Refer to the following table for the multi-function input terminal status.
Multi-function
input terminals
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
Coil No.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Terminal status
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Query
4
Response
Example
(HEX)
Field name
No.
Field name
Example
(HEX)
1
Slave address *1
08
1
Slave address
08
2
Function code
01
2
Function code
01
3
Coil start number (MSB)*2
00
3
Number of data bytes
01
4
Coil start number (LSB)
*2
06
4
Coil data *4
17
5
*3
Number of coils (MSB)
00
5
CRC-16 (MSB)
12
6
Number of coils (LSB)*3
06
6
CRC-16 (LSB)
1A
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
5C
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
90
*4. Transfers data by the number of data bytes.
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed.
*2. Note that the start number is reduced by 1.
*3. When specifying the value of 0 or over 32 for the number of
reading coils, the error code "3h" is replied.
The data received as the response shows the status of coils 7 to 14. The data received here, "17h
= 00010111b", should be read with coil 7 as LSB, as follows:
Coil No.
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Coil status
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
If the read coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data, such coil data is regarded as "0"
and sent.
If the coil status reading command has not been performed normally, refer to the "Exception
Response" section.
4-162
Functions
No.
Coils 13 and 14 are OFF.
4-4 Communication Function
<Reading Holding Register Content [03h]>
Reads consecutively the specified number of holding register contents from the specified holding
register address.
(Example)
Read past trip data from the Inverter with slave address 5.
Below is the data on past three trips:
4
d081 (Previous factor)
d081 (Previous Inverter status)
Holding register No.
0012h
0013h
Trip factor (high-order)
Overvoltage (E07)
During deceleration (02)
Query
No.
Functions
3G3RX command
Response
Field name
Example
(HEX)
No.
Field name
Example
(HEX)
1
Slave address *1
05
1
Slave address
05
2
Function code
03
2
Function code
03
3
Register start number (MSB) *2
00
3
Number of data bytes *3
04
4
*2
Register start number (LSB)
11
4
Register start number (MSB)
00
5
Number of holding registers (MSB)
00
5
Register start number (LSB)
07
6
Number of holding registers (LSB)
02
6
Register start number +1
(MSB)
00
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
95
7
Register start number +1
(LSB)
02
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
8A
8
CRC-16 (MSB)
36
9
CRC-16 (LSB)
37
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed.
*2. Note that the start number is reduced by 1.
*3. Transfers data by the number of data bytes. In
this example, the Inverter sends response data
on two holding registers (4 bytes).
Read the data received in response, as follows:
Response buffer
4
5
6
7
Holding register start
number
+0 (MSB)
+0 (LSB)
+1 (MSB)
+1 (LSB)
Response data
00h
07h
00h
02h
Trip cause
Overvoltage trip
During deceleration
If the holding register content has not been read out normally, refer to the "Exception Response"
section.
4-163
4-4 Communication Function
<Writing Into the Coil [05h]>
Writes into one coil.
The following table shows the coil status change.
Coil status
OFF → ON
ON → OFF
Change data (MSB)
FFh
00h
Change data (LSB)
00h
00h
(Example)
Issue the RUN command to the Inverter with slave address 10.
To run the Inverter, set "03" in A002. The coil number of the RUN command is "1".
Query
Response
Field name
Example
(HEX)
No.
Field name
Example
(HEX)
1
Slave address *1
0A
1
Slave address
0A
2
Function code
05
2
Function code
05
3
Coil start number (MSB)*2
00
3
Coil start number (MSB)
00
4
Coil start number (LSB)*2
00
4
Coil start number (LSB)
00
5
Change data (MSB)
FF
5
Change data (MSB)
FF
6
Change data (LSB)
00
6
Change data (LSB)
00
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
8D
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
8D
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
41
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
41
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Note that the start number is reduced by 1.
If writing into the coil cannot be performed normally, refer to the "Exception Response" section.
4-164
Functions
No.
4
4-4 Communication Function
<Writing Into the Holding Register [06h]>
Writes data into the specified holding register.
(Example)
Write 50 Hz into the Inverter with slave address 5 as the base frequency (A003).
The data resolution of the holding register "1203h" of the base frequency (A003) is 1 Hz. To set 50
Hz, set the change data to "50 (0032h)".
Query
Response
No.
Functions
4
Field name
1
Slave address *1
2
Function code
Example
(HEX)
No.
05
1
Slave address
05
Field name
Example
(HEX)
06
2
Function code
06
3
Register start number (MSB)
*2
12
3
Register start number (MSB)
12
4
Register start number (LSB)*2
02
4
Register start number (LSB)
02
5
Change data (MSB)
00
5
Change data (MSB)
00
6
Change data (LSB)
32
6
Change data (LSB)
32
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
AD
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
AD
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
23
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
23
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Note that the start number is reduced by 1.
If writing into the holding register cannot be performed normally, refer to the "Exception Response"
section.
<Loop-back Test [08h]>
Used to check the communications between master and slave. A random value can be used for test
data.
(Example)
Loop-back test to the Inverter with slave address 1
Query
No.
Response
Field name
Example
(HEX)
No.
Field name
Example
(HEX)
1
Slave address *
01
1
Slave address
01
2
Function code
08
2
Function code
08
3
Diagnostic sub code (MSB)
00
3
Diagnostic sub code (MSB)
00
4
Diagnostic sub code (LSB)
00
4
Diagnostic sub code (LSB)
00
5
Data (MSB)
Random
5
Data (MSB)
Random
6
Data (LSB)
Random
6
Data (LSB)
Random
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
CRC
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
CRC
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
CRC
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
CRC
* Broadcasting cannot be performed.
The diagnostic sub code corresponds only with the query data echo (00h, 00h), not any other
commands.
4-165
4-4 Communication Function
<Writing Into Multiple Coils [0Fh]>
Rewrites consecutive multiple coils.
(Example)
Change the status of multi-function input terminals S1 to S6 on the Inverter with slave address 5.
Set the multi-function input terminals as shown in the following table.
Multi-function
input terminals
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
Coil No.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Terminal status
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Query
No.
4
Response
Field name
Example
(HEX)
No.
Field name
Example
(HEX)
Slave address *1
05
1
Slave address
05
2
Function code
0F
2
Function code
0F
3
Coil start number (MSB)*2
00
3
Coil start number (MSB)
00
4
Coil start number (LSB)*2
06
4
Coil start number (LSB)
06
5
Number of coils (MSB)
00
5
Number of coils (MSB)
00
6
Number of coils (LSB)
06
6
Number of coils (LSB)
06
7
Number of bytes *3
02
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
34
8
Change data (MSB)*3
17
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
4C
9
Change data (LSB)*3
00
10
CRC-16 (MSB)
DB
11
CRC-16 (LSB)
3E
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Note that the start number is reduced by 1.
*3. Since the change data comprises of both MSB and LSB as a set, make the byte to be an even
number by adding 1, even if the byte that actually needs to be changed is an odd number.
If writing into multiple coils cannot be performed normally, refer to the "Exception Response" section.
4-166
Functions
1
4-4 Communication Function
<Writing Into Multiple Holding Register [10h]>
Writes into consecutive multiple holding registers.
(Example)
Set acceleration time 1 (F002) to "3000 sec." for the Inverter with slave address 1.
The data resolution of the holding register "1103h, 1104h" of acceleration time 1 (F002) is 0.01 seconds. To set to 3000 seconds, set data to "300000 (493E0h)".
Query
Functions
4
No.
Field name
1
Slave address *1
2
Function code
Response
Example
(HEX)
No.
Field name
Example
(HEX)
01
1
Slave address
01
10
2
Function code
10
3
Start address (MSB)
*2
11
3
Start address (MSB)
11
4
Start address (LSB)*2
02
4
Start address (LSB)
02
5
Number of holding registers
(MSB)
00
5
Number of holding registers
(MSB)
00
6
Number of holding registers
(LSB)
02
6
Number of holding registers
(LSB)
02
7
Number of bytes *3
04
7
CRC-16 (MSB)
E5
8
Change data 1 (MSB)
00
8
CRC-16 (LSB)
34
9
Change data 1 (LSB)
04
10
Change data 2 (MSB)
93
11
Change data 2 (LSB)
E0
12
CRC-16 (MSB)
9E
13
CRC-16 (LSB)
9F
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Note that the start address is reduced by 1.
*3. Specifies the number of actual bytes to change, not the number of holding registers.
If writing into multiple holding registers cannot be performed normally, refer to the "Exception
Response" section.
<Exception Response>
The master requires the response for a query except for broadcast. Though the Inverter should return a response corresponding with the query, it returns an exception response if the query has an
error.
The exception response has the field configuration shown in the following table.
Field Configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
CRC-16
4-167
4-4 Communication Function
The detailed field configuration is shown below. The function code of the exception response is the
value of the query function code to which 80h is added. The exception code shows the cause of
exception response.
Function code
Exception code
Query
Exception
response
Code
01h
81h
01h
An unsupported function has been specified.
03h
83h
02h
Specified address does not exist.
05h
85h
03h
Specified data has an unacceptable format.
06h
86h
21h
Data is out of the Inverter's range for writing into the holding register.
0Fh
8Fh
10h
90h
Description
The Inverter does not allow this function.
„Saving the Change to the Holding Register (Enter Command)
Even if using the command to write into the holding register (06h) or into the consecutive holding
registers (10h), no change can be saved in the Inverter's memory element. If the Inverter power
shuts off without saving any changes, the holding register returns to the status before the changes
were made. To save the holding register changes in the Inverter's memory element, the "Enter
Command" must be issued according to the following procedure.
When the control parameters are changed, the motor parameters must be re-calculated. In this
case, perform recalculation with this register.
To issue the Enter command
Write all memory data into the holding register with the write command (06h), and write recalculated motor parameters into holding register 0900h. Below are the values to be written into the
holding register.
Set value
Description
0000
Motor parameter recalculation
0001
Set value storage
Other than the above
Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage
Note
•The Enter command needs considerable time. Monitor the data writing signal (coil number 001Ah)
to check whether the data is being written.
•Since the Inverter's memory element has a limit on the number of rewrites (approx. 100,000 times),
the Inverter life may be shortened if enter commands are frequently used.
4-168
Functions
22h
• Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed
during operation.
• Has issued the enter command during operation (UV).
• Has written into the register during trip (UV).
• Has written into the read-only register (coil).
4
4-4 Communication Function
„Register Number List
R/W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and/or writing.
R: Read only
R/W: Read and write enabled
<Coil Number List>
Coil No.
Functions
4
Item
R/W
Description
0000h
Not used
⎯
0001h
RUN command
R/W
1: Run
0: Stop (Enabled when A002 = 03)
0002h
Rotation direction command
R/W
1: Reverse
0: Forward (Enabled when A002 = 03)
0003h
External trip (EXT)
R/W
1: Trip
0004h
Trip reset (RS)
R/W
1: Reset
0005h
Not used
⎯
0006h
Not used
⎯
0007h
Multi-function input terminal S1
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
0008h
Multi-function input terminal S2
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
0009h
Multi-function input terminal S3
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
000Ah
Multi-function input terminal S4
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
000Bh
Multi-function input terminal S5
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
000Ch
Multi-function input terminal S6
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
000Dh
Multi-function input terminal S7
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
000Eh
Multi-function input terminal S8
R/W
1: ON
0: OFF *1
000Fh
Operation status
R
1: Run
0: Stop (Interlocked with d003)
0010h
Rotation direction
R
1: Reverse
0: Forward (Interlocked with d003)
0011h
Inverter ready
R
1: Ready
0: Not ready
0012h
Not used
⎯
0013h
RUN (during RUN)
R
1: During trip
0: Normal
*1. When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on, these settings are ON.
The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi-function input terminals.
If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection, turn the control
circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil.
*2. The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Can be reset during operation.)
4-169
4-4 Communication Function
Coil No.
R/W
Description
0014h
FA1 (constant speed arrival signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0015h
FA2 (over set frequency arrival
signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0016h
OL (overload warning)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0017h
OD (excessive PID deviation)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0018h
AL (alarm signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0019h
FA3 (set-frequency-only arrival
signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
001Ah
OTQ (overtorque)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
001Bh
IP (during momentary power
interruption)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
001Ch
UV (during undervoltage)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
001Dh
TRQ (during torque limit)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
001Eh
RNT (RUN time exceeded)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
001Fh
ONT (ON time exceeded)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0020h
THM (thermal warning)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0021h
Not used
⎯
0022h
Not used
⎯
0023h
Not used
⎯
0024h
Not used
⎯
0025h
Not used
⎯
0026h
BRK (brake release)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0027h
BER (brake error)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0028h
ZS (0 Hz signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0029h
DSE (excessive speed deviation)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
4
Functions
Item
*1. When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on, these settings are ON.
The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi-function input terminals.
If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection, turn the control
circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil.
*2. The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Can be reset during operation.)
4-170
4-4 Communication Function
Coil No.
Item
R/W
002Ah
POK (position ready)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
002Bh
FA4 (set frequency exceeded 2)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
002Ch
FA5 (set frequency only 2)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
002Dh
OL2 (overload warning signal 2)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
002Eh
FVDc (analog FV disconnection
detection)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
002Fh
FIDc (analog FI disconnection
detection)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0030h
FEDc (analog FE disconnection
detection)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0031h
Not used
⎯
0032h
FBV (PID FB status output)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0033h
NDc (network error)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0034h
LOG1 (logic operation output 1)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0035h
LOG2 (logic operation output 2)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0036h
LOG3 (logic operation output 3)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0037h
LOG4 (logic operation output 4)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0038h
LOG5 (logic operation output 5)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0039h
LOG6 (logic operation output 6)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
003Ah
WAC (capacitor life warning)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
003Bh
WAF (cooling fan life warning)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
003Ch
FR (starting contact signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
003Dh
OHF (fin overheat warning)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
003Eh
LOC (low current signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
Functions
4
Description
*1. When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on, these settings are ON.
The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi-function input terminals.
If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection, turn the control
circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil.
*2. The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Can be reset during operation.)
4-171
4-4 Communication Function
Coil No.
Item
R/W
Description
Not used
⎯
0040h
Not used
⎯
0041h
Not used
⎯
0042h
Not used
⎯
0043h
Not used
⎯
0044h
Not used
⎯
0045h
IRDY (operation ready)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0046h
FWR (forward run signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0047h
RVR (reverse run signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0048h
MJA (fatal fault signal)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0049h
During data write
R
1: Writing
0: Normal
004Ah
CRC error
R
1: Error
0: No error *2
004Bh
Overrun error
R
1: Error
0: No error *2
004Ch
Framing error
R
1: Error
0: No error *2
004Dh
Parity error
R
1: Error
0: No error *2
004Eh
Checksum error
R
1: Error
0: No error *2
004Fh
Not used
⎯
0050h
WCFV
(window comparator FV)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0050h
WCFI
(window comparator FI)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
0052h
WCFE
(window comparator FE)
R
1: ON
0: OFF
4
Functions
003Fh
*1. When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on, these settings are ON.
The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi-function input terminals.
If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection, turn the control
circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil.
*2. The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Can be reset during operation.)
4-172
4-4 Communication Function
<Holding Register Number List (Frequency Reference and Trip Monitor)>
Register
No.
Function name
0001h
Function
code
R/W
F001
(HIGH)
R/W
F001
(LOW)
R/W
Output frequency setting/monitor
Resolution
0 to 40000
(Enabled when A001 = 03)
0.01
[Hz]
⎯
4
0003h
Inverter status A
⎯
R
Functions
0002h
Monitor and setting parameters
0: Initial status
1: ⎯
2: Stop
3: RUN
4: Free-run stop
5: Jogging
6: DC injection braking
7: Retry
8: Trip
9: During UV
0004h
Inverter status B
⎯
R
0: During stop
1: During RUN
2: During trip
⎯
⎯
0.01
[%]
0005h
Inverter status C
⎯
R
0: ⎯
1: Stop
2: Deceleration
3: Constant speed
4: Acceleration
5: Forward
6: Reverse
7: Forward to reverse
8: Reverse to forward
9: Forward run start
10: Reverse run start
0006h
PID feedback
⎯
R/W
0 to 10000
0007h
to
0010h
Not used
⎯
⎯
0011h
Fault frequency monitor
d080
R
⎯
0 to 65530
1 [time]
Note 1: The Inverter's rated current is "1000".
Note 2: If the set value is "10000" (100.0 sec) or more, the value in the second decimal place is ignored.
4-173
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
Fault monitor 1 factor
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0013h
Fault monitor 1 Inverter status
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0014h
Fault monitor 1 frequency (HIGH)
0 to 40000
0015h
Fault monitor 1 frequency (LOW)
0.01
[Hz]
0016h
Fault monitor 1 current
Output current value at the time of
tripping
0.1 [A]
0017h
Fault monitor 1 voltage
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
1 [V]
0018h
Fault monitor 1 RUN time (HIGH)
Total RUN time before the trip
1 [h]
0019h
Fault monitor 1 RUN time (LOW)
001Ah
Fault monitor 1 ON time (HIGH)
Total power ON time before the trip
1 [h]
001Bh
Fault monitor 1 ON time (LOW)
001Ch
Fault monitor 2 factor
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
001Dh
Fault monitor 2 Inverter status
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
001Eh
Fault monitor 2 frequency (HIGH)
0 to 40000
0.01
[Hz]
Output current value at the time of
tripping
0.1 [A]
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
1 [V]
Total RUN time before the trip
1 [h]
Total power ON time before the trip
1 [h]
d081
R
001Fh
Fault monitor 2 frequency (LOW)
0020h
Fault monitor 2 current
0021h
Fault monitor 2 voltage
0022h
Fault monitor 2 RUN time (HIGH)
0023h
Fault monitor 2 RUN time (LOW)
0024h
Fault monitor 2 ON time (HIGH)
0025h
Fault monitor 2 ON time (LOW)
0026h
Fault monitor 3 factor
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0027h
Fault monitor 3 Inverter status
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0028h
Fault monitor 3 frequency (HIGH)
0 to 40000
0.01
[Hz]
Output current value at the time of
tripping
0.1 [A]
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
1 [V]
Total RUN time before the trip
1 [h]
Total power ON time before the trip
1 [h]
0029h
Fault monitor 3 frequency (LOW)
002Ah
Fault monitor 3 current
002Bh
Fault monitor 3 voltage
002Ch
Fault monitor 3 RUN time (HIGH)
002Dh
Fault monitor 3 RUN time (LOW)
002Eh
Fault monitor 3 ON time (HIGH)
002Fh
Fault monitor 3 ON time (LOW)
d082
d083
R
R
Note 1: The Inverter's rated current is "1000".
Note 2: If the set value is "10000" (100.0 sec) or more, the value in the second decimal place is ignored.
4-174
4
Functions
0012h
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Functions
4
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
0030h
Fault monitor 4 factor
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0031h
Fault monitor 4 Inverter status
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0032h
Fault monitor 4 frequency (HIGH)
0 to 40000
0033h
Fault monitor 4 frequency (LOW)
0.01
[Hz]
0034h
Fault monitor 4 current
Output current value at the time of
tripping
0.1 [A]
0035h
Fault monitor 4 voltage
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
1 [V]
0036h
Fault monitor 4 RUN time (HIGH)
Total RUN time before the trip
1 [h]
0037h
Fault monitor 4 RUN time (LOW)
0038h
Fault monitor 4 ON time (HIGH)
Total power ON time before the trip
1 [h]
0039h
Fault monitor 4 ON time (LOW)
003Ah
Fault monitor 5 factor
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
003Bh
Fault monitor 5 Inverter status
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
003Ch
Fault monitor 5 frequency (HIGH)
0 to 40000
0.01
[Hz]
Output current value at the time of
tripping
0.1 [A]
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
1 [V]
Total RUN time before the trip
1 [h]
Total power ON time before the trip
1 [h]
d084
R
003Dh
Fault monitor 5 frequency (LOW)
003Eh
Fault monitor 5 current
003Fh
Fault monitor 5 voltage
0040h
Fault monitor 5 RUN time (HIGH)
0041h
Fault monitor 5 RUN time (LOW)
0042h
Fault monitor 5 ON time (HIGH)
0043h
Fault monitor 5 ON time (LOW)
0044h
Fault monitor 6 factor
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0045h
Fault monitor 6 Inverter status
See "Inverter Trip Factor List"
(page 4-176).
⎯
0046h
Fault monitor 6 frequency (HIGH)
0 to 40000
0.01
[Hz]
Output current value at the time of
tripping
0.1 [A]
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
1 [V]
Total RUN time before the trip
1 [h]
Total power ON time before the trip
1 [h]
0047h
Fault monitor 6 frequency (LOW)
0048h
Fault monitor 6 current
0049h
Fault monitor 6 voltage
004Ah
Fault monitor 6 RUN time (HIGH)
004Bh
Fault monitor 6 RUN time (LOW)
004Ch
Fault monitor 6 ON time (HIGH)
004Dh
Fault monitor 6 ON time (LOW)
d085
d086
R
R
Note 1: The Inverter's rated current is "1000".
Note 2: If the set value is "10000" (100.0 sec) or more, the value in the second decimal place is ignored.
4-175
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
004Eh
Warning monitor
d090
R
004Fh
to
08FFh
Not used
⎯
⎯
0900h
EEPROM write
⎯
W
0901h
to
1000h
Not used
⎯
⎯
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
Warning code
⎯
0000: Motor parameter recalculation
0001: Set value storage in EEPROM
Other: Motor parameter recalculation
and set value storage in
EEPROM
⎯
⎯
Inverter Trip Factor List
Trip factor high-order (factor)
Name
Trip factor low-order (Inverter status)
Code
Name
Code
No trip factor
0
During reset
0
Overcurrent protection during constant speed
1
During stop
1
Overvoltage protection during deceleration
2
During deceleration
2
Overcurrent protection during acceleration
3
During constant speed
3
Overcurrent protection during stop
4
During acceleration
4
Overload protection
5
Operates at frequency = 0
5
Braking resistor overload protection
6
During startup
6
Overvoltage protection
7
During DB
7
EEPROM error
8
During overload limit
8
Undervoltage protection
9
During SON/FOC
9
CT error
10
CPU error
11
External trip
12
USP error
13
Grounding protection
14
Incoming overvoltage protection
15
Momentary power interruption protection
16
Power module abnormal temperature
(during FAN stop)
20
Power module abnormal temperature
21
Gate array communications error
23
Input phase loss protection
24
Main circuit error
25
4-176
Functions
Note 1: The Inverter's rated current is "1000".
Note 2: If the set value is "10000" (100.0 sec) or more, the value in the second decimal place is ignored.
4
4-4 Communication Function
Trip factor high-order (factor)
Trip factor low-order (Inverter status)
Name
Code
IGBT error
30
Thermistor error
35
Brake error addition
36
Emergency shutoff error
37
Low-speed-range electronic thermal
38
Name
Option 1 errors 0 to 9
60 to 69
Option 2 errors 0 to 9
70 to 79
Code
4
Functions
<Holding Register Number List (Monitor)>
Register
No.
Function name
1001h
Output frequency monitor
1002h
Function
code
d001
(HIGH)
d001
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Rresolution
R
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1003h
Output current monitor
d002
R
0 to 9999
0.1 [A]
1004h
Rotation direction monitor
d003
R
0: Stop
1: Forward
2: Reverse
⎯
R
0 to 9990
0.1 [%]
1005h
PID feedback value monitor
1006h
d004
(HIGH)
d004
(LOW)
1007h
Multi-function input monitor
d005
R
2^0: Terminal S1 to 2^7: Terminal S8
2^8: Terminal FW
⎯
1008h
Multi-function output
monitor
d006
R
2^0: Terminal P1 to 2^4: Terminal P5
2^6: Relay terminal
⎯
R
0 to 39960
0.01
1009h
100Ah
Output frequency monitor
(after conversion)
100Bh
Real frequency monitor
100Ch
d007
(HIGH)
d007
(LOW)
d008
(HIGH)
R
d008
(LOW)
R
R
-200 to +200
1 [%]
-200 to +200
1 [%]
-40000 to +40000
0.01 [Hz]
100Dh
Torque reference monitor
d009
100Eh
Torque bias monitor
d010
R
100Fh
Not used
⎯
⎯
1010h
Output torque monitor
d012
R
-200 to +200
1 [%]
1011h
Output voltage monitor
d013
R
0 to 6000
0.1 [V]
1012h
Input power monitor
d014
R
0 to 9999
0.1 [kW]
4-177
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
1013h
Integrated power monitor
Function
code
d015
(HIGH)
1014h
d015
(LOW)
1015h
d016
(HIGH)
Total RUN time
1016h
d016
(LOW)
1017h
d017
(HIGH)
Power ON time monitor
1018h
d017
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Rresolution
R
0 to 9999999
0.1 [h]
R
0 to 999900
0.1 [kW]
R
0 to 999900
1 [h]
Fin temperature monitor
d018
R
-200 to 2000
0.1 [°C]
101Ah
Motor temperature monitor
d019
R
-200 to 2000
0.1 [°C]
Not used
⎯
⎯
101Dh
Life assessment monitor
d022
R
101Eh
to
1025h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1026h
DC voltage monitor
d102
R
0 to 9999
0.1 [V]
1027h
Regenerative braking load
rate monitor
d103
R
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
1028h
Electronic thermal monitor
d104
R
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
1029h
to
1033h
Not used
⎯
⎯
d028
(HIGH)
R/W
1035h
d028
(LOW)
R/W
1036h
d029
(HIGH)
R
1037h
d029
(LOW)
R
1038h
d030
(HIGH)
R
d030
(LOW)
R
⎯
⎯
101Bh
101Ch
1034h
Pulse counter monitor
Position command monitor
Current position monitor
1039h
103Ah
to
1102h
Not used
⎯
2^0: Capacitor on the main circuit board
2^1: Cooling fan rotation speed
reduced
⎯
⎯
⎯
0 to 2147483647
1
-2147483647 to 2147483647
1
-2147483647 to 2147483647
1
⎯
4-178
Functions
1019h
4
4-4 Communication Function
<Holding Register Number List>
Register
No.
Function name
1103h
Acceleration time 1
F002
(LOW)
1105h
F003
(HIGH)
Deceleration time 1
Functions
F002
(HIGH)
1104h
1106h
4
Function
code
F003
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
R/W
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
R/W
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
0: Forward
1: Reverse
⎯
1107h
Operator rotation direction
selection
F004
R/W
1108h
to
1200h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
<Holding Register Number List (Function Mode)>
Register
No.
1201h
Function name
Frequency reference
selection
Function
code
A001
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
R/W
0: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
1: Terminal
2: Digital Operator (F001)
3: ModBus communication
4: Option 1
5: Option 2
6: Pulse train frequency
7: Not used
10: Frequency operation result
⎯
⎯
1202h
RUN command selection
A002
R/W
1: Terminal
2: Digital Operator (F001)
3: ModBus communication
4: Option 1
5: Option 2
1203h
Base frequency
A003
R/W
30 to Max. frequency
1 [Hz]
1204h
Maximum frequency
A004
R/W
30 to 400
1 [Hz]
R/W
0: Switches between FV/FI
1: Switches between FV/FE
2: Switches between FV/VR
3: Switches between FI/VR
4: Switches between FE/VR
⎯
0: FE only
1: FV/FI auxiliary speed (not reversible)
2: FV/FI auxiliary speed (reversible)
3: FE disabled
⎯
1205h
FV/FI selection
A005
1206h
FE selection
A006
R/W
1207h
to
120Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
4-179
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
A011
(HIGH)
120Bh
FV start frequency
120Ch
A011
(LOW)
120Dh
A012
(HIGH)
FV end frequency
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
A012
(LOW)
120Eh
FV start ratio
A013
R/W
O to FVend ratio
1 [%]
1210h
FV end ratio
A014
R/W
FV start ratio to 100
1 [%]
1211h
FV start selection
A015
R/W
0: External start frequency
1: 0 Hz
⎯
1212h
FV, FE, FI sampling
A016
R/W
1 to 30
31: 500-ms filter with a hysteresis of
±0.1 Hz
1
1213h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1214h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1215h
Multi-step speed selection
A019
R/W
A020
(HIGH)
R/W
A020
(LOW)
R/W
A021
(HIGH)
R/W
A021
(LOW)
R/W
A022
(HIGH)
R/W
A022
(LOW)
R/W
A023
(HIGH)
R/W
A023
(LOW)
R/W
A024
(HIGH)
R/W
A024
(LOW)
R/W
A025
(HIGH)
R/W
A025
(LOW)
R/W
1216h
Multi-step speed
reference 0
1217h
1218h
Multi-step speed
reference 1
1219h
121Ah
Multi-step speed
reference 2
121Bh
121Ch
Multi-step speed
reference 3
121Dh
121Eh
Multi-step speed
reference 4
121Fh
1220h
Multi-step speed
reference 5
1221h
0: Binary
1: Bit
⎯
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
4-180
4
Functions
120Fh
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
1222h
Multi-step speed
reference 6
1223h
1224h
Multi-step speed
reference 7
1225h
4
1226h
Multi-step speed
reference 8
Functions
1227h
1228h
Multi-step speed
reference 9
1229h
122Ah
Multi-step speed
reference 10
122Bh
122Ch
Multi-step speed
reference 11
122Dh
122Eh
Multi-step speed
reference 12
122Fh
1230h
Multi-step speed
reference 13
1231h
1232h
Multi-step speed
reference 14
1233h
1234h
Multi-step speed
reference 15
1235h
Function
code
R/W
A026
(HIGH)
R/W
A026
(LOW)
R/W
A027
(HIGH)
R/W
A027
(LOW)
R/W
A028
(HIGH)
R/W
A028
(LOW)
R/W
A029
(HIGH)
R/W
A029
(LOW)
R/W
A030
(HIGH)
R/W
A030
(LOW)
R/W
A031
(HIGH)
R/W
A031
(LOW)
R/W
A032
(HIGH)
R/W
A032
(LOW)
R/W
A033
(HIGH)
R/W
A033
(LOW)
R/W
A034
(HIGH)
R/W
A034
(LOW)
R/W
A035
(HIGH)
R/W
A035
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
1236h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1237h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1238h
Jogging frequency
A038
R/W
4-181
Starting frequency to 999
0.01 [Hz]
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
0: Free-run stop/Disabled in operation
1: Deceleration stop/Disabled in
operation
2: DC injection braking stop/Disabled in
operation
3: Free-run stop/Enabled in operation
4: Deceleration stop/Enabled in
operation
5: DC injection braking stop/Enabled in
operation
⎯
1239h
Jogging stop selection
A039
R/W
123Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
123Bh
Torque boost selection
A041
R/W
0: Manual torque boost
1: Automatic torque boost
123Ch
Manual torque boost
voltage
A042
R/W
0 to 200
0.1 [%]
123Dh
Manual torque boost
frequency
A043
R/W
0 to 500
0.1 [%]
⎯
4
⎯
V/f characteristics
selection
A044
R/W
123Fh
Output voltage gain
A045
R/W
20 to 100
1 [%]
1240h
Automatic torque boost
voltage compensation
gain
A046
R/W
0 to 255
1 [%]
1241h
Automatic torque boost
slip compensation gain
A047
R/W
0 to 255
1 [%]
1242h
to
1244h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1245h
DC injection braking
selection
A051
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Operates only at the set frequency.
1246h
DC injection braking
frequency
A052
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1247h
DC injection braking delay
time
A053
R/W
0 to 50
0.1 [s]
1248h
DC injection braking
power
A054
R/W
0 to 100 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 80 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
1249h
DC injection braking time
A055
R/W
0 to 600
0.1 [s]
124Ah
DC injection braking
method selection
A056
R/W
0: Edge operation
1: Level operation
⎯
124Bh
Startup DC injection
braking power
A057
R/W
0 to 100 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 80 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
⎯
⎯
4-182
Functions
123Eh
0: VC
1: Special VP
2: Free V/f
3: Sensorless vector
4: 0-Hz sensorless vector
5: Sensor vector
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
124Ch
Startup DC injection
braking time
A058
R/W
0 to 600
0.1 [s]
124Dh
DC injection braking
carrier frequency
A059
R/W
5 to 150 (0.4 to 55 kW)
5 to 100 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [kHz]
124Eh
Not used
⎯
⎯
A061
(HIGH)
R/W
124Fh
Frequency upper limit
1250h
A061
(LOW)
R/W
1251h
A062
(HIGH)
R/W
4
Functions
Frequency lower limit
1252h
A062
(LOW)
R/W
1253h
A063
(HIGH)
R/W
Jump frequency 1
1254h
1255h
Jump frequency width 1
1256h
A063
(LOW)
R/W
A064
R/W
A065
(HIGH)
R/W
Jump frequency 2
1257h
1258h
Jump frequency width 2
1259h
A065
(LOW)
R/W
A066
R/W
A067
(HIGH)
R/W
A067
(LOW)
R/W
A068
R/W
A069
(HIGH)
R/W
A069
(LOW)
R/W
Jump frequency 3
125Ah
125Bh
Jump frequency width 3
125Ch
Acceleration stop
frequency
125Dh
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
0/Frequency lower limit to
Max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0/Starting frequency to
Frequency upper limit
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 1000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 1000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 1000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [s]
125Eh
Acceleration stop time
A070
R/W
0 to 600
125Fh
PID selection
A071
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Reverse output enabled
⎯
1260h
PID P gain
A072
R/W
2 to 50
0.1
1261h
PID I gain
A073
R/W
0 to 36000
0.1 [s]
1262h
PID D gain
A074
R/W
0 to 10000
0.01 [s]
1263h
PID scale
A075
R/W
1 to 9999
0.01
4-183
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1264h
PID feedback selection
A076
R/W
0: Input FI
1: Input FV
2: RS485 communication
3: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
1265h
Reverse PID function
A077
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
1266h
PID output limit function
A078
R/W
0 to 1000
0.1 [s]
0: Disabled
1: Input FV
2: Input FI
3: Input FE
⎯
⎯
1267h
PID feedforward selection
A079
R/W
1268h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1269h
AVR selection
A081
R/W
0: Always ON
1: Always OFF
2: OFF during deceleration
⎯
200-V class: 0 (200)
1 (215)
2 (220)
3 (230)
4 (240)
400-V class: 5 (380)
6 (400)
7 (415)
8 (440)
9 (460)
10 (480)
⎯
⎯
AVR voltage selection
A082
R/W
126Bh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
126Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
126Dh
RUN mode selection
A085
R/W
0: Normal operation
1: Energy-saving operation
2: Automatic operation
126Eh
Energy-saving response/
accuracy adjustment
A086
R/W
0 to 1000
126Fh
to
1273h
Not used
⎯
⎯
A092
(HIGH)
R/W
1275h
A092
(LOW)
R/W
1276h
A093
(HIGH)
R/W
A093
(LOW)
R/W
A094
R/W
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
1277h
1278h
2-step acceleration/
deceleration selection
⎯
0.1 [%]
⎯
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
0: Switched via terminal 2CH
1: Switched by setting
⎯
4-184
Functions
126Ah
1274h
4
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
1279h
2-step acceleration
frequency
127Ah
127Bh
2-step deceleration
frequency
127Ch
4
Functions
127Dh
Acceleration pattern
selection
Function
code
R/W
A095
(HIGH)
R/W
A095
(LOW)
R/W
A096
(HIGH)
R/W
A096
(LOW)
R/W
A097
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
R/W
0: Line
1: S-shape curve
2: U-shape curve
3: Inverted U-shape curve
4: EL-S-shape curve
⎯
0: Line
1: S-shape curve
2: U-shape curve
3: Inverted U-shape curve
4: EL-S-shape curve
⎯
127Eh
Deceleration pattern
selection
A098
R/W
127Fh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1280h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
A101
(HIGH)
R/W
1282h
A101
(LOW)
R/W
1283h
A102
(HIGH)
R/W
A102
(LOW)
R/W
1281h
FI start frequency
FI end frequency
1284h
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1285h
FI start ratio
A103
R/W
O to FI end ratio
1 [%]
1286h
FI end ratio
A104
R/W
FI start ratio to 100
1 [%]
1287h
FI start selection
A105
R/W
0: External start frequency
1: 0 Hz
⎯
1288h
to
128Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
A111
(HIGH)
R/W
128Dh
FE start frequency
128Eh
A111
(LOW)
R/W
128Fh
A112
(HIGH)
R/W
FE end frequency
1290h
A112
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
-40000 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
-40000 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1291h
FE start ratio
A113
R/W
-100 to FE end ratio
1 [%]
1292h
FE end ratio
A114
R/W
FE start ratio to 100
1 [%]
4-185
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1293h
to
12A4h
Not used
⎯
⎯
12A5h
Acceleration curve
parameter
A131
R/W
1: Small curve to 10: Large curve
⎯
12A6h
Deceleration curve
parameter
A132
R/W
1: Small curve to 10: Large curve
⎯
12A7h
to
12AEh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
4
Operation frequency input
A setting
A141
R/W
0: Digital Operator (F001)
1: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
2: Input FV
3: Input FI
4: RS485 communication
5: Option 1
6: Option 2
7: Pulse train frequency
⎯
⎯
⎯
12B0h
Operation frequency input
B setting
A142
R/W
0: Digital Operator (F001)
1: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
2: Input FV
3: Input FI
4: RS485 communication
5: Option 1
6: Option 2
7: Pulse train frequency
12B1h
Operator selection
A143
R/W
0: Addition (A + B)
1: Subtraction (A - B)
2: Multiplication (A × B)
12B2h
Not used
⎯
⎯
A145
(HIGH)
R/W
12B3h
Frequency addition
amount
12B4h
⎯
0 to 40000
A145
(LOW)
R/W
0.01 [Hz]
12B5h
Frequency addition
direction
A146
R/W
12B6h
to
12B8h
Not used
⎯
⎯
12B9h
EL-S-curve ratio 1 during
acceleration
A150
R/W
0 to 50
1 [%]
12BAh
EL-S-curve ratio 2 during
acceleration
A151
R/W
0 to 50
1 [%]
12BBh
EL-S-curve ratio 1 during
deceleration
A152
R/W
0 to 50
1 [%]
12BCh
EL-S-curve ratio 2 during
deceleration
A153
R/W
0 to 50
1 [%]
0: Frequency reference + A145
1: Frequency reference - A145
⎯
⎯
4-186
Functions
12AFh
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
12BDh
to
1300h
Functions
4
Function name
Not used
Function
code
R/W
⎯
⎯
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
1301h
Retry selection
b001
R/W
0: Trip
1: 0-Hz start
2: Frequency matching start
3: Trip after frequency matching
deceleration stop
4: Frequency pull-in restart
1302h
Allowable momentary
power interruption time
b002
R/W
3 to 250
0.1 [s]
1303h
Retry wait time
b003
R/W
3 to 1000
0.1 [s]
1304h
Momentary power
interruption/undervoltage
trip during stop selection
b004
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Disabled during stop and deceleration
stop
⎯
1305h
Momentary power
interruption retry time
selection
b005
R/W
0: 16 times
1: No limit
⎯
1306h
Input phase loss
protection selection
b006
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
b007
(HIGH)
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1307h
Frequency matching lower
limit frequency setting
1308h
b007
(LOW)
⎯
R/W
1309h
Trip retry selection
b008
R/W
0: Trip
1: 0-Hz start
2: Frequency matching start
3: Trip after frequency matching
deceleration stop
4: Frequency pull-in restart
130Ah
Undervoltage retry time
selection
b009
R/W
0: 16 times
1: No limit
⎯
130Bh
Overvoltage/overcurrent
retry time selection
b010
R/W
1 to 3
⎯
130Ch
Trip retry wait time
b011
R/W
3 to 1000
0.1 [s]
130Dh
Electronic thermal level
b012
R/W
200 to 1000
0.1 [%]
130Eh
Electronic thermal
characteristics selection
b013
R/W
0: Reduction characteristics
1: Constant torque characteristics
2: Free setting
130Fh
Not used
⎯
⎯
1310h
Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency 1
b015
R/W
0 to 400
1 [Hz]
1311h
Free setting, electronic
thermal current 1
b016
R/W
0 to Rated current
0.1 [A]
1312h
Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency 2
b017
R/W
0 to 400
1 [Hz]
4-187
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1313h
Free setting, electronic
thermal current 2
b018
R/W
0 to Rated current
0.1 [A]
1314h
Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency 3
b019
R/W
0 to 400
1 [Hz]
1315h
Free setting, electronic
thermal current 3
b020
R/W
0 to Rated current
0.1 [A]
Overload limit selection
b021
R/W
1317h
Overload limit level
b022
R/W
200 to 2000 ( 0.4 to 55 kW)
200 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [%]
1318h
Overload limit parameter
b023
R/W
10 to 3000
0.01 [s]
⎯
1319h
Overload limit selection 2
b024
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled during acceleration/
constant speed
2: Enabled during constant speed
3: Enabled during acceleration/constant
speed (accelerated during regeneration)
131Ah
Overload limit level 2
b025
R/W
200 to 2000 ( 0.4 to 55 kW)
200 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [%]
131Bh
Overload limit parameter 2
b026
R/W
10 to 3000
0.01 [s]
131Ch
Overcurrent suppression
function
b027
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
131Dh
Frequency pull-in restart
level
b028
R/W
200 to 2000 ( 0.4 to 55 kW)
200 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [%]
131Eh
Frequency pull-in restart
parameter
b029
R/W
10 to 3000
0.01 [s]
131Fh
Starting frequency at
frequency pull-in restart
b030
R/W
0: Frequency at interruption
1: Max. frequency
2: Set frequency
⎯
0: Data other than b031 cannot be
changed when terminal SFT is ON.
1: Data other than b031 and the specified
frequency parameter cannot be
changed when terminal SFT is ON.
2: Data other than b031 cannot be
changed.
3: Data other than b031 and the specified
frequency parameter cannot be
changed.
10: Data can be changed during RUN.
⎯
⎯
1320h
Soft lock selection
b031
R/W
1321h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1322h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-188
4
Functions
1316h
0: Disabled
1: Enabled during acceleration/constant
speed
2: Enabled during constant speed
3: Enabled during acceleration/constant
speed (accelerated during
regeneration)
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
1323h
RUN time/Power ON time
setting
1324h
Functions
4
1325h
Rotation direction limit
selection
1326h
Reduced voltage startup
selection
1327h
Display selection
Function
code
R/W
b034
(HIGH)
R/W
b034
(LOW)
R/W
b035
R/W
0: Forward/Reverse enabled
1: Forward only
2: Reverse only
⎯
R/W
0: (Reduced voltage startup time: Short)
to
255: (Reduced voltage startup time:
Long)
⎯
R/W
0: Complete display
1: Individual display of functions
2: User setting + b037
3: Data comparison display
4: Basic display
⎯
⎯
Monitor and setting parameters
0 to 65535
b036
b037
Resolution
1 [10 h]
1328h
Initial screen selection
b038
R/W
0: Screen on which the Enter key was last
pressed
1: d001
2: d002
3: d003
4: d007
5: F001
1329h
User parameter automatic
setting function selection
b039
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
⎯
132Ah
Torque limit selection
b040
R/W
0: Four-quadrant separate setting
1: Terminal switching
2: Analog Input
3: Option 1
4: Option 2
132Bh
Torque limit 1
(Four-quadrant mode
forward power running)
b041
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)/
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)/255 (no)
1 [%]
132Ch
Torque limit 2
(Four-quadrant mode
reversed regeneration)
b042
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)/
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)/255 (no)
1 [%]
132Dh
Torque limit 3
(Four-quadrant mode
reversed power running)
b043
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)/
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)/255 (no)
1 [%]
132Eh
Torque limit 4
(Four-quadrant mode
forward regeneration)
b044
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)/
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)/255 (no)
1 [%]
132Fh
Torque LADSTOP
selection
b045
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
1330h
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
b046
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
1331h
to
1333h
Not used
⎯
⎯
4-189
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
1334h
Selection of non-stop
function at momentary
power interruption
b050
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Deceleration stop
2: Momentary power interruption nonstop (without recovery)
3: Momentary power interruption nonstop (with recovery)
1335h
Starting voltage of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
b051
R/W
0 to 10000
1336h
Starting deceleration level
of non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
0.1 [V]
4
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [V]
b053
(HIGH)
R/W
b053
(LOW)
R/W
0 to 360000
0.01 [s]
1339h
Deceleration starting width
of non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
b054
R/W
0 to 1000
0.01 [Hz]
133Ah
Proportional gain setting of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
b055
R/W
0 to 255
0.01
133Bh
Integral time setting of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
b056
R/W
0 to 65535
0.001 [s]
133Ch
to
133Eh
Not used
⎯
⎯
133Fh
Window comparator FV
upper limit level
1340h
Window comparator FV
lower limit level
1337h
1338h
Deceleration time of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
1341h
Window comparator FV
hysteresis width
1342h
Window comparator FI
upper limit level
b060
b061
b062
b063
⎯
R/W
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
1 [%]
R/W
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
1 [%]
R/W
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
1 [%]
R/W
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
1 [%]
4-190
Functions
b052
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
1343h
Functions
4
Function name
Window comparator FI
lower limit level
1344h
Window comparator FI
hysteresis width
1345h
Window comparator FE
upper limit level
1346h
Window comparator FE
lower limit level
Function
code
b064
b065
b066
b067
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
R/W
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
1 [%]
R/W
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
1 [%]
R/W
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
1 [%]
R/W
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
1 [%]
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
1 [%]
1347h
Window comparator FE
hysteresis width
b068
R/W
1348h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1349h
Analog operation level at
FV disconnection
b070
R/W
0 to 100/255 (no)
1 [%]
134Ah
Analog operation level at
FI disconnection
b071
R/W
0 to 100/255 (no)
1 [%]
134Bh
Analog operation level at
FE disconnection
b072
R/W
-100 to 100/127 (no)
1 [%]
134Ch
to
1350
Not used
⎯
⎯
1351h
Integrated power clear
b078
R/W
Clear by writing 1
⎯
1352h
Integrated power display
gain
b079
R/W
1 to 1000
1
1353h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1354h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1355h
Starting frequency
b082
R/W
10 to 999
0.01 [Hz]
1356h
Carrier frequency
b083
R/W
5 to 150 (0.4 to 55 kW)
5 to 100 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [kHz]
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
1357h
Initialization selection
b084
R/W
0: Clears the trip monitor
1: Initializes data
2: Clears the trip monitor and initializes
data
1358h
Initialization parameter
selection
b085
R/W
Do not change.
4-191
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
1359h
Frequency conversion
coefficient
b086
R/W
1 to 999
0.1
135Ah
STOP key selection
b087
R/W
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2: Disabled only during stop
⎯
135Bh
Free-run stop selection
b088
R/W
0: 0-Hz start
1: Frequency matching start
2: Frequency pull-in restart
⎯
135Ch
Automatic carrier
frequency reduction
b089
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
135Dh
Usage rate of regenerative
braking function
b090
R/W
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
135Eh
Stop selection
b091
R/W
0: Deceleration → Stop
1: Free-run stop
⎯
135Fh
Cooling fan control
b092
R/W
0: Always ON
1: ON during RUN
⎯
1360h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1361h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1362h
Regenerative braking
function operation
selection
b095
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (disabled during stop)
2: Enabled (also during stop)
⎯
1363h
Regenerative braking
function ON level
b096
R/W
330 to 380
660 to 760
1 [V]
1364h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1365h
Thermistor selection
b098
R/W
0: Disabled
1: PTC enabled
2: NTC enabled
⎯
1366h
Thermistor error level
b099
R/W
0 to 9999
1 [Ω]
1367h
Free V/f frequency 1
b100
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
1368h
Free V/f voltage 1
b101
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
1369h
Free V/f frequency 2
b102
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
136Ah
Free V/f voltage 2
b103
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
136Bh
Free V/f frequency 3
b104
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
136Ch
Free V/f voltage 3
b105
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
136Dh
Free V/f frequency 4
b106
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
136Eh
Free V/f voltage 4
b107
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
136Fh
Free V/f frequency 5
b108
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
1370h
Free V/f voltage 5
b109
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
1371h
Free V/f frequency 6
b110
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
1372h
Free V/f voltage 6
b111
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
1373h
Free V/f frequency 7
b112
R/W
0 to Free V/f frequency 2
1 [Hz]
1374h
Free V/f voltage 7
b113
R/W
0 to 8000
0.1 [V]
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
4-192
Functions
⎯
4
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Functions
4
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1375h
to
137Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
137Bh
Brake control selection
b120
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
137Ch
Brake wait time for release
b121
R/W
0 to 500
0.01 [s]
137Dh
Brake wait time for
acceleration
b122
R/W
0 to 500
0.01 [s]
137Eh
Brake wait time for
stopping
b123
R/W
0 to 500
0.01 [s]
137Fh
Brake wait time for
confirmation
b124
R/W
0 to 500
0.01 [s]
1380h
Brake release frequency
b125
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1381h
Brake release current
b126
R/W
0 to 2000 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [%]
1382h
Brake input frequency
b127
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
1383h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1384h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1385h
Overvoltage protection
function selection during
deceleration
b130
R/W
0: Disabled
1: DC voltage kept constant
2: Acceleration enabled
⎯
1386h
Overvoltage protection
level during deceleration
b131
R/W
200-V class: 330 to 390 (V)
400-V class: 660 to 780 (V)
1 [V]
1387h
Overvoltage protection
parameter
b132
R/W
10 to 3000
0.01 [s]
1388h
Overvoltage protection
proportional gain setting
b133
R/W
0 to 255
0.01
1389h
Overvoltage protection
integral time setting
b134
R/W
0 to 65535.
0.001 [s]
1390h
to
1400h
Not used
⎯
⎯
4-193
⎯
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
1401h
Multi-function input 1
selection
C001
R/W
1402h
Multi-function input 2
selection
C002
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
⎯
⎯
4
1403h
Multi-function input 3
selection
C003
R/W
1404h
Multi-function input 4
selection
C004
R/W
1405h
Multi-function input 5
selection
C005
R/W
1406h
Multi-function input 6
selection
C006
R/W
1407h
Multi-function input 7
selection
C007
R/W
1408h
Multi-function input 8
selection
C008
R/W
1409h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
140Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-194
Functions
01: RV (reverse)
02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1)
03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2)
04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3)
05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4)
06: JG (jogging)
07: DB (external DC injection braking)
08: SET (2nd control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (free-run stop)
12: EXT (external trip)
13: USP (USP function)
14: CS (commercial switch)
15: SFT (soft lock)
16: AT (analog input switching)
17: SET3 (3rd control)
18: RS (reset)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
23: PID (PID enabled/disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
26: CAS (control gain switching)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
31: OPE (forced operator)
32: SF1 (multi-step speed setting bit 1)
33: SF2 (multi-step speed setting bit 2)
34: SF3 (multi-step speed setting bit 3)
35: SF4 (multi-step speed setting bit 4)
36: SF5 (multi-step speed setting bit 5)
37: SF6 (multi-step speed setting bit 6)
38: SF7 (multi-step speed setting bit 7)
39: OLR (overload limit switching)
40: TL (torque limit enabled)
41: TRQ1 (torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (torque limit switching 2)
43: PPI (P/PI switching)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
45: ORT (orientation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
47: PCLR (position deviation clear)
48: STAT (pulse train position command input
permission)
50: ADD (frequency addition)
51: F-TM (forced terminal block)
52: ATR (torque command input permission)
53: KHC (integrated power clear)
54: SON (servo ON)
55: FOC (preliminary excitation)
56: Not used
57: Not used
58: Not used
59: Not used
60: Not used
61: Not used
62: Not used
63: Not used
65: AHD (analog command held)
66: CP1 (position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (position command selection 3)
69: ORL (zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (zero return startup signal)
71: FOT (forward driving stop)
72: ROT (reverse driving stop)
73: SPD (speed/position switching)
74: PCNT (pulse counter)
75: PCC (pulse counter clear)
255: no (no allocation)
Resolution
4-4 Communication Function
Functions
4
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
140Bh
Multi-function input 1
operation selection
C011
R/W
⎯
140Ch
Multi-function input 2
operation selection
C012
R/W
⎯
140Dh
Multi-function input 3
operation selection
C013
R/W
⎯
140Eh
Multi-function input 4
operation selection
C014
R/W
⎯
140Fh
Multi-function input 5
operation selection
C015
R/W
1410h
Multi-function input 6
operation selection
C016
R/W
⎯
1411h
Multi-function input 7
operation selection
C017
R/W
⎯
1412h
Multi-function input 8
operation selection
C018
R/W
⎯
1413h
FW terminal operation
selection
C019
R/W
⎯
1414h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-195
Monitor and setting parameters
0: NO contact at MA; NC contact at MB
1: NC contact at MA; NO contact at MB
Resolution
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Multi-function output
terminal P1 selection
C021
R/W
1416h
Multi-function output
terminal P2 selection
C022
R/W
1417h
Multi-function output
terminal P3 selection
C023
R/W
1418h
Multi-function output
terminal P4 selection
C024
R/W
1419h
Multi-function output
terminal P5 selection
C025
R/W
141Ah
Relay output (MA, MB)
function selection
C026
R/W
0: RUN (signal during RUN)
1: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal)
2: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal)
3: OL (overload warning)
4: OD (excessive PID deviation)
5: AL (alarm output)
6: FA3 (set-frequency-only arrival signal)
7: OTQ (overtorque)
8: IP (signal during momentary power interruption)
9: UV (signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (signal during torque limit)
11: RNT (RUN time exceeded)
12: ONT (ON time exceeded)
13: THM (thermal warning)
19: BRK (brake release)
20: BER (brake error)
21: ZS (0 Hz signal)
22: DSE (excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (position ready)
24: FA4 (set frequency exceeded 2)
25: FA5 (set frequency only 2)
26: OL2 (overload warning 2)
27: FVDc (analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIDc (analog FI disconnection detection)
29: FEDc (analog FE disconnection detection)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
32: NDc (network error)
33: LOG1 (logic operation output 1)
34: LOG2 (logic operation output 2)
35: LOG3 (logic operation output 3)
36: LOG4 (logic operation output 4)
37: LOG5 (logic operation output 5)
38: LOG6 (logic operation output 6)
39: WAC (capacitor life warning signal)
40: WAF (fan life warning signal)
41: FR (RUN command signal)
42: OHF (fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (light load detection signal)
44: Not used
45: Not used
46: Not used
47: Not used
48: Not used
49: Not used
50: IRDY (operation ready signal)
51: FWR (forward run signal)
52: RVR (reverse run signal)
53: MJA (fatal fault signal)
54: WCFV (window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (window comparator FI)
56: WCFE (window comparator FE)
(When alarm code output is selected in C062,
AC0 to AC2, or AC0 to AC3 (ACn: alarm code
output) are forced to be allocated to multifunction output terminals P1 to P3, or P1 to
P4.)
Resolution
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-196
4
Functions
1415h
Monitor and setting parameters
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
141Bh
Function name
MP selection
Function
code
C027
R/W
Functions
AM selection
C028
Resolution
R/W
0: Output frequency
1: Output current
2: Output torque
3: Digital output frequency
4: Output voltage
5: Input power
6: Thermal load rate
7: LAD frequency
8: Digital current monitor
9: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
12: Not used
⎯
R/W
0: Output frequency
1: Output current
2: Output torque
4: Output voltage
5: Input power
6: Thermal load rate
7: LAD frequency
9: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
11: Output torque (signed)
13: Not used
⎯
⎯
4
141Ch
Monitor and setting parameters
141Dh
AMI selection
C029
R/W
0: Output frequency
1: Output current
2: Output torque
4: Output voltage
5: Input power
6: Thermal load rate
7: LAD frequency
9: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
14: Not used
141Eh
Digital current monitor
reference value
C030
R/W
200 to 2000
141Fh
Multi-function output
terminal P1 contact
selection
C031
R/W
⎯
1420h
Multi-function output
terminal P2 contact
selection
C032
R/W
⎯
1421h
Multi-function output
terminal P3 contact
selection
C033
R/W
1422h
Multi-function output
terminal P4 contact
selection
C034
R/W
⎯
1423h
Multi-function output
terminal P5 contact
selection
C035
R/W
⎯
1424h
Relay output (MA, MB)
contact selection
C036
R/W
⎯
4-197
0: NO
1: NC
0.1 [%]
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1425h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1426h
Light load signal output
mode
C038
R/W
0: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
1: Enabled only during constant speed
1427h
Light load detection level
C039
R/W
0 to 2000 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
1428h
Overload warning signal
output mode
C040
R/W
0: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
1: Enabled only during constant speed
1429h
Overload warning level
C041
R/W
0.0: Does not operate.
0 to 2000 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [%]
C042
(HIGH)
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
Arrival frequency during
acceleration
142Bh
C042
(LOW)
R/W
142Ch
C043
(HIGH)
R/W
Arrival frequency during
deceleration
142Dh
142Eh
PID deviation excessive
level
142Fh
Arrival frequency during
acceleration 2
C043
(LOW)
R/W
C044
R/W
C045
(HIGH)
R/W
1430h
C045
(LOW)
R/W
1431h
C046
(HIGH)
R/W
Arrival frequency during
deceleration 2
1432h
C046
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
0.1 [%]
⎯
4
1433h
to
1437h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1438h
PID FB upper limit
C052
R/W
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
1439h
PID FB lower limit
C053
R/W
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
143Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
143Bh
Overtorque level
(Forward power running)
C055
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
143Ch
Overtorque level
(Reverse regeneration)
C056
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
143Dh
Overtorque level
(Reverse power running)
C057
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
143Eh
Overtorque level
(Forward regeneration)
C058
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
143Fh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-198
Functions
142Ah
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Functions
4
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1440h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1441h
Thermal warning level
C061
R/W
0 to 100
1 [%]
1442h
Alarm code selection
C062
R/W
0: Disabled
1: 3 bits
2: 4 bits
⎯
1443h
0-Hz detection level
C063
R/W
0 to 10000
0.01
[Hz]
1444h
Fin overheat warning level
C064
R/W
0 to 200
1 [°C]
1445h
to
144Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
144Bh
Communication speed
selection
(Baud rate selection)
C071
144Ch
Communication station
No. selection
144Dh
⎯
R/W
2: Loop-back test
3: 2400 bps
4: 4800 bps
5: 9600 bps
6: 19200 bps
⎯
C072
R/W
1 to 32
⎯
Communication bit length
selection
C073
R/W
7: 7 bits
8: 8 bits
⎯
144Eh
Communication parity
selection
C074
R/W
0: No parity
1: Even
2: Odd
⎯
144Fh
Communication stop bit
selection
C075
R/W
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bits
⎯
⎯
1450h
Communication error
selection
C076
R/W
0: Trip
1: Trip after deceleration stop
2: Ignore
3: Free-run stop
4: Deceleration stop
1451h
Communication error
timeout
C077
R/W
0 to 9999
0.01 [s]
1452h
Communication wait time
C078
R/W
0 to 1000
1 [ms]
1453h
Communication method
selection
C079
R/W
0: ASCII
1: ModBus-RTU
1454h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1455h
FV adjustment
C081
R/W
0 to 65530
1
1456h
FI adjustment
C082
R/W
0 to 65530
1
1457h
FE adjustment
C083
R/W
0 to 65530
1
1458h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1459h
Thermistor adjustment
C085
R/W
145Ah
to
145Eh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
145Fh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-199
⎯
⎯
⎯
0 to 10000
0.1
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1460h
to
1468h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1469h
UP/DWN selection
C101
R/W
0: Does not store the frequency data
1: Stores the frequency data
⎯
R/W
0: Trip reset at power-on
1: Trip reset at power-off
2: Enabled only during trip (Reset at
power-on)
3: Trip reset only
⎯
0: 0-Hz start
1: Frequency matching start
2: Frequency pull-in restart
⎯
C102
⎯
146Ah
Reset selection
146Bh
Reset frequency matching
selection
C103
R/W
146Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
146Dh
MP gain setting
C105
R/W
50 to 200
1 [%]
146Eh
AM gain setting
C106
R/W
50 to 200
1 [%]
146Fh
AMI gain setting
C107
R/W
50 to 200
1 [%]
1470h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1471h
AM bias setting
C109
R/W
0 to 100
1 [%]
1472h
AMI bias setting
C110
R/W
0 to 100
1 [%]
1473h
Overload warning level 2
C111
R/W
0 to 2000 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 1800 (75 to 132 kW)
0.1 [%]
1474h
to
147Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
147Dh
FV zero adjustment
C121
R/W
0 to 65530
1
147Eh
FI zero adjustment
C122
R/W
0 to 65530
1
147Fh
FE zero adjustment
C123
R/W
0 to 65530
1
1480h
to
1485h
Not used
⎯
⎯
4
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-200
Functions
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
1486h
Output P1 ON delay
C130
R/W
0.1 [s]
1487h
Output P1 OFF delay
C131
R/W
0.1 [s]
1488h
Output P2 ON delay
C132
R/W
0.1 [s]
1489h
Output P2 OFF delay
C133
R/W
0.1 [s]
148Ah
Output P3 ON delay
C134
R/W
0.1 [s]
148Bh
Output P3 OFF delay
C135
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
0.1 [s]
0 to 1000
Functions
4
148Ch
Output P4 ON delay
C136
R/W
0.1 [s]
148Dh
Output P4 OFF delay
C137
R/W
0.1 [s]
148Eh
Output P5 ON delay
C138
R/W
0.1 [s]
148Fh
Output P5 OFF delay
C139
R/W
0.1 [s]
1490h
Relay output ON delay
C140
R/W
0.1 [s]
1491h
Relay output OFF delay
C141
R/W
0.1 [s]
1492h
Logic output signal 1
selection 1
C142
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
1493h
Logic output signal 1
selection 2
C143
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
1494h
Logic output signal 1
operator selection
C144
R/W
0: AND
1: OR
2: XOR
⎯
1495h
Logic output signal 2
selection 1
C145
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
1496h
Logic output signal 2
selection 2
C146
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
1497h
Logic output signal 2
operator selection
C147
R/W
0: AND
1: OR
2: XOR
⎯
1498h
Logic output signal 3
selection 1
C148
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
1499h
Logic output signal 3
selection 2
C149
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
149Ah
Logic output signal 3
operator selection
C150
R/W
0: AND
1: OR
2: XOR
⎯
149Bh
Logic output signal 4
selection 1
C151
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
149Ch
Logic output signal 4
selection 2
C152
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
149Dh
Logic output signal 4
operator selection
C153
R/W
0: AND
1: OR
2: XOR
⎯
149Eh
Logic output signal 5
selection 1
C154
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
4-201
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
149Fh
Logic output signal 5
selection 2
C155
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
14A0h
Logic output signal 5
operator selection
C156
R/W
0: AND
1: OR
2: XOR
⎯
14A1h
Logic output signal 6
selection 1
C157
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
14A2h
Logic output signal 6
selection 2
C158
R/W
Same as C021 to C026
(except LOG1 to 6)
⎯
14A3h
Logic output signal 6
operator selection
C159
R/W
0: AND
1: OR
2: XOR
⎯
14A4h
Input terminal response
time 1
C160
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14A5h
Input terminal response
time 2
C161
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14A6h
Input terminal response
time 3
C162
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14A7h
Input terminal response
time 4
C163
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14A8h
Input terminal response
time 5
C164
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14A9h
Input terminal response
time 6
C165
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14AAh
Input terminal response
time 7
C166
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14ABh
Input terminal response
time 8
C167
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14ACh
FW terminal response
time
C168
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14ADh
Multi-step speed/position
determination time
C169
R/W
0 to 200 (× 2 ms)
1
14AEh
to
1500h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1501h
Auto-tuning selection
H001
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Does not rotate
2: Rotates
⎯
⎯
⎯
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
4
1502h
Motor parameter selection
H002
R/W
0: Standard
1: Auto-tuning data
2: Auto-tuning data
(with online auto-tuning)
1503h
Motor capacity selection
H003
R/W
*
4-202
Functions
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
1504h
Function name
Motor pole number
selection
1505h
Function
code
R/W
H004
R/W
H005
(HIGH)
R/W
Speed response
1506h
Functions
4
H005
(LOW)
R/W
1507h
Stabilization parameter
H006
R/W
1508h
to
1514h
Not used
⎯
⎯
H020
(HIGH)
R/W
1515h
Motor parameter R1
1516h
H020
(LOW)
R/W
1517h
H021
(HIGH)
R/W
Motor parameter R2
1518h
H021
(LOW)
R/W
1519h
H022
(HIGH)
R/W
Motor parameter L
151Ah
H022
(LOW)
R/W
151Bh
H023
(HIGH)
R/W
Motor parameter Io
151Ch
H023
(LOW)
R/W
151Dh
H024
(HIGH)
R/W
Motor parameter J
151Eh
151Fh
to
1523h
Not used
1524h
Motor parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
1525h
1526h
Motor parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
1527h
4-203
H024
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
⎯
H030
(HIGH)
R/W
H030
(LOW)
R/W
H031
(HIGH)
R/W
H031
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
0: 2P
1: 4P
2: 6P
3: 8P
4: 10P
Resolution
⎯
0 to 80000
0.001
0 to 255
1
⎯
1 to 65530
0.001
[Ω]
1 to 65530
0.001
[Ω]
1 to 65530
0.01
[mH]
1 to 65530
0.01 [A]
1 to 9999000
0.001
[kgm2]
⎯
1 to 65530
0.001
[Ω]
1 to 65530
0.001
[Ω]
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
1528h
Motor parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
1529h
152Ah
Motor parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
152Bh
152Ch
Motor parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
152Dh
Function
code
R/W
H032
(HIGH)
R/W
H032
(LOW)
R/W
H033
(HIGH)
R/W
H033
(LOW)
R/W
H034
(HIGH)
R/W
H034
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1 to 65530
0.01
[mH]
1 to 65530
0.01 [A]
1 to 9999000
0.001
[kgm2]
Not used
⎯
⎯
153Dh
PI proportional gain
H050
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [%]
153Eh
PI integral gain
H051
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [%]
153Fh
P proportional gain
H052
R/W
0 to 1000
0.01
1540h
to
1546h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1547h
Limit at 0 Hz
H060
R/W
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
1548h
Boost amount at SLV
startup, 0 Hz
H061
R/W
0 to 50
1 [%]
1549h
to
1550h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1551h
For PI proportional gain
switching
H070
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [%]
1552h
For PI integral gain
switching
H071
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [%]
1553h
For P proportional gain
switching
H072
R/W
0 to 1000
0.01
1554h
Gain switching time
H073
R/W
0 to 9999
1 [ms]
1555h
to
1600h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1601h
Operation selection at
option 1 error
P001
R/W
0: Trips
1: Continues operating
⎯
1602h
Operation selection at
option 2 error
P002
R/W
0: Trips
1: Continues operating
⎯
1603h
to
160Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
160Bh
Encoder pulses
P011
R/W
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
128 to 65535
1
4-204
Functions
152Eh
to
153Ch
4
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Functions
4
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
160Ch
V2 control mode selection
P012
R/W
0: ASR
1: APR
2: APR2
3: HAPR
160Dh
Pulse train mode selection
P013
R/W
0: Mode 0
1: Mode 1
2: Mode 2
⎯
160Eh
Orientation stop position
P014
R/W
0 to 4095
1
160Fh
Orientation speed setting
P015
R/W
Starting frequency to 1st max. frequency
(upper limit: 12000)
1610h
Orientation direction
setting
P016
R/W
0: Forward
1: Reverse
⎯
1611h
Position ready range
setting
P017
R/W
0 to 10000
1
1612h
Position ready delay time
setting
P018
R/W
0 to 999
0.01 [s]
1613h
Electronic gear setting
position selection
P019
R/W
0: Feedback side
1: Command side
⎯
1614h
Electronic gear ratio
numerator
P020
R/W
1 to 9999
⎯
1615h
Electronic gear ratio
denominator
P021
R/W
1 to 9999
⎯
1616h
Position control
feedforward gain
P022
R/W
0 to 65535
0.01
1617h
Position loop gain
P023
R/W
0 to 10000
0.01
1618h
Position bias amount
P024
R/W
-2048 to 2048
⎯
1619h
Secondary resistance
compensation enable/
disable selection
P025
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
⎯
161Ah
Overspeed error detection
level
P026
R/W
0 to 1500
0.1 [%]
161Bh
Speed deviation error
detection level
P027
R/W
0 to 12000
0.01 [Hz]
161Ch
Motor gear ratio numerator
P028
R/W
1 to 9999
1
161Dh
Motor gear ratio
denominator
P029
R/W
1 to 9999
1
161Eh
Not used
⎯
⎯
161Fh
Acceleration/deceleration
time input type
P031
R/W
0: Digital Operator
1: Option 1
2: Option 2
⎯
1620h
Orientation stop position
input type
P032
R/W
0: Digital Operator
1: Option 1
2: Option 2
⎯
4-205
⎯
0.01 [Hz]
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
P034
R/W
0 to 200 (0.4 to 55 kW)
0 to 180 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
Polarity selection at torque
reference via FE
P035
R/W
0: As per sign
1: Depends on the RUN direction
⎯
1624h
Torque bias mode
P036
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Digital Operator
2: Input via terminal FE
⎯
1625h
Torque bias value
P037
R/W
-200 to +200 (0.4 to 55 kW)
-180 to +180 (75 to 132 kW)
1 [%]
1626h
Torque bias polarity
selection
P038
R/W
0: As per sign
1: Depends on the RUN direction
⎯
P039
(HIGH)
R/W
1621h
P033
1622h
Torque reference setting
1623h
1627h
Speed limit value in torque
control (forward)
1628h
P039
(LOW)
R/W
1629h
P040
(HIGH)
R/W
Speed limit value in torque
control (reverse)
162Ah
P040
(LOW)
R/W
0 to 1st max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 1st max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
162Bh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
162Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
162Dh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
162Eh
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
162Fh
Operation setting at
communication error
P045
R/W
0: Trip
1: Trip after deceleration stop
2: Ignore
3: Free run
4: Deceleration stop
1630h
Output assembly instance
No. setting
P046
R/W
20/21/100
⎯
1631h
Input assembly instance
No. setting
P047
R/W
70/71/101
⎯
R/W
0: Trip
1: Trip after deceleration stop
2: Ignore
3: Free run
4: Deceleration stop
⎯
1632h
Operation setting at idle
mode detection
P048
⎯
4-206
4
Functions
R/W
0: Terminal FV
1: Terminal FI
2: Terminal FE
3: Digital Operator
Torque reference input
selection
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
0: 0P
1: 2P
2: 4P
3: 6P
4: 8P
5: 10P
6: 12P
7: 14P
8: 16P
9: 18P
10: 20P
11: 22P
12: 24P
13: 26P
14: 28P
15: 30P
16: 32P
17: 34P
18: 36P
19: 38P
Resolution
1633h
Polarity setting for rotation
speed
P049
R/W
1634h
to
1638h
Not used
⎯
⎯
1639h
Pulse train frequency
scale
P055
R/W
10 to 500
* Input frequency at maximum frequency
0.1 [kHz]
163Ah
Pulse train frequency filter
time constant
P056
R/W
1 to 200
0.01 [s]
163Bh
Pulse train frequency bias
amount
P057
R/W
-100 to +100
1 [%]
163Ch
Pulse train frequency limit
P058
R/W
0 to 100
1 [%]
163Dh
Not used
⎯
⎯
P060
(HIGH)
R/W
P060
(LOW)
R/W
P061
(HIGH)
R/W
P061
(LOW)
R/W
P062
(HIGH)
R/W
P062
(LOW)
R/W
P063
(HIGH)
R/W
P063
(LOW)
R/W
4
Functions
Function name
163Eh
Multi-step position
command 0
163Fh
1640h
Multi-step position
command 1
1641h
1642h
Multi-step position
command 2
1643h
1644h
Multi-step position
command 3
1645h
4-207
⎯
⎯
⎯
1
1
1
1
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
1646h
Multi-step position
command 4
1647h
1648h
Multi-step position
command 5
1649h
164Ah
Multi-step position
command 6
164Bh
Multi-step position
command 7
164Dh
R/W
P064
(HIGH)
R/W
P064
(LOW)
R/W
P065
(HIGH)
R/W
P065
(LOW)
R/W
P066
(HIGH)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1
1
4
1
P066
(LOW)
R/W
P067
(HIGH)
R/W
P067
(LOW)
R/W
1
164Eh
Zero return mode
P068
R/W
0 (Low)/1 (Hi1)/2 (Hi2)
⎯
164Fh
Zero return direction
selection
P069
R/W
0 (FW)/1 (RV)
⎯
1650h
Low-speed zero return
frequency
P070
R/W
0 to 1000
0.01 [Hz]
1651h
High-speed zero return
frequency
P071
R/W
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
P072
(HIGH)
R/W
1652h
Position range
specification (forward)
1653h
P072
(LOW)
R/W
1654h
P073
(HIGH)
R/W
Position range
specification (reverse)
1655h
P073
(LOW)
R/W
0 to 536870912 (at P012 = 2)/
0 to 2147483647 (at P012 = 3)
1
-536870912 to 0 (at P012 = 2)/
-2147483647 to 0 (at P012 = 3)
1
1656h
to
1665h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1666h
to
1685h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
1686h
to
2102h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-208
Functions
164Ch
Function
code
4-4 Communication Function
* Data on H003 (motor capacity selection) is the following code data.
Code data
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Motor capacity (kW)
0.2
⎯
0.4
⎯
0.75
⎯
1.5
2.2
⎯
3.7
⎯
Code data
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Motor capacity (kW)
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
Code data
22
23
24
25
26
Motor capacity (kW)
90
110
132
150
160
<Holding Register Number List (2nd Setting)>
4
Register
No.
Function
code
R/W
F202
(HIGH)
R/W
2104h
F202
(LOW)
R/W
2105h
F203
(HIGH)
R/W
F203
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
⎯
Function name
Functions
2103h
2nd acceleration time 1
2nd deceleration time 1
2106h
2107h
to
2202h
Not used
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
⎯
<Holding Register Number List (Function Mode 2nd Setting)>
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
2203h
2nd base frequency
A203
R/W
30 to 2nd max. frequency
1 [Hz]
2204h
2nd max. frequency
A204
R/W
30 to 400
1 [Hz]
2205h
to
2215h
Not used
⎯
⎯
A220
(HIGH)
R/W
A220
(LOW)
R/W
2216h
2nd multi-step speed
reference 0
2217h
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
0, Starting frequency to 2nd max.
frequency
0.01 [Hz]
2218h
to
223Ah
Not used
⎯
⎯
223Bh
2nd torque boost selection
A241
R/W
0: Manual torque boost
1: Automatic torque boost
223Ch
2nd manual torque boost
voltage
A242
R/W
0 to 200
0.1 [%]
223Dh
2nd manual torque boost
frequency
A243
R/W
0 to 500
0.1 [%]
4-209
⎯
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
0: VC
1: Special VP
2: Free V/f
3: Sensorless vector
4: 0-Hz sensorless vector
Resolution
223Eh
2nd V/f characteristics
selection
A244
R/W
223Fh
Not used
⎯
⎯
2240h
2nd automatic torque
boost voltage
compensation gain
A246
R/W
0 to 255
1
2241h
*2nd automatic torque
boost slip compensation
gain
A247
R/W
0 to 255
1
2242h
to
224Eh
Not used
⎯
⎯
A261
(HIGH)
R/W
2250h
A261
(LOW)
R/W
2251h
A262
(HIGH)
R/W
A262
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
⎯
A292
(HIGH)
R/W
2nd frequency upper limit
2nd frequency lower limit
2252h
2253h
to
226Eh
Not used
226Fh
2nd acceleration time 2
2270h
A292
(LOW)
R/W
2271h
A293
(HIGH)
R/W
2nd deceleration time 2
A293
(LOW)
2272h
2273h
2nd 2-step acceleration/
deceleration selection
2274h
2nd 2-step acceleration
frequency
2275h
2276h
2nd 2-step deceleration
frequency
2277h
⎯
⎯
0, 2nd frequency lower limit to
2nd max. frequency
0.01 [Hz]
0, Starting frequency to
2nd frequency upper limit
0.01 [Hz]
⎯
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
R/W
A294
R/W
A295
(HIGH)
R/W
A295
(LOW)
R/W
A296
(HIGH)
R/W
A296
(LOW)
R/W
0: Switched via terminal 2CH
1: Switched by setting
2: Switched at forward/reverse
inversion only
⎯
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
4-210
4
Functions
224Fh
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Functions
4
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
2278h
to
230Bh
Not used
⎯
⎯
230Ch
2nd electronic thermal
level
b212
R/W
200 to 1000
230Dh
2nd electronic thermal
characteristics selection
b213
R/W
0: Reduction characteristics
1: Constant torque characteristics
2: Free setting
230Eh
to
2501h
Not used
⎯
⎯
2502h
2nd motor parameter
selection
H202
R/W
0: Standard
1: Auto-tuning data
2: Auto-tuning data
(with online auto-tuning)
2503h
2nd motor capacity
selection
H203
R/W
*
⎯
H204
R/W
0: 2P
1: 4P
2: 6P
3: 8P
4: 10P
⎯
H205
(HIGH)
R/W
H205
(LOW)
R/W
2504h
2nd motor pole number
selection
2505h
2nd speed response
2506h
2507h
2nd stabilization
parameter
H206
R/W
2508h
to
2514h
Not used
⎯
⎯
H220
(HIGH)
R/W
2516h
H220
(LOW)
R/W
2517h
H221
(HIGH)
R/W
2518h
H221
(LOW)
R/W
2519h
H222
(HIGH)
R/W
251Ah
H222
(LOW)
R/W
251Bh
H223
(HIGH)
R/W
H223
(LOW)
R/W
2515h
2nd motor parameter R1
2nd motor parameter R2
2nd motor parameter L
2nd motor parameter Io
251Ch
4-211
⎯
0.1 [%]
⎯
⎯
0.1 [%]
1 to 80000
0.001
0 to 255
1
⎯
1 to 65530
0.001 [Ω]
1 to 65530
0.001 [Ω]
1 to 65530
0.01 [mH]
1 to 65530
0.01 [A]
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function name
251Dh
Function
code
R/W
H224
(HIGH)
R/W
2nd motor parameter J
251Eh
251Fh
to
2523h
Not used
2524h
2525h
2526h
2nd motor parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
2527h
2528h
2nd motor parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
2529h
252Ah
2nd motor parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
252Bh
252Ch
2nd motor parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
252Dh
1 to 9999000
H224
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
⎯
H230
(HIGH)
R/W
H230
(LOW)
R/W
H231
(HIGH)
R/W
H231
(LOW)
R/W
H232
(HIGH)
R/W
H232
(LOW)
R/W
H233
(HIGH)
R/W
H233
(LOW)
R/W
H234
(HIGH)
R/W
H234
(LOW)
R/W
Resolution
0.001
[kgm2]
⎯
1 to 65530
0.001 [Ω]
4
1 to 65530
0.001 [Ω]
1 to 65530
0.01 [mH]
Functions
2nd motor parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
Monitor and setting parameters
1 to 65530
0.01 [A]
1 to 9999000
0.001
[kgm2]
252Eh
to
253Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
253Dh
2nd PI proportional gain
H250
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [%]
253Eh
2nd PI integral gain
H251
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [%]
253Fh
2nd P proportional gain
H252
R/W
0 to 1000
0.01
2540h
to
2546h
Not used
⎯
⎯
2547h
2nd limit at 0 Hz
H260
R/W
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
2548h
2nd boost amount at SLV
startup, 0 Hz
H261
R/W
0 to 50
1 [%]
2549h
to
3102h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-212
4-4 Communication Function
* Data on H203 (2nd motor capacity selection) is the following code data.
Code data
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Motor capacity (kW)
0.2
⎯
0.4
⎯
0.75
⎯
1.5
2.2
⎯
3.7
⎯
Code data
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Motor capacity (kW)
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
Code data
22
23
24
25
26
Motor capacity (kW)
90
110
132
150
160
<Holding Register Number List (3rd Setting)>
4
Register
No.
Function
code
R/W
F302
(HIGH)
R/W
3104h
F302
(LOW)
R/W
3105h
F303
(HIGH)
R/W
F303
(LOW)
R/W
⎯
⎯
Function name
Functions
3103h
3rd acceleration time 1
3rd deceleration time 1
3106h
3107h
to
3202h
Not used
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
⎯
<Holding Register Number List (Function Mode 3rd Setting)>
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
3203h
3rd base frequency
A303
R/W
30 to 3rd max. frequency
1 [Hz]
3204h
3rd maximum frequency
A304
R/W
30 to 400
1 [Hz]
3205h to
3215h
Not used
⎯
⎯
A320
(HIGH)
R/W
A320
(LOW)
R/W
3216h
3rd multi-step speed
reference 0
3217h
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
⎯
0, Starting frequency to 3rd max.
frequency
0.01 [Hz]
3218h to
323Bh
Not used
⎯
⎯
323Ch
3rd manual torque boost
voltage
A342
R/W
0 to 200
0.1 [%]
323Dh
3rd manual torque boost
frequency
A343
R/W
0 to 500
0.1 [%]
323Eh
3rd V/f characteristics
selection
A344
R/W
0: VC
1: VP
⎯
323Fh to
326Ch
Not used
⎯
⎯
4-213
⎯
⎯
4-4 Communication Function
Register
No.
Function
code
R/W
A392
(HIGH)
R/W
326Eh
A392
(LOW)
R/W
326Fh
A393
(HIGH)
R/W
A393
(LOW)
R/W
Function name
326Dh
3rd acceleration time 2
3rd deceleration time 2
3270h
Monitor and setting parameters
Resolution
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
1 to 360000
0.01 [s]
Not used
⎯
⎯
330Ch
3rd electronic thermal
level
b312
R/W
200 to 1000
330Dh
3rd electronic thermal
characteristics selection
b313
R/W
0: Reduced torque characteristics
1: Constant torque characteristics
2: Free setting
330Eh to
3506h
Not used
⎯
⎯
3507h
3rd stabilization parameter
H306
R/W
From
3508h
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
0.1 [%]
⎯
⎯
0 to 255
4
1
⎯
4-214
Functions
3271h to
330B
Chapter 5
Maintenance
Operations
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting ... 5-1
5-2 Warning Function............................................. 5-10
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
5Maintenance Operations
5-1 Protective Functions and
Troubleshooting
Error Code List
Name
Maintenance Operations
5
Description
If the motor is
restrained or rapidly
accelerated or
decelerated, a large
current flows through
the Inverter, which
results in a
malfunction. The
current exceeding
the specified level
shuts off the output
Overcurrent and an error
trip
appears.
This protection
function detects an
overcurrent through
the AC CT (current
detector).
The protection circuit
is activated at
approximately 220%
of the Inverter rated
output current and a
trip occurs.
Overload
trip
*1
5-1
Display on
Digital
Operator
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
Constant
speed
ek0k1.
Is there any rapid load fluctuation?
(Eliminate load fluctuation.)
Is there any output short-circuit?
(Check the output wires.)
Is there any ground fault?
(Check the output wires and motor.)
Deceleration
ek0k2.
Is there any rapid deceleration?
(Increase the deceleration time.)
4-8
4-37
ek0k3.
Is there any rapid acceleration?
(Increase the acceleration time.)
Has the motor shaft been locked?
(Check the motor and wires.)
Is the torque boost too high?
(Lower the torque boost.)
4-8
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-37
ek0k4.
Is the DC injection braking too high?
(Lower the injection breaking.)
Is there any error on CT?
(Replace or repair the CT.)
4-24
ek0k5.
Is the load too large?
(Reduce the loading factor.)
Is the thermal level correct?
(Adjust the thermal level to an appropriate
level.)
Note: The electronic thermal function is set to
work easily at 5 Hz or lower. If a large
load inertial moment is applied, the
overload protect function works when
the motor starts accelerating, and
prevents it from accelerating. In this
case, increase the torque boost or take
other measures for adjustment.
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
Acceleration
Others
Monitors the Inverter output current
and shuts off the output, displaying
an error if the built-in electronic
thermal function detects overload
against the motor.
Trips depending on the electronic
thermal function settings.
⎯
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Name
Braking
resistor
overload
trip
Description
Shuts off the output and displays an
error if the usage rate of
regenerative braking circuit exceeds
the b090 set value.
EEPROM
error
*2 *3
Shuts off the output and displays an
error if an error occurs in the built-in
EEPROM because of external noise
or abnormal temperature rise.
Note: It may become a CPU error
depending on the case.
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
ek0k6.
Is there any rapid deceleration?
(Increase the deceleration time.)
Is the operation cycle frequent?
(Increase the operation cycle.)
Is the usage rate setting of the regenerative
braking function low?
(Set to an appropriate level.)
Note: Pay attention to the allowable power of
the resistor.
4-8
4-72
ek0k7.
Is there any rapid deceleration?
(Increase the deceleration time.)
Is there any ground fault?
(Check the output wires and motor.)
Has the motor been rotated from the load
side?
(Reduce regenerative energy.)
4-8
ek0k8.
Is there any large noise source around?
(Countermeasures against noise)
Has the cooling efficiency been reduced?
(Check that there is no clogging in the cooling
fin and clean it.)
(Replace the cooling fan.)
4-16
4-101
5
*1. The reset command is not accepted until approximately 10 seconds after the trip occurs (protection function
works).
*2. The reset command is not accepted if the EEPROM error ek0k8. occurs. Turn off the power once. If you find
E08 when turning on the power again, it is possible that the memory element has been broken or the
parameters have not been memorized correctly. Perform the user initialization to set the parameters again.
*3. The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power.
Name
Description
Shuts off the output if the incoming
voltage drops below the specified
level. This is because the control
circuit fails to work properly when
Undervoltage the incoming voltage to the Inverter
trip
drops.
Trips when the DC voltage between
P and N drops to approximately 175
V DC for 200-V class, and 345 V DC
for 400-V class.
Display on
Digital
Operator
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
ek0k9.
Has the power supply voltage
decreased?
(Check the power supply.)
Is the power supply capacity sufficient?
(Check the power supply.)
Has the thyristor been broken?
(Check the thyristor.)
⎯
*1. The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power.
*2. The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted. Be sure to reset via the RS terminal.
5-2
Maintenance Operations
Extremely high DC voltage between
P/+2 and N/- may result in failure.
This function therefore shuts off the
output and displays an error if the DC
voltage between P/+2 and N/exceeds the specified level because
Overvoltage
of regenerative energy from the motor
trip
or increase of the incoming voltage
during operation.
Trips when the DC voltage between
P/+2 and N/- reaches approximately
400 V DC for 200-V class, and 800 V
DC for 400-V class.
Display on
Digital
Operator
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Name
Description
Display on
Digital
Operator
CT error
Shuts off the output if an error
occurs in the CT (current detector)
built into the Inverter. Trips if the CT
output is approximately 0.6 V or
more when the power is turned on.
ek1k0.
The Inverter has a failure. (Repair)
⎯
ek1k1.
Is there any large noise source around?
(Countermeasures against noise)
The Inverter has a failure. (Repair)
⎯
ek1k2.
Has any error occurred in the external
devices when the external trip function is
selected?
(Correct the external device error.)
4-82
ek1k3.
When the USP function was selected, did
you turn on the power with the RUN
signal input into the Inverter? (Cancel the
RUN command and turn on the power.)
4-82
ek1k4.
Is there any ground fault? (Check the
output wires and motor.)
Is there any error in the Inverter itself?
(Disconnect the output wires to check.)
Is there any error in the main circuit?
(Check the main circuit. Refer to Chapter
6.) (Repair)
⎯
ek1k5.
Is the incoming voltage high while the
Inverter is stopped?
(Lower the incoming voltage, restrain the
power supply fluctuation, apply the AC
reactor to input.)
⎯
ek1k6.
Has the power supply voltage dropped?
(Power recovery)
Is there a contact failure for MCB and/or
Mg?
(Replace MCB, Mg.)
4-60
*1
Shuts off the output and displays an
error if the internal CPU has worked
erroneously or abnormally.
Note: If an abnormal value is read
from EEPROM, it may
become a CPU error
depending on the case.
External
trip
If an error occurs in the external
equipment or devices, the Inverter
receives the signal, and the output is
shut off.
(Available with the external trip
function selected)
USP trip
Appears when the power is turned
on with the RUN signal input into the
Inverter.
(Available with the USP function
selected)
CPU error
Maintenance Operations
5
Ground
fault trip
*1
Protects the Inverter if a ground fault
between the Inverter output unit and
the motor is detected when turning
on the power.
(This function does not work when
there is residual voltage in the
motor.)
Appears if the incoming voltage
continues to be higher than the
specification value for 100 seconds
Incoming
while the Inverter is stopped.
overvoltage
Trips when the main circuit DC
trip
voltage reaches approximately 390
V DC for 200-V class, and 780 V DC
for 400-V class.
Shuts off the output when a
momentary power interruption
occurs for 15 ms or more.
Momentary
If the shutoff time is long, it is
power
normally recognized as a power
interruption
shutoff. Note that, when restart is
trip
selected, the Inverter restarts at
power-on as long as the RUN
command remains.
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
*1. The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power.
*2. The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted. Be sure to reset via the RS terminal.
5-3
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Name
Description
Temperature
error when
the rotation
speed of the
cooling fan
decreases
Appears if a decrease of the cooling
fan rotation speed has been
detected when a temperature error
occurs.
Temperature
error
Shuts off the output if the
temperature has risen in the main
circuit because of the high ambient
temperature.
Gate array
Trips when a fault is detected in
communications communication behavior between
error
the built-in CPU and the gate array.
Trips when the gate array cannot
Main circuit confirm IGBT ON/OFF because of a
main element failure, a load short
error
*1
circuit, or an erroneous operation
resulting from noise interfusion.
Shuts off the Inverter output to
protect the main element when a
momentary overcurrent,
temperature error in the main
IGBT error element, or drop of the main
element driving power supply
occurs.
(Retry operation cannot be
performed for this trip.)
Shuts off the Inverter output when
detecting the thermistor resistance
Thermistor
value inside the motor connected to
error
the TH terminal and resulting motor
temperature rise.
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
ek2k0.
Has the cooling efficiency been reduced?
(Replace the cooling fan.)
Is there any clogging in the fin?
(Clean the fin.)
4-101
ek2k1.
Have you installed the Inverter vertically?
(Installation check)
Is the ambient temperature high?
(Decrease the ambient temperature.)
⎯
ek2k3.
Is there any large noise source around?
(Countermeasures against noise)
Has the cable been disconnected?
(Check the connector.)
4-16
ek2k4.
Is there any input power supply phase
loss?
(Check the input wiring.)
Is there a contact failure for MCB and/or
Mg?
(Replace MCB, Mg.)
4-46
ek2k5.
Is there any large noise source around?
(Countermeasures against noise)
Has the main element been damaged?
Is there any output short-circuit?
(Check the IGBT.)
The Inverter has a failure. (Repair)
4-16
ek3k0.
Is there any output short-circuit? (Check
the output wires.)
Is there any ground fault?
(Check the output wires and motor.)
Has the main element been damaged?
(Check the IGBT.)
Is there any clogging in the fin?
(Clean the fin.)
⎯
ek3k5.
Is the motor temperature too high?
(Check the motor temperature.)
Is there any damage to the thermister
inside the motor?
(Check the thermistor.)
Is there any noise interfusion in the
thermister signal?
(Separate the wiring.)
2-10
4-73
5
*1. The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power.
*2. The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted. Be sure to reset via the RS terminal.
5-4
Maintenance Operations
Prevents Inverter damage due to
input phase loss when the input
Input open phase loss protection selection is
phase trip enabled (b006=01), and trips.
Trips when the phase loss time is
approximately 1 s or more.
Display on
Digital
Operator
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Name
Display on
Digital
Operator
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
ek3k6.
Is the brake ON/OFF function working?
(Brake check)
Is the set time for b124 too short?
(Increase b124.)
Has the brake confirmation signal been
input?
(Wiring check)
4-73
Shuts off the hardware output and
displays an error when the EMR
terminal (S3) is turned on with SW1
on the logic board ON.
ek3k7.
Did any error occur in the external
devices when the emergency shutoff
function was selected?
(Correct the external device error.)
2-10
If an overload is detected in the
lowest speed range of 0.2 Hz max.,
an electronic thermal inside the
Inverter works to shut off the Inverter
output. (2nd electronic thermal)
(However, higher frequency could
remain in the error history.)
ek3k8.
Is the load too large? (Reduce the loading
factor.)
4-49
4-50
ek4k1.
Is the communication speed correct?
Is the wiring distance appropriate?
(Connection check)
4-139
Has the option board been securely
mounted?
(Check that the mounting is correct.)
⎯
Has the option board been securely
mounted?
(Check that the mounting is correct.)
⎯
-k-k-k-
Has the power supply voltage dropped?
(Power recovery)
Is there a contact failure for MCB and/or
Mg?
(Replace MCB, Mg.)
Is the voltage between P and N normal?
(Check the voltage between P and N.)
⎯
=k=k=k=
Has the relay plug been inserted
properly?
(Check the relay plug contact.)
Has the Digital Operator been inserted
properly?
(Check the Digital Operator contact.)
⎯
Description
When 01 is selected in b120 (brake
control selection), this error appears
if the brake ON/OFF cannot be
Brake error confirmed within the b124 set time
(brake confirmation wait time) after
the Inverter outputs the brake
release signal.
Emergency shutoff
*2
Maintenance Operations
5
Overload
trip in low
speed
range
Appears when the timeout occurs
ModBus
because of disconnection during
communic
Modbus-RTU communication.
ations error
(Trip by the C076 setting)
Option 1
error
Detects an error on the board
mounted on option port 1.
ek6k0.
to
ek6k9.
Option 2
error
Detects an error on the board
mounted on option port 2.
ek7k0.
to
ek7k9.
Shows the waiting status after the
incoming Inverter voltage decreases
Undervoltage
and shuts off.
standby
This error also appears during
momentary power interruption.
Appears if an error occurs between
Communications
the Digital Operator and the
error
Inverter.
*1. The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power.
*2. The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted. Be sure to reset via the RS terminal.
5-5
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Description
Display on
Digital
Operator
Retry
standby
Appears in the restart standby
status when the momentary power
interruption/trip retry functions are
enabled.
okokoko
⎯
4-42
Power
shutoff
Appears when the power is shut off.
-k-k-k-
⎯
⎯
RUN
command
is limited
Appears if the limited RUN
command is received while the
rotation direction is limited with
b035.
=k=k=k=
⎯
4-52
Name
Check point and remedy
Reference
page
*1. The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power.
*2. The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted. Be sure to reset via the RS terminal.
5
E6*. (OP1-*) appears when the option board is mounted on option port 1 (Digital Operator connecter side) , and
E7*. (OP2-*) appears when it is mounted on option port 2 (control circuit terminal block side).
•Protection function list when the PG board (3G3AX-PG01) is mounted
Name
Description
Display on Digital
Operator
Encoder
disconnection
Shuts off the output and displays an error when the encoder wiring
disconnection or connection failure is detected, the encoder is
damaged, or an encoder except for line driver output is used.
ek6k0.
ek7k0.
Excess speed
Shuts off the output and displays an error when the motor rotation
exceeds the maximum frequency (A004) × the overspeed error
detection level (P026).
ek6k1.
ek7k1.
Positioning error
Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position
deviation against the position reference value exceeds 1,000,000
pulses during position control.
ek6k2.
ek7k2.
Position control
range trip
Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position
exceeds the setting values of the position range specification for
Forward (P072) and Reverse (P073) during absolute position control.
ek6k3.
ek7k3.
3G3AX-PG01
connection error
Shuts off the output and displays an error if a connection (mounting)
failure of the PG board is detected.
ek6k9.
ek7k9.
Note: Check the DIP switch settings on the PG board for any abnormal operation.
5-6
Maintenance Operations
Option Board Protection Function List
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Function List of the DIP Switches on the PG Board (3G3AX-PG01)
DIP switch
Switch No.
Description
ON
Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder A/B-phase is not
connected
OFF
Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder A/B-phase is not
connected
ON
Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder Z-phase is not
connected
OFF
Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder Z-phase is not
connected
ON
With the termination resistor between SAP and SAN (150 Ω)
OFF
Without the termination resistor between SAP and SAN
ON
With the termination resistor between SBP and SBN (150 Ω)
OFF
Without the termination resistor between SBP and SBN
1
SWENC
2
1
SWR
2
5
Maintenance Operations
•Protection function display when the digital command board (3G3AX-DI01) is mounted
Name
3G3AX-DI01
error
Description
Shuts off the output and displays an error if a timeout occurs in
communication between the Inverter and digital command board.
Display on Digital Operator
ek6k0.
ek7k0.
Note: Input mode is determined by the combination of DIP and rotary switches. Check the settings of the DIP and
rotary switches on the digital command board for any abnormal operation.
5-7
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Function List of the DIP and Rotary Switches on the digital command board (3G3AX-DI01)
DIP switch
(TYPE)
Switch No.
1
2
Resolution setting
Rotary
switch
(CODE)
Setting
code
0.01 Hz
0
{
1
OFF:
Batch
input
mode
(PAC)
Acceleration/Deceleration
time setting
Set frequency
0.1 Hz
1 Hz
Rate
0.01 sec
0.1 sec
1 sec
Torque
limit
setting
Position
setting
1%
1 pulse
{
2
{
3
{
4
{
5
For factory adjustment (Do not set)
6
OFF:
Binary
input
(BIN)
7 to F
For factory adjustment (Do not set)
0
{
1
{
{
2
{
3
ON:
Dividing
input
mode
(DIV)
{
4
{
{
5
{
6
{
7
{
{
{
{
8
{
9
{
A
{
{
B
{
C to F
For factory adjustment (Do not set)
How to Read the Input Mode List
Example 1. Switch setting when setting the frequency with a resolution of 1 Hz, via binary input
(BIN) in the batch input mode (PAC)
TYPE
CODE
1
2
OFF: BIN
OFF: PAC
2
Example 2. Switch setting when setting the frequency with a resolution of 0.1 Hz, via BCD input,
and setting the acceleration/deceleration time with a resolution of 0.1 sec, via BCD input in the dividing input mode (DIV)
TYPE
CODE
1
2
ON: BCD
ON: DIV
4
5-8
5
Maintenance Operations
ON:
BCD
input
(BCD)
{
5-1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting
Trip Monitor Display
(1) Trip factor Explanation of display
ek0k7.2
ek0k7.2
Indicates the cause of the trip. Indicates the Inverter status at the time of tripping.
6k0.0k0
(2) Output frequency (Hz) at the time of tripping
5
Maintenance Operations
4.0k0
(3) Output current (A) at the time of tripping
4k0k0.2
(4) P-N DC voltage (V) at the time of tripping
1K5.
(5) Total RUN time (h) before the trip
1K8.
(6) Total power ON time (h) before the trip
5-9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
: During initialization at power-on or with
the reset terminal set to ON.
: During stop
: During deceleration
: During constant speed
: During acceleration
: The RUN command is turned on at frequency = 0.
: During startup
: During DC injection braking
: During overload limit
: During forcing/servo ON
Note: The trip monitor display shows the Inverter status
at the time of tripping, not the actual motor operation.
(Example)
While PID control is used or the frequency reference
is input using analog signals (voltage/current), the
Inverter may alternate frequently between
acceleration and deceleration because of the signal
fluctuations, even if the motor seems to operate at a
constant speed.
In this case, the onscreen lnverter status at the time
of tripping may differ from the actual operation.
5-2 Warning Function
5-2 Warning Function
•The following table shows the details of warning display and parameter correction.
Warning display
Target code
Condition
Frequency upper limit A061/A261
>
002/202
Frequency lower limit A062/A262
>
004/204/304
Base frequency A003/A203/A303 *1
>
005/205/305
Output frequency F001, Multi-step speed reference 0 A020/
A220/A320 *2
>
006/206/306
Multi-step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035
>
009
Orientation speed setting P015
>
012/212
Frequency lower limit A062/A262
>
015/215
Output frequency F001, Multi-step speed reference 0 A020/
A220 *2
>
016/216
Multi-step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035
>
019
<
Frequency upper limit A061/A261
021/221
Output frequency F001, Multi-step speed reference 0 A020/
A220/A320 *2
<
031/231
Frequency upper limit A061/A261
<
032/232
Frequency lower limit A062/A262
<
Output frequency F001, Multi-step speed reference 0 A020/
A220/A320 *2
<
036
Multi-step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035
<
037
Jogging frequency A038
<
Output frequency F001, Multi-step speed reference 0 A020/
A220/A320 *2
<>
Multi-step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035
<>
085/285/385
086
5
Frequency upper limit
A061/A261
Orientation speed
P015
<
025/225
035/235/335
Maximum frequency
A004/A204/A304
Frequency lower limit
A062/A262
Starting frequency
b082
Jump frequency 1/2/3
± Jump width
A063 ± A064
A065 ± A066
A067 ± A068 *3
*1. In this case, the base frequency is rewritten when correcting parameters. Change the data to a correct value
if a warning occurs. Otherwise, the motor may burn out depending on the value.
*2. Checks even if the frequency reference selection (A001) is set other than to the Digital Operator (02).
*3. The jump frequency is rewritten into the value of the subtraction of the jump width (lower limit) from the jump
frequency.
5-10
Maintenance Operations
001/201
Base code
5-2 Warning Function
Warning display
Target code
Condition
Base code
091/291
Frequency upper limit A061/A261
>
092/292
Frequency lower limit A062/A262
>
095/295
Output frequency F001, Multi-step speed reference 0 A020/
A220 *2
>
Multi-step speed reference 1 to 15 A021 to A035
>
Free V/f frequencies 1 to 6
b100, b102, b104, b106, b108, b110
>
Free V/f frequencies 2 to 6
b102, b104, b106, b108, b110
<
Free V/f frequency 1 b100
>
Free V/f frequencies 3 to 6 b104, b106, b108, b110
<
Free V/f frequencies 1, 2 b100, b102
>
Free V/f frequencies 4 to 6 b106, b108, b110
<
Free V/f frequencies 1 to 3 b100, b102, b104
>
Free V/f frequencies 5, 6 b108, b110
<
Free V/f frequencies 1 to 4 b100, b102, b104, b106
>
Free V/f frequency 6 b110
<
Free V/f frequencies 1 to 5
b100, b102, b104, b106, b108
>
Free V/f frequency 6
b110
Free electric thermal frequencies 2, 3 b017, b019
<
Free electric thermal
frequency 1
b015
Free electric thermal frequency 1 b015
>
Free electric thermal frequency 3 b019
<
Free electric thermal frequencies 1 2 b015, b017
>
096
5
Maintenance Operations
110
120
Free V/f frequency 7
b112
Free V/f frequency 1
b100
Free V/f frequency 2
b102
Free V/f frequency 3
b104
Free V/f frequency 4
b106
Free V/f frequency 5
b108
Free electric thermal
frequency 2
b017
Free electric thermal
frequency 3
b019
*1. In this case, the base frequency is rewritten when correcting parameters. Change the data to a correct value
if a warning occurs. Otherwise, the motor may burn out depending on the value.
*2. Checks even if the frequency reference selection (A001) is set other than to the Digital Operator (02).
*3. The jump frequency is rewritten into the value of the subtraction of the jump width (lower limit) from the jump
frequency.
• Warning appears when a target code set data meets the condition shown above in relation to the base code
data.
• Parameters are rewritten into the data of the base code. (rewritten at start-up)
5-11
Chapter 6
Inspection and
Maintenance
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance ........................... 6-1
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
6Inspection and Maintenance
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
WARNING
Do not change wiring and slide switches (SW1), put on or take off Digital Operator and optional
devices, replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a
serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power
shutoff.
Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
CAUTION
6
Inspection and Maintenance
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the
power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn.
Do not dismantle, repair or modify this product.
Doing so may result in an injury.
Safety Information
„Maintenance and Inspection
•Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement.
Precautions for Use
„Operation Stop Command
•Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when
function settings are performed.
•When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input
terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
„Product Disposal
•Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
6-1
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Daily Inspection
•Basically, check the following during operation.
•The motor operates according to the settings.
•There are no errors in the installation environment.
•There are no errors in the cooling system.
•There are no abnormal vibrations or sounds.
•There are no abnormal overheat or discoloration.
•There are no abnormal odors.
•Check the input voltage of the Inverter during operation using a tester or other equipment.
•There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation.
•The voltage level between the wires is balanced.
Cleaning
•Always keep the Inverter clean for operation.
•Lightly remove any dirt with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent.
Periodic Inspection
•Check the parts that cannot be checked without stopping operation, as well as those that require
periodic inspection.
•Contact OMRON Corporation for periodic inspections.
•Check that there are no errors in the cooling system.
.......... Clean the air filter.
•Check that all parts that need tightening are secure.
.......... Screws and bolts may become loose because of vibration or temperature change.
•Check that there is no corrosion or damage to the conductors and/or insulators.
•Measurement of insulation resistance.
•Check and replace the cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, and relay.
6-2
6
Inspection and Maintenance
Note:
Do not use such solutions as acetone, benzene, toluene, or alcohol for cleaning. Doing so may
cause the Inverter surface to dissolve or its coating to come off.
Do not use any detergent or alcohol to clean the Digital Operator display.
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
„Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection
Inspection period
Inspection
part
Inspection
item
Inspection point
Periodic
Inspection method
Criteria
Meter
Thermometer
Hygrometer
Recorder
Daily
1 year 2 years
General
{
Refer to "2-1
Installation".
Check that there
are no abnormal
Entire device
vibrations or
sounds.
{
Visual or acoustic
inspection
No faults
{
Measure the voltage Must be within
between Inverter
allowable
main circuit terminals fluctuation of
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. AC voltage.
Tester,
digital
multimeter
Disconnect the I/O
wirings of the Inverter
main circuit terminal
block, detach the
control terminal block
board, and remove
the short-circuit bar
used for switching the
Inverter built-in filter
function. Then, use a 5 MΩ min.
megger to measure
the resistance
between the ground
terminal and the
short-circuited parts
of terminals R/L1, S/
L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, P/+2, +1,
N/-, RB, Ro, and To.
500 V DC
megger
Power
supply
voltage
6
Inspection and Maintenance
Check ambient
Ambient
temperature, as
environment well as humidity
and dust levels.
Ambient
temperature
10°C to 50°C,
no freezing.
Ambient
humidity 90%
max., no
condensation.
Main
circuit
General
Check that the
main circuit
voltage is normal.
Megger check
(between main
circuit terminal
and ground
terminal)
{
*1. The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperatures.
Refer to "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" for the replacement reference.
*2. The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions, such as ambient temperature
and/or dust. Check the operation through daily inspections.
*3. The replacement reference (year/cycle) or "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" is based on the expected design
life, which is not guaranteed.
6-3
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Inspection period
Inspection
part
Inspection
item
Inspection point
Periodic
Inspection method
Criteria
Meter
Daily
1 year 2 years
General
Connection
conductor
and wire
Terminal
block
Check that any
parts which may
need tightening
are secure.
{
Tighten securely.
No faults
Check that no part
has indications of
overheating.
{
Visual inspection
No faults
Check that there is
no distortion with
the conductor.
{
Visual inspection
No faults
Visual inspection
No faults
Check that there is
no tearing in the
wire coverings.
{
Check that there is
no damage.
{
Check the
Converter
resistance
unit
between the
(including
terminals.
the resistor)
Smoothing
capacitor
Relay
{
Check that there is
no liquid leakage.
{
Check that the
safety valve has
not come out and
that there are no
bulges.
{
6
Analog
tester
Capacity
Visual inspection
meter
No faults
Reference of
the replacement
period: 10 years
*2 *3
Check that there is
no abnormal
sound during
operation.
{
Acoustic inspection
No faults
Check that there is
no rough surface
on the contact.
{
Visual inspection
No faults
*1. The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperatures.
Refer to "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" for the replacement reference.
*2. The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions, such as ambient temperature
and/or dust. Check the operation through daily inspections.
*3. The replacement reference (year/cycle) or "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" is based on the expected design
life, which is not guaranteed.
6-4
Inspection and Maintenance
Inverter unit
Main
circuit
Disconnect the wiring
of the Inverter main
Refer to
circuit terminal block
"Checking the
and measure the
Inverter and
resistance levels
Converter".
between terminals
Inverter unit
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and
replacement
P/+2, N/-, and
reference
between U/T1, V/T2,
Start/Stop:
W/T3 and P/+2, N/- in
Cycle 106 *3
the range of tester ×
1 Ω.
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Inspection period
Inspection
part
Inspection
item
Inspection point
Periodic
Inspection method
Criteria
Meter
Daily
1 year 2 years
Control
Operation
circuit
Protection check
circuit
6
Cooling fan
Inspection and Maintenance
Cooling
system
Fin
Display
Check the balance
of output voltage
levels between
phases in single
Inverter run.
Check that there
are no errors in
protection and
display circuits
through sequence
protection
operation.
Check that there
are no abnormal
vibrations or
sounds.
Meter
{
{
Short-circuit or open
the Inverter protection Error is found in
circuit output under
the sequence.
simulated conditions.
Rotates
Rotate manually
smoothly.
when the power is off. No faults
{
Reference of
the replacement
period: 10 years
Check that the
connection parts
are secure.
{
Visual inspection
Check that there is
no clogging.
{
Visual inspection
No clogging.
Visual inspection
Check that the
LED indicators
are lit properly.
Check that the
LED indicators are
lit properly.
{
{
Cleaning
Display
Phase-to-phase
voltage balance
200-V class:
4 V max.
400-V class:
Digital
8 V max.
multimeter
Rectifier
Voltmeter
Measure the voltage
between Inverter
main circuit terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3.
Check that the
indicated value is
normal.
{
*2 *3
Clean with a waste
cloth.
Check the indicated
values on the panel
meters.
The specified or
control values Voltmeter,
must be
ammeter
satisfied.
*1. The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperatures.
Refer to "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" for the replacement reference.
*2. The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions, such as ambient temperature
and/or dust. Check the operation through daily inspections.
*3. The replacement reference (year/cycle) or "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" is based on the expected design
life, which is not guaranteed.
6-5
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Inspection period
Inspection
part
Inspection
item
Inspection point
Periodic
Inspection method
Criteria
Meter
Daily
1 year 2 years
Check that there
are no abnormal
vibrations or
sounds.
{
Acoustic, feeling, and/
No faults
or visual inspection
{
Check that there is no
abnormal odor
No faults
caused by damage or
overheating.
General
Check that there
are no abnormal
odors.
Motor
Insulation
resistance
Megger check
(Between the
collective motor
terminals and
ground terminal)
{
Disconnect Inverter
main circuit terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3, and shortcircuit the 3-phase
motor wires. Then,
5 MΩ min.
use a megger to
measure the
resistance between
the motor wire and
ground terminal.
500 V DC
megger
6
6-6
Inspection and Maintenance
*1. The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperatures.
Refer to "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" for the replacement reference.
*2. The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions, such as ambient temperature
and/or dust. Check the operation through daily inspections.
*3. The replacement reference (year/cycle) or "Appendix-2 Product Life Curve" is based on the expected design
life, which is not guaranteed.
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Megger test
•For a megger test of the external circuit, be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the Inverter so
as not to apply the test voltage to the Inverter.
•Use a high resistance tester for a power distribution test of the control circuit. Do not use a megger
or buzzer.
•Conduct an Inverter megger test only to the main circuit, not to the control circuit.
•Use a 500 V DC megger for a megger test.
•For a megger test of the Inverter main circuit, remove the short-circuit bar used for switching the
Inverter built-in filter function and then short-circuit terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
P/+2, +1, N/-, RB, Ro, and To with the wires, as shown below.
After the megger test, remove the short-circuit wires from terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, P/+2, +1,
N/-, RB, Ro, and To, and reconnect the short-circuit bar for switching the Inverter built-in filter
function.
Note that the RB terminal is provided only for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity.
R/L1
Inspection and Maintenance
6
Power
supply
Do not connect the
power wire.
P/+2
+1
N/-
RB
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Motor
IM
Ground terminal Ground terminal
Ro
Do not connect to the
To
motor.
500 V DC megger
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar for
switching the built-in filter function.
Withstand Voltage Test
Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter.
Doing the test is dangerous and may cause damage or deterioration to the parts inside the Inverter.
Checking the Inverter and Converter
•The quality of the Inverter and converter can be checked using a tester.
(Preparation)
Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), the motor connection
wires (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3), and the regenerative braking resistance (P/+2, RB).
Prepare a tester. (Usable range is 1 Ω measurement resistance.)
(Checking method)
•The quality can be judged by measuring the conduction state of Inverter main circuit terminal
blocks R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, RB, P/+2, and N/- while alternating the tester polarity.
Note 1: Before checking, measure the voltage between P/+2 and N/- at DC voltage range in advance, and
confirm that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged.
6-7
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Note 2: A nearly infinite value is shown in a no-conduction state.
However, the value may not be infinite if the momentary conduction occurs through the influence
of the smoothing capacitor
The value shown ranges from a few to a few dozen Ω in a conduction state.
The Inverter or converter is in good shape if the values from various parameters are nearly equal,
though they are not consistent depending on the types of elements or testers.
Note 3: The regenerative braking circuit is provided for Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or lower.
Tester polarity
+ (red) - (black)
Measurement
value
R/L1
+1
No conduction
+1
R/L1
Conduction
S/L2
+1
No conduction R/L1
+1
S/L2
Conduction
T/L3
+1
No conduction
+1
T/L3
Conduction
R/L1
N/-
Conduction
N/-
R/L1
No conduction
S/L2
N/-
Conduction
N/-
S/L2
No conduction
T/L3
N/-
Conduction
N/-
T/L3
No conduction
U/T1
P/+2
No conduction
P/+2
U/T1
Conduction
V/T2
P/+2
No conduction
P/+2
V/T2
Conduction
W/T3
P/+2
No conduction
P/+2
W/T3
Conduction
U/T1
N/-
Conduction
N/-
U/T1
No conduction
V/T2
N/-
Conduction
N/-
V/T2
No conduction
W/T3
N/-
Conduction
N/-
W/T3
No conduction
RB
P/+2
No conduction
P/+2
RB
Conduction
RB
N/-
No conduction
N/-
RB
No conduction
Converter unit
+1 P/+2
RB
Inverter unit
TR1
D1
D1 D2
TR2
TR3
D3
U/T1
Converter unit
D2
D3
V/T2
S/L2
C
W/T3
T/L3
TR7
6
D4
D4 D5
D6
TR5
TR6
Inspection and Maintenance
TR4
D5
N/-
Regenerative
braking circuit
D6
TR1
Inverter unit
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
Regenerative braking circuit
TR6
TR7
6-8
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
„Measurement Methods of I/O Voltage, Current, and Electric Power
Below is a general measurement device for input/output voltages, current, and electric power.
R
W11
IR
R/L1
U/T1
ER
IS
S/L2
W12
V/T2
Inspection and Maintenance
6
Motor
EV
IT
T/L3
W13
W/T3
W02
IW
ET
Measurement
item
V
IV
ES
T
U
EU
Inverter
Power S
supply
W01
IU
W
EW
Measurement point
Measurement device
Note
Measurement value reference
Power
supply
voltage
EIN
Between R-S, S-T, and TR
(ER), (ES), (ET)
Moving-iron voltmeter
or
Rectifier voltmeter
All
effective
values
200-V class: 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
400-V class: 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Power
supply
current
IIN
Current R, S, T
(IR), (IS), (IT)
All
Moving iron ammeter effective
values
Input
electric
power
WIN
Between R-S, S-T, and
T-R
(WI1) + (WI2) + (WI3)
Electrodynamic
wattmeter
Input
power
factor PfIN
All
effective
values
PfIN =
WIN
3 ⋅ EIN ⋅ IIN
× 100(%)
Effective
See the figure below
value of
or
fundamental
Rectifier voltmeter
wave
Between U-V, V-W, W-U
(EU), (EV), (EW)
Output
current
IOUT
Current U, V, W
(IU), (IV),(IW)
All
Moving iron ammeter effective
values
Output
power
WOUT
Between U-V, V-W
(WO1)+(WO2)
Electrodynamic
wattmeter
6-9
Three-wattmeter method
Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage
EIN, power supply current IIN, and input electric power WIN.
Output
voltage
EOUT
Output
power
factor
PfOUT
When the input current is not
balanced
IIN = (IR+IS+ IT)/3
All
effective
values
Calculated from the measured values of output voltage EOUT,
output current IOUT, and output power WOUT.
PfOUT =
WOUT
× 100(%)
3 ⋅ EOUT ⋅ IOUT
Two-wattmeter method
(or three-wattmeter method)
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Inverter
Note 1: For output voltage, use
Measurement Method of Output Voltage
a measurement device
that displays effective
R
U
R/L1
U/T1
values of fundamental
wave. For current and
S
V
Motor
Power supply
electric power, use a
V/T2
S/L2
measurement device
T
W
that displays all
T/L3
W/T3
effective values.
2 W 220 kΩ
Note 2: The Inverter output
Diode
waveform, under PWM
+
600 V 0.1 A min. (200-V class)
control, has a margin of
1000 V 0.1 A min. (400-V class)
VDC
error, especially at a
Moving coil type
low frequency.
300 V (200-V class)
Effective value of fundamental wave VAC
600 V (400-V class)
Note 3: General-purpose
VAC = 1.1 × VDC
testers are not
applicable because of
noise in many cases.
6
Inspection and Maintenance
6-10
Chapter 7
Specifications
7-1 Standard Specification List ............................. 7-1
7-2 Dimensional Drawing....................................... 7-6
7-3 Options.............................................................. 7-14
7-1 Standard Specification List
7Specifications
7-1 Standard Specification List
„Three-phase 200-V Class
Class
3-phase 200 V
Model name (3G3RX-)
A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A2185 A2220
Max.
applicable
motor 4P
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
200 V
1.0
1.7
2.5
3.6
5.7
8.3
11.0
15.9
22.1
26.3
32.9
240 V
1.2
2.0
3.1
4.3
6.8
9.9
13.3
19.1
26.6
31.5
39.4
Rated output
capacity (kVA)
Rated input voltage
3-phase (3-wire) 200 V -15% to 240 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated output voltage
3-phase: 200 to 240 V (Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage.)
Rated output current (A)
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.5
16.5
Radio noise filter
Weight (kg)
7
Specifications
3.5
Minimum
connection
resistance (Ω)
3.5
3.5
3.5
50
50
35
35
3-phase 200 V
Model name (3G3RX-)
A2300 A2370 A2450 A2550
Rated output
capacity (kVA)
kW
30
37
45
55
200 V
41.9
50.2
63.0
76.2
240 V
50.2
60.2
75.6
91.4
Rated input voltage
3-phase (3-wire) 200 V -15% to
240 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated output voltage
3-phase: 200 to 240 V (Cannot
exceed that of incoming
voltage.)
Rated output current (A)
121
Radio noise filter
Weight (kg)
Braking
7-1
46
64
76
95
3.5
6
6
6
14
14
14
Built-in braking resistor circuit (discharge resistor separately mounted)
Class
Max.
applicable
motor 4P
32
Built-in
Regenerative
braking
Braking
24
145
182
220
Built-in
22
30
30
43
Regenerative
braking
Regenerative braking unit
separately mounted
Minimum
connection
resistance (Ω)
⎯
35
16
10
10
7.5
7.5
5
7-1 Standard Specification List
„Three-phase 400-V Class
Class
3-phase 400 V
Model name (3G3RX-)
A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185 A4220
Max.
applicable
motor 4P
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
400 V
1.0
1.7
2.5
3.6
6.2
9.7
13.1
17.3
22.1
26.3
33.2
480 V
1.2
2.0
3.1
4.3
7.4
11.6
15.8
20.7
26.6
31.5
39.9
Rated output
capacity (kVA)
Rated input voltage
3-phase (3-wire) 380 V -15% to 480 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated output voltage
3-phase: 380 to 480 V (Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage.)
Rated output current (A)
1.5
2.5
3.8
5.3
9.0
Radio noise filter
Weight (kg)
3.5
Minimum
connection
resistance (Ω)
19
25
32
38
48
6
6
14
14
14
24
20
Built-in
3.5
Regenerative
braking
Braking
14
3.5
3.5
3.5
6
Built-in braking resistor circuit (discharge resistor)
100
100
100
100
70
70
35
35
7
Class
3-phase 400 V
Model name (3G3RX-)
A4300 A4370 A4450 A4550 A4750 A4900 A411K A413K
Rated output
capacity (kVA)
kW
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
400 V
40.1
51.9
63.0
77.6
103.2
121.9
150.3
180.1
480 V
48.2
62.3
75.6
93.1
128.3
146.3
180.4
216.1
Rated input voltage
3-phase (3-wire) 380 V -15% to 480 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated output voltage
3-phase: 380 to 480 V (Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage.)
Rated output current (A)
58
75
91
Radio noise filter
Weight (kg)
Braking
112
149
176
217
260
60
80
80
Specifications
Max.
applicable
motor 4P
24
Built-in
22
30
30
30
60
Regenerative
braking
Regenerative braking unit separately mounted
Minimum
connection
resistance (Ω)
⎯
7-2
7-1 Standard Specification List
„Common Specifications
Item
Specifications
Enclosure rating
IP20
Cooling method
Forced air cooling
Control method
Phase-to-phase sinusoidal modulation PWM
Output frequency range
0.1 to 400 Hz
Frequency precision
Digital command: ±0.01% of the max. frequency
Analog command: ±0.2% of the max. frequency (25°C ± 10°C)
Frequency resolution
Digital setting: 0.01 Hz
Analog setting: Max. frequency/4000
(Terminal FV: 12 bits/0 to +10 V), (Terminal FE: 12 bits/-10 to +10 V),
(Terminal FI: 12 bits/0 to +20 mA)
Voltage/Frequency
characteristics
V/f optionally changeable at base frequencies of 30 to 400 Hz, V/f braking constant
torque, reduction torque, sensor-less vector control, sensor-less vector control at 0 Hz
Speed fluctuation
±0.5% (under sensor-less vector control or sensor-less vector control at 0 Hz)
Overload current rating
150%/60 s, 200%/3 s
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
0.01 to 3600.0 s (line/curve selection)
200%/0.3 Hz
(under sensor-less vector control or sensor-less vector control at 0 Hz)
7
Starting torque
Specifications
150%/Torque at 0 Hz (under sensor-less vector control at 0 Hz, when a motor size one
rank lower than specified is connected)
7-3
Forward or reverse operation/Stop Frequency settings
Input
DC injection braking
Operates when the starting frequency is lower than that in deceleration via the STOP
command, when the frequency reference is lower than the operation frequency, or via
an external input (braking power, time, and frequency are variable)
Standard Digital
Operator
Setting via
External signal
0 to +10 V DC, -10 to +10 V DC (Input impedance: 10 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 100 Ω)
External port
Setting through RS485 communication
keys
Standard Digital
Operator
RUN/STOP (Forward/reverse switched via the parameter settings)
External signal
Forward/Stop (Reverse/Stop available at the time of multi-functional input terminal
allocation)
3-wire input available (at the time of control circuit terminal block allocation)
External port
Setting through RS485 communication
7-1 Standard Specification List
Item
8 terminals, NO/NC switchable, sink/source logic switchable
[Terminal function] 8 functions can be selected from among 61.
Reverse (RV), Multi-step speed setting binary 1 (CF1), Multi-step speed setting binary 2
(CF2), Multi-step speed setting binary 3 (CF3), Multi-step speed setting binary 4 (CF4),
Jogging (JG), DC injection braking (DB), 2nd control (SET), 2-step acceleration/
deceleration (2CH), Free-run stop (FRS), External trip (EXT), USP function (USP),
Commercial switching (CS), Soft lock (SFT), Analog input switching (AT), 3rd control
(SET3), Reset (RS), 3-wire start (STA), 3-wire stop (STP), 3-wire forward/reverse (F/R),
PID enabled/disabled (PID), PID integral reset (PIDC), Control gain switching (CAS),
UP/DWN function accelerated (UP), UP/DWN function decelerated (DWN), UP/DWN
function data clear (UDC), Forced operator (OPE), Multi-step speed setting bit 1 (SF1),
Multi-step speed setting bit 2 (SF2), Multi-step speed setting bit 3 (SF3), Multi-step
speed setting bit 4 (SF4), Multi-step speed setting bit 5 (SF5), Multi-step speed setting
bit 6 (SF6), Multi-step speed setting bit 7 (SF7), Overload limit switching (OLR), Torque
limit enabled (TL), Torque limit switching 1 (TRQ1), Torque limit switching 2 (TRQ2),
P/PI switching (PPI), Brake confirmation (BOK), Orientation (ORT), LAD cancel (LAC),
Position deviation clear (PCLR), Pulse train position command input permission (STAT),
Frequency addition function (ADD), Forced terminal block (F-TM), Torque reference
input permission (ATR), Integrated power clear (KHC), Servo ON (SON), Preliminary
excitation (FOC), Analog command on hold (AHD), Position command selection 1 (CP1),
Position command selection 2 (CP2), Position command selection 3 (CP3), Zero return
limit signal (ORL), Zero return startup signal (ORG), Forward driving stop (FOT),
Reverse driving stop (ROT), Speed/Position switching (SPD), Pulse counter (PCNT),
Pulse counter clear (PCC), No allocation (no)
Thermistor input
terminal
1 terminal (Positive/Negative temperature coefficient of resistance element switchable)
Multi-function output
5 open collector output terminals: NO/NC switchable, sink/source logic switchable
1 relay (SPDT contact) output terminal: NO/NC switchable
[Terminal function] 6 functions can be selected from among 45.
Signal during RUN (RUN), Constant speed arrival signal (FA1), Over set frequency
arrival signal (FA2), Overload warning (OL), Excessive PID deviation (OD), Alarm signal
(AL), Set-frequency-only arrival signal (FA3), Overtorque (OTQ), Signal during
momentary power interruption (IP), Signal during undervoltage (UV), Torque limit (TRQ),
RUN time exceeded (RNT), Power ON time exceeded (ONT), Thermal warning (THM),
Brake release (BRK), Brake error (BER), 0-Hz signal (ZS), Excessive speed deviation
(DSE), Position ready (POK), Set frequency exceeded 2 (FA4), Set frequency only 2
(FA5), Overload warning 2 (OL2), Analog FV disconnection detection (FVDc), Analog FI
disconnection detection (FIDc), Analog FE disconnection detection (FEDc), PID FB
status output (FBV), Network error (NDc), Logic operation output 1 (LOG1), Logic
operation output 2 (LOG2), Logic operation output 3 (LOG3), Logic operation output 4
(LOG4), Logic operation output 5 (LOG5), Logic operation output 6 (LOG6), Capacitor
life warning (WAC), Cooling fan life warning (WAF), Starting contact signal (FR), Fin
overheat warning (OHF), Light load detection signal (LOC), Operation ready (IRDY),
Forward run (FWR), Reverse run (RVR), Fatal fault (MJA), Window comparator FV
(WCFV), Window comparator FI (WCFI), Window comparator FE (WCFE), Alarm codes
0 to 3 (AC0 to AC3)
Multi-function monitor
output terminal
Analog voltage output, Analog current output,
Pulse train output (A-F, D-F {multiplied by "n", pulse output only}, A, T, V, P, etc.)
Display monitor
Output frequency, Output current, Output torque, Frequency conversion value, Trip
record, I/O terminal status, Electric power, etc.
7-4
7
Specifications
Output
Input
Multi-function input
Specifications
7-1 Standard Specification List
Other functions
V/f free setting (7), Upper/lower frequency limit, Frequency jump, Curve acceleration/
deceleration, Manual torque boost level/break, Energy-saving operation, Analog meter
adjustment, Starting frequency, Carrier frequency adjustment, Electronic thermal
function, (free setting available), External start/end (frequency/rate), Analog input
selection, Trip retry, Restart during momentary power interruption, Various signal
outputs, Reduced voltage startup, Overload limit, Initialization value setting, Automatic
deceleration at power-off, AVR function, Automatic acceleration/deceleration, Auto
tuning (Online/Offline), High-torque multi-motor operation control (sensor-less vector
control of two monitors with one Inverter)
Carrier frequency
modification range
0.5 to 15 kHz
Protective functions
Overcurrent protection, Overvoltage protection, Undervoltage protection, Electronic
thermal protection, Temperature error protection, Momentary power interruption/Power
interruption protection, Input phase loss protection, Braking resistor overload protection,
Ground-fault current detection at power-on, USP error, External trip, Emergency shutoff
trip, CT error, Communication error, Option error, etc.
Operating environment
Specifications
Ambient/Storage
temperature/
Humidity
Options
Specifications
7
Item
Feedback option
Sensor vector control
Digital input option
4-digit BCD, 16-bit binary
Other options
Braking resistor, AC reactor, DC reactor, Digital Operator cables, Noise filter, Braking
unit, etc.
-10°C to 50°C/-20°C to 65°C/20% to 90% RH (with no condensation)
Vibration *
3G3RX-A†004 to A†220
5.9 m/s2 (0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz
3G3RX-A†300 to A†550, A4750 to A413K
2.94 m/s2 (0.3G), 10 to 55 Hz
Location
At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
* Complies with the test method specified in JIS C0040 (1999).
Note: Insulation distance complies with UL/CE standards.
7-5
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A2004/A2007/A2015/A2022/A2037
A4004/A4007/A4015/A4022/A4037
150
130
2-φ6
255
241
79
80
7
Specifications
6
62
140
130
143
7-6
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A2055/A2075/A2110
A4055/A4075/A4110
210
189
2-φ7
80
246
260
82
169
13.6
79
24.5
7
7
170
Specifications
189
203
7-7
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A2150/A2185/A2220
A4150/A4185/A4220
2-φ7
250
229
80
390
273.4
376
79
24.5
7
Specifications
7
83
9.5
190
229
244
7-8
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A2300/A4300
265
2-φ10
80
540
368
510
79
45
Specifications
7
10
265
195
310
7-9
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A2370/A2450
A4370/A4450/A4550
2-φ12
550
277
520
79
300
7
Specifications
12
300
250
390
7-10
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A2550
2-φ12
Specifications
7
700
352
670
79
380
12
380
250
480
7-11
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A4750/A4900
670
7
357
700
79
2-φ12
Specifications
2-12
300
268
390
7-12
7-2 Dimensional Drawing
„3G3RX-A411K/A413K
480
710
740
79
2-φ12
Specifications
7
2-12
380
270
480
7-13
7-3 Options
7-3 Options
Regenerative Braking Unit (3G3AX-RBU††)
„Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-RBU21/-RBU22/-RBU41
95
145
218
5
208
75
2-φ5
7
35
5
100
Specifications
Ground
terminal (M5)
7-14
7-3 Options
3G3AX-RBU23
217
160
250
4-φ8
45
109
237
258
51
86
151
Ground
terminal (M5)
258
3G3AX-RBU24
50
300
4-φ8
200
234
254
275
275
7-15
101
171
Ground
terminal (M5)
67
Specifications
7
127
7-3 Options
3G3AX-RBU42
95
2-φ5
145
218
208
5
75
35
5
100
Ground
terminal (M5)
7
Specifications
3G3AX-RBU43
217
160
250
4-φ8
45
109
237
258
86
51
151
Ground
terminal (M5)
258
7-16
7-3 Options
„Specifications
Built-in resistor type (3G3AX-RBU21/-RBU22/-RBU41)
Applicable voltage class
Model
Connection resistance
3G3AX-RBU22
3G3AX-RBU41
17 Ω min.
17 Ω min.
34 Ω min.
ON : 362.5 ± 5 V
OFF: 355 ± 5 V
Operation indication
LED ON (Lit)
Parallel interlocking
operation function
5 units max.
Built-in resistor
3-phase 400-V class
3G3AX-RBU21
Operating voltage
ON/OFF
ON : 725 ± 5 V
OFF: 710 ± 5 V
Internal resistance
120 W, 180 Ω
120 W, 20 Ω
120 W, 180 Ω × 2 in series
Allowable
consecutive ON
time
10 s max.
0.5 s max.
10 s max.
Allowable
operation cycle
Cycle 1/10
(ON for 10 s, OFF for 90 s)
Cycle 1/80
(ON for 0.5 s, OFF for 40 s)
Cycle 1/10
(ON for 10 s, OFF for 90 s)
Power
consumption
Instantaneous 0.73 kW
Short-time rating 120 W
Instantaneous 6.6 kW
Short-time rating 120 W
Instantaneous 1.46 kW
Short-time rating 240 W
Relay operates at approximately 200°C or higher.
Recovers at approximately 170°C or lower.
Built-in resistor
• Rating of contact 250 V AC 200mA (R load)
overheat protection
12 V DC 500mA (R load)
42 V DC 200mA (R load)
• Minimum load
1mA (R load)
Operating environment
Specifications
7
3-phase 200-V class
• Cooling fin temperature
Ambient
temperature
Ambient storage
temperature
-10°C to 50°C
-20°C to 65°C (short-time temperature during transport)
Humidity
20% to 90% (with no condensation)
Vibration
5.9 m/s2 (0.6G) 10 to 55 Hz
Location
At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
Paint color
Munselle 5Y7/1 (cooling fan: aluminum ground color)
*1 When using a braking resistor (model 3G3AX-RAB/-RBB/-RBC) for a 400-V-class regenerative braking unit,
disconnect the built-in resistor and connect two of the same size braking resistors in series.
Damage may occur to a 400-V-class regenerative braking unit if operated with only one braking resistor connected.
*2 Set up using DIP switch.
*3 Built-in resistors are equipped with thermal fuses.
If the alarm is not connected, the fuse may blow to prevent burnout due to overheating.
If the fuse blows, the built-in resistor will need to be replaced.
7-17
7-3 Options
External resistor type (3G3AX-RBU23/-RBU24/-RBU42/-RBU43)
3-phase 200-V class
3-phase 400-V class
Model
3G3AX-RBU23
3G3AX-RBU24
3G3AX-RBU42
3G3AX-RBU43
Continuous
operation
6 Ω min.
4 Ω min.
24 Ω min.
12 Ω min.
Short-time/
operation
Allowable
operation cycle/
Continuous ON
time
4 Ω min.
1/5
2 min
2 Ω min.
1/5
2 min
10 Ω min.
1/10
10 s
6 Ω min.
1/5
2 min
ON: 362.5 ± 5 V
OFF: 355 ± 5 V
Operation indication
LED ON (Lit)
Maximum number of
units operating in
parallel
2 units max.
Built-in relay specifications
Cooling fin temperature Relay operates at approximately 100°C or higher.
• Rating of contact: 240 V AC 3 A (R load)
36 V DC 2 A (R load)
• Minimum load:
5 V DC 50 mA (R load)
Internal power
module overheat
protection
Ambient
temperature
Ambient storage
temperature
ON: 725 ± 5 V
OFF: 710 ± 5 V
-10°C to 50°C
-20°C to 65°C (short-time temperature during transport)
Humidity
20% to 90% (with no condensation)
Vibration
4.9 m/s2 (0.5G) 10 to 55 Hz
Location
At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
Paint color
7
Specifications
Operating environment
Operating voltage ON/
OFF
Protective functions
Discharge resistance
Applicable voltage class
Munselle 5Y7/1 (cooling fan: aluminum ground color)
*1 When using a braking resistor (model 3G3AX-RAB/-RBB/-RBC) for a 400-V-class regenerative braking unit,
connect two of the same size braking resistors in series.
Damage may occur to a 400-V-class regenerative braking unit if operated with only one braking resistor connected.
*2 Set up using DIP switch.
7-18
7-3 Options
Braking Resistor (3G3AX-RBA/-RBB/-RBC†††)
„Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-RBA††††
170
43
2-4.2
150
5
160
5
1.2
20.5 MAX
500
7
3G3AX-RBB††††
L1
H1
70
7
10
H2
25
.5
R3.5
R3
W
Specifications
55
φ15
7.5
L2
7.5
T
L3
Rated
capacity
(W)
Resistance
(Ω)
L1
L2
L3
H1
H2
W
T
Weight
(kg)
3G3AX-RBB2001
200
180
310
295
160
67
12
64
1.6
0.97
3G3AX-RBB2002
200
100
310
295
160
67
12
64
1.6
0.97
3G3AX-RBB3001
300
50
470
455
320
67
12
64
1.6
1.68
3G3AX-RBB4001
400
35
435
422
300
94
15
76
2
2.85
Model
7-19
Dimensions (mm)
7-3 Options
3G3AX-RBC4001
100
70
300
280
150
5
7
3G3AX-RBC6001
Specifications
100
70
410
390
150
5
7-20
7-3 Options
3G3AX-RBC12001
150
170
410
390
10
110
7
„Specifications
Compact type
(3G3AX-RBA
Resistance
Model
1201
Capacity
1202
1203
Standard type
(3G3AX-RBB
)
1204
120 W
2001
2002
200 W
Medium capacity type
(3G3AX-RBC
)
)
3001
4001
4001
6001
12001
300 W
400 W
400 W
600 W
1200 W
50
35
17
Resistance
(Ω)
180
100
50
35
180
100
50
35
Allowable
braking
frequency (%)
5
2.5
1.5
1.0
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
Allowable
continuous
braking time (s)
20
12
5
3
20
10
Weight (kg)
Fault detection
function
General specifications
Specifications
7
Ambient
temperature
7-21
0.27
30
0.97
1.68
2.85
Built-in thermal (Contact capacity: 240 V AC 2 A max.
Minimum current: 5 mA,
Normally ON (NC contact)
Built-in temperature fuse (recovery impossible)
2.5
3.6
6.5
Built-in temperature relay,
Normally ON (NC contact)
Contact capacity:
240 V AC 3 A (R load),
0.2 A (L load), 36 V DC 2 A
(R load)
-10°C to 50°C
Humidity
20% to 90% (RH) with no condensation
Vibration
5.9 m/s (0.6 G) 10 to 55 Hz Complies with JISC0911
Location
At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
Cooling
method
Self-cooling
7-3 Options
„Simplified Selection Table for Regenerative Braking Unit and Braking Resistor
(1) Inverter specifications (choose voltage, capacity, and model)
The content noted in the table assumes the case of combining one Inverter and one motor of the
same capacity.
(2) Select the %ED.
Use the %ED that is equivalent to or lower than the value shown.
(3) This shows the model and number of regenerative braking units and braking resistors.
(4) This provides a summary of the connection configuration of the regenerative braking unit and
braking resistor.
Refer to pages 7-22 to 7-28.
(5) The specified conditions contain restrictions. Make sure there are not any issues
(2) Usage
conditions
(1) Inverter
Max.
applicable
Voltage
motor
capacity
(kW)
0.4
1.5
200-V
Class
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
3G3RX
-A2004
3G3RX
-A2007
3G3RX
-A2015
3G3RX
-A2022
3G3RX
-A2037
3G3RX
-A2055
3G3RX
-A2075
(5)
Restrictions
(3) Braking resistor
(4)
Allowable
Number Connection continuous
braking
of units
time (s)
Model
Number
of units
Model
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1201
1
1
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB2001
1
1
30
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1201
1
1
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB2001
1
1
30
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1202
1
1
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
1
1
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB3001
1
1
30
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
1
1
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB4001
1
1
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC6001
1
1
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB3001
2
3
30
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
2
3
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB4001
2
3
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC6001
2
3
10
7-22
7
Specifications
0.75
Model
%ED
(%)
(3) Regenerative braking
unit
7-3 Options
(2) Usage
conditions
(1) Inverter
Max.
applicable
Voltage
motor
capacity
(kW)
11
15
18.5
22
7
Model
3G3RX
-A2110
3G3RX
-A2150
3G3RX
-A2185
3G3RX
-A2220
200-V
Class
Specifications
30
37
45
55
7-23
3G3RX
-A2300
3G3RX
-A2370
3G3RX
-A2450
3G3RX
-A2550
%ED
(%)
(3) Regenerative braking
unit
(5)
Restrictions
(3) Braking resistor
(4)
Allowable
Number Connection continuous
of units
braking
time (s)
Model
Number
of units
Model
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB4001
3
5
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC6001
3
5
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC12001
2
3
10
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC12001
2
3
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
3
7
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
3
7
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
3
7
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
3
7
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
5
11
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
5
11
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
5
11
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
5
11
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
6
12
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
6
12
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
7
13
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU24
1
3G3AXRBC12001
7
13
10
7-3 Options
(2) Usage
conditions
(1) Inverter
Max.
applicable
Voltage
motor
capacity
(kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
3G3RX
-A4004
3G3RX
-A4007
3G3RX
-A4015
3G3RX
-A4022
3G3RX
-A4037
3G3RX
-A4055
3G3RX
-A4075
3G3RX
-A4110
3G3RX
-A4150
3G3RX
-A4185
3G3RX
-A4220
(5)
Restrictions
(3) Braking resistor
(4)
Allowable
Number Connection continuous
of units
braking
time (s)
Model
Number
of units
Model
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1201
2
3
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB2001
2
3
30
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1201
2
3
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB2001
2
3
30
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1201
2
3
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB2001
2
3
30
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBA1202
2
3
12
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
2
3
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB3001
2
3
30
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
2
3
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB3001
2
3
30
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
2
3
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB4001
2
3
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC6001
2
3
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB3001
4
5
30
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC4001
4
5
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBB4001
4
5
20
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC6001
4
5
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC12001
6
6
10
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC12001
6
6
10
3.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC12001
6
6
10
10.0%
Built-in braking
resistor circuit
⎯
3G3AXRBC12001
6
6
10
7-24
7
Specifications
400-V
Class
Model
%ED
(%)
(3) Regenerative braking
unit
7-3 Options
(2) Usage
conditions
(1) Inverter
Max.
applicable
Voltage
motor
capacity
(kW)
30
37
Model
3G3RX
-A2300
3G3RX
-A4370
400-V
Class
45
55
7
3G3RX
-A4450
3G3RX
-A4550
%ED
(%)
(3) Regenerative braking
unit
(5)
Restrictions
(3) Braking resistor
(4)
Allowable
Number Connection continuous
of units
braking
time (s)
Model
Number
of units
Model
3.0%
3G3AXRBU42
1
3G3AXRBC12001
4
8
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU42
1
3G3AXRBC12001
4
8
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU43
1
3G3AXRBC12001
6
9
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU43
1
3G3AXRBC12001
6
9
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU43
1
3G3AXRBC12001
6
9
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU43
1
3G3AXRBC12001
6
9
10
3.0%
3G3AXRBU43
1
3G3AXRBC12001
8
10
10
10.0%
3G3AXRBU43
1
3G3AXRBC12001
8
10
10
Specifications
* Calculated using a braking torque of approximately 100%.
* Calculated based on using a standard 4-pole motor.
* The simplified selection table above cannot be used in cases where a 10% ED is exceeded, in
vertical applications, or where a very large braking torque is required.
* Consult us concerning models with a capacity of 75 kW or higher.
7-25
7-3 Options
TYPE
P/+2
1
Inverter
Resistor only
One units
R
Resistor
RB
2
P/+2
Resistor only
Two units in
parallel
Inverter
R
R
RB
P/+2
Inverter
3
R
Resistor only
Two units in series
R
RB
4
P/+2
Resistor only
Three units in
parallel
7
Inverter
R
R
R
RB
Specifications
P/+2
Inverter
5
Resistor only
Two parallel units
connected in
series to two other
parallel units
R
R
R
R
RB
P/+2
R
R
R
R
R
R
Inverter
6
Three resistors in
series
Two units in
parallel
RB
7-26
7-3 Options
TYPE
P/+2
Inverter
R
7
One braking unit
Three resistors in
parallel
P
R
R
RB
Braking unit
(Resistor mounted
externally)
Voltage
detection
N/N
P/+2
Inverter
8
One braking unit
Two resistors in
parallel connected
in series to two
other parallel units
P
R
R
R
R
RB
Voltage
detection
N/-
7
N
Specifications
P/+2
Inverter
9
One braking unit
Three resistors in
parallel connected
in series to two
other parallel units
P
R
R
R
R
R
R
RB
Voltage
detection
N/N
P/+2
Inverter
10
One braking unit
Four resistors in
parallel connected
in series to two
other parallel units
P
Voltage
detection
N/N
7-27
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RB
Braking unit
(Resistor mounted externally)
7-3 Options
TYPE
P/+2
Inverter
R
11
One braking unit
Five resistors in
parallel
P
R
R
R
R
RB
Braking unit
(Resistor mounted externally)
Voltage
detection
N/N
P/+2
Inverter
R
12
One braking unit
Six resistors in
parallel
P
R
R
R
R
R
RB
Braking unit
(Resistor mounted externally)
Voltage
detection
N/N
7
P/+2
Inverter
R
13
P
Voltage
detection
R
R
R
R
R
R
RB
Braking unit
(Resistor mounted externally)
Specifications
One braking unit
Seven resistors in
parallel
N/N
7-28
7-3 Options
DC Reactor (3G3AX-DL††††)
„Dimensional Drawing
Y
D
Y
D
Ground terminal (M5)
2-K
X
W
4-C
Ground terminal (M4)
X
W
MAX B
4-C
MAX B
7
MAX H
MAX H
2-K
Figure 1
Figure 2
Specifications
W
D
Y
X
4-C
Ground terminal (M6)
MAX B
MAX A
MAX H
2-K
Figure 3
7-29
7-3 Options
„Specifications
Inverter
input
power
supply
Figure
No.
Model
W
D
H
A
B
X
Y
C
K
Weight
Standard
(kg)
applicable wire
66
90
98
⎯
85
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
0.8
1.25 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2004
0.4
66
90
98
⎯
95
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
1.0
1.25 mm2 min.
0.75
66
90
98
⎯
105
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
1.3
2 mm2 min.
1.5
66
90
98
⎯
115
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
1.6
2 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2022
2.2
86
100 116
⎯
105
71
80
6×9
M4
2.1
2 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2037
3.7
86
100 118
⎯
120
71
80
6×9
M4
2.6
3.5 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2055
5..5
111 100 210
⎯
110
95
80
7 × 11
M5
3.6
8 mm2 min.
7.5
111 100 212
⎯
120
95
80
7 × 11
M6
3.9
14 mm2 min.
11
146 120 252
⎯
110 124
96
7 × 11
M6
6.5
22 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2150
15
146 120 256
⎯
120 124
96
7 × 11
M8
7.0
38 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2220
18.5, 22
120 175 356 140 145
98
151 7 × 11
M8
9.0
60 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2300
30
120 175 386 155 150
98
151 7 × 11
M8
13.0
38 mm2 × 2 min.
37
120 175 390 155 150
98
151 7 × 11 M10
13.5
38 mm2 × 2 min.
3G3AX-DL2450
45
160 190 420 180 150 120 168 7 × 11 M10
19.0
60 mm2 × 2 min.
3G3AX-DL2550
55
160 190 424 180 180 120 168 7 × 11 M12
24.0
80 mm2 × 2 min.
3G3AX-DL4004
0.4
66
90
98
⎯
85
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
0.8
1.25 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4007
0.75
66
90
98
⎯
95
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
1.1
1.25 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4015
1.5
66
90
98
⎯
115
56
72
5.2 × 8
M4
1.6
2 mm2 min.
2.2
86
100 116
⎯
105
71
80
6×9
M4
2.1
2 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4037
3.7
86
100 116
⎯
120
71
80
6×9
M4
2.6
2 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4055
5.5
111 100 138
⎯
110
95
80
7 × 11
M4
3.6
3.5 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4075
7.5
111 100 138
⎯
115
95
80
7 × 11
M4
3.9
3.5 mm2 min.
11
146 120 250
⎯
105 124
96
7 × 11
M5
5.2
5.5 mm2 min.
15
146 120 252
⎯
120 124
96
7 × 11
M6
7.0
14 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL2075
3G3AX-DL2110
3G3AX-DL2370
3G3AX-DL4022
3G3AX-DL4110
3G3AX-DL4150
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
3G3AX-DL4220
18.5, 22
120 175 352 140 145
98
151 7 × 11
M6
9.5
22 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4300
30
120 175 356 140 145
98
151 7 × 11
M8
9.5
30 mm2 min.
37
120 175 386 155 150
98
151 7 × 11
M8
13.5
38 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4450
45
160 190 416 180 145 120 168 7 × 11
M8
16.5
60 mm2 min.
3G3AX-DL4550
55
160 190 416 190 170 120 168 7 × 11
M8
23.0
38 mm2 × 2 min.
3G3AX-DL4370
Fig.3
„Operating Environment
Ambient temperature
-10°C to 50°C
Humidity
20% to 90% RH (with no condensation)
Vibration
15 kW max. 5.9 m/s2 max. (0.6G) 10 to 55 Hz
22 kW min. 2.0 m/s2 max. (0.2G) 10 to 55 Hz
Location
At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
7-30
7
Specifications
0.2
3G3AX-DL2015
3-phase
400 V AC
Dimensions (mm) Bmax: coil dimensions
3G3AX-DL2002
3G3AX-DL2007
3/1-phase
200 V AC
Applicable
Inverter
capacity
(kw)
7-3 Options
Input Noise Filter (3G3AX-NFI)
„Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-NFI21/-NFI22
66
52
(10)
Inverter side
117
100
(84)
L3' L2' L1'
L3 L2 L1
Power
supply side
10
M4
(15)
3G3AX-NFI23/-NFI24/-NFI41/
-NFI42/-NFI43/-NFI44
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
74
Model
C
B
(95)
L3' L2' L1'
M4
(15)
(D)
7-31
73
φ5
L3 L2 L1
Power
supply side
A
B
C
D
3G3AX-NFI23
128
118
56
10
3G3AX-NFI24
144
130
56
11
3G3AX-NFI41
144
130
56
11
3G3AX-NFI42
144
130
56
11
3G3AX-NFI43
144
130
56
11
3G3AX-NFI44
144
130
56
11
5
Inverter side
A
Specifications
7
67MAX
2-f5.0
7-3 Options
3G3AX-NFI25/-NFI26/-NFI45
-NFI46/-NFI47
2-4.5×6
Power
supply side
L1 L2 L3
(95)
155
165
M6
L1' L2' L3'
Inverter
side
(16)
2-φ4.5
65
90
95
7
3G3AX-NFI27/-NFI28/-NFI29
-NFI48/-NFI49/-NFI4A
Specifications
6-N
Power supply side
J2
P
F
E
L1' L2' L3'
W
Inverter side
2-M
L3 L2 L1
G
2-L
IN
D
C
B
A
K
J
H
7-32
7-3 Options
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Model
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
J2
K
L
M
N
P
W
3G3AX-NFI27
217
200
185
170
120
90
44
115
85
82
20
R2.75
Length 7
φ5.5
M6 M4
17
3G3AX-NFI28
254
230
215
200
150
120
57
115
80
75
30
R3.75
Length 8
φ6.5
M8 M6
23
3G3AX-NFI29
314
300
280
260
200
170
57
130
90
85
35
R3.75
Length 8
φ6.5
M8 M6
23
3G3AX-NFI48
217
200
185
170
120
90
44
115
85
82
20
R2.75
Length 7
φ5.5
M6 M4
17
3G3AX-NFI49
254
230
215
200
150
120
57
115
80
75
30
R3.75
Length 8
φ6.5
M8 M6
23
3G3AX-NFI4A
314
300
280
260
200
170
57
130
90
85
35
R3.75
Length 8
φ6.5
M8 M6
23
3G3AX-NFI2A/-NFI2B/-NFI2C
L
Specifications
G
D
E
F
L1' L2' L3'
K
L3 L2 L1
7
86
39
K
C
M
Power
supply
side
t
Inverter side
(J)
H
B
A
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Model
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
t
450
430
338
100
190
230
7
180
(133)
M10
M8
385
1.0
500
475
400
⎯
160
200
12
180
(133)
M10
M8
445
1.2
3G3AX-NFI2A
3G3AX-NFI2B
3G3AX-NFI2C
7-33
7-3 Options
„Specifications (3G3AX-NF1)
Power supply
3-phase
250 V +10%
Max.
Rated input current In
(A) at an ambient
temperature of 50°C
Power loss
(W)
Leakage current (mA/
phase) at 60 Hz
3G3AX-NFI21
0.2 to 0.75
3 × 6A
3
< 1.5 (250V)
3G3AX-NFI22
1.5
3 × 10A
4
< 1.5 (250V)
3G3AX-NFI23
2.2, 3.7
3 × 20A
6
< 1.5 (250V)
3G3AX-NFI24
5.5
3 × 30 A
9
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI25
7.5
3 × 40 A
12
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI26
11
3 × 60 A
17
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI27
15
3 × 80 A
21
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI28
18.5
3 × 100 A
23
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI29
22, 30
3 × 150 A
45
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI2A
37
3 × 200 A
50
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI2B
45
3 × 250 A
68
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI2C
55
3 × 300 A
56
< 1.5 (250 V)
3G3AX-NFI41
0.4 to 2.2
3 × 7A
2
< 7.5 (480V)
3G3AX-NFI42
3.7
3 × 10A
4
< 7.5 (480V)
3G3AX-NFI43
5.5, 7.5
3 × 20 A
6
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI44
11
3 × 30 A
9
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI45
15
3 × 40 A
12
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI46
18.5
3 × 50 A
15
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI47
22
3 × 60 A
17
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI48
30
3 × 80 A
21
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI49
37
3 × 100 A
23
< 7.5 (480 V)
3G3AX-NFI4A
45, 55
3 × 150 A
45
< 7.5 (480 V)
7
Specifications
3-phase
480 V +10%
Max.
Applicable
Inverter
capacity (kw)
Model
7-34
7-3 Options
Model
Wire dia.
2
Weight (kg)
Plastic, IP00
M4
1.25mm
0.5
3G3AX-NFI22
Plastic, IP00
M4
2mm2
0.6
3G3AX-NFI23
Plastic, IP00
M4
2mm2, 3.5mm2
0.7
M4
2
1.25mm
0.5
0.6
Plastic, IP00
3G3AX-NFI22
Plastic, IP00
M4
2mm2
3G3AX-NFI23
Plastic, IP00
M4
2mm2, 3.5mm2
0.7
3G3AX-NFI24
Plastic, IP00
M4
5.5 mm2
0.8
M5
8 mm2
1.4
3G3AX-NFI25
Plastic, IP00
2
3G3AX-NFI26
Plastic, IP00
M5
14 mm
1.8
3G3AX-NFI27
Metal, IP00
M6
22 mm2
3.6
3G3AX-NFI28
Metal, IP00
M8
30 mm2
4.6
3G3AX-NFI29
Specifications
Terminal size
3G3AX-NFI21
3G3AX-NFI21
7
Case enclosure rating
Metal, IP00
2, 60 mm2
M8
38 mm
9.0
16
3G3AX-NFI2A
Metal, IP00
M10
100 mm2 or 38 mm2, 2 wires parallel
3G3AX-NFI2B
Metal, IP00
M10
100 mm2 or 38 mm2, 2 wires parallel
16
3G3AX-NFI2C
Metal, IP00
M10
150 mm2 or 60 mm2, 2 wires parallel
23
M4
1.25mm2, 2mm2
0.7
3G3AX-NFI41
Plastic, IP00
2
3G3AX-NFI42
Plastic, IP00
M4
2mm
0.7
3G3AX-NFI43
Plastic, IP00
M4
2 mm2, 3.5 mm2
0.7
3G3AX-NFI44
Plastic, IP00
M4
5.5 mm2
0.8
3G3AX-NFI45
Plastic, IP00
M5
2
1.4
8 mm
2
3G3AX-NFI46
Plastic, IP00
M5
14 mm
1.6
3G3AX-NFI47
Plastic, IP00
M5
14 mm2
1.8
3G3AX-NFI48
Metal, IP00
M6
22 mm2
3.6
M8
2
38 mm
4.6
M8
38 mm2, 60 mm2
9.0
3G3AX-NFI49
3G3AX-NFI4A
7-35
Metal, IP00
Metal, IP00
7-3 Options
EMC Noise Filter (3G3AX-EFI†††)
„Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-EFI41/-EFI42
74
56
M4
7
73
11
(15)
φ5
(95)
130
144
5
Specifications
(95)
155
165
3G3AX-EFI43/-EFI44/-EFI45
(16)
65
90
95
7-36
7-3 Options
G3AX-EFI46/-EFI47/-EFI48/-EFI49/-EFI4A
6-N
2-L
P
F
E
L3 L2 L1
L1’ L2’ L3’
2-M
D
C
B
A
K
J
H
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Model
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
217
220
185
170
120
90
115
85
20
R2.75
Length 7
φ5.5
M6
M4
3G3AX-EFI49
254
230
215
200
150
120
115
80
30
R3.25
Length 8
φ6.5
M8
M6
3G3AX-EFI4A
314
300
280
260
200
170
130
90
35
R3.25
Length 8
φ6.5
M8
M6
3G3AX-EFI46
3G3AX-EFI47
3G3AX-EFI48
3G3AX-EFI4B
E
F
L
D
L1’ L2’ L3’
39
K
G
86
K
L3 L2 L1
Specifications
7
C
B
(J)
A
H
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Model
3G3AX-EFI4B
7-37
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
450
430
338
100
190
230
7
180
(133)
M10
M8
7-3 Options
„Specification
Voltage
Applicable Inverter capacity
(kw)
Model
Input current
In (A)
Leakage
current (mA/
phase) at 60
Hz
Class
3-phase 200 V 3-phase 400 V
3-phase
200 V / 400 V
3G3AX-EFI41
0.4, 0.75
0.4 to 2.2
7A
150
A
3G3AX-EFI42
1.5
3.7
10A
150
A
3G3AX-EFI43
2.2, 3.7
5.5, 7.5
20A
170
A
3G3AX-EFI44
5.5
11
30A
170
A
3G3AX-EFI45
7.5
15
40A
170
A
3G3AX-EFI46
⎯
18.5
50A
250
A
3G3AX-EFI47
11
22
60A
250
A
3G3AX-EFI48
15
30
80A
250
A
3G3AX-EFI49
18.5
37
100A
250
A
3G3AX-EFI4A
22, 30
45, 55
150A
250
A
3G3AX-EFI4B
37
75, 90
200A
250
A
Model
Case enclosure rating
Terminal size
3G3AX-EFI41
Wire dia.
1.25mm
M4
2, 2mm2
Weight (kg)
0.7
2mm2
0.7
3G3AX-EFI43
2mm2, 3.5mm2
1.0
2
1.3
3G3AX-EFI45
8mm
2
1.4
3G3AX-EFI46
14mm2
2.9
3G3AX-EFI47
14mm
2
3.0
22mm
2
3.6
M5
3G3AX-EFI44
M6
3G3AX-EFI48
3G3AX-EFI49
Metal, IP00
M8
3G3AX-EFI4A
3G3AX-EFI4B
M10
5.5mm
30mm2, 38mm2
4.3
38mm2, 60mm2
9.0
2 or 38 mm2,
100 mm
2 wires parallel
Specifications
3G3AX-EFI42
Plastic, IP00
7
16.0
7-38
7-3 Options
Output Noise Filter (3G3AX-NFO††)
„Dimensional Drawing
W
3G3AX-NFO01/-NFO02
H
D
3G3AX-NFO03/-NFO04/-NFO05/-NFO06/-NFO07
Specifications
7
„Specifications
200-V class
External dimensions
(Height × Width × Depth)
400-V class
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
6
0.75 max.
2.2 max.
156 × 95 × 50
0.7
3G3AX-NFO02
12
1.5, 2.2
3.7
176 × 110 × 70
0.9
3-phase (3-wire)
rated voltage
3G3AX-NFO03
25
3.7, 5.5
5.5 to 11
154 × 160 × 120
2.1
3G3AX-NFO04
50
7.5, 11
15, 18.5, 22
210 × 200 × 150
3.7
500 V AC
3G3AX-NFO05
75
15
30, 37
230 × 220 × 170
5.7
3G3AX-NFO06
100
18.5, 22
45
237 × 220 × 170
8.4
3G3AX-NFO07
150
30, 37
55, 75
257 × 240 × 170
9.0
Power supply
7-39
Rated
current (A)
3G3AX-NFO01
Model
Applicable motor (kW)
7-3 Options
AC Reactor (3G3AX-AL††††)
„Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-AL2025/-AL2055/-AL4025/-AL4055/-AL4110
D max
E max
H1 max
H max
Ro R So S To T
X
Y
A max
C max
3G3AX-AL2110/-AL2220/-AL2330/-AL2500/-AL2750
-AL4220/-AL4330/-AL4500/-AL4750
7
A max
S
D max
To
E max
T
H1 max
H max
So
Specifications
Ro R
X
Y
C max
7-40
7-3 Options
„Specifications
Power
supply
3-phase
200 V AC
3-phase
400 V AC
Specifications
7
7-41
Applicable
Inverter capacity
(kw)
A
C
D
E
H
H1
X
Y
Weight
(kg)
3G3AX-AL2025
0.2 to 1.5
130
82
60
40
150
92
50
67
2.8
3G3AX-AL2055
2.2, 3.7
140
98
60
40
150
92
50
75
4.0
3G3AX-AL2110
5.5, 7.5
160
103
70
55
170
106
60
80
5.0
3G3AX-AL2220
11, 15
180
113
75
55
190
138
90
90
10.0
3G3AX-AL2330
18.5, 22
180
113
85
60
230
138
125
90
11.0
3G3AX-AL2500
30, 37
260
113
85
60
290
200
100
90
19.0
3G3AX-AL2750
45, 55
260
144
110
80
290
200
125
112
25.0
3G3AX-AL4025
0.4 to 1.5
130
82
60
40
150
92
50
67
2.7
3G3AX-AL4055
2.2, 3.7
130
98
60
40
150
92
50
75
4.0
3G3AX-AL4110
5.5, 7.5
160
116
75
55
170
106
60
98
6.0
3G3AX-AL4220
11, 15
180
103
75
55
190
138
100
80
10.0
3G3AX-AL4330
18.5, 22
180
123
85
60
230
138
100
100
11.5
3G3AX-AL4500
30, 37
260
113
85
60
290
200
100
90
19.0
3G3AX-AL4750
45, 55
260
146
110
80
290
205
125
112
25.0
Model
External dimensions (mm)
7-3 Options
Digital Operator (3G3AX-OP)
3G3AX-OP01
(7)
10
2.7
Data display
RUN command
LED indicator
Operation keys
FREQ adjuster
2-M3 depth 3.5
20.5
2-φ4
18
7
16.5
8.8
15.3
18
Specifications
Panel cut dimensions
External dimensions
Height (55 mm) × Width (70 mm) × Depth (10 mm)
7-42
Appendix
Appendix-1 Parameter List................................ App-1
Appendix-2 Product Life Curve......................... App-41
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output .......................... App-42
Appendix-1 Parameter List
AppAppendix
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Monitor Mode (d
)
•The default setting displays "d001" at power-on. To select the optional display, change the setting
in "b038".
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Normal b031 = 10
d001
Output frequency
monitor
0.0 to 400.0
⎯
Yes
⎯
Hz
4-1
d002
Output current
monitor
0.0 to 999.9
1000 to 9999
⎯
⎯
⎯
A
4-1
d003
Rotation direction
monitor
F: Forward
o: Stop
r: Reverse
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-1
d004
PID feedback value
monitor
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
(Enabled when the PID function is selected)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-1
d005
Multi-function input
monitor
(Example) Terminals FW, S7, S2, S1 : ON
Terminals S8, S6, S5, S4, S3: OFF
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-2
(Example) Terminals P2, P1
: ON
Terminals MA, P5, P4, P3: OFF
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-2
d007
Output frequency
monitor
(after conversion)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 3996 (10000 to 39960)
(Output frequency × Conversion factor of b086)
⎯
Yes
⎯
⎯
4-2
d008
Real frequency
monitor
-400. to -100.
-99.9 to 0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
Hz
4-3
d009
Torque reference
monitor
-200. to +200.
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-3
d010
Torque bias
monitor
-200. to +200.
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-3
d012
Output torque
monitor
-200. to +200.
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-3
d013
Output voltage
monitor
0. to 600.
⎯
⎯
⎯
V
4-4
FW
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
d006
Multi-function
output monitor
MA P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
App-1
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
d014
Input power
monitor
0.0 to 999.9
⎯
⎯
⎯
kW
4-4
d015
Integrated power
monitor
0.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-4
d016
Total RUN time
0. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
⎯
⎯
⎯
h
4-4
d017
Power ON time
monitor
0. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
⎡100 to ⎡999 (100000 to 999000)
⎯
⎯
⎯
h
4-5
d018
Fin temperature
monitor
-020. to 200.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
°C
4-5
d019
Motor temperature
monitor
-020. to 200.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
°C
4-5
d022
Life assessment
monitor
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-5
ON
1: Capacitor on the main circuit board
OFF 2: Cooling fan rotation speed reduced
2
1
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d024
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d025
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d026
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d027
Not used
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
d028
Pulse counter
monitor
0 to 2147483647 (Displays MSB 4 digits)
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-5
d029
Position command
monitor
-1073741823 to 1073741823
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-6
d030
Current position
monitor
-1073741823 to 1073741823
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-6
4-132
d080
Fault frequency
monitor
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
⎯
⎯
⎯
Time
4-6
d081
Fault monitor 1
(Latest)
d082
Fault monitor 2
d083
Fault monitor 3
d084
Fault monitor 4
d085
Fault monitor 5
d086
Fault monitor 6
d090
Warning monitor
d102
DC voltage monitor 0.0 to 999.9
4-6
Error code (condition of occurrence)
→Output frequency [Hz] → Output current [A]
→Internal DC voltage [V]
→RUN time [h]
→ON time [h]
4-6
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
Warning code
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
4-7
⎯
⎯
⎯
V
4-7
App-2
Appendix
d023
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
d103
Regenerative
braking load rate
monitor
0.0 to 100.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-7
d104
Electronic thermal
monitor
0.0 to 100.0
⎯
⎯
⎯
%
4-7
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Basic Function Mode (F
Parameter
No.
Function name
)
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Appendix
Normal b031 = 10
F001
Output frequency
setting/monitor
F002
F202
0.0/Starting frequency to 1st/2nd/3rd max.
frequency
0.0 to 100.0 (PID control enabled)
⎯
Yes
Yes
Hz
4-8
0.01 to 99.99
Acceleration time 1 100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
* 2nd acceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F302
* 3rd acceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F003
0.01 to 99.99
Deceleration time 1 100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F203
* 2nd deceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F303
* 3rd deceleration
time 1
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
30.00
Yes
Yes
s
4-8
F004
Operator rotation
direction selection
00: (Forward)
01: (Reverse)
00
No
No
⎯
4-10
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-3
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Extended Function Mode
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Basic setting
A001
00: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
(Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
01: Terminal
02: Digital Operator (F001)
Frequency reference 03: ModBus communication
selection
04: Option 1
05: Option 2
06: Pulse train frequency
07: Not used
10: Operation function result
02
No
No
⎯
4-10
4-138
02
No
No
⎯
4-11
60.
RUN command
selection
A003
Base frequency
30. to Maximum frequency [A004]
A203
* 2nd base frequency 30. to 2nd maximum frequency [A204]
60.
A303
* 3rd base frequency 30. to 3rd maximum frequency [A304]
60.
A004
Maximum frequency
30. to 400.
60.
A204
* 2nd maximum
frequency
30. to 400.
60.
A304
* 3rd maximum
frequency
30. to 400.
60.
4-11
4-109
No
No
Hz
4-11
No
No
Hz
4-12
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-4
Appendix
A002
01: Terminal
02: Digital Operator (F001)
03: ModBus communication
04: Option 1
05: Option 2
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
FV/FI selection
00: Switches between FV/FI via terminal AT
01: Switches between FV/FE via terminal AT
02: Switches between FV/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used)
03: Switches between FI/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used)
04: Switches between FE/FREQ adjuster via
terminal AT
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is
used)
00
No
No
⎯
4-12
A006
FE selection
00: FE only
01: FV/FI auxiliary frequency reference
(not reversible)
02: FV/FI auxiliary frequency reference
(reversible)
03: FE disabled
03
No
No
⎯
4-13
A011
FV start frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A012
FV end frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A013
FV start ratio
0. to FV end ratio
0.
No
Yes
%
A014
FV end ratio
FV start ratio to 100.
100.
No
Yes
%
A015
FV start selection
00: External start frequency
(A011 set value)
01: 0 Hz
01
No
Yes
⎯
A016
FV, FE, FI sampling
1. to 30.
31. (with 500 ms filter ± 0.1 Hz hysteresis)
31.
No
Yes
⎯
4-16
A017
Not used
Use "00".
* Do not change.
00
No
No
⎯
⎯
Appendix
Analog input, Others
A005
4-14
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-5
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-16
Multi-step speed, Jogging
Normal b031 = 10
Multi-step speed
selection
00: Binary: 16-step selection with 4 terminals
01: Bit: 8-step selection with 7 terminals
00
No
No
⎯
A020
Multi-step speed
reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A220
* 2nd multi-step
speed reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd Max.
frequency
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A320
* 3rd multi-step
speed reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to 3rd Max. frequency
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A021
Multi-step speed
reference 1
0.00
A022
Multi-step speed
reference 2
0.00
A023
Multi-step speed
reference 3
0.00
A024
Multi-step speed
reference 4
0.00
A025
Multi-step speed
reference 5
0.00
A026
Multi-step speed
reference 6
0.00
A027
Multi-step speed
reference 7
0.00
A028
Multi-step speed
reference 8
Yes
Yes
Hz
A029
Multi-step speed
reference 9
0.00
A030
Multi-step speed
reference 10
0.00
A031
Multi-step speed
reference 11
0.00
A032
Multi-step speed
reference 12
0.00
A033
Multi-step speed
reference 13
0.00
A034
Multi-step speed
reference 14
0.00
A035
Multi-step speed
reference 15
0.00
0.0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
0.00
4-8
4-16
4-16
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-6
Appendix
A019
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Multi-step speed, Jogging
A038
Jogging frequency
0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99
6.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
A039
Jogging stop
selection
00: Free running on jogging stop/
Disabled in operation
01: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/
Disabled in operation
02: DC injection braking on jogging stop/
Disabled in operation
03: Free running on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
04: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
05: DC injection braking on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
00
No
Yes
⎯
A041
Torque boost
selection
No
No
⎯
Yes
Yes
%
4-18
00
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
A241
* 2nd torque boost
selection
A042
Manual torque boost
voltage
A242
* 2nd manual torque
boost voltage
A342
* 3rd manual torque
boost voltage
1.0
A043
Manual torque boost
frequency
5.0
A243
* 2nd manual torque
boost frequency
A343
* 3rd manual torque
boost frequency
00
1.0
0.0 to 20.0
1.0
V/f characteristics
Appendix
4-19
0.0 to 50.0
5.0
Yes
%
No
No
⎯
4-21
Yes
Yes
%
4-24
5.0
V/f characteristics
selection
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(special VP)
02: Free V/f characteristics
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV)
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector control
05: Sensor vector control (V2)
A244
* 2nd V/f
characteristics
selection
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(special VP)
02: Free V/f characteristics
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV)
04: 0-Hz sensorless vector control
00
A344
* 3rd V/f
characteristics
selection
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Special reduced torque characteristics
(special VP)
00
A045
Output voltage gain
20. to 100.
100.
A044
Yes
00
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-7
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
A046
Automatic torque
boost voltage
compensation gain
A246
* 2nd automatic
torque boost voltage
compensation gain
A047
Automatic torque
boost slip
compensation gain
A247
* 2nd automatic
torque boost slip
compensation gain
0. to 255.
100.
A051
DC injection braking
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Frequency control [A052 set value]
A052
DC injection braking
frequency
A053
DC injection braking
delay time
A054
DC injection braking
power
0. to 255.
100.
Upper/Lower limiter, Jump
0. to 255.
Yes
⎯
100.
4-20
0. to 255.
100.
Yes
Yes
⎯
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-24
4-109
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.50
No
Yes
Hz
4-24
0.0 to 5.0
0.0
No
Yes
s
0. to 100. (0.4 to 55 kW)
50.
No
Yes
%
0. to 80. (75 to 132 kW)
40.
No
Yes
%
A055
DC injection braking
time
0.0 to 60.0
0.5
No
Yes
s
A056
DC injection braking
method selection
00: Edge operation
01: Level operation
01
No
Yes
⎯
A057
Startup DC injection
braking power
0. to 100. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 80. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
No
Yes
%
A058
Startup DC injection
braking time
0.0 to 60.0
0.0
No
Yes
s
DC injection braking
carrier frequency
0.5 to 15.0 (0.4 to 55 kW)
5.0
No
No
kHz
A059
0.5 to 10.0 (75 to 132 kW)
3.0
No
No
kHz
A061
Frequency upper
limit
0.00/Frequency lower limit to Max.
frequency
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A261
* 2nd frequency
upper limit
0.00/2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max.
frequency
0.00
A062
Frequency lower limit
0.00/Starting frequency to Frequency upper
limit
0.00
A262
* 2nd frequency
lower limit
0.00/Starting frequency to 2nd frequency
upper limit
0.00
4-24
4-28
No
Yes
Hz
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-8
Appendix
DC injection braking
V/f characteristics
Yes
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
PID control
PID control
A063
Jump frequency 1
0.00
A064
Jump frequency
width 1
0.50
A065
Jump frequency 2
0.00
Jump frequency: 0.0 to 400.0
Jump frequency width: 0.0 to 10.0
No
Yes
Hz
A066
Jump frequency
width 2
A067
Jump frequency 3
0.00
A068
Jump frequency
width 3
0.50
A069
Acceleration stop
frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A070
Acceleration stop
time
0.0 to 60.0
0.0
No
Yes
s
A071
PID selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
A072
PID P gain
0.2 to 5.0
1.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
A073
PID I gain
0.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
1.0
Yes
Yes
s
A074
PID D gain
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.00
Yes
Yes
s
A075
PID scale
0.01 to 99.99
1.00
No
Yes
Time
A076
PID feedback
selection
00: FI
01: FV
02: RS485 communication
03: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
0.50
4-30
4-31
00
No
Yes
⎯
A077
00: OFF (Deviation = Target value Feedback value)
Reverse PID function
01: ON (Deviation = Feedback value - Target
value)
00
No
Yes
⎯
A078
PID output limit
function
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
No
Yes
%
A079
PID feedforward
selection
00: Disabled
01: FV
02: FI
03: FE
00
No
Yes
⎯
A081
AVR selection
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
02: OFF during deceleration
02
No
No
⎯
A082
AVR voltage
selection
200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
200/
400
AVR
Appendix
Upper/Lower limit, Jump
Normal b031 = 10
4-31
4-35
No
No
V
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-9
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
A085
00: Normal operation
RUN mode selection 01: Energy-saving operation
02: Automatic operation
A086
Energy-saving
response/accuracy
adjustment
A092
Acceleration time 2
15.00
A292
* 2nd acceleration
time 2
15.00
A392
* 3rd acceleration
time 2
A093
Deceleration time 2
A293
* 2nd deceleration
time 2
15.00
A393
* 3rd deceleration
time 2
15.00
A094
2-step acceleration/
deceleration
selection
A294
* 2nd 2-step
acceleration/
deceleration
selection
A095
2-step acceleration
frequency
0.00
A295
* 2nd 2-step
acceleration
frequency
0.00
A096
2-step deceleration
frequency
A296
* 2nd 2-step
deceleration
frequency
A097
Acceleration pattern
selection
A098
Deceleration pattern
selection
00
No
No
⎯
0.0 to 100.0
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
00: Switched via multi-function input 09
(2CH)
01: Switched by setting
02: Enabled only when switching forward/
reverse
50.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
s
No
No
⎯
No
No
Hz
No
No
Hz
No
No
⎯
15.00
15.00
00
4-37
00
Appendix
RUN mode, Acceleration/Deceleration functions
4-36
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
0.00
00: Line
01: S-shape curve
02: U-shape curve
03: Inverted U-shape curve
04: EL-S-shape curve
00
4-38
00
No
No
⎯
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-10
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Operation frequency
Appendix
Acceleration/Deceleration
External frequency adjustment
Normal b031 = 10
A101
FI start frequency
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
FI end frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
A102
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A103
FI start ratio
0. to FI end ratio
20.
No
Yes
%
A104
FI end ratio
FI start ratio to 100.
100.
No
Yes
%
A105
FI start selection
00: Use FI start frequency [A101]
01: 0 Hz
00
No
Yes
⎯
A111
FE start frequency
A112
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
FE end frequency
-400. to -100.
-99.9 to 0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A113
FE start ratio
-100. to FE end ratio
-100.
No
Yes
%
A114
FE end ratio
FE start ratio to 100.
100.
No
Yes
%
A131
Acceleration curve
parameter
02
No
Yes
⎯
A132
Deceleration curve
parameter
02
No
Yes
⎯
A141
Operation frequency
input A setting
02
No
Yes
⎯
A142
Operation frequency
input B setting
03
No
Yes
⎯
A143
Operator selection
00: Addition (A + B)
01: Subtraction (A - B)
02: Multiplication (A × B)
00
No
Yes
⎯
A145
Frequency addition
amount
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
A146
Frequency addition
direction
00: Add A145 value to output frequency
01: Subtract A145 value from output
frequency
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-15
01 (small curve) to 10 (large curve)
00: Digital Operator (F001)
01: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster)
(Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
02: Input FV
03: Input FI
04: RS485 communication
05: Option 1
06: Option 2
07: Pulse train frequency
4-14
4-39
4-41
4-41
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-11
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Acceleration/Deceleration
Normal b031 = 10
A150
EL-S-curve ratio 1
during acceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
A151
EL-S-curve ratio 2
during acceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
A152
EL-S-curve ratio 1
during deceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
A153
EL-S-curve ratio 2
during deceleration
0. to 50.
25.
No
No
%
Retry selection
00: Alarm
01: 0 Hz start
02: Frequency matching start
03: Trip after frequency matching
deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-39
4-42
b002
Allowable
momentary power
interruption time
0.3 to 25.0
1.0
No
Yes
s
b003
Retry wait time
0.3 to 100.0
1.0
No
Yes
s
b004
Momentary power
00: Disabled
interruption/
01: Enabled
undervoltage trip
02: Disabled during stop and deceleration
during stop selection
stop
00
No
Yes
⎯
b005
Momentary power
00: 16 times
interruption retry time
01: No limit
selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
b006
Input phase loss
protection selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-46
b007
Frequency matching
0.00 to 99.99
lower limit frequency
100.0 to 400.0
setting
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
4-42
4-68
4-85
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-42
00
No
Yes
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
4-85
4-42
b008
Trip retry selection
00: Trip
01: 0 Hz start
02: Frequency matching start
03: Trip after frequency matching
deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
b009
Undervoltage retry
time selection
00: 16 times
01: No limit
b010
Overvoltage/
overcurrent retry time 1 to 3
selection
3
No
Yes
Time
b011
Trip retry wait time
1.0
No
Yes
s
0.3 to 100.0
4-43
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-12
Appendix
Momentary power interruption/Trip restart
b001
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Electronic Thermal
Normal b031 = 10
b012
Electronic thermal
level
b212
* 2nd electronic
thermal level
b312
* 3rd electronic
thermal level
b013
Electronic thermal
characteristics
selection
b213
* 2nd electronic
thermal
characteristics
selection
b313
* 3rd electronic
thermal
characteristics
selection
b015
Free setting,
electronic thermal
frequency 1
b017
Free setting,
electronic thermal
frequency 2
b019
Free setting,
electronic thermal
frequency 3
b016
Free setting,
electronic thermal
current 1
b018
Free setting,
electronic thermal
current 2
b020
Free setting,
electronic thermal
current 3
0.20 × Rated current to 1.00 × Rated current
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
4-46
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
00
No
Yes
⎯
0. to 400.
0.
No
Yes
Hz
4-47
0.0 to Rated current
0.0
No
Yes
A
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-13
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
Overload limit
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation (Accelerates during
regeneration)
01
No
Yes
⎯
b022
Overload limit level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
1.50
×
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
b023
Overload limit
parameter
0.10 to 30.00
1.00
No
Yes
s
b024
Overload limit
selection 2
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed
operation (Accelerates during
regeneration)
01
No
Yes
⎯
b025
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
Overload limit level 2
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
1.50
×
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
b026
Overload limit
parameter 2
0.10 to 30.00
1.00
No
Yes
s
b027
Overcurrent
00: Disabled
suppression function 01: Enabled
01
No
Yes
⎯
b028
Frequency pull-in
restart level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
No
Yes
A
b029
Frequency pull-in
restart parameter
0.10 to 30.00
0.50
No
Yes
s
b030
Starting frequency at 00: Frequency at interruption
frequency pull-in
01: Max. frequency
02: Set frequency
restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-49
4-51
4-43
4-69
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-14
Appendix
Overload limit, Overcurrent Protection
b021
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Others
Lock
Normal b031 = 10
00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed
when terminal SFT is ON.
01: Data other than b031 and the specified
frequency parameter cannot be changed
when terminal SFT is ON.
02: Data other than b031 cannot be
changed.
03: Data other than b031 and the specified
frequency parameter cannot be
changed.
10: Data can be changed during RUN.
01
No
Yes
⎯
4-51
0.
No
Yes
h
4-52
00: Forward and Reverse are enabled
01: Only Forward is enabled.
02: Only Reverse is enabled.
00
No
No
⎯
4-52
Reduced voltage
startup selection
0 (Reduced voltage startup time: small) to
255 (Reduced voltage startup time: large)
6
No
Yes
⎯
4-53
Display selection
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
02: User setting
03: Data comparison display
04: Basic display
04
No
Yes
⎯
4-53
b038
Initial screen
selection
00: Screen when the Enter key was pressed
last
01: d001
02: d002
03: d003
04: d007
05: F001
01
No
Yes
⎯
4-56
b039
User parameter
automatic setting
function selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-57
b031
Soft lock selection
b034
RUN time/Power ON 0. to 9999. (0 to 99990)
time setting
1000 to 6553 (100000 to 655300)
b035
Rotation direction
limit selection
b036
b037
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-15
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Torque limit
Normal b031 = 10
b040
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switch
Torque limit selection 02: Analog input
03: Option 1
04: Option 2
00
No
Yes
-⎯
4-57
4-59
b041
Torque limit 1
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
forward power
no (Torque limit disabled)
running)
150.
No
Yes
%
4-57
4-59
b042
Torque limit 2
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
reverse
no (Torque limit disabled)
regeneration)
150.
No
Yes
%
b043
Torque limit 3
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
reverse power
no (Torque limit disabled)
running)
150.
No
Yes
%
b044
Torque limit 4
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
(Four-quadrant mode
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
forward
no (Torque limit disabled)
regeneration)
150.
No
Yes
%
b045
Torque LADSTOP
selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
4-57
4-59
4-59
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
Appendix
App-16
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-59
Appendix
Others
Normal b031 = 10
b046
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
b050
Selection of non-stop
function at
momentary power
interruption
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (deceleration stop)
02: Enabled (without recovery)
03: Enabled (with recovery)
00
No
No
⎯
b051
Starting voltage of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
220/
440
No
No
V
b052
Stop deceleration
level of non-stop
function at
momentary power
interruption
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
360/
720
No
No
V
b053
Deceleration time of
non-stop function at
momentary power
interruption
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
1.00
No
No
s
b054
Deceleration starting
width of non-stop
function at
0.00 to 10.00
momentary power
interruption
0.00
No
No
Hz
b055
Proportional gain
setting of non-stop
function at
momentary power
interruption
0.20
Yes
Yes
⎯
b056
Integral time setting
of non-stop function
0.000 to 9.999/10.00 to 65.53
at momentary power
interruption
0.100
Yes
Yes
s
4-60
0.00 to 2.55
4-60
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-17
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Others
Normal b031 = 10
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100.
Yes
Yes
%
b061
Window comparator
FV lower limit level
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b062
Window comparator
FV hysteresis width
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b063
Window comparator
FI upper limit level
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100.
Yes
Yes
%
b064
Window comparator
FI lower limit level
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b065
Window comparator
FI hysteresis width
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b066
Window comparator
FE upper limit level
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width × 2
100.
Yes
Yes
%
b067
Window comparator
FE lower limit level
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: -100 to 100
Upper limit: Upper limit level - Hysteresis
width × 2
-100.
Yes
Yes
%
b068
Window comparator
FE hysteresis width
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0 to 10
Upper limit: (Upper limit level - Lower limit
level) × 2
0.
Yes
Yes
%
b070
Analog operation
level at FV
disconnection
0. to 100./no (ignored)
no
No
Yes
⎯
b071
Analog operation
level at FI
disconnection
0. to 100./no (ignored)
no
No
Yes
⎯
b072
Analog operation
level at FE
disconnection
-100. to 100./no (ignored)
no
No
Yes
⎯
4-63
Appendix
b060
Window comparator
FV upper limit level
4-63
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-18
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
b078
Integrated power
clear
Cleared with the Enter key after changing to
01
b079
Integrated power
display gain
1. to 1000.
1.
Yes
Yes
⎯
b082
Starting frequency
0.10 to 9.99
0.50
No
Yes
Hz
0.5 to 15.0 (0.4 to 55 kW)
*Derating enabled
5.0
No
No
kHz
0.5 to 10.0 (75 to 132 kW)
*Derating enabled
3.0
No
No
kHz
00: Clears the trip monitor
01: Initializes data
Initialization selection
02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes
data
00
No
No
⎯
b085
Initialization
parameter selection
00
*Do not change.
00
No
No
⎯
b086
Frequency
conversion
coefficient
0.1 to 99.0
1.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-2
b087
STOP key selection
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
02: Disabled only during stop
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-68
b088
Free-run stop
selection
00: 0 Hz start
01: Frequency matching start
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-69
b089
Automatic carrier
reduction
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
No
⎯
4-71
b090
Usage rate of
regenerative braking 0.0 to 100.0
function
0.0
No
Yes
%
4-72
b091
Stop selection
00: Deceleration → Stop
01: Free-run stop
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-68
b092
Cooling fan control
00: Always ON
01: ON during RUN
01
No
Yes
⎯
b095
Regenerative
braking function
operation selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Disabled during stop)
02: Enabled (Enabled during stop)
00
No
Yes
⎯
b096
Regenerative
braking function ON
level
330 to 380
660 to 760
360/
720
No
Yes
V
b098
Thermistor selection
00: Disabled
01: PTC enabled
02: NTC enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-4
b083
Appendix
Others
b084
b099
4-65
4-117
Carrier frequency
Thermistor error level 0. to 9999.
4-65
4-66
3000.
No
Yes
4-72
4-73
Ω
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-19
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Vf free setting
Normal b031 = 10
b100
Free V/f frequency 1
0. to Free V/f frequency 2
0.
No
No
Hz
b101
Free V/f voltage 1
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b102
Free V/f frequency 2
0. to Free V/f frequency 3
0.
No
No
Hz
b103
Free V/f voltage 2
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b104
Free V/f frequency 3
0. to Free V/f frequency 4
0.
No
No
Hz
b105
Free V/f voltage 3
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b106
Free V/f frequency 4
0. to Free V/f frequency 5
0.
No
No
Hz
b107
Free V/f voltage 4
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b108
Free V/f frequency 5
0. to Free V/f frequency 6
0.
No
No
Hz
b109
Free V/f voltage 5
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b110
Free V/f frequency 6
0. to Free V/f frequency 7
0.
No
No
Hz
b111
Free V/f voltage 6
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
b112
Free V/f frequency 7
0. to 400.
0.
No
No
Hz
b113
Free V/f voltage 7
0.0 to 800.0
0.0
No
No
V
4-23
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
Appendix
App-20
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Others
Normal b031 = 10
b120
Brake control
selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
b121
Brake wait time for
release
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b122
Brake wait time for
acceleration
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b123
Brake wait time for
stopping
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b124
Brake wait time for
confirmation
0.00 to 5.00
0.00
No
Yes
s
b125
Brake release
frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
b126
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
Brake release current
0.0 to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
No
Yes
⎯
b127
Brake input
frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
b130
Overvoltage
protection function
selection during
deceleration
00: Disabled
01: DC voltage kept constant
02: Acceleration enabled
00
No
Yes
⎯
b131
Overvoltage
protection level
during deceleration
200-V class: 330 to 390
400-V class: 660 to 780
380/
760
No
Yes
V
b132
Overvoltage
0.10 to 30.00
protection parameter
1.00
No
Yes
s
b133
Overvoltage
protection
proportional gain
setting
0.00 to 2.55
0.50
Yes
Yes
⎯
b134
Overvoltage
protection integral
time setting
0.000 to 9.999
10.000 to 65.53
0.060
Yes
Yes
s
4-75
4-76
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-21
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
⎯
4-77
C001
Multi-function input 1
selection *1
C002
Multi-function input 2
selection
C003
Multi-function input 3
selection *1
C004
Multi-function input 4
selection
C005
Multi-function input 5
selection
C006
Multi-function input 6
selection
C007
Multi-function input 7
selection
C008
Multi-function input 8
selection
01: RV (reverse)
02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1)
03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2)
04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3)
05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4)
06: JG (jogging)
07: DB (external DC injection braking)
08: SET (2nd control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (free-run stop)
12: EXT (external trip)
13: USP (USP function)
14: CS (commercial switch)
15: SFT (soft lock)
16: AT (analog input switching)
17: SET3 (3rd control)
18: RS (reset)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
23: PID (PID enabled/disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
26: CAS (control gain switching)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
31: OPE (forced operator)
32: SF1 (multi-step speed setting bit 1)
33: SF2 (multi-step speed setting bit 2)
34: SF3 (multi-step speed setting bit 3)
35: SF4 (multi-step speed setting bit 4)
36: SF5 (multi-step speed setting bit 5)
37: SF6 (multi-step speed setting bit 6)
38: SF7 (multi-step speed setting bit 7)
39: OLR (overload limit switching)
40: TL (torque limit enabled)
41: TRQ1 (torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (torque limit switching 2)
43: PPI (P/PI switching)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
45: ORT (orientation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
47: PCLR (position deviation clear)
48: STAT (pulse train position command input
permission)
50: ADD (frequency addition)
51: F-TM (forced terminal block)
52: ATR (torque command input permission)
53: KHC (integrated power clear)
54: SON (servo ON)
55: FOC (preliminary excitation)
56: Not used
57: Not used
58: Not used
59: Not used
60: Not used
61: Not used
62: Not used
63: Not used
65: AHD (analog command held)
66: CP1 (position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (position command selection 3)
69: ORL (zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (zero return startup signal)
71: FOT (forward driving stop)
72: ROT (reverse driving stop)
73: SPD (speed/position switching)
74: PCNT (pulse counter)
75: PCC (pulse counter clear)
no: NO (no allocation)
01 *1
18
12 *1
02
No
Yes
03
Appendix
Multi-function input terminals
Normal b031 = 10
04
05
06
*1. C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 (RS) and 64 (EMR), respectively, when the emergency shutoff
function is enabled (SW1 = ON). (64 cannot be set optionally.)
When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF, C003 has no allocations ("no").
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-22
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
⎯
4-79
Multi-function input terminals
Normal b031 = 10
C011
Multi-function input 1
operation selection
00
C012
Multi-function input 2
operation selection
00
C013
Multi-function input 3
operation selection
00
C014
Multi-function input 4
operation selection
00
C015
Multi-function input 5
operation selection
C016
Multi-function input 6
operation selection
00
C017
Multi-function input 7
operation selection
00
C018
Multi-function input 8
operation selection
00
C019
FW terminal
operation selection
00
00: NO
01: NC
00
No
Yes
Appendix
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-23
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
⎯
4-92
Multi-function output terminal
Normal b031 = 10
C021
Multi-function output
terminal
P1 selection
C022
Multi-function output
terminal P2 selection
C023
Multi-function output
terminal P3 selection
Multi-function output
terminal P4 selection
C025
Multi-function output
terminal P5 selection
C026
Relay output (MA,
MB) function
selection
00
01
03
No
Yes
07
Appendix
C024
00: RUN (signal during RUN)
01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal)
02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal)
03: OL (overload warning)
04: OD (excessive PID deviation)
05: AL (alarm output)
06: FA3 (set-frequency-only arrival signal)
07: OTQ (overtorque)
08: IP (signal during momentary power interruption)
09: UV (signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (torque limit)
11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power ON time over)
13: THM (thermal warning)
19: BRK (brake release)
20: BER (brake error)
21: ZS (0 Hz signal)
22: DSE (excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (position ready)
24: FA4 (set frequency exceeded 2)
25: FA5 (set frequency only 2)
26: OL2 (overload warning 2)
27: FVDc (analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIDc (analog FI disconnection detection)
29: FEDc (analog FE disconnection detection)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
32: NDc (network error)
33: LOG1 (logic operation output 1)
34: LOG2 (logic operation output 2)
35: LOG3 (logic operation output 3)
36: LOG4 (logic operation output 4)
37: LOG5 (logic operation output 5)
38: LOG6 (logic operation output 6)
39: WAC (capacitor life warning signal)
40: WAF (cooling fan life warning signal)
41: FR (starting contact signal)
42: OHF (fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (light load detection signal)
44: Not used
45: Not used
46: Not used
47: Not used
48: Not used
49: Not used
50: IRDY (operation ready signal)
51: FWR (forward run signal)
52: RVR (reverse run signal)
53: MJA (fatal fault signal)
54: WCFV (window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (window comparator FI)
56: WCFE (window comparator FE)
(When C062 is used to select the alarm code
output, the multi-function output terminals P1 to
P3, or P1 to P4 are forcibly changed to AC0 to
AC2 or AC0 to AC3 [Acn 'Alarm code output'],
respectively.)
40
05
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-24
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-106
4-116
Normal b031 = 10
Appendix
Analog monitor
C027
C028
MP selection
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input voltage
06: Thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
09: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
12: Not used
00
No
Yes
⎯
AM selection
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
04: Output voltage
05: Input voltage
06: Thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
09: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
11: Output torque <signed>
13: Not used
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-107
4-116
C029
AMI selection
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
04: Output voltage
05: Input voltage
06: Thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
09: Motor temperature
10: Fin temperature
14: Not used
00
No
Yes
⎯
C030
Digital current
monitor reference
value
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
Rated
(Current value at the digital current monitor
current
output 1440 Hz)
Yes
Yes
A
4-106
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-25
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-93
C031
Multi-function output
terminal P1 contact
selection
C032
Multi-function output
terminal P2 contact
selection
C033
Multi-function output
terminal P3 contact
selection
C034
Multi-function output
terminal P4 contact
selection
C035
Multi-function output
terminal P5 contact
selection
C036
Relay output (MA,
MB) contact selection
C038
Light load signal
output mode
00
00: NO contact at MA; NC contact at MB
01: NC contact at MA; NO contact at MB
No
Yes
⎯
No
Yes
⎯
01
00: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
01
4-103
C039
Light load detection
level
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.0 to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
Yes
Yes
A
C040
Overload warning
signal output mode
00: Enabled during acceleration/
deceleration/constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
01
No
Yes
⎯
C041
Overload warning
level
0.0: Does not operate.
0.1 × Rated current to 2.00 × Rated current
(0.4 to 55 kW)
0.1 × Rated current to 1.80 × Rated current
(75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
Yes
Yes
A
C042
Arrival frequency
during acceleration
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C043
Arrival frequency
during deceleration
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C044
PID deviation
excessive level
0.0 to 100.0
3.0
No
Yes
%
C045
Arrival frequency
0.00 to 99.99
during acceleration 2 100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C046
Arrival frequency
0.00 to 99.99
during deceleration 2 100.0 to 400.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
C052
PID FB upper limit
0.0 to 100.0
100.0
No
Yes
%
C053
PID FB lower limit
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
No
Yes
%
4-49
4-95
4-31
4-95
4-31
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-26
Appendix
Level and output terminal status
Multi-function output terminal
Normal b031 = 10
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Level and output terminal status
Normal b031 = 10
C055
Overtorque level
(Forward power
running)
C056
Overtorque level
(Reverse
regeneration)
100.
No
Yes
%
100.
No
Yes
%
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
C057
Overtorque level
(Reverse power
running)
C058
Overtorque level
(Forward
regeneration)
C061
Thermal warning
level
C062
C063
0 Hz detection level
C064
Fin overheat warning
0. to 200.
level
4-97
100.
No
Yes
%
100.
No
Yes
%
80.
No
Yes
%
4-47
00: Disabled
Alarm code selection 01: 3-bit
02: 4-bit
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-98
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.00
No
Yes
Hz
4-98
120.
No
Yes
°C
4-102
0. to 100.
Appendix
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-27
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Communication function
Normal b031 = 10
C071
02: Loop-back test
Communication
03: 2400 bps
speed selection
04: 4800 bps
(Baud rate selection) 05: 9600 bps
06: 19200 bps
04
No
Yes
⎯
C072
Communication
station No. selection
1. to 32.
1.
No
Yes
⎯
C073
Communication bit
length selection
7: 7-bit
8: 8-bit
7
No
Yes
⎯
C074
Communication
parity selection
00: No parity
01: Even
02: Odd
00
No
Yes
⎯
C075
Communication stop 1: 1-bit
bit selection
2: 2-bit
1
No
Yes
⎯
C076
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
Communication error
02: Ignore
selection
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
02
No
Yes
⎯
C077
Communication error
0.00 to 99.99
timeout
0.00
No
Yes
s
C078
Communication wait
time
0. to 1000.
0.
No
Yes
ms
C079
Communication
method selection
00: ASCII
01: ModBus-RTU
4-141
4-101
4-141
4-141
Yes
⎯
FV adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
⎯
FI adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
⎯
C083
FE adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
⎯
C085
Thermistor
adjustment
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
4-73
C091
Not used
Use "00".
* Do not change.
No
⎯
⎯
C081
Adjustment
C082
00
No
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-28
Appendix
No
01
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
UP/DWN selection
00: Do not store the frequency data
01: Store the frequency data
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-88
C102
Reset selection
00: Trip reset at power-on
01: Trip reset when the power is OFF
02: Enabled only during trip (Reset when the
power is ON)
03: Trip reset only
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-85
4-132
C103
Reset frequency
matching selection
00: 0 Hz start
01: Frequency matching start
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-85
C105
MP gain setting
50. to 200.
100.
Yes
Yes
%
4-107
C106
AM gain setting
50. to 200.
100.
Yes
Yes
%
C107
AMI gain setting
50. to 200.
100.
Yes
Yes
%
C109
AM bias setting
0. to 100.
0.
Yes
Yes
%
C110
AMI bias setting
0. to 100.
20.
Yes
Yes
%
C111
Overload warning
level 2
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current (0.4 to 55 kW)
0.0 to 1.80 × Rated current (75 to 132 kW)
Rated
current
Yes
Yes
A
FV zero adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
FI zero adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
FE zero adjustment
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530)
Factor
y
Yes
defaul
t
Yes
⎯
Terminal
Meter adjustment
Others
C101
4-108
Adjustment
Appendix
C121
C122
C123
4-49
⎯
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-29
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
C130
Output P1 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C131
Output P1 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C132
Output P2 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C133
Output P2 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C134
Output P3 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C135
Output P3 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C136
Output P4 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C137
Output P4 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C138
Output P5 ON delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C139
Output P5 OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C140
Relay output ON delay 0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C141
Relay output OFF
delay
0.0 to 100.0
0.0
C142
Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C143
Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C144
00: AND
Logic output signal 1
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C145
Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C146
Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C147
00: AND
Logic output signal 2
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C148
Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C149
Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C150
00: AND
Logic output signal 3
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C151
Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
No
Yes
s
4-105
No
Yes
⎯
4-99
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-30
Appendix
Output terminal operation function
Normal b031 = 10
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Input terminal response
Others
Appendix
Output terminal operation function
Normal b031 = 10
C152
Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C153
00: AND
Logic output signal 4
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C154
Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C155
Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C156
00: AND
Logic output signal 5
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C157
Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 1
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C158
Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026
selection 2
(excluding LOG1 to LOG6)
00
C159
00: AND
Logic output signal 6
01: OR
operator selection
02: XOR
00
C160
Input terminal
response time 1
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C161
Input terminal
response time 2
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C162
Input terminal
response time 3
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C163
Input terminal
response time 4
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C164
Input terminal
response time 5
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C165
Input terminal
response time 6
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C166
Input terminal
response time 7
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C167
Input terminal
response time 8
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
1
C168
FW terminal response
0. to 200. (× 2 ms)
time
1
C169
Multi-step speed/
position
determination time
0
0. to 200. (× 10 ms)
No
Yes
⎯
4-99
No
Yes
ms
4-105
No
Yes
ms
4-16
4-132
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-31
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Control parameter
Normal b031 = 10
H001
00: Disabled
Auto-tuning selection 01: Not rotate
02: Rotate
00
H002
Motor parameter
selection
00
00: Standard motor parameter
01: Auto-tuning parameter
02: Auto-tuning parameter
(online auto-tuning enabled)
H202
* 2nd motor
parameter selection
H003
Motor capacity
selection
H203
* 2nd motor capacity
selection
Factory
default
H004
Motor pole number
selection
4
H204
* 2nd motor pole
number selection
H005
Speed response
⎯
4-109
No
No
⎯
4-109
4-111
4-112
No
No
kW
Factory
default
2/4/6/8/10
H205
No
00
0.20 to 160.0
* 2nd speed
response
No
4-19
4-109
4-112
4-116
No
No
Pole
Yes
Yes
⎯
4
1.590
0.001 to 9.999/10.00 to 80.00
(10.000 to 80.000)
1.590
4-87
4-89
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
Appendix
App-32
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
4-117
Normal b031 = 10
H006
Stabilization
parameter
H206
* 2nd stabilization
parameter
H306
* 3rd stabilization
parameter
100.
Motor parameter R1
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H020
100.
0. to 255.
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
H220
H021
* 2nd motor
parameter R1
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter R2
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Control parameter
Appendix
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
H221
H022
* 2nd motor
parameter R2
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter L
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H222
H023
* 2nd motor
parameter L
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter Io
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H223
100.
* 2nd motor
parameter Io
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Motor parameter J
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
Ω
No
No
Ω
No
No
mH
No
No
A
4-112
4-112
H024
H224
* 2nd motor
parameter J
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
No
No
kgm2
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-33
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
H030
Motor parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
H230
* 2nd motor
parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H031
Motor parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
Control parameter
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H231
* 2nd motor
parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H032
Motor parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H033
Motor parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
H233
* 2nd motor
parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H034
Motor parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
H234
* 2nd motor
parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
No
Ω
No
No
Ω
No
No
mH
No
No
A
No
No
kgm2
4-109
4-112
Appendix
H232
* 2nd motor
parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
No
Depends
on the
motor
capacity.
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-34
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Control parameter
Normal b031 = 10
H050
PI proportional gain
100.0
H250
0.0 to 999.9
* 2nd PI proportional 1000.
gain
100.0
H051
PI integral gain
100.0
H251
*2nd PI integral gain
H052
P proportional gain
H252
*2nd P proportional
gain
H060
Limit at 0 Hz
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
%
100.0
4-87
4-89
1.00
0.01 to 10.00
1.00
100.0
0.0 to 100.0
H260
* 2nd limit at 0 Hz
100.0
H061
Boost amount at SLV
startup, 0 Hz
50.
H261
* 2nd boost amount
at SLV startup, 0 Hz
H070
For PI proportional
gain switching
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
H071
For PI integral gain
switching
H072
H073
0. to 50.
4-114
Yes
Yes
%
100.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
100.0
Yes
Yes
⎯
For P proportional
gain switching
0.00 to 10.00
1.00
Yes
Yes
⎯
Gain switching time
0. to 9999.
100.
Yes
Yes
ms
50.
4-87
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-35
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
P001
Operation selection
at option 1 error
00: Trip
01: Continues operation
P002
Operation selection
at option 2 error
00: Trip
01: Continues operation
00
No
Yes
P011
Encoder pulses
128. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65535)
1024.
No
No
P012
V2 control mode
selection
00: ASR (speed control mode)
01: APR (pulse train position control mode)
02: APR2 (absolute position control mode)
03: HAPR (High resolution absolute position
control mode)
00
No
No
⎯
4-119
4-131
P013
Pulse train mode
selection
00: Mode 0
01: Mode 1
02: Mode 2
00
No
No
⎯
4-122
P014
Orientation stop
position
0. to 4095.
0.
No
Yes
⎯
P015
Orientation speed
setting
Starting frequency to Max. frequency (upper
limit: 120.0)
5.00
No
Yes
Hz
P016
Orientation direction
setting
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
00
No
No
⎯
00
No
Yes
⎯
Options
4-108
⎯
4-119
Pulse 4-128
4-129
4-129
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
Appendix
App-36
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Options
Normal b031 = 10
P017
Position ready range 0. to 9999.
setting
1000(10000)
5.
No
Yes
Pulse
4-122
4-129
P018
Position ready delay
time setting
0.00 to 9.99
0.00
No
Yes
s
4-122
4-129
P019
Electronic gear
setting position
selection
00: Position feedback side (FB)
01: Position command side (REF)
00
No
Yes
⎯
P020
Electronic gear ratio
numerator
0. to 9999.
1.
Yes
Yes
⎯
P021
Electronic gear ratio
denominator
0. to 9999.
1.
Yes
Yes
⎯
P022
Position control
feedforward gain
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
0.00
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-123
4-124
0.50
Yes
Yes
rad/s
4-119
4-123
4-124
4-129
4-131
Position bias amount -204(-2048.)/-999. to 2048.
0.
Yes
Yes
⎯
4-123
P025
Secondary resistance
00: Disabled
compensation enable/
01: Enabled
disable selection
00
No
Yes
⎯
4-111
P026
Overspeed error
detection level
135.0
No
Yes
%
5-6
P027
Speed deviation error 0.00 to 99.99
detection level
100.0 to 120.0
7.50
No
Yes
Hz
4-119
P028
Motor gear ratio
numerator
1.
No
Yes
⎯
P029
Motor gear ratio
denominator
1. to 9999.
1.
No
Yes
⎯
P031
Acceleration/
deceleration time
input type
00: Digital Operator
01: Option 1
02: Option 2
00
No
No
⎯
4-9
P032
Orientation stop
position input type
00: Digital Operator
01: Option 1
02: Option 2
00
No
Yes
⎯
⎯
P033
Torque reference
input selection
00: Terminal FV
01: Terminal FI
02: Terminal FE
03: Digital Operator
00
No
No
⎯
P034
Torque reference
setting
0. to 200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
0. to 180. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
Yes
Yes
%
P035
Polarity selection at
00: Signed
torque reference via FE 01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
No
No
⎯
P023
Position loop gain
P024
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.0 to 150.0
1. to 9999.
4-128
4-121
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-37
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Normal b031 = 10
P036
Torque bias mode
00: None
01: Digital Operator
02: Terminal FE
00
No
No
⎯
P037
Torque bias value
-200. to +200. (0.4 to 55 kW)
-180. to +180. (75 to 132 kW)
0.
Yes
Yes
%
P038
Torque bias polarity
selection
00: Signed
01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
No
No
⎯
P039
Speed limit value in
torque control
(forward)
0.00 to Maximum frequency
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P040
Speed limit value in
torque control
(reverse)
0.00 to Maximum frequency
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P044
Not used
Use "1.00".
*Do not change.
1.00
No
No
s
⎯
P045
Operation setting at
communications
error
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run
04: Deceleration stop
01
No
No
⎯
⎯
P046
Output assembly
instance No. setting
20
21
100
21
No
No
⎯
⎯
P047
Input assembly
instance No. setting
70
71
101
71
No
No
⎯
⎯
P048
Operation setting at
idle mode detection
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run
04: Deceleration stop
01
No
No
⎯
⎯
P049
Polarity setting for
rotation speed
0/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/22/24/26/28/30/
32/34/36/38
0
No
No
⎯
⎯
P055
Pulse train frequency
1.0 to 50.0
scale
25.0
No
Yes
kHz
P056
Pulse train frequency
0.01 to 2.00
filter time constant
0.10
No
Yes
s
P057
Pulse train frequency
-100. to +100.
bias amount
0.
No
Yes
%
P058
Pulse train frequency
0. to 100.
limit
100.
No
Yes
%
4-121
4-122
Options
4-121
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-38
Appendix
4-138
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Appendix
Absolute position control
Normal b031 = 10
P060
Multi-step position
command 0
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P061
Multi-step position
command 1
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P062
Multi-step position
command 2
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P063
Multi-step position
command 3
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
Multi-step position
command 4
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
Yes
P064
Yes
⎯
4-131
P065
Multi-step position
command 5
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P066
Multi-step position
command 6
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P067
Multi-step position
command 7
Position range specification (reverse side) to
Position range specification (forward
side)(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
0
P068
Zero return mode
00: Low
01: Hi1
02: Hi2
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
P069
Zero return direction
selection
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-39
Appendix-1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Function name
Monitor or data range
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
Unit
Page
Absolute position control
Normal b031 = 10
P070
Low-speed zero
return frequency
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P071
High-speed zero
return frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to Maximum frequency
0.00
Yes
Yes
Hz
P072
Position range
specification
(forward)
0 to 268435455 (at P012 = 02)
0 to 1073741823 (at P012 = 03)
(Displays MSB 4 digits)
268435455
Yes
Yes
⎯
P073
Position range
specification
(reverse)
-268435455 to 0 (at P012 = 02)
-1073741823 to 0 (at P012 = 03)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "-")
-268435455
Yes
Yes
⎯
Teaching selection
00: Multi-step position command 0 (P060)
01: Multi-step position command 1 (P061)
02: Multi-step position command 2 (P062)
03: Multi-step position command 3 (P063)
04: Multi-step position command 4 (P064)
05: Multi-step position command 5 (P065)
06: Multi-step position command 6 (P066)
07: Multi-step position command 7 (P067)
00
Yes
Yes
⎯
Not used
Do not use.
0.
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
U001
User 1 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U002
User 2 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U003
User 3 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U004
User 4 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U005
User 5 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U006
User 6 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
Yes
Yes
User 7 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
⎯
4-53
U007
U008
User 8 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U009
User 9 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U010
User 10 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U011
User 11 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
U012
User 12 selection
no/d001 to P074
no
P074
4-132
* 2nd/3rd control is displayed when "SET(08)/SET3(17)" is allocated to one of multi-function inputs from C001
to C008.
App-40
Appendix
User parameter
P100
to
P131
4-131
Appendix-2 Product Life Curve
Appendix-2 Product Life Curve
Ambient temperature (°C)
24-hour power supply/day
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Capacitor life (year)
Appendix
Note 1: Ambient temperature refers to the temperature measured at the location approximately 5 cm from
the bottom center of the Inverter. (atmospheric temperature)
It refers to the temperature inside if the Inverter is stored in an enclosure.
Note 2: The smoothing capacitor, which will deteriorate because of the chemical reaction caused by the
temperatures of the parts, should normally be replaced once every 10 years (which is the expected
design life, and not guaranteed).
However, if the ambient temperature is high, or the Inverter is used with a current exceeding the
rated current, for example, under overload conditions, its life will be significantly shortened.
App-41
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output
•When the product life becomes close to the end for the parts including the on-board smoothing
capacitor or cooling fan, but excluding the main circuit smoothing capacitor, an alarm can be output
through the self-diagnostic function. Use it as a reference of the parts replacement period.
For details, refer to "Life Assessment Monitor [d022]" (page 4-5), "Multi-function Pulse Counter (PCNT,
PCC)" (page 4-91), or "Multi-function Output Terminal Contact Selection" (page 4-93).
This alarm is output through the self-diagnosis based on the expected design life (not a guaranteed
value). Therefore, it has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions.
Appendix
App-42
Index
Index
Index
Numerics
0-Hz sensorless vector control .............................. 4-114
2-step acceleration/deceleration .............................. 4-37
3-wire input function ................................................ 4-86
A
acceleration stop ..................................................... 4-30
acceleration time 2 .................................................. 4-37
acceleration/deceleration pattern ............................ 4-38
acceleration/deceleration time ................................... 4-8
ADD ......................................................................... 4-41
AHD ......................................................................... 4-91
AL ............................................................................ 4-92
alarm code output .................................................... 4-98
allowable momentary power interruption time ......... 4-42
AM .................................................................. 2-8, 4-107
AMI ................................................................. 2-8, 4-107
analog command hold function ................................ 4-91
automatic energy-saving operation function ............ 4-36
automatic optimum acceleration/deceleration ......... 4-36
automatic torque boost ............................................ 4-21
B
base frequency ........................................................ 4-11
basic display ............................................................ 4-56
BER ......................................................................... 4-73
binary operation ....................................................... 4-17
bit operation ............................................................. 4-18
BOK ......................................................................... 4-73
brake control ............................................................ 4-73
BRK ......................................................................... 4-73
C
capacitor life warning ............................................. 4-100
carrier frequency ...................................................... 4-65
CAS ......................................................................... 4-87
commercial switching .............................................. 4-83
communication function ......................................... 4-139
constant torque characteristics (VC) ....................... 4-22
control circuit terminal ................................................ 2-7
control gain switching .............................................. 4-87
control method ......................................................... 4-21
cooling fan control ................................................... 4-72
cooling fan speed drop signal ................................ 4-101
current position monitor ............................................. 4-6
D
data comparison display ................................. 4-53, 4-55
Index-1
DC injection braking ................................................ 4-24
DC voltage monitor .................................................... 4-7
deceleration time 2 .................................................. 4-37
derating .................................................................... 4-65
digital operator .................................................. 2-24, 3-3
display selection ............................................. 3-10, 4-53
DWN ........................................................................ 4-88
E
electronic gear ....................................................... 4-124
electronic thermal monitor ......................................... 4-7
EMC .......................................................2-15, 2-16, 2-17
emergency shutoff ............................................ 2-9, 2-10
end frequency .......................................................... 4-14
end ratio ................................................................... 4-14
error code .................................................................. 5-1
excess speed ............................................................. 5-6
EXT .......................................................................... 4-82
extended function mode .......................................... 3-15
external analog input ............................................... 4-12
external DC injection braking ................................... 4-25
external thermistor ................................................... 4-73
external trip (EXT) ................................................... 4-82
F
F/R ........................................................................... 4-86
fatal fault signal ...................................................... 4-104
fault frequency monitor .............................................. 4-6
fault monitor ............................................................... 4-6
FBV .......................................................................... 4-34
FC ..................................................................... 2-7, 2-22
FE ..................................................................... 2-7, 2-22
feedback .................................................................. 4-32
feedback option ..................................................... 4-118
FI ...................................................................... 2-7, 2-22
fin overheat warning .............................................. 4-102
fin temperature monitor ............................................. 4-5
FOC ....................................................................... 4-116
forced operator ........................................................ 4-89
forced terminal ......................................................... 4-90
forward run signal .................................................. 4-104
FR .......................................................................... 4-102
free-run stop ............................................................ 4-68
free-run stop selection and stop selection ............... 4-68
frequency addition function ...................................... 4-41
frequency arrival signal ............................................ 4-95
frequency conversion coefficient ............................... 4-2
frequency jump ........................................................ 4-30
frequency limit ......................................................... 4-28
lower limit ......................................................... 4-28
upper limit ........................................................ 4-28
frequency matching ................................................. 4-68
Index
frequency pull-in restart .................................. 4-43, 4-45
frequency reference selection ................................. 4-10
FRS ......................................................................... 4-69
FS .............................................................................. 2-7
F-TM ........................................................................ 4-90
function mode ............................................................ 4-8
FV ..................................................................... 2-7, 2-22
FW ............................................................................. 2-9
FWR ...................................................................... 4-104
H
high-torque multi-operation .................................... 4-117
I
initial screen ............................................................. 4-56
initialization .............................................................. 4-66
input power monitor ................................................... 4-4
integrated power monitor ........................................... 4-4
internal DC injection braking ........................... 4-26, 4-27
IP .................................................................... 4-44, 4-45
J
JG ............................................................................ 4-18
jogging operation ..................................................... 4-18
K
KHC ........................................................................... 4-4
L
LAC ................................................................... 4-9, 4-40
LAD ................................................................... 4-9, 4-78
life assessment monitor .................................. 4-5, 4-100
light load detection signal ...................................... 4-103
LOC ....................................................................... 4-103
LOG1 to LOG6 ........................................................ 4-99
M
main circuit terminal .......................................... 2-7, 2-15
manual torque boost ................................................ 4-20
maximum frequency ................................................ 4-12
MJA ....................................................................... 4-104
momentary power interruption non-stop .................. 4-60
momentary power interruption/undervoltage trip during
stop selection .................................................. 4-42, 4-44
MP .................................................................. 2-8, 4-106
multi-function input monitor ....................................... 4-2
multi-function input terminal selection ..................... 4-77
multi-function output monitor ..................................... 4-2
multi-function output terminal .................................. 4-92
N
NDc ........................................................................ 4-101
no ............................................................................. 4-77
O
OD ........................................................................... 4-34
offline auto-tuning .................................................. 4-108
OHF ....................................................................... 4-102
OL, OL2 ................................................................... 4-50
OLR ......................................................................... 4-49
online auto-tuning .................................................. 4-111
ONT ......................................................................... 4-52
OPE ......................................................................... 4-89
operation frequency function ................................... 4-41
operation method ....................................................... 3-3
operation ready signal ........................................... 4-103
operation selection during option error .................. 4-108
option board protection function ................................ 5-6
orientation function ................................................ 4-129
OTQ ......................................................................... 4-97
output current monitor ............................................... 4-1
output frequency monitor .................................... 4-1, 4-2
output frequency setting/monitor ............................... 4-8
output signal delay/hold ......................................... 4-105
output signal logic operation .................................... 4-99
output torque monitor ................................................ 4-3
output voltage gain .................................................. 4-24
output voltage monitor ............................................... 4-4
overcurrent suppression .......................................... 4-51
overload limit ........................................................... 4-49
overload warning ..................................................... 4-49
overtorque ............................................................... 4-97
overvoltage protection function during deceleration 4-76
P
P/PI switching .......................................................... 4-89
P24 ............................................................................ 2-8
phase loss protection ............................................... 4-46
PID ........................................................................... 4-31
PID feedback value monitor ...................................... 4-1
PIDC ........................................................................ 4-35
power ON time ........................................................... 4-5
power recovery restart prevention ........................... 4-82
PPI ........................................................................... 4-89
preliminary excitation ............................................. 4-116
pulse train frequency input .................................... 4-138
R
real frequency monitor ............................................... 4-3
Index-2
Index
reduced voltage startup ........................................... 4-53
relay output terminals .............................................. 4-94
reset .................................................................. 3-9, 4-85
retry selection .......................................................... 4-42
reverse rotation prevention ...................................... 4-59
reverse run signal .................................................. 4-104
RNT ......................................................................... 4-52
rotation direction limit selection ............................... 4-52
rotation direction selection ....................................... 4-10
RS ............................................................................ 2-10
RUN ......................................................................... 4-95
RUN command selection ......................................... 4-11
RUN direction monitor ............................................... 4-1
RUN direction selection ........................................... 4-10
RV ................................................................... 2-12, 4-77
RVR ....................................................................... 4-104
S
total RUN time ........................................................... 4-4
trip monitor display ............................................. 4-6, 5-9
trip retry ................................................................... 4-42
TRQ ......................................................................... 4-92
TRQ1, TRQ2 ........................................................... 4-58
U
UDC ......................................................................... 4-88
UP ............................................................................ 4-88
UP/DOWN function .................................................. 4-88
user parameter ........................................................ 4-57
user selection .......................................................... 4-53
USP ......................................................................... 4-82
UV ................................................................... 4-45, 4-92
V
V2 .......................................................................... 4-119
SC ..................................................................... 2-8, 2-22
secondary resistance compensation ..................... 4-111
sensor vector control ............................................. 4-120
sensorless vector control ....................................... 4-113
servo ON ............................................................... 4-137
SF1 to SF7 .............................................................. 4-18
signal during RUN ................................................... 4-95
sink logic .................................................................. 2-23
slide switch .............................................................. 2-11
soft lock ................................................................... 4-51
SON ....................................................................... 4-137
source logic ............................................................. 2-23
special reduced torque characteristics .................... 4-22
STA .......................................................................... 4-86
stabilization parameter .......................................... 4-117
start frequency ......................................................... 4-14
start ratio .................................................................. 4-14
start selection .......................................................... 4-14
starting contact signal ............................................ 4-102
starting frequency .................................................... 4-65
stop key selection .................................................... 4-68
stop selection ........................................................... 4-68
STP .......................................................................... 4-86
synchronous operation .......................................... 4-126
T
test run ....................................................................... 3-5
thermistor ................................................................. 4-73
THM ......................................................................... 4-49
TL ............................................................................ 4-58
torque bias monitor .................................................... 4-3
torque boost ............................................................. 4-19
torque LADSTOP function ....................................... 4-59
torque limit ............................................................... 4-57
torque reference monitor ........................................... 4-3
Index-3
W
WAF ....................................................................... 4-101
wiring control circuit terminals ................................. 2-22
wiring the main circuit terminals .............................. 2-12
Z
ZS ............................................................................ 4-98
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Motion Control Division
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81) 75-344-7173/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
2-2-1 Nishikusatsu, Kusatsu-shi,
Shiga, 525-0035 Japan
Tel: (81) 77-565-5223/Fax: (81) 77-565-5568
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Authorized Distributor:
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com
© OMRON Corporation 2007 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cat. No. I560-E1-03
">